Mori Seiki Series - Programming Manual NL Series. 481 Pages.

PROGRAMMING MANUAL
Applicable Model
NL1500/500 NL1500MC/500 NL1500Y/500
NL1500S/500 NL1500SMC/500 NL1500SY/500
NL2000/500 NL2000MC/500 NL2000Y/500
NL2000S/500 NL2000SMC/500 NL2000SY/500
NL2500/700 NL2500MC/700 NL2500Y/700
NL2500S/700 NL2500SMC/700 NL2500SY/700
NL2500/1250 NL2500MC/1250 NL2500Y/1250
NL2500S/1250 NL2500SMC/1250 NL2500SY/1250
NL3000/700 NL3000MC/700 NL3000Y/700
NL3000/1250 NL3000MC/1250 NL3000Y/1250
NL3000/2000 NL3000MC/2000 NL3000Y/2000
NL3000/3000 NL3000MC/3000 NL3000Y/3000
Applicable NC Unit
M720BM (MSX-850IV)
Before starting operation, maintenance, or programming, carefully read the

manuals supplied by Mori Seiki, the NC unit manufacturer, and equipment
manufacturers so that you fully understand the information they contain.
Keep the manuals carefully so that they will not be lost.
PX-NL_4-E0JPEN
2011.07.P
• • This is an original instruction manual officially issued by Mori
Seiki.
• • The contents of this manual are subject to change without
notice due to improvements to the machine or in order to
improve the manual. Consequently, please bear in mind that
there may be slight discrepancies between the contents of
the manual and the actual machine. Changes to the
instruction manual are made in revised editions which are
distinguished from each other by updating the instruction
manual number.
• • Should you discover any discrepancies between the
contents of the manual and the actual machine, or if any part
of the manual is unclear, please contact Mori Seiki and clarify
these points before using the machine. Mori Seiki will not be
liable for any damages occurring as a direct or indirect
consequence of using the machine without clarifying these
points.
• • All rights reserved: reproduction of this instruction manual in
any form, in whole or in part, is not permitted without the
written consent of Mori Seiki.
The product shipped to you (the machine and accessory

equipment) has been manufactured in accordance with
the laws and standards that prevail in the relevant
country or region. Consequently it cannot be exported,
sold, or relocated, to a destination in a country with
different laws or standards.
The export of this product is subject to an authorization
from the government of the exporting country. Check
with the government agency for authorization.
990730
Copyright © 2011 MORI SEIKI CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
3
About Declaration of Conformity

EC <Declaration of EC Conformity>
NC Mori Seiki declares that the machine tool shipped to Europe
(NC lathe, turning center, or multi-axis machine) is designed
and manufactured in conformity with the following
requirements.
1. EC 1. EC directive
Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC
EMC Directive 2004/108/EC EMC Directive 2004/108/EC
Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC
2. EN 2. EN standards
EN ISO 12100-1 EN ISO 12100-1
EN ISO 12100-2 EN ISO 12100-2
EN 50370-1 EN 50370-1
EN 50370-2 EN 50370-2
EN 60204-1 EN 60204-1
3. ISO 3. ISO standards
ISO 23125 ISO 23125
<Machine Model>
Description of machine models is omitted because this manual
applies to multiple machine models.
<Manufacturer>
MORI SEIKI CO., LTD.
450-0002 2 35 16 2-35-16 Meieki, Nakamura-ku, Nagoya City, Aichi 450-0002,
Japan
<Contact Address for Inquiry Regarding Technical Files>
MORI SEIKI GmbH

Head Office
Antoniusstrasse 14, 73249 Wernau, Germany
Phone: (49)-7153-934-0 Fax.: (49)-7153-934-220
Technical Centers
Stuttgart, München, Hamburg, Düsseldorf, Chemnitz
MORI SEIKI (U.K.) LTD.

Head Office
202 Bedford Avenue, Slough SL1 4RY, England
Phone: (44)-844-800-7647 Fax.: (44)-844-800-7648
Technical Centers
London, Birmingham
MORI SEIKI FRANCE S.A.S.

Head Office
Parc du Moulin, 1 Rue du Noyer BP 19326 Roissy en France 95705 Roissy CDG Cedex, France
Phone: (33)-1-39-94-68-00 Fax.: (33)-1-39-94-68-59
Technical Centers
Mori Seiki France Sud-Est S.A.S., Prague
MORI SEIKI ITALIANA S.R.L.

Head Office & Technical Center
Via Riccardo Lombardi N. 10, 20153 Milano, Italy
Phone: (39)-02-4894921 Fax.: (39)-02-48914448
MORI SEIKI ESPAÑA S.A.

Edificio Sant Cugat Trade Center III Avda. de les Corts Catalanes, 9-11, Entidad 16D
08173 Sant Cugat del Valles (Barcelona), Spain
Phone: (34)-935-75-36-46 Fax.: (34)-935-75-08-47
4
DMG / MORI SEIKI Turkey (DMG MOR SE K STANBUL MAK NE T CARET VE SERV S L M TED RKET )
Ferhatpa a Mah. Gazipa a Cad. No.11 34885 Ata ehir, stanbul, Turkey
Phone: (90)-216-471-66-36 Fax.: (90)-216-471-80-30
5
About Machine
<Basis>
NC This machine was designed and built using state-of-the-art
technology for the purpose of machining rotating workpieces
using cutting tools and soft jaws. This machine complies with
generally recognized safety regulations, standards and
specifications at the time of manufacture. This machine is
suitable for manual and automatic operation.
<Tools>
* This machine is capable of using common turning tools and
rotary tools* (such as milling cutters, drills, and taps). Contact
Mori Seiki before using grinding tools or special tools.
* * For machines equipped to use rotary tools.
<Materials>
This machine is designed for machining metal, resin, and
plastics. It was not intended for the machining of materials
such as magnesium, carbon, ceramics, and wood. Contact
Mori Seiki before using these materials.
6
About this Manual

• • Keep this manual in a clearly marked location to ensure easy
access when necessary.
• • Contact the Mori Seiki Service Department if any part of the
manual is unclear.
• • Contact the Mori Seiki Service Department or your distributor
if this manual is lost or damaged.
• • The contents of this manual are subject to change without
prior notification due to improvements to the machine.
• • All rights reserved: reproduction of this instruction manual in
any form is not permitted without the written consent of Mori
Seiki.
• • Various manuals and documents are supplied with the
machine in addition to this manual. Keep them close to the
machine to enable easy reference.
• “ ” • The important precautions are compiled in the “FOR SAFE
MACHINE OPERATION” section. You must read this section
before performing any operations relating to the machine.
• • The following number formatting is used in this manual:
“,” Thousand separator: “,” (comma)

“.” Decimal separator: “.” (period)
7
Signal Word Definition
8 8 DANGER
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
8 8 WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
7 7 CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, may result in minor injury or damage to the
machine.
[ ] [ ] Failure to observe the precautions (hazards, warnings

and cautions) will lead to the hazards indicated in
square brackets [ ], injuries or machine trouble.
2 2 NOTE
Indicates items that must be taken into consideration.
1 1 Indicates items to be referred to.
5 5Indicates hints.
Example:
Indicates program-applied examples.
CONTENTS
FOR SAFE MACHINE OPERATION

G
G FUNCTIONS
M
M FUNCTIONS
T, S, F
T, S, F FUNCTIONS
TOOL OFFSET
CANNED CYCLE
EXAMPLE PROGRAMS
OTHER FUNCTIONS
INDEX
11
CONTENTS
FOR SAFE MACHINE OPERATION
1 ...................................................................................... 25
FOR USERS AND SUPERVISORS
2 ............................................................................................................... 26
PRECAUTIONS FOR OPERATORS
3 ........................................................................................................... 27
FIRE PREVENTION AND COUNTERMEASURE
4 .......................................................................................................................... 30
SAFETY DEVICES
5 .......................................................................................................................... 31
CAUTION LABELS
5-1 .................................................................................................................... 31
Safety Precautions
5-2 ................................................................................................................................... 32
Turning ON/OFF Power
5-3 .......................................................................................................................................................... 32
Bar Stock
5-4 ............................................................................................................................... 33
Door Interlock Function
5-5 1 ............................................................................................................................... 34
Safety During Machine Operation (1)
5-6 2 ............................................................................................................................... 35
5-7 .................................................................................................................... 36
Spindle Speed and Chucking
5-8 ............................................................................................................................... 36
Spindle Speed and Gripping Force
5-9 ........................................................................................................................................... 37
Locked-In Prevention Key
5-10 ................................................................................................... 37
Chip Conveyor (Chip Conveyor Specifications)
5-11 ............................................................................................................................................... 38
Legal Obligation
6 .......................................................................................................................... 39
WORKING ENVIRONMENT
7 .......................................................................................................................... 40
MACHINE OPERATION
7-1 ........................................................................................................................................... 47
Programming
7-2 ....................................................................................................................................... 48
Door Interlock
7-3 .......................................................................................................................................................... 48
Data
12
7-4 .............................................................................................................................................. 49
Precautions when Operating Special Specification Machines
8 ...................................................................................................................... 50
MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
9 ...................................................................................................................... 53
DISPOSITION OF MACHINES
1 G
CHAPTER 1 G FUNCTIONS
1 ........................................................................................................... 57
AXIS CONTROL AND MOVEMENT DIRECTION
1-1 ............................................................................................................ 59
Expressing Axis Movement in Programming
60
Tailstock Specification
2 61
Headstock 2 Specification
2 G ............................................................................................................................. 62
G FUNCTIONS
2-1 G .......................................................................................................................................... 62
G Code List
2-2 G00 ................................................................................................................... 71
G00 Positioning Cutting Tool at Rapid Traverse Rate
2-3 G01 ........................................................................................................ 73
G01 Moving Cutting Tool along Straight Path at Cutting Feedrate
2-4 G01 R ............................................................................................................... 74
G01 Chamfering and Rounding Functions
2-5 G01 ...................................................................................................................................... 78
G01 Line at Angle Command
2-6 G02 G03 ...................................................................... 79
G02 Circular Interpolation (Clockwise), G03 Circular Interpolation (Counterclockwise)
2-7 G02 G03 ............................... 82
G02 Helical Interpolation (Clockwise), G03 Helical Interpolation (Counterclockwise) (Option)
2-8 G04 ................................................................................................... 85
G04 Suspending Program Execution (Dwell)
2-9 G07.1 G107 ........................................................................................................................... 87
G07.1 (G107) Cylindrical Interpolation
2-10 G12.1 G112
G13.1 G113 .......................................................................................... 93
G12.1 (G112) Polar Coordinate Interpolation (Notching),
G13.1 (G113) Polar Coordinate Interpolation Cancel
2-11 G17, G18, G19 ..................................................................................................................... 95
G17, G18, G19 Selecting Plane for Machining
2-12 G22
G23 ............................................................. 96
G22 Stored Stroke Check Function ON,
G23 Stored Stroke Check Function OFF (Option)
2-13 G27 ............................................................................................. 98
G27 Zero (Reference Position) Return Check
13
2-14 G28 G30 2 (3, 4) ....................... 99

G28 Machine Zero (Reference Position) Return, G30 Second (Third or Fourth) Zero (Reference Posi-
tion) Return
2-15 G31 ..................................................................................................................................... 100
G31 Skip Function
2-16 G32 .................................................................................................................... 101
G32 Tapping (at Center of Spindle)
G32 103
Cautions on Programming Tapping Using G32
2-17 G32 G92 ................................................................................................... 105
G32 Thread Cutting, G92 Thread Cutting Cycle
107
Thread Cutting Spindle Speed Override (Option)
108
Incomplete Thread Portion
108
Calculating the Incomplete Thread Portion
109
Precautions on Thread Cutting Operation
2-18 G34 .......................................................................................................................... 121
G34 Variable Lead Thread Cutting
123
2-19 G51.2 G251 G50.2 G250 ................... 124
G51.2 (G251) Polygon Cutting, G50.2 (G250) Polygon Cutting Cancel (Option)
2-20 G52 .......................................................................................................................... 126
G52 Setting Local Coordinate System
2-21 G53 ................................................................................................................................. 126
G53 Selecting Machine Coordinate System
2-22 G54 G59 ................................................................................................................. 128
G54 to G59 Selecting Work Coordinate System
2-23 G65 ......................................................................................................... 130
G65 Macro Call (One-Shot)
130
Argument Assignment
132
Nesting Level for Calls
2-24 G66
G66.1 G67 ...........133
G66 Macro Modal Call (Call after Execution of Axis Movement Commands),
G66.1 Macro Modal Call (Call in Each Block), G67 Macro Modal Call Cancel
2-25 G90 G94 ........................................................................ 136
G90 O.D./I.D. Cutting Cycle, G94 Face Cutting Cycle
2-26 G50 G96 .......... 138
G50 Setting Maximum and Minimum Spindle Speeds, G96 Controlling Constant Surface Speed (Con-
stant surface speed control)
2-27 G97 ....................................................................... 141
G97 Controlling Spindle Speed at Constant Speed (Constant Surface Speed Control Cancel)
2-28 G98 G99 ............................................................................................... 142
G98 Feedrate per Minute Command, G99 Feedrate per Revolution Command
2-29 G325 .......................................................................... 145
G325 Change of Value Set for Tailstock (Digital Tailstock)
2-30 G330 2 ................................................ 146
G330 Tailstock (Digital Tailstock)/Headstock 2 Reference Point Return
14
2-31 G374 G375 ......... 146

G374 Drilling with Tailstock Canned Cycle, G375 Drilling with Tailstock Canned Cycle Completion
Check (Option)
2-32 G479 ............................................................................................. 148
G479 Automatic Centering Type Steady Rest/Tailstock Travel
148
Automatic Centering Type Steady Rest Travel (Carriage Direct-Coupled)
150
Automatic Centering Type Steady Rest Travel (Servo-Driven)
151
Tailstock Travel (Carriage Direct-Coupled)
2-33 ................................................................................................................................. 153
Cutting Feedrate Control
G09 153
G09 Exact Stop
G61 154
G61 Exact Stop Mode
M28 M29 155
M28 Error Detect ON, M29 Error Detect OFF
G64 156
G64 Cutting Mode
G63 156
G63 Tapping Mode
G62 157
G62 Automatic Corner Override
3 SEICOS ................................................................................. 158

COMPATIBLE SPECIFICATIONS WITH SEICOS (OPTION)
3-1 R ......................................................................................... 158
Automatic Tool Nose Radius Offset Mode (Automatic Determination of Offset Direction)
158
Automatic Determination of Offset Direction
160
Start-Up and Cancel
161
Compulsory Determination of Offset Direction
3-2 ..................................................................................................................................... 162
Cutter Radius Offset Mode
162
Start-Up During Cutter Radius Offset Mode
163
Operation in Cutter Radius Offset Mode
164
Canceling Cutter Radius Offset Mode
3-3 ........................................................................................................................... 165
Groove Width Tool Offset Function (Option)
166
Groove Width Tool Offset Mode
167
Groove Width Tool Offset Mode Cancel
15
2 M
CHAPTER 2 M FUNCTIONS
1 M ........................................................................................................................... 171
M FUNCTIONS
1-1 M ......................................................................................................................................... 171
M Code List
1-2 M ................................................................................................................................ 186
Multiple M Code Function
1-3 M00 M01 ........................................................................ 187
M00 Program Stop, M01 Optional Stop
1-4 M02 M30 ............................................................................ 188
M02 Program End, M30 Program End and Rewind
1-5 M03 1 M203 2 M04 1 M204 2 M05
...............................................................................................................................................................188
M03 Spindle Start (Normal), M203 Spindle 2 Start (Normal),
M04 Spindle Start (Reverse), M204 Spindle 2 Start (Reverse), M05 Spindle Rotation Stop
1-6 M08 M09 ............................................................................ 190
M08 Coolant Discharge ON, M09 Coolant Discharge OFF
I/F 191
Changing Coolant Discharge Pressure (Knoll I/F Only)
1-7 M10 1 M210 2
M11 1 M211 2 ....................................192
M10 Spindle 1 Chuck Clamp, M210 Spindle 2 Chuck Clamp,
M11 Spindle 1 Chuck Unclamp, M211 Spindle 2 Chuck Unclamp
1-8 M13 M14 M05 ........................................................ 195
M13 Rotary Tool Spindle Start (Normal), M14 Rotary Tool Spindle Start (Reverse),
M05 Rotation Stop
1-9 M23 M24 ............................................................. 196
M23 Chamfering ON, M24 Chamfering OFF
1-10 M25, M26 M25, M26
.............................................................................................................................................................198
M25, M26 Tailstock Forward/Backward (Digital Tailstock), M25, M26 Tailstock Spindle OUT/IN (Car-
riage Direct-Coupled Tailstock)
198
Tailstock Forward/Backward (Digital Tailstock)
200
Tailstock Spindle OUT/IN (Carriage Direct-Coupled Tailstock)
200
Center-Work Programming with Safety
1-11 M45 C 1 M245 C 2
M46 C 1 M246 C 2 .......................................................203
M45 C-Axis Connection (Spindle 1), M245 C-Axis Connection (Spindle 2),
M46 C-Axis Connection Cancel (Spindle 1), M246 C-Axis Connection Cancel (Spindle 2)
1-12 M47 ............................................................................................. 204
M47 Workpiece Ejector Out (Option)
1-13 M48 M49 ........ 205
M48 Feedrate Override Cancel OFF, M49 Feedrate Override Cancel ON
1-14 M51 M251 2
M59 M259 2 ....205
M51 Spindle Chuck Air Blow ON, M251 Spindle 2 Chuck Air Blow ON,
M59 Spindle Chuck Air Blow OFF, M259 Spindle 2 Chuck Air Blow OFF (Option)
1-15 M52
M252 2
16
M57
M257 2 ..................................................... 206
M52 Through-Spindle Air Blow ON,
M252 Spindle 2 Through-Spindle Air Blow ON,
M57 Through-Spindle Air Blow OFF,
M257 Spindle 2 Through-Spindle Air Blow OFF (Option)
1-16 M68 1 M268 2
M69 1 M269 2 ................................... 206
M68 Spindle 1 Brake Clamp, M268 Spindle 2 Brake Clamp,
M69 Spindle 1 Brake Unclamp, M269 Spindle 2 Brake Unclamp
1-17 M73 M74 ................................................... 207
M73 Work Unloader OUT, M74 Work Unloader IN (Option)
1-18 M85 M86 ................................................................................. 209
M85 Automatic Door Open, M86 Automatic Door Close (Option)
1-19 M89 ........................................ 209
M89 Work Counter, Total Counter, Multi Counter (Option)
1-20 M90 1
M91 1
M290 2
M291 2 ......................................................................... 211
M90 Spindle 1/Rotary Tool Spindle Simultaneous Operation Mode ON,
M91 Spindle 1/Rotary Tool Spindle Simultaneous Operation Mode OFF,
M291 Spindle 2/Rotary Tool Spindle Simultaneous Operation Mode OFF
1-21 M98/M198 M99 ......................................................... 213
M98/M198 Sub-Program Call, M99 Sub-Program End
1-22 M200 M201 ....................................................................... 215
M200 Chip Conveyor Forward Rotation Start, M201 Chip Conveyor Stop
1-23 M382
M383 ......216
M382 Bed Cover Chip Flush Coolant ON/Chuck Top Coolant ON,
M383 Bed Cover Chip Flush Coolant OFF/Chuck Top Coolant OFF (Option)
1-24 M432 ........................................................................... 216
M432 Work Unloader Cycle Function (Option)
1-25 M458 M459 ....................................... 218
M458 Tool Tip Air Blow ON, M459 Tool Tip Air Blow OFF (Option)
1-26 M478 M479 .
218
M478 Through-Spindle Coolant ON, M479 Through-Spindle Coolant OFF (Option)
1-27 M480C M46C ............................................................... 218
M480 Calls C-Axis Synchronized Operation Mode
M46 C-Axis Synchronous Mode Cancel
1-28 M560 M561 ................................. 219
M560 Rotary Tool Spindle Reverse Rotation Mode ON, M561 Rotary Tool Spindle Reverse Rotation
Mode OFF
1-29 M611 Y M610 Y ................................................................. 220
M611 Y-Axis Zero Point Interlock Invalid, M610 Y-Axis Zero Point Interlock Valid
1-30 M661 M662 ........................ 220
M661 Steady Rest Coolant ON, M662 Steady Rest Coolant OFF (Option)
1-31 M712 M713 ......................................... 220
M712 Tailstock Spindle Interlock Function OFF, M713 Tailstock Spindle Interlock Function OFF Cancel
1-32 M2200 .................................................................................................................................... 221
M2200 Pre-Read Stop
1-33 I/F M ................................................................... 221
Bar Feeder I/F and M Code Commands (Bar Feeder Specifications)
17
2 .................................................................................... 225
PROGRAM TO SHORTEN PROCESSING TIME
3 T, S, F
CHAPTER 3 T, S, F FUNCTIONS
1 T ............................................................................................................................ 229
T FUNCTION
1-1 ............................................................................................................................................. 230
Tool Geometry Offset
1-2 ............................................................................................................................................. 232
Tool Wear Offset
2 S ............................................................................................................................ 239
S FUNCTION
2-1 - - .................................................................................................... 240
Relationship among Cutting Speed, Diameter, and Spindle Speed
3 F ............................................................................................................................ 241
F FUNCTION
3-1 1 mm/rev ................................................................................. 241
Specify Feedrate per Spindle Revolution (mm/rev)
3-2 1 mm/min, /min .............................................................................. 241
Specify Feedrate per Minute (mm/min, /min)
3-3 ..................................................................................................................................... 242
Feedrate for Finishing
4
CHAPTER 4 TOOL OFFSET
1 R ............................................................................................................ 247
AUTOMATIC TOOL NOSE RADIUS OFFSET
1-1 R G40, G41, G42 ................................................................... 249
Set to Use Automatic Tool Nose Radius Offset Function (G40, G41, G42)
249
Imaginary Tool Tip Position
R 252
Setting Tool Nose Radius
R 253
Switching Absolute Coordinate during Automatic Tool Nose Radius Offset
G46 253
Direction of Offset Determined by G46
1-2 R ...................................................................................................... 254
Technical Terms Used in Explanation of Automatic Tool Nose Radius Offset Function
R 254
Start-Up (Automatic Tool Nose Radius Offset)
R 256
Offset Mode (Automatic Tool Nose Radius Offset)
R 257
Cancel Mode (Automatic Tool Nose Radius Offset)
1-3 R ........................................................................................... 259
General Cautions on Automatic Tool Nose Radius Offset Function
18
R 259
If Wall Lies at Endpoint of Cutting (Automatic Tool Nose Radius Offset)
R 262
Overcut in Automatic Tool Nose Radius Offset Mode
1-4 R ........................................................................................................... 264
Sample Programs (Automatic Tool Nose Radius Offset)
R 264
Basic Programs (Automatic Tool Nose Radius Offset)
R 274
Recommended Example Programs (Automatic Tool Nose Radius Offset)
2 R ............................................................................................................ 278
MANUAL TOOL NOSE RADIUS OFFSET
2-1 ...................................................................................................... 278
Offset for Taper Cutting and Chamfering
R 278
Tool Nose Radius Offset Method
R 279
Calculating Tool Nose Radius Offset Data
R 282
Tool Nose Radius Offset Direction and Calculation of Coordinate Values
2-2 R ........................................................................................................... 288
Example Program (Manual Tool Nose Radius Offset)
R 291
Tool Nose Radius Offset Data Table
2-3 ............................................................................................................................. 297
Offset in Circular Interpolation
297
Convex Arc
297
Concave Arc
297
Calculating Coordinate Values to be Specified in Program
299
Example Program
2-4 R ............................................................................. 300
Example Program for Sample Workpiece (Manual Tool Nose Radius Offset)
3 .................................................................................................................... 307
TOOL RADIUS OFFSET
3-1 ................................................................................................................................. 309
Setting Tool Radius Offset Amount
3-2 .............................................................................................................. 309
Technical Terms Used in Explanation of Tool Radius Offset Function
309
Start-Up (Tool Radius Offset)
310
Offset Mode (Tool Radius Offset)
310
Cancel Mode (Tool Radius Offset)
3-3 .............................................................................................................. 311
General Cautions on Offset Function
311
If Wall Lies at Endpoint of Cutting (Tool Radius Offset)
19
313
Positive (+) and Negative ( ) Designation for Tool Radius Offset Amount and Tool Paths
313
Overcut in Tool Radius Offset Mode
5
CHAPTER 5 CANNED CYCLE
1 ...................................................................................................... 319
MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CYCLES
1-1 ...................................................................................................................... 319
Multiple Repetitive Cycles List
1-2 ......................................................................................................................................... 322
Rough Cutting Cycle
1-3 G73 ...................................................................................................................... 329
G73 Closed-Loop Cutting Cycle
1-4 G71, G72, G73 ............................................................................................................ 334
Cautions on Using G71, G72, and G73 Cycles
1-5 G70 ................................................................................................................................. 336
G70 Finishing Cycle
1-6 G74 ..................................................................... 338
G74 Face Cut-Off, Grooving Cycle, and Deep Hole Drilling Cycle
1-7 G75 ................................................................................ 342
G75 O.D./I.D. Grooving Cycle, Cut-Off Cycle
1-8 G76 .................................................................................................................. 346
G76 Multiple Thread Cutting Cycle
348
349
Infeed Mode
G76 349
Cautions on G76 Multiple Thread Cutting Cycle
1 350
Relationship between Depth of Cut in First Cycle and Number of Thread Cutting Cycles
(Fixed Metal Removal Rate and Straight Feed along the Thread Face)
2 ...................................................................................................... 353
HOLE MACHINING CANNED CYCLE
2-1 ........................................................................................................... 355
Hole Machining Canned Cycle List
356
Face Hole Machining Canned Cycle
356
Side Hole Machining Canned Cycle
2-2 ................................................................................................................................. 357
Drilling Cycle
357
High-Speed Deep Hole Drilling Cycle
358
Deep Hole Drilling Cycle
363
Spot Drilling Cycle
368
Spot Drilling Cycle (Dwell)
20
2-3 ..................................................................................................................... 372

Synchronized Tapping Cycle
373
End Face Synchronized Tapping Cycle
375
End Face Synchronized Reverse Tapping Cycle
375
Side Face Synchronized Tapping Cycle
378
Side Face Synchronized Reverse Tapping Cycle
M329 G84 379
Spindle Synchronized Tapping Cycle (M329 G84) (Option)
2-4 ................................................................................................................................. 380
Boring Cycle
6
CHAPTER 6 EXAMPLE PROGRAMS
1 ................................................................................................................ 387
EXAMPLE PROGRAMS
1-1 ................................................................................................................................................ 387
Notching
387
Width between Two Faces (Using Polar Coordinate Interpolation)
Y 388
Width between Two Faces (Using Y-Axis)
389
Hexagon (Using Polar Coordinate Interpolation)
Y 391
Hexagon (Using Y-Axis)
1-2 Y ........................................................................................................................ 392
Keyway Milling (Using Y-Axis)
1-3 ................................................................................................................................. 393
Chuck-Work Programming
1-4 2 ......................................................................................................................... 400
Chuck-Work Programming (2)
1 .................................................................................................................................................... 400
1st Process
2 .................................................................................................................................................... 404
2nd Process
1-5 3 ......................................................................................................................... 407
1 1 409
1st Process (Spindle 1)
2 2 413
2nd Process (Spindle 2)
1-6 ............................................................................................................................. 417
Various Part Programs
417
Grooving
418
I.D. Deep Hole Drilling
1 418
Milling 1 (Drilling on End Face)
21
2 C 421
Milling 2 (Machining with the Zero Point of the C-Axis in the Work Coordinate System Shifted)
3 ..................................................................................................................................423
Milling 3
4 ..................................................................................................................................427
Milling 4
7
CHAPTER 7 OTHER FUNCTIONS
1 ............................................................................................................. 433
WORKPIECE TRANSFER
1-1 M34, M35, M36 ....................................................................................................... 435
M34, M35, M36 Synchronized Operation ON/OFF
1-2 2 B ...................................................................................................................... 436
Moving Headstock 2 (B-Axis)
436
Using the Work Coordinate System
437
Using the Machine Coordinate System
1-3 G38 ............................................................................................................................. 439
G38 Workpiece Pushing Check
1-4 M80 ........................................................................................................................................ 441
M80 Workpiece Cut-Off Detection
M80 442
Programming Using M80
2 ................................................................................................................ 444
TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT
2-1 ................................................................................................... 444
Setting Tool Life Data by Manual Operation
444
Tool Life Management Screen
445
Group Registration
446
Changing Tool Number
446
Change of Status
2-2 ............................................................................................... 446
Setting Tool Life Data in Program
2-3 .................................................................................................................. 447
Specification in Machining Program
447
Group Specification
447
Life Count
448
Skip Command
2-4 .............................................................................................................. 448
New Tool Selection Flag and Tool Life Expired Flag
448
New Tool Selection Flag
448
Tool Life Expiration Signal
22
3 ................................................................................................................ 450
LOAD MONITORING FUNCTION
3-1 ..................................................................................................................................... 450
Outline of Load Monitoring Function
3-2 ......................................................................................................................... 451
Screens for Load Monitoring Function
452
The Load Monitoring Load Meter Screen
454
Load Monitoring Data Setting Screen
455
The Load Monitor Warning List Screen
456
Load Monitoring Setting Screen
3-3 .......................................................................................................... 458
Specifying Load Monitor Program
3-4 ................................... 458
Interlock Function for Set Value and Operation Mode by Operation Selection Key-Switch
3-5 ............................................................................................................................. 459
Alarm, Error Display
3-6 ......................................................................................................................... 459
Load Monitoring Data Input/Output
FOR SAFE MACHINE
OPERATION
1 25
2 26
3 27
4 30
SAFETY DEVICES
5 31
CAUTION LABELS
6 39
WORKING ENVIRONMENT
7 40
MACHINE OPERATION
8 50
9 53
FOR USERS AND SUPERVISORS 25
1
1. 1. Understand the contents of this manual thoroughly. Store
this manual close to the machine to enable easy reference
whenever necessary.
2. 2. Do not allow persons who lack basic knowledge of the
machine or sufficient training to perform operation,
maintenance or programming of the machine. Prohibit
anyone without sufficient safety training from entering the
plant and vicinity of the machine. Mori Seiki is not liable for
accidents.
3. 3. This machine is manufactured for use by persons with
normal senses and not-physically-challenged. Not
compliant for use by persons with implanted medical device
directives such as pacemakers. Actual machine operations
are the sole responsibility of the user.
4. 4. Provide operators with sufficient training and education
prior to operation.
5. 5. Determine the most appropriate settings.
6. 6. Do not change or modify the machine without prior
consultation with Mori Seiki. Mori Seiki is not liable for
accidents.
7. 7. Take adequate safety measures for both machine and
operators.
8. 8. Do not export, resell or relocate the machine to a
destination with different laws or standards.
9. 9. If by any chance an accident occurs, managers or
supervisors must rescue the injured person, then call an
ambulance as necessary and take emergency measures
such as first aid.
26 PRECAUTIONS FOR OPERATORS
2
1. 1. Before operating or programming the machine, or
performing maintenance procedures, read and understand
the instruction manuals thoroughly.
2. 2. This machine is manufactured for use by persons with
normal senses and not-physically-challenged. Not
compliant for use by persons with implanted medical device
directives such as pacemakers. Actual machine operations
are the sole responsibility of the user.
3. 3. Prior to machine operation, take necessary training and
education.
4. “ ” “ ” 4. Assume that something is impossible unless the manual
“ ” specifically states that it can be done.
5. 5. Never operate, maintain, or program the machine while
under the influence of alcohol or drugs. Never operate,
maintain, or program the machine while taking medicines
which may induce sleep or reduce concentration.
6. 6. Take off accessories such as a ring or a tie which may be
entangled by the machine, and trim clothing (fastener,
button, or belt) and hair.
[Entanglement]
7. 7. Wear safety shoes, eye protectors and a hardhat at all
times.
8. 8. If an emergency situation such as an accident and a fire
occurs, report it immediately to the supervisor and follow
the instruction of the supervisor.
FIRE PREVENTION AND COUNTERMEASURE 27
3
Failure to observe the following warnings may result in a fire or
machine damage. Mori Seiki is not liable for any fire whose
cause is other than a product defect.
1. 1. When machining using coolant
• MSDS Obtain the MSDS (MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET)
from the coolant manufacturer directly yourself as the
customer and use coolant without any chemical effects
MSDS on the machine. Please be sure to pay careful attention
to the effects on the human body and the storage method
described in the MSDS.
• Before starting automatic operation, check the amount of
coolant in the coolant tank, and replenish coolant if
necessary. When insufficient coolant is applied to the
cutting point, the machined part will heat up due to
insufficient cooling, and this may result in a fire.
2. 2. When machining using flammable coolant (not
recommended)
• Do not use a flammable coolant such as oil-based
coolant, as it has high risk of a fire which may spread to
the entire machine. If a flammable coolant is used out of
necessity, any consequent fire or accident must be dealt
with as the users' responsibility.
• Always monitor the machining process and do not carry
out unmanned operation. Install appropriate automatic
fire extinguishing equipment to quickly extinguish fire at
an early stage.
• Check the flash point and the ignition point of the coolant
to be used. Manage the material of the tools and
workpieces, and tool wear so that the temperature during
machining does not exceed these points.
• When coolant becomes a mist inside the machine, it may
burn explosively in abnormal temperature conditions.
Change the coolant discharge method so that no coolant
mist becomes suspended inside the machine, or install
equipment to collect the coolant mist generated.
• Use an explosion-proof mist collector.

• Check the instructions on coolant in the manuals in
advance, and follow them.
3. 3. When machining without using coolant (including dry
cutting and semi-dry cutting)
• Check and manage the materials of the tools and
workpieces to be used to prevent fire due to heat
generated in the machining process.
4. 4. When machining workpieces made of flammable material
• Always monitor the machining process and do not carry
out unmanned operation. Install appropriate automatic
fire extinguishing equipment to quickly extinguish fire at
an early stage.
• Check and manage the tools and machining conditions to
be used so that the temperature during machining does
not exceed the ignition point.
• Materials such as magnesium may burn explosively
when exposed to water while burning. Check the
fire-fighting methods and equipment in advance, and
install the equipment at suitable locations for quickly
extinguishing fire.
5. 5. When installing a fire extinguisher
28 FIRE PREVENTION AND COUNTERMEASURE
• It is recommended to install the automatic fire

extinguishing equipment as the fire extinguisher.
• As for the capability, selection, or warranty, consult with
the manufacturer of the fire extinguisher.
• When installing the fire extinguisher, consult with Mori
Seiki as well.
If a mist collector is also installed, the mist collector should
be shut off when the fire extinguisher is activated. Other-
wise, the fire extinguishing agent will be exhausted of and
the fire will not be extinguished.
• For handling of the fire extinguisher, refer to the
instruction manual of the fire extinguisher manufacturer.
• Follow the instructions of the fire extinguisher
manufacturer, and execute periodical inspection and
appropriate maintenance.
• After the fire extinguisher is activated, replenish the fire
extinguishing agent or exchange the fire extinguisher in
accordance to the instructions of the fire extinguisher
manufacturer.
• Do not use the machine before the fire extinguisher is
ready to be activated.
• If the automatic fire extinguishing equipment allows
switching between automatic/manual operations, set the
extinguisher to automatic mode.
6. 6. Before starting automatic operation
• Reconfirm that all parts of the tools and tool holders are
securely tightened. Insufficient tightening leads to
insufficient tool clamping, and may result in an accident
or a fire caused by heat.
• Reconfirm that the workpiece is securely clamped. If a
workpiece is not clamped securely, it may shift and make
contact with a tool, resulting in a fire caused by heat.
• Do not use worn or damaged tools. If worn or damaged
tools are used, chips may clog them, resulting in a fire
caused by heat.
• Before starting automatic operation, reconfirm that the
tools and programs to be used are correct. Failure to use
the correct tools and programs may result in an accident
or a fire. Especially with a program in which the same
1 2 pattern is executed repeatedly, confirm that the tool is
selected correctly before starting the second set of
repetitions after the first machining.
• Create a program while fully considering the safe
machining conditions which can also minimize the heat
generated by rubbing. Creating programs without this
consideration may result in a fire or machine damage.
• The conversational programming function creates NC
NC programs based on general machining conditions, but
the final responsibility for determining the machining
conditions rests with the user. Mori Seiki is not liable for
the machining outcome of the conversational
programming function.
• During and after machining, completely remove chips if
necessary. Failure to remove chips completely may
result in a fire, depending on the workpiece material and
machining conditions.
7. 7. If a fire breaks out
• If by any chance a fire occurs, stop usage of the machine
and contact the Mori Seiki Service Department
regardless of use of the fire extinguisher or the operation
of the fire extinguishing equipment. Although there are no
abnormalities in the external appearance, the wiring or
piping may be damaged inside the machine and the
FIRE PREVENTION AND COUNTERMEASURE 29
machine may operate in an unexpected manner, causing

damage to the machine.
• Managers or supervisors must report the fire to the fire
department.
30 SAFETY DEVICES
4
SAFETY DEVICES
To guard operators from danger, the machine is equipped with
safety devices as shown below.
Door Lock System
*
[EMERGENCY STOP]
(Emergency Stop) Button*
Door with Interlock Function
2 2 NOTE
* * Depending on the machine specifications, the [EMERGENCY
STOP] (Emergency Stop) button may be mounted on the upper
face of the chip conveyor.
8 8 WARNING
1. 1. Be ready to press the [EMERGENCY STOP]
(Emergency Stop) button during machine operation.
2. 2. Do not place any obstacle in front of an [EMERGENCY
STOP] (Emergency Stop) button.
3. 3. Even when the [EMERGENCY STOP] (Emergency Stop)
button is pressed, confirm all operations have come to
a complete stop before approaching moving parts.
4. 4. Do not modify or remove safety-related devices on
your own. If the safety devices are replaced, be sure to
confirm whether they work properly before starting the
machine operation. Contact Mori Seiki for further
information.
5. 5. Do not operate the machine with protective covers
removed or while other safety devices are in invalid
status.
6. 6. Do not put too much confidence in safety devices,
protective covers and doors. This is not the
explosion-proof specification machine. Recognition of
the dangers involved in machining procedures is
required at all times. Dangers such as the ejection of a
large workpiece or harmful dust or an explosion
caused by the machining of metals such as
magnesium are not preventable even if the door is
closed.
7. 7. If protective covers or safety devices are damaged,
contact the Mori Seiki Service Department.
CAUTION LABELS 31
5
CAUTION LABELS
8 8 WARNING
1. 1. Observe the information on the caution labels.
2. 2. Caution labels are marked according to the following
warning levels.
DANGER:
Failure to follow the instructions will result in serious
injury or death.
WARNING:
Failure to follow the instructions could result in serious
injury or death.
CAUTION:
Failure to follow the instructions could result in minor
injury, or in damage to the machine.
3. 3. Purchase a replacement caution label and re-affix in
original position when a label peels off, becomes
blurred and cannot be read, or a part with a label
attached is replaced.
4. 4. Do not fix anything on top of a caution label or paint
over it.
5. 5. Ensure caution labels attached to the machine are
written in the native language of the operator.
6. 6. Contact the Mori Seiki Service Department on
purchasing new caution labels and other inquiries.
1 “ ” 3 “ ” 1 Separate volume, INSTALLATION MANUAL Chapter 3 DIA-
GRAMS “CAUTION LABELS”
5-1
Safety Precautions
Be sure to follow the instructions on the caution label. Failure

to follow the instructions may result in serious injury, damage to
the machine, and damage to workpieces.
32 CAUTION LABELS
5-2
Turning ON/OFF Power
1. 1. Turn the power OFF before performing the followings.

[Electric shock/Entanglement]
• Before performing any work inside the machine for
maintenance and cleaning.
• NC Before performing any work inside the electrical cabinet
and the NC unit.
• Before leaving the machine.
2. NC 2. Do not open the doors of the electrical cabinet, the NC unit,
and the operation panel unless it is absolutely necessary.
Dust, foreign matter, and moisture may enter to the
devices.
[Machine malfunction]
3. 3. The machine cannot operate correctly unless the power is
properly supplied. If the power supply is momentarily cut off
during machine operation due to a power failure or
lightening, the machine may operate unexpectedly. In these
cases, turn OFF the main power immediately.
5-3
Bar Stock
Be sure to follow the instructions below to prevent spindle

runout increase, collision with bar, and bar bending.
1. 1. Use a bar feeder when machining the bar stock longer than
the spindle length.
CAUTION LABELS 33
2. 2. Use a guide bush when machining the bar stock shorter

than the spindle length.
3. 3. Do not start the spindle unless the cylinder cover is in
place.
4. 4. Do not insert bar stock into the spindle-through hole while
the spindle is rotating.
5. 5. When machining bar stock on a machine equipped with a
bar feeder or spindle through-hole, use straight bar stock
only.
5-4
Door Interlock Function
Note that setting the [INTERLOCK MODE] key-switch to

[RELEASE] to enable limited machine operations with the door
open is extremely dangerous. In daily operations, set the
key-switch to [NORMAL], remove the key from the switch, and
store it in a safe location.
Only persons who are trained sufficiently in safety and machine
operation are permitted to switch the door interlock function to
the [RELEASE] mode and operate the machine.
Possible accidents resulting in serious injury or death during
machine operation with the door open are described below.
34 CAUTION LABELS
1. 1. The operator will become entangled with the spindle if the

spindle starts while the operator is touching the chuck or
workpiece.
2. 2. The operator will become entangled with the spindle if the
operator touches the chuck or the workpiece while the
spindle is rotating.
3. 3. A workpiece will fly out if the spindle starts while the
workpiece is not clamped correctly.
4. 4. A workpiece, chuck jaws, and tools will fly out if the tool (or
turret) collides with the workpiece due to a programming
error.
5. 5. A workpiece will fly out due to lowered gripping force of
chuck caused by excessively heavy cutting force or
centrifugal force.
6. 6. The operator will be caught or entangled by moving parts
such as turret during axis feed or indexing motions.
7. 7. The operator or a person standing near the machine will be
splashed with chips and coolant during machining, resulting
in injury or health problems (particularly if chips or coolant
get into the eyes).
8. 8. The operator will become caught in the chip conveyor when
the operator's hand or foot touches the chip conveyor while
it is operating.
1 1 For the [RELEASE] mode, refer to the separate volume, OPER-
ATION MANUAL.
5-5 1
1. 1. Keep the front door closed while the machine is operating.

The area inside the front door contains many sources of
potential danger.
• The spindle rotating at a high speed with a workpiece
clamped in it
• The turret which rotates and moves in many directions
with a number of sharp cutting tools
• Splashing coolant and flying chips
2. 2. Allow a sufficient chucking amount so that the workpiece
will not come out of the chuck due to the cutting force or
centrifugal force generated by spindle rotation. Support the
workpiece with the tailstock or the steady rest if necessary.
• If the length-to-diameter ratio of the workpiece is large,
support the workpiece using tailstock so that it will not be
bent while the front end of the workpiece is being cut.
• There must be no play in the motion of the chuck jaw.
• When heavy cutting a thick as-forged bar, place the
workpiece end against the chuck face so that the
chucking force can sustain the load during cutting.
• When chucking a cast or forged workpiece, shape the
jaws to the draft of the workpiece or use the jaws with
carbide pins.
CAUTION LABELS 35
• Clamp a workpiece in the chuck at the center of the

chuck jaw stroke.
3. 3. Machine vibration will result when a workpiece with its
center of gravity not at the chuck rotating center is rotated
in the chuck. This, in turn, will deteriorate the accuracy of
the machined workpiece. It is necessary to balance the
workpiece with a balancing weight.
4. 4. While the spindle is rotating, do not open the front door to
remove chips or touch the workpiece and tools.
[Serious injury]
5. 5. Do not stand in front of the spindle or other rotating parts.
6. 6. Do not remove the covers unless absolutely necessary.
7. 7. Do not start machine operation without the safety devices
in place.
[Serious injury]
5-6 2
1. 1. Do not stand near the moving parts of the machine while

the machine is operating.
[Entanglement/Serious injury]
2. 2. Pay attention to moving parts of the rear and side of the
machine as well as the front of the machine.
3. 3. Do not touch any rotating part; make sure that the part has
stopped rotating before touching it.
4. 4. Do not try to remove chips from the workpiece and tool
while the spindle is rotating.
5. 5. Cover your hair and do not wear loose clothing or jewelry to
avoid becoming entangled or caught in the machine.
Always wear safety shoes when operating the machine.
[Entanglement/Serious Injury]
6. 6. Do not leave any tools or instruments on the operation
panel or on any moving part of the machine.
7. 7. Do not lean against the machine while it is operating.
Leaning on the covers can be very dangerous.
36 CAUTION LABELS
5-7
Spindle Speed and Chucking
1. 1. Specify a spindle speed limit that is lower than the lowest of

the individual allowable speed limits for the chuck, cylinder,
and fixture.
[Workpiece ejection/Serious injury/Machine damage]
2. 2. Before starting or stopping the spindle, set the spindle
speed to the lowest setting.
3. 3. Lower the spindle speed before changing the speed range
4. 4. Select the proper chucking pressure and tailstock spindle
thrust pressure appropriate for the machining conditions.
5. 5. Clamp workpieces and tools securely. Depth of cut and
cutting feed must be selected beginning with small values.
6. 6. Before starting the spindle, secure that the workpiece and
rotary tool are clamped correctly. For center-work
machining, also check that the tailstock spindle center is
pressing the workpiece correctly.
5-8
Spindle Speed and Gripping Force
1. 1. As the spindle speed increases, centrifugal force acts on

the chuck jaws reducing the chuck gripping force.
Measure the chuck gripping force at regular intervals using
a gripping force meter to secure that the required gripping
force is maintained. If it is not, contact the chuck
manufacturer and the cylinder manufacturer.
[Workpiece ejection]
2. 2. The relationship between gripping force and spindle speed
varies depending on the size, shape and mounting
conditions of jaws and workpieces, cutting conditions, and
the chuck used.
1 1 For details, refer to the instruction manual supplied by the
chuck manufacturer and the cylinder manufacturer.
CAUTION LABELS 37
3. 3. When machining, measure the chuck gripping force applied

during spindle rotation at the actual machining speed using
a gripping force meter. If the required gripping force is not
maintained, change machining conditions such as the
chucking pressure, spindle speed, feedrate, and depth of
cut.
5-9
Locked-In Prevention Key
Turning the locked-in prevention key makes it impossible to

fully close the door so the door cannot be closed. If it is
necessary to carry out cleaning or maintenance inside the
machine, turn the power OFF, turn the key, and remove it. Take
the key with you when you enter the machine.
5-10
Chip Conveyor (Chip Conveyor Specifications)
1. 1. Do not attempt to reach inside the chip conveyor or put

your feet in it while it is operating.
2. 2. Keep the chip conveyor operating all the time during
automatic operation. If chips accumulate on the conveyor,
they may not be removed from the chip conveyor, resulting
in damage to the chip conveyor.
3. 3. Stop the chip conveyor before placing rags on the chip
conveyor belt.
[Entanglement/Machine malfunction and damage]
38 CAUTION LABELS
5-11
Legal Obligation
The product shipped to you (the machine and accessory

equipment) has been manufactured in accordance with the
laws and standards that prevail in the relevant country or
region. Consequently it cannot be exported, sold, or relocated,
to a destination in a country with different laws or standards.
The export of this product is subject to authorization from the
government of the exporting country. Check with the
government agency for authorization.
WORKING ENVIRONMENT 39
6
WORKING ENVIRONMENT
8 8 DANGER
Cover power supply cables on the floor with rigid
insulated plates.
[Electric shock]
8 8 WARNING
1. 1. Always keep the floor area around the machine clean,
without material or fluid such as water and oil
remained, to ensure the work area for safe machine
operations.
[Tripping/Slipping]
2. 2. Depending on the types of the coolant or the
machining conditions, a large amount of coolant mist
may be generated. If a health problem such as sore
eyes is caused, install a mist collector (option).
1 1 For mist collector specifications when using a
flammablecoolant (not recommended) or installing the fire
“ ” 27 extinguisher, refer to “FIRE PREVENTION AND
COUNTERMEASURE” (page 27).
7 7 CAUTION
1. 1. Do not use cellular phones, electrical welding
equipment, or other devices that generate
electromagnetic waves around the machine.
[Unexpected machine operation]
2. 2. Ensure that the workplace is sufficiently illuminated.
[Reduced operating efficiency and safety]
3. 3. Take care not to trip over the footswitch.
[Injury]
40 MACHINE OPERATION
7
MACHINE OPERATION
8 8 DANGER
1. 1. Confirm all cables are properly insulated prior to
machine operation.
[Electric shock]
2. 2. Do not operate with wet hands.
[Electric shock]
3. 3. Confirm no personnel or obstacles remain inside
protective covers or close to rotating or moving parts
before starting machine operation.
[Entanglement/Collision]
8 8 WARNING
1. 1. Before operating the machine, confirm there are no
personnel or obstacles around or inside the machine.
Keep distance from moving parts.
[Injury/Machine damage/Interference]
2. 2. Before using a switch, button, or key, perform visual
confirmation and then press or set decisively to avoid
selection errors.
[Mechanical error]
3. 3. Do not change machine specifications, parameters or
modify the machine without prior consultation with
Mori Seiki.
[Impaired machine performance/Machine service life
reduction]
4. 4. When operating noise may be produced, change
cutting conditions to limit the generation of noise or
ensure the operator wears protective gear to avoid
injury due to excessive noise levels.
[Impaired hearing]
1 “ 1 For the machine noise data, refer to the separate volume,
” OPERATION MANUAL “Machine Noise Data”.
5. 5. This is not the explosion-proof specification machine.
Dangers such as the ejection of a large workpiece or
harmful dust or an explosion caused by the machining
of metals such as magnesium are not preventable even
if the door is closed. Do not rely on door and protective
devices alone. Recognition of the dangers involved in
machining procedures is required at all times.
6. 6. Operators must wear safety glasses at all times,
(including operators wearing prescription glasses).
[Eye damage due to ejected foreign matter]
7. 7. Do not wear gloves when operating the machine.
[Entanglement/Machine malfunction/Serious injury
(death)]
8. 8. Do not grind workpieces with emery cloths. It may get
entangled.
9. 2 9. When the machine is operated by more than one
operator, cooperation and communication between
them is required at all times.
[Accident]
10. 10.Keep distance from spindle or other rotating parts.
[Entanglement]
MACHINE OPERATION 41
11. 11. Do not place hands or feet inside the chip conveyor (if
installed) during operation.
[Entanglement]
12. 12.Stop the machine before removing chips or adjusting
the direction or volume of coolant supply.
[Entanglement]
13. 13.Bolts used for fixtures should be periodically replaced

with the bolts specified by Mori Seiki that have
appropriate strength.
[Bolt breakage/Workpiece, fixture, cutting tool ejection/
Serious injuries/Machine damage]
14. / 14.Ensure workpiece, cutting tool, holder, soft jaws, and
2 tailstock (tailstock specifications/spindle 2 tailstock
specifications) are tightened securely.
[Workpiece, cutting tool ejection]
15. 20 cm 15.Always work at a safety margin of at least 20 cm from
the window. This shock-absorbent window could be
substantially deformed to ease the impact of an ejected
tool. With further impact, the window could break or be
penetrated.
[Injury]
16. 16.When using the stopper inside the spindle, confirm the
adjusting shaft does not protrude excessively from the
rear of the spindle.
[Shaft ejection during spindle rotation]
17. 17.Contact the Mori Seiki Service Department before
grinding.
[Grinding stone and cover breakage]
18. 18.When clamping or unclamping a workpiece in the
/ 2 chuck, ensure hands do not become trapped by the
workpiece, soft jaws, or tailstock (tailstock
specifications/spindle 2 tailstock specifications).
[Injury]
19. 19.The length of the bar stock must be shorter than the
spindle length unless a bar feeder is used. Do not
insert bar stock into the spindle while the spindle is
rotating.
[Spindle runout increase/Collision with bar/Bar
bending]
20. 20.Before opening the door during a machining operation,
make sure that the door interlock function is in the
[NORMAL] mode. Close the door before restarting the
machine operation.
[Serious injuries]
21. 21.Before carrying out unmanned operation over
extended periods, or machining using an inflammable
coolant workpiece, install automatic fire extinguishing
equipment.
[Fire]
22. 22.Use a crane or lifter to mount or remove heavy
workpieces.
[Injury]
23. 23.The rotary tool spindle might not be rotated by
maximum speed by conditions such as fixtures and
rotary tools used even if length, the diameter, and the
mass of the rotary tool are in the use limitations of the
machine.
[Rotary tool ejection by rotating spindle at high speed
forcibly]
24. 24.Stop machine operation immediately and contact the

Mori Seiki Service Department following malfunction of
any device related to the door interlock function.
[Injury/Machine damage]
25. 25.This machine is equipped with a read-ahead function
for the running program, and retains the read-ahead
NC program commands stored in the NC memory during a
temporary stop of automatic operation in order to
eliminate latency time when restarting. Therefore,
@ check the program commands or present positions of
the axes when stopping the machine temporarily. In
NC
cases such as when discontinuing the machining,
press the @ (RESET) key to clear the program
NC
commands stored in the NC if necessary. Changing the
program start position after a temporary stop in
particular may cause accidents after the machining is
restarted since the program commands stored in the
NC are activated. Pay extra attention to the difference
in the specifications in relation to other manufacturers’
machines because the read-ahead program data may
be cleared at temporary stops on these machines.
[Unexpected machine motion/Interference]
26. 26.Some switches have covers preventing unintentional
switch actuation. Keep covers closed except when
pressing the switches. If a switch cover is damaged,
contact the Mori Seiki Service Department.
[Switch actuated unintentionally/Unexpected machine
operation]
27. 27.If the coolant supply is not sufficient, tools,
workpieces, and chips will reach high temperatures
shortly after the production. Do not touch them until
the temperature drops.
8 8 WARNING
<Spindle Rotation>
1. 1. For the default setting of the spindle speed limit, check

the rating plate on the door.
2. 2. Spindle speeds must not exceed allowable speed limits
of chuck, fixture and cylinder.
3. 3. Before starting the spindle, check the machining
conditions.
[Workpiece ejection/Fixture damage]
4. 4. Do not open the door during spindle or rotary tool
rotation.
[Entanglement/Injury]
5. 5. When starting the spindle manually, set the spindle
speed setting button to the lowest, and then gradually
increase the spindle speed. In addition, decrease the
spindle speed gradually when stopping the spindle
manually.
6. 6. When using the fixture or chuck with the spindle speed
limited, set the maximum spindle speed matching the
limited speed of the fixture or chuck to the parameter.
For details on setting the parameters, contact the Mori
Seiki Service Department.
[Workpiece ejection/Damage of fixture and chuck]
<Chucks>
1. 1. When mounting a chuck, chuck cylinder, or connecting

rod in the spindle, read the instruction manuals of Mori
Seiki, the chuck manufacturer, and the chuck cylinder
manufacturer prior to performing the procedure.
[Chuck, chuck cylinder or connecting rod damage]
2. 2. When mounting or removing a chuck, lift the unit with a
crane using eyebolts and cables. Ensure eyebolts and
cables are removed after the procedure.
[Entanglement/Eyebolt and cable ejection]
3. 3. The chuck or fixture clamping the workpiece must be

secured to the spindle using the threaded holes in the
spindle nose.
[Chuck and fixture ejection]
4. 4. If a workpiece holding chuck or fixture other than the
chuck supplied with the machine is used, contact the
Mori Seiki Service Department prior to machine
operation to prevent serious injury and machine
damage.
2 2 NOTE
Mori Seiki is not responsible for accidents caused by the use of a
chuck or fixture prepared by the customer without prior
consultation.
5. 5. If the chuck supplied with the machine is removed from
the machine and a specially prepared fixture is used,
remove the chuck cylinder and connecting rod.
[Connecting rod, chuck cylinder ejection]
6. 6. Refer to the instruction manuals prepared by the chuck
and cylinder manufacturers for the allowable plunger
thrust of the chuck, allowable chucking and cylinder
pressures, and the relationship between the top jaw
height and allowable cylinder thrust, which must be set
to a value within the permissible value range. If difficult
to determine, contact the Mori Seiki Service
Department.
[Chuck and cylinder damage/Workpiece and jaw
ejection]
7. 7. Leave the pilot bush mounted in the chuck when
operating the machine.
[Master jaw or chuck jaw ejection]
8. 8. Use only specified bolts to mount the chuck and
tighten to the specified torque. Check at regular
intervals to ensure the bolts are securely tightened.
[Workpiece ejection/Chuck damage]
9. 9. When operating a machine equipped with a hollow
chuck, install the attached through hole cover to the
chuck if the through hole is not used.
[Chuck, cylinder or other hydraulic circuit malfunction
due to entry of coolant or chips]
10. / 2 10.Set the chucking pressure and tailstock spindle
thrusting force (tailstock specifications/spindle 2
tailstock specifications) with full consideration given to
the shape and material of the workpiece to be
machined and machining conditions.
11. 11. The user is responsible for setting the speed of the
chuck by taking the following matters into
consideration. Rotate the spindle at a speed no faster
than allowable values under specified conditions.
• • Top jaw's shape and mass
• • Chuck gripping force

• • Workpiece dimensions and shapes
• • Cutting force
• • Chuck maintenance and inspections
12. / 2 12.When machining long workpieces, clamp the free end
of the workpiece securely with the tailstock or a steady
rest (tailstock specifications/spindle 2 tailstock
specifications).
[Workpiece bent or shaken during spindle rotation,
ejection outside of the machine]
13. 13.Before clamping a workpiece in the chuck, check using
a pressure gage that the correct hydraulic or air
pressure is supplied to the cylinder that actuates
chuck operation.
14. 14.If a gap exists between the workpiece rear surface and
the chuck locator face or the jaw face on which the
workpiece is to be seated, the workpiece rotation
centerline is tilted in relation to the chuck rotation
centerline, or if the workpiece is cast or forged, carry
out test cutting at a low spindle speed to ensure safety.
[Cutting force exceeds workpiece clamping capacity of
chuck, causing workpiece ejection]
15. 15.When a workpiece is eccentric, not round or the center
of gravity of the workpiece is not at the center of the
rotation, balance using a balancer with full
consideration given to machining conditions such as
the spindle speed.
16. 16.Do not rotate the spindle without a workpiece when
using a balancer.
[Spindle bearing wear, component seizure]
17. 17.When using a manually tightened chuck or fixture,
remove the clamp handle or tightening tool from the
chuck or fixture after tightening.
[Clamp handle, tightening tool ejection]
18. 18.Always turn the main power switch OFF before
performing chuck mounting/removal, inspection and
lubrication procedures.
[Entanglement]
2 2 NOTE
For details on chuck maintenance procedures, refer to the
instruction manuals prepared by the chuck and cylinder
manufacturers.
<Lifting Workpiece>
1. 1. Only technicians qualified to operate cranes are to

perform workpiece-lifting procedures.
[Workpiece, machine damage/Accident]
2. 2 2. When two or more people are involved in lifting,
cooperation and clear communication is necessary at
all times.
[Accident]
3. 3. Use only wires, shackles and jigs strong enough to
support the total weight of the workpiece.
[Dropped workpiece]
4. 4. Before lifting a workpiece, check it is held securely.
[Dropped workpiece]
5. 5. Raise the workpiece a short distance off the floor to

confirm it is well balanced in both crosswise and
lengthwise directions.
[Dropped workpiece]
<Safety Practices During Setup>
1. 1. During setup, implement the following safety

measures.
<To Prevent Automatic Operation Start>
• • Select the handle mode.
• • Unclamp the chuck.
<To Ensure Operator Safety if Automatic Operation is
Started By Mistake>
• • Set override switches (spindle speed, rapid traverse
rate, cutting feedrate) at the lowest setting.
• • Turn the single block function ON.
• • Turn the machine lock function ON.
• 8 1 • Establish the coolant OFF mode by pressing the
coolant button 8 [OFF] (Off) for longer than one
second.
<To Prevent Spindle Rotation Start>
• • Unclamp the chuck.
• u • Set the operation selection key-switch to the u
[OFF].
<To Ensure Operator Safety if The Spindle is Started by
Mistake>
• • Set the spindle speed setting button to the lowest
setting.
<To Prevent Turret Head Indexing>
• • Make the indication in the turret button display unit
match the number of the currently indexed station.
• u • Set the operation selection key-switch to the u
[OFF].
2. 2. When using a bar feeder or bar supporter, confirm
excessive vibration is not generated as follows:
a) a) Close the door with a workpiece clamped in the chuck
and set the spindle speed setting button to the lowest
setting.
b) b) Rotate the spindle in manual mode and gradually
increase the spindle speed to the maximum specified in
the program.
3. 3. If excessive vibration is generated, perform the
following countermeasures.
• • Correct the bar bend.
• • Change the maximum spindle speed used in the
program to a speed that does not cause vibration of
the machine body or the bar feeder.
• • Adjust the alignment of the machine and bar feeder.
• • Check that appropriate guide bushes are used in the
spindle through-hole.
If the vibration cannot be eliminated by performing the
countermeasures listed above, contact the Mori Seiki
Service Department.
[Machine damage/Machining accuracy lowered]
7 7 CAUTION
1. 1. If abnormal noise or vibration is generated during
machine operation, determine the cause and take
appropriate action.
[Machine damage/Impaired machining accuracy]
2. 2. When machining a workpiece such as carbon or
ceramics which generate powder particles, contact the
Mori Seiki Service Department.
[Inhaling powder particles, Powder particles entering
slideway or gap between bearing]
3. 3. Perform spindle and controlled axis test running
procedures prior to machining.
[Thermal displacement adversely affecting machining
accuracy]
4. 4. Do not touch lamps used to illuminate the interior of
the machine during machine operation or immediately
following power OFF.
[Burns]
5. 5. Do not stop spindle rotation while a cutting tool is in
contact with the workpiece.
[Cutting tool and machine damage]
6. 6. When the [EMERGENCY STOP] (Emergency Stop)
@ button or @ (RESET) button has been pressed to stop
the machine during a threading operation or a hole
machining operation, especially a tapping operation,
carefully feed the axes after checking the condition of
the workpiece and cutting tool.
[Collision or interference between workpiece and
cutting tool]
7. 7. When the turret head is rotated with cutting tools
Z mounted, ensure tools in the turret do not interfere
with the Z-axis protector, before rotating the turret.
8. 8. Support the workpiece securely before unclamping the
workpiece to perform workpiece removal.
[Dropped workpiece]
9. 2 9. When tooling, ensure interference does not occur. In
the case of headstock 2 specification machines,
ensure interference does not occur during workpiece
transfer.
10. 10.When searching for a block during the machining
M, S, T, process and restarting machining from this point,
G, F MDI specify the M, S, T, G and F codes, and workpiece
coordinate system, etc., in MDI mode after carefully
checking the status of the machine and the NC.
[Unexpected machine motion]
11. 11. Do not subject the chuck jaws or workpiece to shock.
[Adversely affecting chucking accuracy, functions, and
service life]
12. 12.When leaving the machine with the power OFF for an
extended period, always remove the workpiece from
the clamping device.
[Dropped workpiece/chuck's life and tailstock
clamping mechanism service life adversely affected]
13. 13.When clamping or unclamping the chuck, take care to
ensure hands or fingers do not become caught in the
chuck or chuck jaws.
[Injury]
14. 14.When machining bar stock on a machine equipped with

a bar feeder or spindle through-hole, use straight bar
stock only. When machining bar stock with a diameter
smaller than that of the spindle (or draw bar), use a
guide bush.
[Machine vibration/Impaired machine accuracy]
15. 15.Keep the chip conveyor operating all the times during
automatic operation.
[Chip accumulation causing chip conveyor damage]
16. 16.When releasing the hard overtravel on a machine with
2 O.T. that function, the axis movement interlock can be
released by pressing the [2nd O.T. Release] button. Do
not move the axis in the direction in which the hard
overtravel occurred. For safety reasons, feed the axes
×1 using the handle feed [ 1] until the hard overtravel
status has been canceled.
[Interference between carriage and covers]
17. 17.When chucking or supporting a workpiece, take the
rigidity of the workpiece into account when
/ 2 determining the chucking or supporting method and
chucking pressure or tailstock thrust (tailstock
[Impaired machine accuracy]
<Touch Panel>
1. 1. Use a finger to touch the panel as it can be easily

scratched. Use a touch-pen if one is supplied with the
machine.
2. 2. Do not touch the panel with anything with a solid tip,
such as a ballpoint pen, anything sharp, or a fingernail.
3. 2 3. Do not press more than one key at the same time.
[Machine damage by unexpected machine operation]
4. 4. Do not use commercially available liquid crystal
protective film.
[Improper operation of touch panel]
5. 5. Do not touch the panel while wearing gloves.
[Improper operation of touch panel, scratches]
6. 6. If the touch panel is smudged, wipe the smudging off
gently with a commercially available cleaning cloth
using the ball of a finger; not a fingernail.
7. 7. Do not use cleaning fluid containing alcohol.
[Deterioration of touch panel, malfunction]
7-1
Programming
8 8 WARNING
1. 1. The programs given in this manual are not applicable
to all types of machines. Programs must be written
while taking the performance of the machine into
consideration and be executed with due consideration
given to safety. If the machine's capacity is not taken
into account when writing the program, the workpiece
or cutting tool may fly out during machining.
2. 2. Place the operation selection key-switch in the i [ON]
i u or u [OFF] position after completing program entry to
prevent the program being accidentally updated.
[Unexpected machine motion]
7 7 CAUTION
1. Z 1. For center-work machining, move the Z-axis first and
X then the X-axis to position the cutting tool at the
X approach point. In the cutting tool retraction operation,
Z first retract the X-axis to a point where continued
cutting tool movement does not interfere with the
tailstock, and then move the Z-axis to the required
retraction position.
[Turret and tailstock interference]
2. 2. Do not discharge coolant when the spindle is not
rotating. Take measures to ensure that coolant does
not enter the spindle bearings when it is discharged
[Spindle damage]
3. G10 ‘ ’ 3. Note that if data is set for ‘COMMON’ on the ‘WORK
‘ ’ G54 G59 OFFSET’ screen by specifying G10 or system variable
commands, the workpiece zero point is shifted in the
same direction in all of the work coordinate systems,
G54 to G59.
[Tool/Turret and chuck interference, machine damage]
7-2
Door Interlock
8 8 WARNING
1. 1. The door interlock function must be in the [NORMAL]
mode when operating the machine. If operating the
machine with the door interlock switched to the
[RELEASE] mode, awareness of the dangers involved
and particular attention given to safety during machine
operation is essential. Only persons who are trained
sufficiently in safety and machine operation are
permitted to switch the door interlock function to the
[RELEASE] mode and operate the machine. Following
completion of the operation, ensure the door interlock
is switched back to the [NORMAL] mode immediately.
[Serious injury/ Machine damage]
2. 2. Do not modify or remove the door interlock function.
3. 3. Do not put too much confidence in interlock function.

Ensure safety procedures are followed at all times.
7-3
Data
7 7 CAUTION
1. 1. Back up stored programs, parameters set before
shipping and offset data.
[Programs destroyed, parameter data and/or offset
data lost]
2 2 NOTE
Mori Seiki is not liable for problems resulting from destroyed
programs or lost data that have not been backed up.
2. 2. If necessary to perform a memory clear operation,

contact the Mori Seiki Service Department for
assistance.
[Data deleted]
7-4
Precautions when Operating Special Specification Machines
8 8 WARNING
Optional specifications machines must be operated in
compliance with such specifications.
<Industrial Robot Specifications>
Only qualified personnel trained and approved in
accordance with local regulations may operate robots.
Unauthorized personnel may not operate robots under any
circumstances, including teaching and inspection.
Personnel assisting robot operators must be fully
qualified.
1. NC 36 31
“
” “
”
2.
3-1
3.
4-1
4.
5-1
5.
6-1
50 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
8
8 8 DANGER
1. 1. Turn the power OFF before performing maintenance
and inspection procedures. If absolutely necessary to
work with the power ON, exercise extreme caution.
[Electric shock/Entanglement]
2. 2. Electrical wiring work is to be performed by qualified
electrical technicians only.
[Electric shock]
3. 3. Ensure the main power switch is turned [OFF] and
OFF locked at all times when performing maintenance
procedures considered dangerous if the power is ON.
1 1 For locking the main power switch, refer to the separate
“ ” volume, OPERATION MANUAL “Main Power Switch”.
4. 4. When working inside the machine, the door must be
open.
[Locked/Injury]
5. “ ” 5. Provide clear warning that the machine is being
[ ] maintained and operations cannot be performed.
[Accident]
6. 6. Before performing maintenance and inspection
procedures inside the electrical cabinet or on motors,
transformers or machine lighting, confirm the plant
side power supply (circuit breaker) is turned OFF. Note
that when the main power switch is turned OFF, parts
may still contain residual electrical energy. Using a
tester, confirm parts are free of residual energy prior to
performing maintenance procedures. Maintenance
procedures undertaken with the power turned ON must
be performed by qualified electrical engineers.
[Electric shock]
7. 7. Do not open electrical cabinet doors or the operation
panel except to perform maintenance and inspection
procedures.
[Dust and moisture entry/Machine damage]
8. 8. Do not touch the hydraulic unit, coolant pump,
solenoid valves and servomotors during, or
immediately after operation as external surfaces reach
high temperature.
[Burns]
9. 9. Ensure the connecting rod (draw bar/tube) between the
chuck and cylinder, and other threaded parts are
tightened securely at all times.
[Vibration/Strength reduction/Machine accuracy
degradation]
10. 10.Do not overtighten bolts.
[Machine distortion/Bolt breakage]
11. 11. Before installing or transferring the machine, read and
make sure you understand the manuals or drawings
supplied with the machine. When it is necessary to lift
the machine using equipment such as a hydraulic jack,
lift it up on flat ground with adequate strength, paying
due attention to machine balance in order to prevent
the machine from toppling over.
[Machine toppled down/Injury]
1 1 INSTALLATION MANUAL
MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 51
8 8 WARNING
1. 1. Consult the Mori Seiki Service Department prior to
performing replacement procedures. Use specified
parts at all times.
[Impaired machine performance and safety]
2 2 NOTE
Mori Seiki does not accept responsibility for accidents arising from
the use of non-specified replacement parts or parts replaced
without prior consultation.
2. 2. Do not climb on top of the machine.
[Falling]
3. 3. Do not leave articles such as tools and rags inside the
machine.
[Entanglement in tool/Ejection from machine]
4. 4. Interlock functions including the chuck interlock and
“ ” the tailstock interlock must be ON when operating the
“ ” machine. If necessary to operate the machine with the
interlocks released, awareness of the dangers involved
“ ” and particular attention given to safety during machine
operation is essential. Following completion of the
“ ”
operation, ensure the interlocks are turned back ON
[ ]
immediately.
[Unexpected machine operation/Serious injury/
Machine damage]
5. 5. Do not modify or remove interlock functions.
6. 6. Do not put too much confidence in interlock function.

Ensure safety procedures are followed at all times.
7 7 CAUTION
1. 1. Do not touch chips or tool cutting edges with bare
hand.
[Injury]
2. 2. Management of keys supplied with the machine
(operation panel, electrical cabinet, auxiliary devices)
is the sole responsibility of the customer.
3. 3. Keys not used on a regular basis (electrical cabinet
key) must be removed from the lock and stored in a
secure location.
4. 4. Do not use chlorinated hydrocarbon, acetone, or
equivalent erosive solvent.
[Damage to synthetic resin parts or sealing (wiper)]
5. 5. Disposal of industrial waste such as oil, coolant, chips,
and refrigerants is to be performed in strict compliance
with safety and environmental protection laws as
stipulated by the proper national and local authorities.
52 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
DISPOSITION OF MACHINES 53
9
8 8 WARNING
1. 1. Before dismantling the machine, remove the power
cord and air hose connected to the machine.
2. 2. There is a live part inside the electrical cabinet and the
operation panel. Be sure to pay sufficient attention
during the operation.
[Electric shock]
3. 3. Dismantle air cylinders after eliminating pressure.
[Bursting/Accident]
7 7 CAUTION
Machine owners are responsible for appropriate machine
disposal. Do not disturb the environment when you
dispose the machines. Be sure to observe the laws of your
country and regulations of local government concerning
environmental conservation and recycling.
<Liquid>
Contact local governments when disposing liquids such as
lubricants, grease, hydraulic oil, coolants appropriately.
<Electronic Device>
Appropriately dispose electrical parts in the operation panel,
monitor, keyboard, electrical parts in the electrical cabinet,
cable, measuring device (encoder, etc.) after having contacted
the local government to check whether the devices and parts
are recyclable.
<Battery>
Contact local governments to check whether batteries and
dry-cell batteries are recyclable and appropriately dispose
them.
<Machinery Parts>
Appropriately dispose machine parts as recyclable resources
such as casting, sheet metal, ball screw, bearing, and valve as
scraps.
<Hose>
Appropriately dispose hoses as recyclable resources or plastic
waste after having drained the liquid inside.
<Refrigerant>
Refrigerants are used in all cooling systems such as oil
temperature controllers, coolant cooling unit, coolers in the
electrical cabinet. The disposal of these cooling systems and
recovery of refrigerants should be handled by professionals.
Contact local governments to check whether the machines are
recyclable.
<Machining Chamber Observation Window>
The machining chamber observation window consists of
polycarbonate and tempered glass. Contact local governments
to check whether the material is recyclable and appropriately
dispose them.
<Document>
CD Contact local governments to check whether all the related
documents and CDs attached to the machine are recyclable
and appropriately dispose them.
1
1èÕ G
CHAPTER 1
CHAPTER 1 G FUNCTIONS
1 57
2 G 62
G FUNCTIONS
3 SEICOS 158
AXIS CONTROL AND MOVEMENT DIRECTION 57
1
The controlled axes and their travel directions are determined
as follows:
2 , MC, Y <Standard Specifications (2-Axis Turning, MC, Y-Axis
Specifications)>
For standard specifications, the controlled axes and their travel
directions are determined as follows:
+/ + and Direction
Axis Unit
+ direction:
X + The direction in which the machining
Turret
diameter increases.
+ direction:
Z + The direction in which a cutting tool
Turret
moves away from the spindle.
C MC, Y direction:
C (MC specifications, Clockwise rotation, viewing a tool form
Spindle
Y-axis specifications) the spindle.
+ direction:
Y Y The direction in which a cutting tool
Y (Y-axis +
Turret moves upward when viewing the
specifications)
machine from the front.
2 2 NOTE
X JIS X +/ X-axis reversed JIS specification machines have the positive and
negative directions of the X-axis reversed when compared with
conventional specification machines.
Turret
Spindle
Machine Front
58 AXIS CONTROL AND MOVEMENT DIRECTION
2 S, SMC, SY <Headstock 2 Specifications (S, SMC, SY Specifications)>

2 For headstock 2 specifications, the controlled axes and travel
directions are determined as follows.
+/ + and Direction
Axis Unit
+ direction:
X + The direction in which the machining
Turret
diameter increases.
+ direction:
Z + The direction in which a cutting tool
Turret 1 moves away from spindle 1.
direction:
1 Clockwise rotation, viewing a tool form
C SMC, SY Spindle 1 1 the spindle 1.
C (SMC, SY
specifications) + direction:
2 + Clockwise rotation, viewing a tool form
Spindle 2 2 the spindle 2.
+ direction:
Y SY + The direction in which a cutting tool
Y (SY specifications) Turret moves upward when viewing the
machine from the front.
+ direction:
B 2 + The direction in which a cutting tool
Spindle 2 1 moves away from spindle 1.
2 2 NOTE
X JIS X +/ X-axis reversed JIS specification machines have the positive and
negative directions of the X-axis reversed when compared with
conventional specification machines.
Turret
1
Spindle 1
2
Spindle 2
Machine Front
1-1
Expressing Axis Movement in Programming
When writing a program, the numerical values used for

specifying axis position and positive/negative sign used for
determining axis movement direction vary depending on the
position taken as the reference for programming.
The reference position (workpiece zero point) and axis
movement direction are determined as follows:
To write a program, the origin for the program,

i.e. the workpiece zero point must be
determined.
Workpiece Zero Point X0, Z0, Y0 The workpiece zero point (X0, Z0, Y0) is taken
as the reference for programming and also for
machining.
X The diametral dimensions of a product are

X expressed using address X. X0 is taken on the
X-Axis X0
center line of the product.
Z The longitudinal dimensions of a product are

Z expressed using address Z. Z0 is taken on the
Z-Axis Z0
end face of the finished product.
60 AXIS CONTROL AND MOVEMENT DIRECTION
C MC, Y Spindle index angle for executing milling is

C-Axis (MC C C0 expressed using address C. C0 is taken at the
specifications, Y-axis zero point of the C-axis.
specifications)
X Z The dimensions measured in right angle

Y Y direction to X-axis and Z-axis are expressed
Y-Axis (Y-axis Y Y0
using address Y. Y0 is taken on the spindle
specifications)
center line.
2 2 NOTE
2 1 2 In cutting off operation, spindle 2 moves in the Z-axis direction when it
Z receives a workpiece from spindle 1.
2 B With headstock 2 specifications, this movement is made along the
B-axis.
Tailstock Specification
<Chuck Work> <Center Work>
+X +X
+X Direction Tool-Spindle +X Direction Tool-Spindle
Tailstock
Workpiece +Z
Headstock +Z Direction Headstock
Z Z +Z
Z Direction X0, Z0 Z Direction +Z Direction
Workpiece ZeroPoint
Workpiece X0, Z0
(X0, Z0) Workpiece Zero Point
(X0, Z0)
X X
X Direction X Direction
X Y Y <X-Axis and Y-Axis (Y-Axis Specifications)>

Y Used in Y-axis specification machine.
+X
+X Direction
X0, Y0
Workpiece Zero Point (X0, Y0)
+Y Y
+Y Direction Y Direction
X
X Direction
2 Headstock 2 Specification
1 2
<Headstock 1 Side> <Headstock 2 Side>
+X +X
+X Direction Turret Turret +X Direction
1 2
Headstock 1 Workpiece +Z Workpiece Headstock 2
+Z Direction
Z
Z Direction
Z X0, Z0 +Z
Z Direction Workpiece Zero (X0, Z0) +Z Direction
X0, Z0
Workpiece Zero Point
(X0, Z0)
X X
X Direction X Direction
G
62 G FUNCTIONS
2 G
G FUNCTIONS
2 2 NOTE
R The examples of program given in this chapter all assume tool nose
R0.
1 G 1 For the G codes not explained in this chapter, refer to the

instruction manual supplied by the NC unit manufacturer.
2-1 G
G Code List
G G G codes are also called preparatory functions. The G codes

consisting of the address G and a numerical value that follows
NC address G define the machining method and the axis
movement mode in a specified block. The NC establishes the
control mode in response to the specified G code.
G The numerical value following address G defines the
G 2 commands written in that block.
G Depending on how the G codes remain valid, they are

2 classified into the following two types:
Type Function
G One-shot G code Valid only in the specified

00 G (G codes in group 00) block.
G G Modal G code Valid until another G code in

00 G (G codes in groups other the same group is specified
than group 00)
G01, G00 G 00 For example, G00 and G01 are both modal codes, that is, they
G are G codes in the group other than group 00.
G01 X_ Z_ ;
X_ ;
Z_ ;............................................................................ G01 G01 is valid up to this block.
G00 X_ Z_ ;
2 2 NOTE
1. G 1. When a program is executed including a G code without number,
P33 an alarm (P33) occurs.
2. G 2. Address following G code must be specified according to format
order.
3. G 3. More than one G code, each belonging to a different G code group,
may be specified in the same block.
4. G 2 4. If more than one G code, belonging to the same group, are
G specified in a block, the one specified later is valid.
5. G G 5. If a G code not listed in the G code table or a G code for which the
G corresponding option is not selected is specified, an alarm
P34 message (P34) is displayed on the screen.
@ ^ \
1
G00 @ 71
73
G01 @ 74
01 78
G02 @/\*6 79
G03 @/\*6 79
G
G FUNCTIONS 63
@ ^ \
1
G04 00 @ 85
G07.1
19 \*1 87
(G107)
G09 @ 153
G10 @ —
00
*7
G10.6 ^
G11 @ —
G12.1
\*1 93
(G112)
19
G13.1
\*1 93
(G113)
G17 XpYp Xp @ 95
X
G18 ZpXp @ 95
02 Yp
Y
G19 YpZp Zp @ 95
Z
G20 @ —
06
G21 @ —
G22 ^ 96
G23 ^ 96
G27 @ 98
G28 00 @ 99
G30 2 3 4 @ 99
G30.1 ^ —
G31 @ 100
105
G32 @
101
G34 01 @ 121
G35 ^ —
G36 ^ —
*2
G38 — \ 439
*4
G40 R @/\ 164
G41 R @/\*4 247
07
G42 R @/\*4 247
G46 R @ 247
G50 @ 138
G50.2
^*3
(G250)
124
G51.2 00
^*3
(G251)
G52 @ 126
G53 @ 126
G
64 G FUNCTIONS
@ ^ \
1
G54 1 @ 128
G55 2 @ 128
G56 3 @ 128
12
G57 4 @ 128
G58 5 @ 128
G59 6 @ 128
G61 @ 154
G62 @ 157
13
G63 @ 156
G64 @ 156
G65 00 @ 130
G66 ^ 133
G66.1 14 ^ 133
G67 ^ 133
G70 @ 336
G71 @ 334
G72 @ 334
329
G73 @
09 334
G74 @ 338
G75 @ 342
G76 @ 346
G80 \*1 353

G83 \*1 353
G84 \*1 353
G85 \*1 353
G87 \*1 353
09
G88 \*1 353
G89 \*1 353
G90 @ 136
G92 @ 105
G94 @ 136
G96 @ 138
17
G97 @ 141
G98 @ 142
05
G99 @ 142
G
G FUNCTIONS 65
@ ^ \
1
G140 R ^ 158
G141 ^ 158
21
G142 ^ 158
G143 R ^ 158
G150 ^ 165
G151 22 ^ 165
G152 ^ 165
2
G300 G499
G313 — @ 458
G325 — @ 145
G330 — 2 \*5/\*2 146
G374 — ^ 146
G375 — ^ 146
G424 — ^ —
G425 — ^ —
G426 — ^ —
G427 — ^ —
G428 — ^ —
G429 — ^ —
G430 — ^ —
G431 — ^ —
G432 — ^ —
G433 — ^ —
G434 — ^ —
G435 — ^ —
G436 — Z ^ —
G437 — ^ —
G438 — ^ —
G439 — ^ —
G451 — ^ —
G452 — ^ —
G453 — ^ —
G454 — ^ —
G455 — ^ —
G456 — ^ —
G457 — ^ —
G479 — ^ 148
G
66 G FUNCTIONS
@ ^ \
1
G480 — ^ —
G481 — ^ —
G482 — ^ —
G483 — ^ —
G484 — ^ —
G485 — ^ —
G486 — ^ —
G487 — ^ —
G488 — ^ —
G489 — ^ —
G490 — ^ —
G491 — ^ —
G492 — ^ —
G493 — ^ —
G494 — ^ —
G495 — ^ —
G496 — R R ^ —
G498 — ^ —
2
1. G @ G
G18, G54, G97, G99 @ G

G
2.
*1 MC Y
*2 2
*3 MC Y
*4 Y
*5
*6 Y MC
*7 “ ”
@: Standard ^: Option \: Not available
Code Group Function Division 1

G00 Positioning @ 71
73
G01 Linear interpolation @ 74
01 78
G02 Circular interpolation/helical interpolation, CW (clockwise) @/\*6 79
G03 Circular interpolation/helical interpolation, CCW (counterclockwise) @/\*6 79
G04 00 Dwell @ 85
G
G FUNCTIONS 67

G07.1
19 Cylindrical interpolation \*1 87
(G107)
G09 Exact stop @ 153
G10 Data setting @ —
00
G10.6 Tool retract/return function ^ *7
G11 Data setting mode cancel @ —

G12.1
Polar coordinate interpolation mode \*1 93
(G112)
19
G13.1
Polar coordinate interpolation mode cancel \*1 93
(G113)
G17 XpYp plane Xp: @ 95
X-axis or its parallel axis
G18 ZpXp plane @ 95
Yp:
02
Y-axis or its parallel axis
G19 YpZp plane Zp: @ 95
Z-axis or its parallel axis
G20 Data input in inch system @ —
06
G21 Data input in metric system @ —
G22 Stored stroke check function ON ^ 96
G23 Stored stroke check function OFF ^ 96
G27 Zero (reference position) return check @ 98
G28 00 Machine zero (reference position) return @ 99
G30 Second/third, fourth zero (reference position) return @ 99
G30.1 Floating reference point return ^ —
G31 Skip function/multi-step skip function @ 100
105
G32 Thread cutting @
101
G34 01 Variable lead thread cutting @ 121
G35 Circular thread cutting, CW (clockwise) ^ —
G36 Circular thread cutting, CCW (counterclockwise) ^ —
G38 — Workpiece pushing check \*2 439
*4
G40 Tool nose radius offset cancel/tool radius offset cancel @/\ 164
*4
G41 Tool nose radius offset, left/tool radius offset, left @/\ 247
07
G42 Tool nose radius offset, right/tool radius offset, right @/\*4 247
G46 Automatic determination of tool nose radius offset @ 247
G50 Coordinate system setting/spindle speed limit setting @ 138
G50.2
Polygon cutting cancel ^*3
(G250)
124
G51.2 00
Polygon cutting ^*3
(G251)
G52 Local coordinate system setting @ 126
G53 Machine coordinate system selection @ 126
G
68 G FUNCTIONS

G54 Work coordinate system 1 selection @ 128
12
G61 Exact stop mode @ 154
G62 Automatic corner override mode @ 157
13
G63 Tapping mode @ 156
G64 Cutting mode @ 156
G65 00 Macro call @ 130
G66 Macro modal call (call after execution of axis movement commands) ^ 133
G66.1 14 Macro modal call (call in each block) ^ 133
G67 Macro modal call cancel ^ 133
G70 Finishing cycle @ 336
O.D./I.D. rough cutting cycle/
G71 @ 334
pocket cutting
Rough facing cycle/pocket
G72 @ 334
cutting
329
G73 Closed-loop cutting cycle @
09 Multiple repetitive cycle 334
Face cut-off cycle, deep hole
G74 @ 338
drilling cycle
O.D./I.D. grooving cycle, cut-off
G75 @ 342
cycle
Multiple thread cutting cycle/
G76 @ 346
zigzag infeed mode
Hole machining canned cycle
G80 \*1 353
cancel
G83 Face hole machining cycle \*1 353
G84 Face tapping cycle \*1 353
Hole machining canned cycle
G85 Face boring cycle \*1 353
*1
G87 09 Side hole machining cycle \ 353
G88 Side tapping cycle \*1 353
G89 Side boring cycle \*1 353
G90 O.D./I.D. cutting cycle @ 136
G92 Simple thread cutting cycle @ 105
G94 Face cutting cycle @ 136
G96 Constant surface speed control @ 138
17
G97 Constant surface speed control cancel @ 141
G98 Feed per minute mode @ 142
05
G99 Feed per revolution mode @ 142
G
G FUNCTIONS 69

G140 Automatic tool nose radius offset mode cancel ^ 158
G141 Compulsory determination of offset direction (left side) ^ 158
21
G142 Compulsory determination of offset direction (right side) ^ 158
G143 Automatic tool nose radius offset mode valid ^ 158
G150 Groove width tool offset function cancel ^ 165
G151 22 Face groove width tool offset function valid ^ 165
G152 O.D/I.D groove width tool offset function valid ^ 165
2 NOTE
Commands G300 to G499 constitute a reserved area for system use, so they cannot be used for other purposes such as macro calls by the
customer.
G313 — Calling the load monitor macro program @ 458
G325 — Change of value for tailstock (digital tailstock) @ 145
G330 — Tailstock (digital tailstock)/headstock 2 reference point return \*5/\*2 146
G374 — Drilling with tailstock canned cycle ^ 146
G375 — Drilling with tailstock canned cycle completion check ^ 146
G424 — Rectangular milling cycle ^ —
Rectangular milling cycle with
G425 — ^ —
Flat milling cycle one-side wall
Rectangular milling cycle with
G426 — ^ —
two-side wall
G427 — Circular pocketing cycle ^ —
G428 — Rectangular pocketing cycle ^ —
G429 — Inner track machining cycle ^ —
Circular circumferential
G430 — ^ —
Pocketing cycle pocketing cycle
Rectangular circumferential
G431 — ^ —
machining
G432 — Outer track machining cycle ^ —
G433 — Accurate circle cutting ^ —
G434 — Trochoid machining cycle ^ —
G435 — High-speed side milling cycle ^ —
G436 — Z-feed grooving cycle ^ —
High-speed machining cycle
G437 — Corner pocketing cycle ^ —
G438 — Rectangular pocketing cycle ^ —
G439 — Helical hole machining cycle ^ —
G451 — Concave hemisphere cycle ^ —
G452 — External oval machining cycle ^ —
G453 — Internal oval machining cycle ^ —
Mono-shape canned cycle
G454 — Helical threading cycle ^ —
Rectangular milling cycle from
G455 — ^ —
round material
G
70 G FUNCTIONS

Concave chamfering cycle on
G456 — ^ —
cylinder
Chamfering cycle
Keyway chamfering cycle on
G457 — ^ —
cylinder
G479 — Automatic centering type steady rest/tailstock travel ^ 148
G480 — Bolt hole drilling cycle ^ —
G481 — Arc drilling cycle ^ —
Drilling pattern cycle
G482 — Line-at-angle drilling cycle ^ —
G483 — Grid drilling cycle ^ —
G484 — Circle inner chamfering cycle ^ —
Rectangle inner chamfering
G485 — ^ —
cycle
G486 — Track inner chamfering cycle ^ —
Chamfering cycle
G487 — Circle outer chamfering cycle ^ —
Rectangle outer chamfering
G488 — ^ —
cycle
G489 — Track outer chamfering cycle ^ —
Rough step machining cycle
G490 — ^ —
(O.D. / I.D.)
Drilling cycle with variable depth
G491 — ^ —
of cut for turning
Rectangular rough machining
G492 — cycle (X-axis direction) using ^ —
multi-function tool
Rectangular rough machining
G493 — cycle (Z-axis direction) using ^ —
Turning cycle
multi-function tool
Rectangular finish machining
G494 — cycle (X-axis direction) using ^ —
multi-function tool
Rectangular finish machining
G495 — cycle (Z-axis direction) using ^ —
multi-function tool
R-groove machining cycle using
G496 — ^ —
round insert (O.D. / I.D.)
G498 — Mono-shape canned cycle Keyway milling cycle on cylinder ^ —
2 NOTE
1. The NC establishes the G code modes, identified by the symbol, when the power is turned on or when the @ (RESET) key is
pressed.
Concerning G18, G54, G97, and G99, however, pressing the @ (RESET) key does not establish the G code mode of them but the G code
selected for each group remains valid.
2.
*1 Standard for the MC specifications and the Y-axis specifications.
*2 Standard for the headstock 2 specifications.
*3 Optional for the MC specifications and the Y-axis specifications.
*4 Standard for the Y-axis specifications.
*5 Standard for the digital tailstock specifications.
*6 Standard for the Y-axis specifications and optional for the MC specifications.
*7 Refer to the separate volume, “OPERATION MANUAL”.
G
G FUNCTIONS 71
2-2 G00
G00 Positioning Cutting Tool at Rapid Traverse Rate
G00 By specifying the G00 command, all axis movement

commands are executed at the rapid traverse rate.
G00 The G00 mode is usually used for the following operations:
1. 1. At the start of machining:
To move the cutting tool close to the workpiece.
2. 2. During machining:
To move the cutting tool, retracted from the workpiece, to
the next programmed target point.
7 7 CAUTION
When moving the cutting tool at a rapid traverse rate
during machining, make sure that there are no
obstacles in the tool paths.
[Interference, Machine damage]
3. 3. At the end of machining:
To move the cutting tool away from the workpiece.
8 8 WARNING
G00 When setting the G00 mode approach to the workpiece,
Z +10 mm determine the approach paths carefully, taking the
workpiece shape and cutting allowance into
consideration. The approach point in the Z-axis
direction should be +10 mm or more away from the
workpiece end face. When the spindle is rotating,
centrifugal force acts on the chuck jaws, reducing the
chuck gripping force.
G00 X(U)_Y(V)_ Z(W)_ ;

• G00 ..................................... Calls positioning at a rapid traverse rate.
• X, Y, Z ................................. Specifies the positioning target point at a
rapid traverse rate.
The coordinates are specified in absolute
values.
• U, V, W ................................ Specifies the positioning target point.
The coordinates are specified in incremental
values in reference to the present position.
2 2 NOTE
Y(V) Y Address Y(V) can be specified with Y-axis specifications only.
7 7 CAUTION
1. G00 X Z 1. If X- and Z-axis movements are specified in the same
block in the G00 mode, the tool path is not always a
X Z straight line from the present position to the
programmed end point. Make sure that there are no
obstacles in the tool path, remembering that X- and
Z-axis movement is at the rapid traverse rate.
[Interferences, Machine damage]
X Z If the rapid traverse rates of X-axis and Z-axis are:
•X : 18000 mm/min • X-axis: 18000 mm/min
•Z : 24000 mm/min • Z-axis: 24000 mm/min
G
72 G FUNCTIONS
G00 X Z The tool path generated by the simultaneous

movement of the two axes in the G00 mode is shown in
the illustration.
X
(18000)
Z (24000)
Therefore, the tool paths are generated as illustrated

below depending on the positional relationship
between the start and programmed points.
Start Point
Programmed Points Programmed Points

Start Point
2. X Z 2. For center-work, move the Z-axis first and then the

2 X-axis to position a cutting tool at the approach point.
/ 2 If X and Z-axes are specified at the same time, the
Z X cutting tool may interfere with a tailstock or spindle 2
causing the machine to be damaged (tailstock
X
specifications/spindle 2 tailstock specifications). Also,
Z
when retracting cutting tool, retract it in the X-axis
direction first to the point where it does not interfere
with the tailstock, and then Z-axis to the required
retraction position.
[Interference/Machine damage]
1
2
3. G00 X Z Z 3. If the Z-axis is moved after the X-axis, or the X-axis is

X moved after the Z-axis, by a G00 command for
example, the tool path will be inside of the specified
position. That is, if the tool reaches the specified
range, the programming in the next block is executed
before reaching the end position of the command
(in-position). When creating programs, take
interference between the tools and the workpiece into
full consideration.
The validity of in-position check can be switched by
setting the parameter below.
No. 1193 No. 1193
0: 0: In-position check invalid (default setting)
1: 1: In-position check valid
[Interference between tool and workpiece]
2 2 NOTE
1. G00 G01, G02 G03 1. Once the G00 command is specified, it remains valid until another
G G00 G code in the same group is specified. G01, G02, and G03 are
examples of G codes which belong to the same group.
G
G FUNCTIONS 73
G G G codes which remain valid until another G code in the same

group is specified are called modal G codes.
1 G “G ” 62 1 For the G code groups, refer to “G Code List” (page 62).
2. 2. The maximum rapid traverse rate varies among the machine

models.
3. 3. The rapid traverse rate is adjustable by using the rapid traverse
rate override switch on the machine operation panel.
4. “0” 4. If the rapid traverse rate override switch is set to “0” during
automatic operation, the programmed rapid traverse is not
executed and the operation enters the feed hold mode.
5. 0 q 5. If the feedrate override switch on the operation panel is set to “0”
No. 0102 during automatic operation and press the automatic operation
0 button q [START] (Start), an alarm (No. 0102) is displayed and
the programmed rapid traverse is not executed. If the feedrate
override switch is set to a value other than "0", the alarm is
released and the programmed rapid traverse is executed.
6. T G00 6. In a block where a T code is specified, G00 should be specified.
T This G00 command is necessary to determine the cutting tool

movement feedrate to execute offset motion.
2-3 G01
G01 Moving Cutting Tool along Straight Path at Cutting Feedrate
F 1 1 The feedrate is specified with a F code by the travel distance of

mm the cutting tool per rotation of the spindle or minute.
1 “G98 G99 ” 142 1 “G98 Feedrate per Minute Command, G99 Feedrate per Revolu-
tion Command” (page 142)
G01 X(U)_ Y(V)_ Z(W)_ F_ ;

• X, Y, Z .................................. Specifies the cutting target point.
values.
• U, V, W ................................. Specifies the cutting target point (distance
and direction).
• F........................................... Specifies the feedrate in ordinary control
• G99 mm/rev • In the G99 mode, the feedrate is specified
in “mm/rev”.
F0.2 0.2 mm/rev F0.2: 0.2 mm/rev
• G98 mm/min • In the G98 mode, the feedrate is specified
in “mm/min”.
F200 200 mm/min F200: 200 mm/min
G
74 G FUNCTIONS
7 7 CAUTION
G01 X Z When the cutting speed is high, if the Z-axis is moved after
Z X the X-axis or the X-axis is moved after the Z-axis, by a G01
command for example, the next block is executed before
acceleration/deceleration of the previous block is
completely finished and the tool paths become an arc at
the corner. That is, a corner cannot be finished sharply.
When the in-position check is valid, a corner is finished
sharply. The validity of in-position check can be switched
by setting the parameter below.
No. 1193 No. 1193
0: 0: In-position check invalid (default setting)
1: 1: In-position check valid
2 2 NOTE
1. Y(V) Y 1. Address Y(V) can be specified with Y-axis specifications only.
2. G01 G00, G02 G03 2. Once the G01 command is specified, it remains valid until another
G G01 G code in the same group is specified. G00, G02, and G03 are
examples of G codes which belong to the same group.
G G G codes which remain valid until another G code in the same
group is specified are called modal G codes.
1 G “G ” 62 1 For the G code groups, refer to “G Code List” (page 62).
3. 3. The cutting feedrate is adjustable by using the feedrate override

0 200% switch on the machine operation panel in the range of 0 to 200%.
4. F 4. The feedrate data is “0” until an F code is specified.
“0”
If an axis movement command is read before an F code is
P62 specified, the machine does not operate. In this case, an alarm
message (P62) is displayed on the screen.
5. G99 5. When the power is turned on, the NC is in the G99 (feed per
revolution) mode.
2-4 G01 R
G01 Chamfering and Rounding Functions
2 It is possible to chamfer or round a corner, formed by straight

R lines specified by the commands in two blocks, at any angle or
radius.
aD bD dD To chamfer or round corners, tool paths must be written to
e define the required shape as points a D b D d D e as in
the diagram below.
R aD However, chamfering or rounding is possible by simply defining
cD e the shape as points a D c D e when the chamfering or
rounding function is used.
E R The feedrate for chamfering or corner rounding can be
specified by using an E code.
5 4 3 5 4 3
2 2
1 1
R
<Chamfering Function> <Rounding Function>
G
G FUNCTIONS 75
5E R 5Chamfering and rounding accuracy is improved by specifying a low

R feedrate for chamfering or rounding using an E code.
<Chamfering>
G01 X(U)_ Z(W)_ , C_ F_ E_ ;
• X(U) ..................................... Specifies the X coordinate value of the point
d X of intersection when a corner is formed by
a two straight lines (point “d” in the illustration
d below). In incremental programming, it
specifies the distance from point “a” to point
“d”.
• Z(W) .................................... Specifies the Z coordinate value of the point
h Z of intersection when a corner is formed by
e h two straight lines (point “h” in the illustration
below). In incremental programming, it
specifies the distance from point “e” to point
“h”.
• , C ....................................... C Specifies the chamfer size (“C” in the
illustration below).
• F........................................... Specifies the feedrate in ordinary control.
• E........................................... Specifies the feedrate applied for
chamfering.
a +X +X
C C
W W
c d c
−Z +Z U/2
b g g
b C h C
U/2 h
−Z +Z
c d c f e e f C
C
g g
C C
a
−X −X
R
<Corner rounding>
G01 X(U)_ Z(W)_ , R_ F_ E_ ;
• X(U) ..................................... Specifies the X coordinate value of the point
d X of intersection when a corner is formed by
a two straight lines (point “d” in the illustration
d below). In incremental programming, it
specifies the distance from point “a” to point
“d”.
• Z(W) .................................... Specifies the Z coordinate value of the point
h Z of intersection when a corner is formed by
e h two straight lines (point “h” in the illustration
below). In incremental programming, it
specifies the distance from point “e” to point
“h”.
• , R ....................................... R R Specifies the radius of a rounding arc (“R” in
the illustration below).
• E........................................... R Specifies the feedrate applied for rounding.
G
76 G FUNCTIONS
+X +X
a
R R
W W
c d c
−Z +Z U/2 g g
b
R h R
b h
U/2
−Z +Z R f e e f R
c d c
g g
R R
a
−X −X
2 2 NOTE
1. R C, R 1. When specifying the chamfering or corner rounding function, enter
“,” a comma “,” before address C or R.
2. R 2. If the axis movement distance specified in the block where the
P383 chamfering or corner rounding function is specified is smaller than
the amount of chamfering or rounding, an alarm message (P383)
is displayed on the screen.
3. R 3. If the axis movement distance specified in the block next to the one
where the chamfering or corner rounding function is specified is
P384 smaller than the amount of chamfering or corner rounding, an
alarm message (P384) is displayed on the screen.
4. R 4. If the block next to the one where the chamfering or corner
G01 G02, G03 rounding function is specified does not include the linear
P382 interpolation (G01) or circular interpolation (G02, G03) command,
an alarm message (P382) is displayed on the screen.
5. R 5. If the block next to the one where the chamfering or corner
G02, G03 RII rounding function is specified includes the circular interpolation
(G02, G03) command, the chamfering/corner rounding II function
is called for.
6. G01 “, C” “, R” 6. In the G01 mode, if “, C_” and “, R_” are specified in the same
block, the address specified later is valid.
7. E 7. An E command is modal and, once specified, it remains valid until
another E command is specified next.
8. E E 0 8. If address E is omitted or E0 is specified, the feedrate specified by
R F F applies to chamfering or corner rounding.
9. E G99 mm/rev G98 9. The unit system of an E command is determined according to the
mm/min designation of G99 and G98. In the G99 (feed per revolution)
mode, the E command value is executed in “mm/rev” and in the
G98 (feed per minute) mode, it is executed in “mm/min”.
G
G FUNCTIONS 77
Example:
G01 R Programming using G01 (Chamfering and rounding
functions)
R Writing a program using the chamfering/rounding function.
8 7' 7
C1 R2
6' 5 ' 5
6 R1 C1
2
4' 1
60
40
20
3
20
Rapid Traverse
40
60
Cutting Feed
O1;
N1;
G50 S1500;
G00 T0101;
G96 S200 M03;
X30.0 Z20.0 M08; .................................................... Positioning at a at a rapid traverse
a rate to move the cutting tool close to
the workpiece
G01 Z0 F1.0;............................................................. Positioning at b at a cutting
b feedrate, the start point of facing
X0 F0.2; ................................................................... 0.2 mm/rev c Cutting up to c at a feedrate of 0.2
mm/rev
G00 X20.0 Z1.0;
G01 Z 20.0, C1.0 E0.1; ............................................ d' Cutting up to d' using the
chamfering function
2 2 NOTE
0.1 mm/rev Chamfering is executed at 0.1 mm/rev.
X40.0, R1.0; .............................................................. R e' Cutting up to e' using the rounding

function
Z 40.0, R2.0; ............................................................ R f' Cutting up to f' using the rounding
function
X60.0, C1.0; .............................................................. g' Cutting up to g' using the
chamfering function
Z 60.0;...................................................................... h Cutting up to h in ordinary cutting
mode
G00 U1.0 Z20.0;
X200.0 Z150.0 M09;
M01;
2 2 NOTE
E R Since the E command is modal, “E0.1” specified for chamfering is also
0.1 mm/rev valid for the succeeding chamfering and corner rounding blocks.
G
78 G FUNCTIONS
2-5 G01
G01 Line at Angle Command
Z When defining a line that makes an angle to the Z-axis as

1 shown below, the coordinate values of the end point are
automatically calculated by specifying the angle to the Z-axis
and one of the coordinate values of the end point.
+X
X, Z
End Point (X, Z)
A
+Z
1. “A” 1. When “A” is not used for the servo axis name.
G01 A_ X(Z)_ F_ ;
G01 A _ X(Z)_ F_ ;
2 2 NOTE
NL3000/2000 NL3000/3000 This format cannot be used with the
servo-controlled steady rest specifications of
NL3000/2000 and NL3000/3000.
2. “A” 2. When “A” is used for the servo axis name.
G01 X(Z)_ , A_ F_ ;
G01 X(Z)_ , A _ F_ ;
2 2 NOTE
NL3000/2000 NL3000/3000 Only the format 2 can be used with the
2 servo-controlled steady rest specifications of
NL3000/2000 and NL3000/3000.
• , A ........................................ Z Specifies the angle the line makes to the
Z-axis.
5Z + +
5The angle is measured from the +Z direction
in the counterclockwise direction.
• X(Z) ..................................... Specifies the coordinate value of the end
point.
2
2 NOTE
X Z
Either of the X and Z coordinate values of the end
point should be specified.
2 2 NOTE
1. A X, Z X, Z A 1. If both A, and X and Z values are specified, X and Z values are
used for defining the line with the A value disregarded.
2. G01 2. The line at angle function is valid only in the G01 mode.
3. A 360.000 A 360.000 3. The programmable range of address A is 360.000 A 360.000.
360 If a value outside this range is specified, a remainder of the division
of “specified value / 360” is taken as the command value.
4. “A” A 4. When “A” is used for the servo axis name, always enter a comma
“,” “,” before an angular command A.
G
G FUNCTIONS 79
Example:
G01 Programming using G01 (Line at angle function)
Writing a program using the line at angle function.
140
2
1
60
4
3 Rapid Traverse
20
20
Cutting Feed
O1;
N1;
G50 S1500;
G00 T0101;
G96 S200 M03;
the workpiece
X0 F0.2; ................................................................... 0.2 mm/rev c Cutting up to c at a feedrate of 0.2
mm/rev
G00 X20.0 Z1.0;
G01 Z 20.0; ............................................................. 0.2 mm/rev d Cutting up to d at a feedrate of 0.2
mm/rev
G01 A140.0 X60.0; .................................................. e Cutting up to e in the line at angle
cutting mode
G00 U1.0 Z20.0;
X200.0 Z150.0 M09;
M01;
2-6 G02 G03

G02 Circular Interpolation (Clockwise), G03 Circular Interpolation (Counterclockwise)
1. ZX
Circular arc on ZX plane
G18 G02(G03) X(U)_ Z(W)_ R_ F_ ;
G18 G02(G03) X(U)_ Z(W)_ I_ K_ F_ ;
2. XY
Circular arc on XY plane
G17 G02(G03) X(U)_ Y(V)_ R_ F_ ;
G17 G02(G03) X(U)_ Y(V)_ I_ J_ F_ ;
3. YZ
Circular arc on YZ plane
G19 G02(G03) Y(V)_ Z(W)_ R_ F_ ;
G
80 G FUNCTIONS
G19 G02(G03) Y(V)_ Z(W)_ J_ K_ F_ ;
G02
G03
• G17, G18, G19..................... Selects the plane where a circular arc is

defined.
• G02 ..................................... Calls the circular interpolation mode in the
clockwise direction.
• G03 ..................................... Calls the circular interpolation mode in the
counterclockwise direction.
• X, Y, Z ................................. Specifies the end point of the arc.
values.
• U, V, W ................................ Specifies the end point of the arc (distance
and direction).
• R ......................................... Specifies the radius of the arc.
• I, J, K ................................... Specifies the distance and the direction from
I the start point to the center of arc. (The
value of I command should be specified as a
radius.)
• F .......................................... Specifies the feedrate in ordinary control
• G99 mm/rev • In the G99 mode, the feedrate is specified
in “mm/rev”.
F0.2 0.2 mm/rev F0.2: 0.2 mm/rev
• G98 mm/min • In the G98 mode, the feedrate is specified
in “mm/min”.
F200 200 mm/min F200: 200 mm/min
1 “G98 G99 1 “G98 Feedrate per Minute Command,
” 142 G99 Feedrate per Revolution Command”
(page 142)
2 2 NOTE
2. G18 ZX 2. When the power is turned on, G18 (ZX plane) is selected.
G18 ZX XY Generally, circular arc cutting is carried out in the ZX plane (G18).
YZ G17, G19 When cutting a circular arc in the XY or YZ plane, select the plane
by specifying the G17 or G19 command.
G17, G18, G19 An alarm (P113) occurs if an axis of other than the plane selected
P113) with G17, G18, G19 is specified.
3. R 180 3. The sign (+, ) accompanying the radius R indicates as shown
R below. For 180 , either positive (+) or negative ( ) is used.
R>0 180 R>0 Circular arc of 180 or smaller

R<0 180 R<0 Circular arc of 180 or larger
4. I, J, K R 4. When cutting a full circle, use I, J, and K to specify the radius. If
circle radius is specified with R, innumerable circles that have the
same start and end points can be defined.
G
G FUNCTIONS 81
5. 180 0 , 90 , 180 , 5. Use I, J and K to specify the arc center unless the arc consists of a
270 1, 2, 3, 4 I, J, K half-circle having 180 as the center angle and the apex oriented
R 0 , 90 , 180 , 270 as shown in 1, 2, 3, 4 in the figure below. If R is
used for the arc center, a calculation error may be caused.
3 1
6. X, Z I, K 6. When I and K commands are used to specify the distance and

360 direction to the center of an arc while X and Z commands are
I, K R omitted or the start and end points lie at the same position, a full
circle (360 ) is defined. If an R command is used instead of I and K
commands, no axis movement results.
7. I, J, K R R I, J, K 7. If an R command and a pair of I, J, and K commands are specified
in the same block, the R command is given priority and the I, J, and
K commands are ignored.
8. 180 8. To cut a half-circle accurately or to accurately define the center of
I, J, K an arc of which the center angle is close to 180 , use I, J, and K
commands instead of an R command.
R 180 If an R command is used, there are cases that the center of a
half-circle or an arc of which the center angle is close to 180
cannot be set accurately due to calculation error.
5G02, G03 + 5G02 or G03 is determined by viewing the arc in the negative
direction from the positive direction in the axis which is not
contained in the selected plane.
G18 ZX Y + In the G18 ZX plane, for example, the G02 command
G02 generates a clockwise arc by viewing the arc in the negative
direction from the positive direction in the Y-axis.
9. Y + X, Z 1 2 9. When viewing X-Z plane from +Y direction, rotational direction for a
G02, G03 1 G02 or G03 command is the same for either spindle 1 or spindle 2
2 G02 G03 G03 side. When using programs created for the spindle 1 on the spindle
G02 Z 2 side, it is necessary to replace G02 commands with G03 and
G03 commands with G02. In addition, the “+/ ” direction of the
Z-axis will be reversed therefore careful attention is required when
creating programs for such purposes.
1 2
<Spindle 1> +X +X <Spindle 2>
G02 G03
Z +Z
G
82 G FUNCTIONS
Example:
G02, G03 Programming using G02 or G03
bDc To move the cutting tool at a cutting feedrate along the arc
bDc.
R2 2 1
O1;
N1;
G50 S2000;
G00 T0101;
G96 S200 M03;
X47.069 Z20.0 M08;
G01 Z1.0 F1.0;.......................................................... a Positioning at a to move the
cutting tool close to the workpiece
Z0 F0.2; .................................................................... 0.2 mm/rev b Positioning at b at a feedrate of
0.2 mm/rev
G02 X43.205 Z 1.482 R2.0 F0.07; ........................... 0.07 mm/rev 2 Cutting an arc of 2 mm radius in the
mm c clockwise direction to c, at a
feedrate of 0.07 mm/rev.
2-7 G02 G03

G02 Helical Interpolation (Clockwise), G03 Helical Interpolation (Counterclockwise) (Option)
X, Y, Z 3 By specifying X-, Y-, and Z-axes in the circular interpolation

mode, the cutting tool movement is controlled along helix.
5 5Helical interpolation mode is used to perform operations such as

hole drilling or cutting threads using a thread cutting tool.
2 2 NOTE
Y This mode is only available with Y-axis specifications.
1. XY
Helical interpolation in the XY plane
G17 G02(03)X_Y_Z_I_J_F_;
G17 G02(03)X_Y_Z_R_F_;
2. YZ
Helical interpolation in the YZ plane
G19 G02(G03)Y_Z_X_J_K_F_;
G19 G02(G03)Y_Z_X_R_F_;
:
G
G FUNCTIONS 83
G18;
• G17, G19 ............................ Selects the plane where the helical
interpolation is executed.
• X, Y, Z ................................. Specifies the coordinate values of the end
point of helical interpolation.
• I, J, K ................................... Specifies the distance and the direction from
the start point of the helical interpolation to
the center of the circle.
• R ......................................... Specifies the radius of the helical
interpolation.
2 2 NOTE
1. G18 XZ 1. When the power is turned ON, the NC is automatically set in G18
G17, G19 mode (XZ plane). If G17 or G19 mode is selected for the helical
G18 XZ interpolation, G18 must be input to return to the XZ plane following
helical interpolation mode operation completion.
2. I, J, K R R I, J, K 2. When I, J, and K command is specified with an R command in the
same block, the R command is given priority and I, J, and K
commands are ignored.
3. F F 3. Command F specifies the feedrate along the circular arc. As the
actual feedrate differs from the feedrate specified by F in the
program, careful consideration must be given to ensure the
feedrate along the linear axis does not exceed machine limits.
4. 4. The feedrate along a linear axis is calculated with the following
formula.
Length of linear axis

=F Linear axis feedrate = F
Length of circular arc
Tool Path
Length of
Linear Axis
X Y
Length of Circular Arc F

Feedrate Specified by F
G
84 G FUNCTIONS
Example:
G02, G03 Programming using helical interpolation (G02/G03)
20 A thread of M60 P = 2.0 at a depth of 30 mm will be cut at
Z 40.0, Y0 M60 P = 2.0 30 mm position Z 40.0, Y0 using a 20 mm diameter thread cutting
tool.
30 4
M60 P2.0
8
100 1
30
5 3 7
+Z
70 10
20 2 mm 30 6
Relief: 2 mm
P2.0 Locus of the Cutting Tool +Y
P2.0 Thread Cutting Tool
O1;
N1;
G98 G19;
M45;
G28 H0;
G00 T0101;
G97 S200 M13;
X120.0 Y0 Z 50.0;
Z 40.0;
G01 X40.0 F300; ..................................................a
G41 Y18.0 Z 28.0 F80; ................................. a b ON Tool radius offset ON
G03 X40.6 Y0 Z 10.0 R18.0; ......................... b c
X44.6 K 30.0; ................................................ c g
X45.2 Y 18.0 Z 28.0 R18.0; ......................... g h
G00 G40 Y0 Z 40.0 X120.0; ................................... OFF Tool radius offset OFF
Z50.0;
X300.0 Z100.0 M05;
M46;
G99 G18;
M01;
<Lead Angle>
abc As shown in the diagram below, when triangle “abc” is wound
ac around a cylinder, the oblique line “ac” of the triangle forms a
helical curve. If a groove having a triangular or square
abc cab = cross-section is created along the helix, a thread is formed.
3 8 cab = of triangle “abc” forming the helix is called the lead
angle. In order to cut the thread smoothly, movements from
point 3 to point 8 must generate the same angle as the lead
angle.
The lead angle can be calculated using the following formula.
L
tanθ =
π•D
G
G FUNCTIONS 85
12 :
10 11 12 11
7 8 9 c 10
9 8 Lead Angle ( )
6 7
4 5
2 3 2 3 4
5 6
L: mm
1 1
a b Lead (mm)
D D: mm
Thread Diameter (mm)
9 8
10 7
c 11 2
3 4
12 1 5 6
0 0
a b
1) 1D 2 1) Point 1 D Point 2
The radius of the approach arc must satisfy the following
conditions.
<r < Tool radius < r (approach arc radius) < Machining radius
10 mm 30 mm By assigning tool radius 10 mm and machining radius 30
mm to the inequality above, the following can be obtained.
10 < r < 30 10 < r < 30
r = 18 mm From this, approach radius is determined as r = 18 mm.
<Coordinate Values of Approach Arc Radius Start
Point>
If the inside angle of the approach arc is too large,
approach motion will take a time. Conversely, if it is too
small, the tool may interfere with the face to be machined.
90 Taking these facts into consideration, the inside angle of
the approach arc is determined to be 90 . According to the
Y0, Z 28.0 2 approach radius and the machining radius, the coordinate
Y18.0, Z 28.0 values of the approach arc center are Y0, Z 28.0. The
coordinate values of start point 2 are then calculated as
Y18.0, Z 28.0.
2) 2D 3 2) Point 2 D Point 3
<Lead in Approach Arc>
To execute thread cutting smoothly, the lead angle within
the approach arc must match the lead angle of the thread
to be cut.
Machining radius: Pitch (Lead)
= L = Approach arc radius: L (Lead)
30 mm 2 mm 18 mm Since “machining radius = 30 mm”, “pitch = 2 mm”, and
“approach arc radius = 18 mm”,
30 : 2 = 18 : L 30 : 2 = 18 : L
L Accordingly, value L is obtained as follows:
L = 1.2 mm L = 1.2 mm
2-8 G04
G04 Suspending Program Execution (Dwell)
G04 The G04 command is used to suspend program execution

during automatic operation for the period specified in the
program.
This function is called the dwell function, and is used in
operation such as the grooving operation.
G
86 G FUNCTIONS
If dwell is specified at the bottom of the groove, the tool stops

moving. The spindle keeps rotating while the tool stays at the
bottom of the groove.
1 By turning the spindle a single rotation with the tool at the
bottom of the groove, the groove profile accuracy is improved
and uncut portion is eliminated. The dwell function is also used
for adjusting the timing to confirm opening and closing of the
chuck when the machine is equipped with the air blow, the bar
feeder or loader devices.
2 2 NOTE
G04 When executing a dwell using the G04 command, if the cutting tool is
1 kept in contact with the workpiece at a position such as the bottom of a
groove for a long time it will shorten the life of the tool nose as well as
adversely affecting machining accuracy.
G04 X_ ;
G04 U_ ;
G04 P_ ;
• G04 ...................................... Calls the dwell function.
• X, U, P ................................. Specifies the period in which the program
X, U execution is suspended.
X1.0 (U1.0) (P1.0): 1 The dwell period should be specified in units
X1 (U1) (P1): 0.001 of seconds with a decimal point.
X1.0 (U1.0) (P1.0): 1 sec
2 X1 (U1) (P1): 0.001 sec
1. 0.001 99999.999 2 NOTE
2. G04 1. Programmable dwell period is 0.001 to
99999.999 seconds.
3. 1 2. The dwell function is valid only in the specified
block.
3. Dwell period per revolution of the spindle is
60 calculated as follows:
t
60 (sec)
t (sec) =
spindle speed (min 1)
Example:
G04 Programming using G04
3 mm To cut a 3 mm wide groove.
2
3 1
C0.5 M60 P2
4 C1 22
25
Rapid Traverse
69
56
Cutting Feed
O1;
N1;
G50 S1500;............................................................... 1 Setting the spindle 1 speed limit at
1500 min 1 1500 min 1 for automatic operation
to ensure safety
G00 T0101;
G
G FUNCTIONS 87
G96 S100 M03;......................................................... 100 m/min 1 Starting spindle 1 in the normal

direction at cutting speed of 100 m/
min
X70.0 Z20.0 M08; .................................................... Positioning at a to move the cutting
a tool close to the workpiece at a
rapid traverse rate
G01 Z 26.0 F1.0; ..................................................... b Positioning at b, the start point of
grooving at a cutting feedrate
X68.0 Z 25.0 F0.07; ................................................ 0.07 mm/rev Cutting along path b D c at a
bDc feedrate of 0.07 mm/rev
X56.0 F0.1; .............................................................. 0.1 mm/rev Cutting along path c D d at a
cDd feedrate of 0.1 mm/rev
G04 U0.2; ................................................................. 1 0.2 Suspending program execution for
: 0.2 seconds at the bottom of the
d groove to allow spindle to rotate one
turn
1000V Spindle speed at d
N =
•D
1000 100 1000V
= 569 min 1
N =
3.14 56 •D
1 1000 100
= 569 (min 1)
3.14 56
60 Period required for the spindle to
= 1
569 rotate one turn
1
60
0.2 = 1 (sec)
569
To suspend program execution at
the groove bottom for more than
one turn of the spindle, dwell period
is determined to 0.2 seconds.
5G04 U0.2; G04 X0.2; G04 P0.2; 5The following program may be used instead of “G04 U0.2;”.
G04 X0.2; or G04 P0.2;
2-9 G07.1 G107

G07.1 (G107) Cylindrical Interpolation
Z Using the cylindrical interpolation function, grooving on cylinder

circumference can be performed by synchronizing rotation of
the workpiece and movement of the tool in the Z-axis direction.
With this function, the program can be created by developing
the cylinder circumference into the plane, so calculation of the
coordinate can be made simple.
2 2 NOTE
G07.1 G107 MC Y The G07.1 (G107) command can be used only with the MC type or
MC Y G07.1 G107 Y-axis specification machines. With the models other than MC
specifications and Y-axis specifications, these G codes cannot be
used.
<Cylindrical interpolation mode>

(G19 W0 H0;) .............. ZC Specifies the ZC plane for machining.
G07.1(G107) C_ ;
<Cylindrical interpolation mode cancel>

G07.1(G107) C0;
:
(G18 U0 W0;) .............. ZX Specifies the ZX plane for machining.
G
88 G FUNCTIONS
• G07.1(G107) ....................... Calls the cylindrical interpolation mode.

• C ......................................... Specifies the radius of the workpiece
(groove bottom).
2 2 NOTE
1. G07.1 1. Specify the G07.1 command in a single block without other
commands.
2. I, J, K 2. In the cylindrical interpolation mode, I, J and K cannot be used to
define an arc.
R Circular arc radius must be specified using R. The unit of R
command is “mm”.
G02 X_ C_ R4.0; 4 mm G02 X_ C_ R4.0; (radius 4 mm)
3. 3. If circular interpolation or tool radius offset is specified in the
ZC cylindrical interpolation mode, it is necessary to specify the ZC
plane for machining.
4. 4. To execute the tool radius offset function in the cylindrical
interpolation mode, specify the tool radius offset function (start-up
and offset cancel) in the cylindrical interpolation mode.
5. G07.1 P485 5. If the G07.1 command is specified in the tool radius offset mode,
an alarm (P485) occurs.
6. G07.1 6. If the G07.1 command is specified without axis movement
G07.1 commands after canceling the tool radius offset, the position of
each axis in the block with the G07.1 command is assumed to be
the position after canceling the tool radius offset and the following
movement is executed.
7. P481 7. If the tool length offset is specified in the cylindrical interpolation
mode, an alarm (P481) occurs.
8. 8. Complete the tool offset movement (movement by the tool length
offset and tool wear offset amount) before specifying the cylindrical
interpolation.
9. G07.1 P485 9. If the G07.1 command is specified in the constant surface speed
control mode, an alarm (P485) occurs.
10. F 10. For the feedrate, specify the tangential speed in the cylinder
development with address F.
11. G98 11. Whether the previous F command is valid or not depends on that
G99 F the mode just before the G07.1 command is the feed per minute
mode (G98) or the feed per revolution mode (G99).
• G07.1 G98 • With the feed per minute mode (G98) just before the G07.1
command
F F If the F command is not specified in the cylindrical interpolation
mode, the previous F command is used. As the feedrate after
F canceling the cylindrical interpolation mode, the last feedrate
specified at the beginning of or during the cylindrical
interpolation mode is valid.
• G07.1 G99 • With the feed per revolution mode (G99) just before the G07.1
command
F In the cylindrical interpolation mode, the previous F command
F feedrate cannot be used. If the cutting feed is specified without
(P62) F the F command in the cylindrical interpolation mode, an alarm
(P62) occurs. When canceling the cylindrical interpolation mode,
the F value was reinstated to that applied before the cylindrical
interpolation mode was started.
F <Without F Command in Cylindrical Interpolation
Mode>
F F
F
F Value just after Starting F Value In Cylindrical Interpo-
Previous Mode F Value after Canceling Cylin-
Cylindrical Interpolation Mode lation Mode
drical Interpolation Mode
G98 F F F
Previous F command is valid Previous F command is valid Previous F command is valid
G
G FUNCTIONS 89
F F
F
G07.1 F
G99 F=0 F=0 F=0 *1
F command just before G07.1
command is valid or F=0 *1
F <With F Command in Cylindrical Interpolation Mode>
F F
F
G98 F F F
Previous F command is valid Specified F command is valid Specified F command is valid
G07.1 F
*1
*2 F
G99 F=0 F F command just before G07.1
Specified F command is valid *2
command is valid or specified F
command is valid *1
*1 G98 *1 When the G98 command is specified in the cylindrical
interpolation mode, the machine movement differs depending
on the following parameters.
No. 1279.3 No. 1279.3
0: G07.1 F 0: F command just before G07.1 command is valid.
1: F 1: F command before canceling cylindrical interpolation mode
is valid.
*2 *2 Moves with the feed per revolution command in the cylindrical
interpolation mode.
12. G 12. The following G codes can be specified in the cylindrical
interpolation mode.
G P481 If any G code other than those listed above is specified, an alarm
(P481) occurs.
• G00 • G00 .......... Positioning
• G01 • G01 .......... Linear interpolation
• G02 • G02 .......... Circular interpolation (clockwise)
• G03 • G03 .......... Circular interpolation (counterclockwise)
• G04 • G04 .......... Dwell
• G09 • G09 .......... Exact stop
• G22 • G22 .......... Stored stroke check function ON
• G23 • G23 .......... Stored stroke check function OFF
• G40 • G40 .......... Tool radius offset cancel
• G41 • G41 .......... Tool radius offset, left
• G42 • G42 .......... Tool radius offset, right
• G50.2 • G50.2 ....... Polygon cutting cancel
• G61 • G61 .......... Exact stop mode
• G64 • G64 .......... Cutting mode
• G65 • G65 .......... Macro call
• G66 • G66 .......... Macro modal call (call after execution of axis
movement commands)
• G66.1 • G66.1 ....... Macro modal call (call in each block)
• G67 • G67 .......... Macro modal call cancel
• G80 • G80 .......... Hole machining canned cycle cancel
• G81 • G81 .......... Spot drilling cycle
• G82 • G82 .......... Counter boring cycle
• G83 • G83 .......... Deep hole drilling cycle
• G84 • G84 .......... Tapping cycle
G
90 G FUNCTIONS
• G85 • G85 .......... Boring cycle

• G86 • G86 .......... Boring cycle
• G87 • G87 .......... Back boring cycle
• G88 • G88 .......... Boring cycle
• G89 • G89 .......... Boring cycle
• G90 • G90 .......... Absolute commands
• G91 • G91 .......... Incremental commands
• G97 • G97 .......... Constant surface speed control cancel
• G98 • G98 .......... Feed per minute mode
13. 13. The cylindrical interpolation mode is canceled when the power is
turned ON or reset.
14. 14. An alarm (P484) occurs if any axis specified for the cylindrical
P484 interpolation has not completed the zero point return.
15. 15. The program of the block during the cylindrical interpolation cannot
be restarted.
16. G07.1 P486 16. An alarm (P486) occurs if the G07.1 command is specified during
the mirror image.
17. 17. When the cylindrical interpolation mode is started or canceled, the
deceleration check is performed.
18. 18. An alarm (P481) occurs if the cylindrical interpolation or the polar
P481 coordinate interpolation is specified during the cylindrical
interpolation mode.
19. 2 2 19. With the headstock 2 specification machine, the cylindrical
Z C interpolation function can also be used on the spindle 2 side. If the
+/ cylindrical interpolation function is used in the operation at spindle
2, pay attention to the “+/ ” direction of the Z- and C-axes.
1 Z C +/ “ 1 Concerning the “+/ ” direction of the Z- and C-axis, refer to

” 59 “Expressing Axis Movement in Programming” (page 59).
Example:
G07.1 (G107) Programming using G07.1 (G107)
8
110 C
100 R4
1 A
200
Fig. 1
R4
360
5 mm R4
Groove Depth 5 mm
A B
R4
100 100 C
C 30 10
B 160 2
Fig. 2
3
Fig. 3
2 2 NOTE
1. 2 1 2 3 1. Fig. 2 is a development of Fig. 1. The angle in Fig. 2 indicates the
angle made to the center of the cylinder as shown in Fig. 3.
2. 2 2. Command point for cylindrical interpolation is obtained from the
development of the circumference of the cylindrical shape (Fig. 2).
G
G FUNCTIONS 91
3. 2 ZC 3. The development of the cylinder circumference (Fig. 2) is given in

the ZC plane.
4. 2 4 4. Command points of the shape in Fig. 2 are expressed by in Fig.
4.
G07.1 (G107) After selecting the cylindrical interpolation mode with the G07.1
(G107) command, specify the command points in order.
40 10
0 Z mm
1
Z-Axis (mm)
2
4 3 C1
100 (A)
5 C2
: Command Point
6 C3 :
200 (B) Path of the Tool Center
7 8 9 C4
R4
Each Corner: R4
360
10
C
4 C-axis ( )
Fig. 4
4 a j Command values of a to j in Fig. 4 are indicated below.
Z (mm) C( )
Command Point
a 10 0
b 10 C1
c 14 100
d 36 100
e 40 C2
f 40 C3
g 36 200
h 14 200
i 10 C4
j 10 360
C1 C4 It is possible to create a program if values C1 - C4 are known.
R 4.0 mm The radius of corners in the tool path is 4.0 mm.

C1 C4 C1 C4 First obtain the values C1 - C4 in “mm” before obtaining them
in angles ( ).
A (100 ), B (200 ) For this calculation, A (100 ) and B (200 ) should be converted
into “mm”.
Circumference of the workpiece:
100 = 314.1593 (mm) 100 = 314.1593 (mm)
360 314.1593 (mm) This means 314.1593 (mm) corresponds to 360 .
100
A (100°): 314.1593 × = 87.266 (mm)
360
200
B (200°): 314.1593 × = 174.533 (mm)
360
G
92 G FUNCTIONS
40 10 0 40 10 0
Z mm Z mm
Z-Axis (mm) Z-Axis (mm)
C1 95.416
87.266 100 (A)
C2 104.583
C3 195.416
174.533 200 (B)
C4 204.584
314.1593 360
C mm C
C-Axis (mm) C-Axis ( )
5 6
Fig. 5 Fig. 6
C1 C4 C Next, calculate values C1 - C4 in “mm”.

C1: 87.266 4 = 83.266 (mm) C1: 87.266 4 = 83.266 (mm)
C2: 87.266 + 4 = 91.266 (mm) C2: 87.266 + 4 = 91.266 (mm)
C3: 174.533 4 = 170.533 (mm) C3: 174.533 4 = 170.533 (mm)
C4: 174.533 + 4 = 178.533 (mm) C4: 174.533 + 4 = 178.533 (mm)
C For cylindrical interpolation, it is necessary to specify the
C-axis value in angles.
C1 C4 Convert C1 - C4 into the unit of “ ” (angle).
C1: 360 : 314.1593 (mm) = C1: 83.266 (mm)
C1 = 95.416
C2: 360 : 314.1593 (mm) = C2: 91.266 (mm)
C2 = 104.583
C3: 360 : 314.1593 (mm) = C3: 170.533 (mm)
C3 = 195.416
C4: 360 : 314.1593 (mm) = C4: 178.533 (mm)
C4 = 204.584
O1;
N1;
M45;
G28 H0;
G00 T0101;
G97 S100 M13;
X115.0 Z 10.0 S500; ............................................... Positioning to the point where
grooving is started
G98 G01 X100.0 F50; .............................................. Starting of the grooving
G98 Feedrate is 50 mm/min, specified in
50 mm/min the G98 (feed per minute) mode.
G19 W0 H0; .............................................................. ZC Selecting the machining plane (ZC
C plane)
Z When specifying circular command
G02, G03 (G02 or G03) between the rotary
axis (C-axis) and linear axis (Z-axis)
G19 Z C in the cylindrical interpolation mode,
Z it is necessary to select a plane.
C “G19 If the Z- and C-axis movements are
W0 H0;”. not required, specify as “G19 W0
H0;”. This is necessary because Z-
and C-axis commands must be
specified after the G19 command.
G
G FUNCTIONS 93
G07.1(G107) C50.0; ................................................. Calling the cylindrical interpolation

100 mode
50 mm As the diameter of the workpiece
(groove bottom) is 100 mm, the
cylinder radius is 50 mm.
C95.416; ................................................................... Machining is carried out by
C synchronizing spindle rotation
Z (C-axis indexing) and Z-axis
movement until canceling the
cylindrical interpolation mode.
G02 Z 14.0 C100.0 R4.0;
G01 Z 36.0;
G03 Z 40.0 C104.583 R4.0;
G01 C195.416;
G03 Z 36.0 C200.0 R4.0;
G01 Z 14.0;
G02 Z 10.0 C204.584 R4.0;
G01 C360.0;
G07.1(G107) C0; ...................................................... Canceling the cylindrical
interpolation mode
X115.0;
G00 G99 X200.0 Z100.0 M05;
G18 U0 W0 M46;
M01;
2-10 G12.1 G112

G13.1 G113
G12.1 (G112) Polar Coordinate Interpolation (Notching),
G13.1 (G113) Polar Coordinate Interpolation Cancel
X
X-Axis
“Notching” means cutting the workpiece face to make a

contoured shape.
G12.1 (G112) After starting the rotary tool, specify the G12.1 (G112)
command to select polar coordinate interpolation mode.
X It is possible to synchronize the spindle revolution (slow speed)
with X-axis feedrate of the rotary tool in the polar coordinate
interpolation mode.
2 2 NOTE
1. G12.1 G112 G13.1 G113 MC Y 1. The G12.1 (G112) and G13.1 (G113) commands can be used only
with the MC type or Y-axis specification machines.
2. X C 2. In the polar coordinate interpolation mode, X-axis value should be
specified in diameter and C-axis value should be specified in “mm”
in radius, not in “ ” (angle).
3. G12.1 (G112), G13.1 (G113) 3. The G12.1 (G112) and G13.1 (G113) commands must be specified
in a block without other commands.
4. I, J, K 4. When an arc cutting is executed in the polar coordinate
interpolation mode, addresses to indicate the arc radius are
determined according to the axis name of the linear axis.
X If the X-axis is taken as the linear axis:
XY I, J Since circular interpolation is assumed to be executed in the XY
plane, addresses I and J are used to specify the arc radius.
(Default setting)
G
94 G FUNCTIONS
Y If the Y-axis is taken as the linear axis:

YZ J, K Since circular interpolation is assumed to be executed in the YZ
plane, addresses J and K are used to specify the arc radius.
Z If the Z-axis is taken as the linear axis:
ZX I, K Since circular interpolation is assumed to be executed in the ZX
plane, addresses I and K are used to specify the arc radius.
R Note an arc radius may be specified using address R.
5. G50, G52, G53, G54 5. In the polar coordinate interpolation mode, never change the
G59 coordinate system (G50, G52, G53, G54 - G59, etc.).
6. G00 6. In the polar coordinate interpolation mode, the G00 command
G cannot be specified. Only the following G codes can be specified.
G01, G02, G03, G04, G40, G41, G42, G65, G66, G67, G98, G99 G01, G02, G03, G04, G40, G41, G42, G65, G66, G67, G98, and
G99
7. R G12.1 7. In the cutter radius offset mode or the automatic tool nose radius
G112 G13.1 G113 offset mode, the G12.1 (G112) and G13.1 (G113) commands
cannot be specified.
G12.1 G112 G13.1 G113 Before specifying the G12.1 (G112) or G13.1 (G113) command,
R cancel the cutter radius offset mode or the automatic tool nose
radius offset mode.
8. ‘ ’ “X” 8. For “X” of the ‘TOOL GEOMETRY OFFSET’ screen, set the
‘ distance from the center of spindle to the center of a rotary tool
’ “R” with the turret returned to the zero point. For “R” of the ‘TOOL
GEOMETRY OFFSET’ screen, set the radius of the rotary tool.
9. 2 2 9. With the headstock 2 specification machine, the polar coordinate
C +/ interpolation function can also be used on the spindle 2 side. If the
polar coordinate interpolation function is used in the operation at
spindle 2, pay attention to the “+/ ” direction of the C-axis.
1 Z C +/ “ 1 Concerning the “+/ ” direction of the Z- and C-axis, refer to

” 59 “Expressing Axis Movement in Programming” (page 59).
Example:
G12.1 (G112), G13.1 (G113) Programming using G12.1 (G112) and G13.1 (G113)
20 ADBDCD Notching to machine 50 mm 50 mm square (A D B D C
DDEDA D D D E D A) using the 20 mm dia. end mill.
X C
C B
A
φ 80
50
Z X
D E
20
O1;
N1;
M45;
G28 H0;
G00 T0101;
G97 S100 M13;
X80.0 Z30.0; ...................................................... Positioning to the point where
notching is started
b a
d
f g
e
G
G FUNCTIONS 95
G98 G01 Z 20.0 F100; ...................................... Z 20.0 Cutting into Z 20.0

G18;
G12.1(G112);...................................................... Calling the polar coordinate
interpolation mode
The spindle rotates synchronized
with the feedrate of the cutting
tool.
G42 X50.0; ......................................................... aA ADBDCDDDEDA Cutting in the order of A D B D C
C25.0; ................................................................ bB DDDEDA
X 50.0;................................................................ cC A In approach to point A, the
R automatic tool nose radius offset
C 25.0; .............................................................. dD
function is turned on.
X50.0; ................................................................. eE
C0; ..................................................................... fA
G40 X100.0; ....................................................... g R Canceling the automatic tool nose
X100.0 radius offset function; the cutting
tool is retracted to X100.0.
G13.1(G113);...................................................... Canceling the polar coordinate
interpolation mode
:
2-11 G17, G18, G19

G17, G18, G19 Selecting Plane for Machining
When executing circular arc cutting, a tool radius offset, or

drilling, it is necessary to select the plane in which the called
function is to be executed.
G18 ZX For turning, G18 (the ZX plane) is generally selected.
XY YZ For milling, specify G17 or G19 depending on whether the
G17, G19 function is to be executed on the XY or YZ plane.
+X (U) +X (U)
−Y (V)
−Y (V)
G19 G19
G17
−Z (W) +Z (W) −Z (W) +Z (W)
G18 G17
G18
+Y (V) +Y (V)
−X (U) −X (U)
G17 .............................. XY XY plane

G18 .............................. ZX ZX plane (selected when power is turned
on)
G19 .............................. YZ YZ plane
1 1 Instruction manual from the NC unit manufacturer

2 2 NOTE
1. Y Y 2 2 1. The Y-axis is featured on Y-axis specification machines only and
headstock 2 is featured on headstock 2 specification machines
only.
2. 2. Axis movement commands are not affected by the plane selection.
G17 G02 X_ Y_ R_ F_ ; G17 G02 X_ Y_ R_ F_ ;
G
96 G FUNCTIONS
G01 Z_ ; G01 Z_ ;
XY Z The Z-axis moves independently of the selected plane.
3. G02, G03) G17, G18, G19 3. When specifying a circular interpolation command (G02, G03), an
P113) alarm (P113) occurs if an axis of other than the plane selected with
G17, G18, G19 is specified.
4. R 4. Direct drawing dimension programming, chamfering, corner R,
G90, G92, G94 ZX multiple repetitive canned cycles, and simple canned cycles (G90,
P113 G92, G94) are enabled only on the ZX plane. Specifying these
functions on other planes causes alarm (P113).
2-12 G22
G23
G22 Stored Stroke Check Function ON,
G23 Stored Stroke Check Function OFF (Option)
G22 By specifying the G22 command, just before a cutting tool

enters the defined entry-inhibition area, an alarm occurs and
the machine stops.
G23 G22 The G22 mode can be canceled by executing the G23
command.
To eliminate interference between the cutting tool and the
G22 chuck or a workpiece, set the tool entry prohibition zone using
the G22 command.
2 2 NOTE
“ ” “ ” The tool entry prohibition zone is established “outside” or “inside” the
specified zone.
“ ” “ ” “Outside” is standard and “inside” is optional.
G22 X_ Y_ Z_ I_ J_K_;
G23;
• X, Y, Z ................................. Start point of the tool entry prohibition zone.
To define the zone, use the distance from
the machine zero point. That is, specify the
X coordinate values in the machine coordinate
system which are displayed on the screen.
Note that a radial value should be specified
with address X.
• I, J, K ................................... End point of the tool entry prohibition zone.
To define the zone, use the distance from
the machine zero point. That is, specify the
I coordinate values in the machine coordinate
system which are displayed on the screen.
Note that a radial value should be specified
with address I.
(X, Y, Z)
(I, J, K)
<Tool Entry Prohibition Zone>

G
G FUNCTIONS 97
7 7 CAUTION
When using the stored stroke check function, always
execute a machine zero return operation after switching
the power ON, otherwise the function will not be valid.
[Machine damage]
2 2 NOTE
2. G22 “X_ Y_ Z_” “I_ J_ K_” 2. When specifying the values for X, Y, Z, I, J, and K for a G22
command, the following restrictions apply.
• X > I, Y > J, Z > K X • X > I, Y > J, Z > K (X: In radius)
• X I > 2 mm, Y J > 2 mm, Z K > 2 mm X • X I > 2 mm, Y J > 2 mm, Z K > 2 mm (X: In radius)
To set the zone as illustrated below, for example:
(I80.0, J−20.0, K−80.0)
+X
+Z
(X100, Y20.0, Z−40.0)
+Y
• X100.0 > I80.0 • 100.0 − (80.0) = 20.0 > 2 mm

• Z−40.0 > K−80.0 • −40.0 − (−80.0) = 40.0 > 2 mm
The tool entry prohibition zone is established “outside” or “inside”
the specified zone.
3. “ ” “ ” 3. Where the tool entry prohibition zone is set “outside” or “inside” is
No. 1300.0 determined by the setting for parameter No. 1300.0.
4. “G22_ ;” “G23;” 4. The G22 and G23 commands must be specified in a block without
other commands.
5. G22 “X_ Z_” “I_ K_” 5. If the same values are set for “X_ Z_” and “I_ K_” following the G22
command, the tool entry prohibition zone is not set.
• X, Z, I, K “0” • If the values of addresses X, Z, I, and K are all “0”, the entire
area is set as the tool entry prohibition zone if the tool entry
prohibition zone is established “outside” the specified zone
(standard). If the tool entry prohibition zone is established
“inside” the specified zone (option), the tool entry prohibition
zone is not established.
• X, Z, I, K "0" • If the values of addresses X, Z, I, and K are not “0”, the tool entry
prohibition zone is not established.
6. G22 6. Tool entry prohibition zone specified with G22 is set in parameters.
G22 The value set in parameters are not lost even if the power is turned
off.
G22 To cancel the values set for parameters with G22, specify G23.
G23
5G22 5If a cutting tool enters the tool entry prohibition zone specified with
G22, an alarm is displayed on the screen and the machine stops.
In this case, the cutting tool can be moved only in the opposite
direction in which the cutting tool has been moved.
@ The alarm state can be cleared by pressing the @ (RESET) key
on the operation panel after moving the cutting tool outside the tool
entry prohibition zone manually.
G
98 G FUNCTIONS
Example:
G22, G23 Programming using G22 and G23
To set the zone as illustrated below.
(X100.0, Y20.0, Z−40.0)
+X
+Z
(I80.0, J−20.0, K−80.0)
+Y
O1;
N1;
G00 G28 U0 W0; ..................................................... X, Z Machine zero return of the X- and
Z-axes
G22 X100.0 Y20.0 Z 40.0 I80.0 J 20.0 K 80.0; ...... Setting the tool entry prohibition
zone as illustrated above
G50 S2000;
G00 T0101;
:
: Machining program
:
G23; .......................................................................... Canceling the tool entry prohibition
zone
:
2-13 G27
G27 Zero (Reference Position) Return Check
G27 On specification of the G27 command, when the specified axis

is returned to the zero point, the corresponding status indicator
is illuminated, allowing you to check if the axis has returned to
the zero point. For example, if a program in which the specified
axis starts from the machine zero point and returns to the
machine zero point is created, the return of the axis to the
machine zero point can be checked after executing the
program.
G27 X(U)_ Y(V)_ Z(W)_ P1(P2, P3, P4);
G27 ................................................ Zero return check
X, Y, Z ............................................ Specifying the axis to be returned to the zero
point (absolute command)
U, V, W ........................................... Specifying the axis to be returned to the zero
point (incremental command)
P1 ................................................... Machine zero return check
P2 ................................................... 2 Second zero return check
P3 ................................................... 3 Third zero return check
P4 ................................................... 4 Fourth zero return check
2 2 NOTE
1. P 1. If the P command is omitted, it is assumed that a machine zero
return check command is specified.
2. 2. The number of axes whose zero point returns can be checked
simultaneously depends on the number of axes which can be
controlled simultaneously.
3. (P434) 3. An alarm (P434) occurs if the zero point is not reached after the
command is completed.
G
G FUNCTIONS 99
2-14 G28 G30 2 (3, 4)

G28 Machine Zero (Reference Position) Return, G30 Second (Third or Fourth) Zero (Reference
Position) Return
G28, G30 The G28 or G30 command is used to automatically return the
2 axes specified in the same block to the machine zero point or
3 4 the second (third or fourth) zero point after positioning them to
the specified intermediate point at a rapid traverse rate.
These commands are used if the tool and/or tool holder may
interfere with the workpiece, chuck, or fixture while the turret is
rotating, for mounting/removing a workpiece, or for removing
chips.
1.
Machine zero point
G28 X(U)_ Y(V)_ Z(W)_ ;
2. 2
Second zero point
G30 X(U)_ Y(V)_ Z(W)_ ;
3. 3 4
Third and fourth zero point
G30 P3(P4) X(U)_ Y(V)_ Z(W)_ ;
• G28 ..................................... Calls the machine zero return mode.
• G30 ..................................... 2 No. 2038 Calls the second zero return mode. (The
second zero point coordinate values must
be set for parameter No. 2038.)
• G30 P3 ................................ 3 No. 2039 Calls the third zero return mode. (The third
zero point coordinate values must be set for
parameter No. 2039.)
• G30 P4 ................................ 4 No.2040 Calls the fourth zero return mode. (The
fourth zero point coordinate values must be
set for parameter No. 2040.)
• X, Y, Z ................................. 2 3 4 Specifies the axes to be returned to the
machine zero point or, the second, third, or
fourth zero point. (absolute command)
2
2 NOTE
X, Y, Z,
Numeric value specified following addresses X, Y
and Z indicates the coordinate value of the
intermediate point.
• U, V, W ................................ 2 3 4 Specifies the axes to be returned to the
machine zero point or, the second, third, or
fourth zero point. (incremental command)
2 2 NOTE
U, V, W Numeric value specified following addresses U, V,
and W indicates the coordinate value of the
intermediate point.
2 2 NOTE
G
100 G FUNCTIONS
7 7 CAUTION
1. G28, G30 1. When returning the axis to the machine zero point or
2 3 4 “G28 U0 V0 the second third or fourth zero point from the present
W0;” positions by using G28 or G30 command, use
“G28 X0 Y0 Z0;” incremental command such as “G28 U0 V0 W0;”. If the
absolute command such as “G28 X0 Y0 Z0;” is
2 3 4
specified, the axes first move to the workpiece zero
point before returning to the machine zero point or the
second, third or fourth zero point and this may cause
interference.
2. 2 B 2. Always specify “G330” to return the tailstock/
“G330” headstock 2 (B-axis) to the zero point.
“G28 B0” If the “G28 B0” command is specified, the B-axis
returns to the machine zero point via the workpiece
zero point. The axis may move in an unexpected
direction and may cause interference.
2-15 G31
G31 Skip Function
G31 G01 G31 When G31 is specified, the axes move along a straight line
same as the G01 command. If the skip signal is input externally
during the G31 mode, current movement is stopped and the
program advances to the next block ignoring the remaining
distance.
The skip function is used to measure the workpiece dimension.
5 5G31 is not used in the ordinary machining program.

G31 X(U)_ Z(W)_ F_;
X(U), Z(W) ................................... Coordinate values of the end point of
movement
F .................................................. mm/min Feedrate (mm/min)
Example:
G31 As shown below, axis movements after input of the skip
signal varies according to the dimensioning mode
(incremental or absolute) of the block following the G31
block.
1. 1. In incremental mode
G31 W100.0 F100; G31 W100.0 F100;
U50.0; U50.0;
Skip signal was input here. 50.0

X
Actual Motion
100.0
Z Motion without Skip Signal
2. 2. In absolute mode
G31 Z200.0 F100; G31 Z200.0 F100;
G
G FUNCTIONS 101
X100.0; X100.0;
X100.0
Skip signal was input here.

Actual Motion
Z200.0 Motion without Skip Signal
3. 2 3. In absolute mode for 2 axes

G31 Z200.0 F100; G31 Z200.0 F100;
X100.0 Z300.0; X100.0 Z300.0;
Skip signal was input here.

100 (100, 300)
Actual Motion
Z
100 200 300 Motion without Skip Signal
2 2 NOTE
1. F No. 1174 1. If address F is not specified, the feedrate set in the parameter No.
1174 is applied.
2. G31 2. In the G31 block, automatic acceleration/deceleration is not
applied.
3. G31 100% 3. In the G31 mode, the feedrate override is invalid and fixed at
100%.
4. G31 4. In the G31 mode, the dry run function is invalid.
5. G31 G 5. Since G31 is one-shot G code, it is valid only in the specified block.
6. G31 G31 6. If the skip signal is input at the beginning of G31, the G31
G31 command is completed immediately. If the skip signal is not input
G31 until the end of the G31 block, the G31 command is completed
when the axis movement command is completed.
7. R G31 (P608) 7. If G31 is specified in the tool nose radius offset mode, an alarm
(P608) occurs.
8. F No.1174 “0” 8. When address F is not specified and “0”is set in the parameter No.
(P603) 1174, and alarm (P603) occurs.
9. Z 9. When the machine lock function is valid and only Z-axis is
specified, the skip signal is ignored and the program is executed
up to the last block.
2-16 G32
G32 Tapping (at Center of Spindle)
The G32 command is used to execute a tapping cycle at the

G32 center of the spindle (workpiece).
G
102 G FUNCTIONS
7 7 CAUTION
Depending on the length of the tapper, damage to the tool
may occur as the Z-axis waits for the spindle “one
No. 1270.6 = 1 revolution” signal when at the bottom of the hole. In this
Z case, setting parameter No. 1270.6 to 1 enables the Z-axis
G32 to return movement without waiting for the “one
revolution” signal. However, extra care is required when
specifying G32 continuously for threading operations. A
synchronized tapping cycle is recommended for tapping
at the spindle center.
2 2 NOTE
G32 A tapper should be used when executing tapping by specifying the G32
command.
G32 Z(W)_ F_ ;
• G32 ..................................... Calls the tapping operation.
• Z .......................................... Z Specifies the Z-coordinate of the tapping
end point.
• W ......................................... Specifies the distance and direction from the
start point to the end point of tapping.
• F .......................................... mm Specifies the pitch of thread to be cut (mm).
7 7 CAUTION
G32 For the tapping cycle called by G32, a tapper is used. In
Z this case, the return movement of the Z-axis from the
Z bottom of the machined hole is made with the tapper
extended. Therefore, the position where the Z-axis
reaches in the return movement must be determined
taking into consideration the extending length of the
tapper.
[Collision or interference of cutting tools and a workpiece/
Machine damage]
2 2 NOTE
1. 1. The spindle speed must be kept constant during the execution of a
G97 tapping cycle. Therefore, specify the G97 command to keep
spindle speed constant.
2. 2. During the execution of a tapping cycle called by G32, feedrate
override and spindle speed override values are fixed to 100%
100% because a fixed lead thread cannot be cut if feedrate or spindle
speed is changed during the tapping cycle.
3. Z 3. The cycle does not stop until the Z-axis returns to the specified
return point even if the automatic operation button w [STOP]
(Stop) is pressed during the execution of a tapping cycle.
4. G32 4. In a tapping cycle called by G32, the spindle must be stopped at
Z the bottom of the machined hole. To extract the tapping tool from
M04 M03 the machine hole, specify M04 when cutting a right-hand thread or
M03 when cutting a left-hand thread.
5. F 5. Specify the pitch of the tap to be used for address F.
G
G FUNCTIONS 103
G32 Cautions on Programming Tapping Using G32
0 Dwell Command
G32 The following explains in what situation the dwell command
should be used in the G32 tapping cycle.
To be Specified Not Required

Dwell
Blind Hole Through Hole
Tap hole
shape
Built-in depth sizing No special restriction

Tapper device
Z Z Tapper is pulled into the Tapper is extended from

hole from the feed stop the feed stop point of
point of Z-axis by the Z-axis.
20 30 mm amount of tapper Tapper has allowance to
extension. When the extend 20 to 30 mm. But,
tapper is extended by the actual extension amount
Tapper set amount, the depth cannot be judged.
extension sizing device built in the
amount tapper functions and
rotation is not transmitted
to the tap, then tapping of
specified depth is carried
out.
0 Precautions on Using Tapper

When carrying out tapping in a through hole, extension of
tapper tip at the hole bottom can be ignored. However, in the
case of a blind hole, if the tapper should extend beyond the
depth of the prepared hole, it will cause the tap to be damaged.
To avoid such a problem, use the tapper with built-in depth
sizing device for tapping a blind hole.
F1, F2, F3 The following distances of F1, F2, and F3 are specified in the
catalog of the tapper with built-in depth sizing device.
F3 F2 F1
F1 Necessary if the tap fails to be engaged with

Contraction the workpiece positively at the start of
tapping.
F2 Extension amount at the hole bottom. This
Extension amount is an extension amount of a tapper in
normal spindle rotation (for right-hand
thread) or reverse rotation (for left-hand
thread).
G
104 G FUNCTIONS
F3 For right-hand thread:

This is an extension amount of a tapper
Extension amount when when the tapping tool leaves the workpiece
the tap is pulled out while the spindle is rotating in the reverse
direction.
For left-hand thread:
This is an extension amount of a tapper
when the tapping tool leaves the workpiece
while the spindle is rotating in the normal
direction.
0 To Finish Tapping at Correct Depth in Blind Hole

When machining a threaded hole with the tapper equipped with
Z depth sizing device, obtain the Z-axis return point and the point
of the hole bottom to be specified in a program in the manner
indicated below.
2 2 NOTE
The explanation given below shows the theoretical value. The depth of
tapped hole will vary depending on workpiece material and prepared
hole diameter in actual operation.
• Z • Z-axis return point
Z > F2 + F 3 Z > F2 + F3
• • Hole bottom position
Z= Z=
F2 + (Depth of tapping specified in the drawing F2 + tap engaging
length)
F2 F2:
Extension amount in normal rotation (right-hand thread), extension
amount in reverse rotation (left-hand thread)
F3 F3:
Extension amount in reverse rotation (right-hand thread), extension
amount in normal rotation (left-hand thread)
Example:
G32 Programming using G32 (Tapping)
M8 P1.25 20 mm To carry out tapping of M8 P1.25, and 20 mm deep at the
G32 center of the spindle (workpiece) in the G32 mode.
Prepared hole:
6.8 mm 30 mm 6.8 mm dia., depth 30 mm
Tapper to be used:
F2 = 5 mm F2 (extension amount in normal rotation) = 5 mm
F3 = 7 mm F3 (extension amount in reverse rotation) = 7 mm
5 mm Tap engaging length: 5 mm
O1;
N1;
G00 T0101;
G97 S300 M03;......................................................... 300 min 1 1 Starting the spindle 1 in the normal
direction at 300 min 1
X0 Z15.0; .................................................................. X0, Z15.0 Positioning at (X0, Z15.0) at a rapid
traverse rate
G32 Z 20.0 F1.25; .................................................... Executing the tapping cycle (G32)
• Z 20.0 • Z 20.0
Z= F2 Z = (“Depth of tap” F2 + “Tap
+ engaging length”) = (20 5 + 5)
= (20 5 + 5) = 20 (mm) = 20 (mm)
• F1.25 • F1.25
1.25 mm Pitch 1.25 mm
G
G FUNCTIONS 105
G04 U0.8;.................................................................. F2 Dwell at the bottom of the hole to

allow the tapper to extend F2
(extension amount in normal
• U0.8 rotation) set by the depth sizing
device
60 • U0.8
60 (sec) F2
Dwell =
F×S
0.8 60 × 5
=
1.25 300
= 0.8 (sec)
M05; ......................................................................... Stopping the spindle

Z15.0 M04 ;............................................................... Z15.0 Starting the spindle in the reverse
direction and returning the tool to
• Z15.0 Z15.0
Z > F2 + F3 = 5 + 7 = 12 (mm) • Z15.0
Z 12 mm Z > F2 + F3 = 5 + 7 = 12 (mm)
Z15.0 Since a value greater than “12”
must be set for Z, “Z15.0” is
5G32 G specified in the program.
5Tapping cycle is executed in this
block too since G32 is modal.
G00 X200.0 Z150.0 M05;
:
2-17 G32 G92

G32 Thread Cutting, G92 Thread Cutting Cycle
1 G76 1 G76 Multiple thread cutting cycle can do the same machining.
“G76 ” 346 “G76 Multiple Thread Cutting Cycle” (page 346)
4 1
3 2
<O.D. Thread Cutting Cycle>

G32 bDc The G32 command is used to execute the thread cutting from
point b to c.
In thread cutting operation, threads are not cut in a single path
of thread cutting. They are formed by repeating the thread
cutting path several times while changing the cutting position.
G
106 G FUNCTIONS
G32 aDb, bDc, cDd, dDa If the G32 command is used, tool path aDb, bDc,
cDd, and dDa, must be specified repeatedly for each
operation.
4 1
3 2
Rapid Traverse
Thread Cutting
G92 aDbDcDd 1 The G92 command generates one cycle of thread cutting paths
aDbDcDd. Therefore, in the G92 mode, the thread
cutting cycle is repeated by simply specifying the diameter
aDbDcDd where the cycle is to be executed.
G92 Generally, thread cutting is executed in the G92 mode.
1.
Standard format (default setting)
<Straight thread cutting>

G32 Z(W)_ F(E)_ Q_ ;
G92 X(U)_ Z(W)_ F(E)_ ;
<Tapered thread cutting>

G32 X(U)_ Z(W)_ F(E)_ Q_ ;
G92 X(U)_ Z(W)_ R_ F(E)_ ;
<Scrolled thread cutting on face>

G32 X(U)_ F(E)_ Q_ ;
2. F15
F15 format

G32 Z(W)_ F(E)_ Q_ ;
G92 X(U)_ Z(W)_ F(E)_ ;

G32 X(U)_ Z(W)_ F(E)_ Q_ ;
G92 X(U)_ Z(W)_ I_ F(E)_ ;
G
G FUNCTIONS 107
<Scrolled thread cutting on face>

G32 X(U)_ F(E)_ Q_ ;
• G32 ..................................... Calls the thread cutting operation.
• G92 ..................................... Calls the thread cutting cycle.
• X .......................................... G32 (G32):
X Specifies the X coordinate of the thread
G92 cutting end point.
1 (G92):
Specifies the diameter at which the first
thread cutting cycle is executed.
• Z .......................................... Z Specifies the Z coordinate of the thread
cutting end point.
• U, W .................................... G32 (G32):
Specifies the distance and direction from the
start point to end point of thread cutting.
G92 (G92):
Specifies the distance and direction from the
start point to end point of thread cutting
cycle.
• R, I ...................................... X Specifies the tapered size in the X-axis
direction. It is specified using a signed value
in radius.
• F, E ...................................... Specifies the thread lead.
• Q ......................................... Specifies the angle of shift of the thread
cutting start angle.
1 “ 1 For details on switching the format, refer to the separate volume,

” OPERATION MANUAL “Setting Screen”.
2 2 NOTE
1. Q 1. Specify address Q when cutting multi-start threads.
2. Q 2. Specify address Q for all blocks where multi-start thread is cut. If
Q address Q is omitted, shift angle of thread cutting start angles is 0 .
0
3. Q 0.001 360.000 3. Address Q programmable range is from 0.001 to 360.000.
4. E 4. Specify the thread lead using address E when cutting precision
lead threads.
<Straight Thread> <Tapered Thread> <Scroll Thread>
+X +X
W W
F U/2
U/2
U/2 X/2
Z R
X/2
X/2
+Z Z
+Z
Even if the thread cutting speed is changed with the spindle

speed override button, the thread cutting start point is not
changed. If the thread cutting speed is changed with the
spindle speed override button, the change becomes valid when
the next thread cutting operation starts.
G
108 G FUNCTIONS
Incomplete Thread Portion
At the start and end of an axis feed, an axis drive servo motor
is automatically accelerated or decelerated. Consequently,
inaccurate thread leads are generated where thread cutting
starts and ends. These areas are referred to as incomplete
thread portions.
A B To explain incomplete thread portions more completely, thread
cutting from point A to point B is used as an example.
A B When thread cutting starts from point A, axis feed is
L 1 , L2 accelerated causing incomplete thread portion for L1.
Similarly, incomplete thread portion is generated for L2
because axis feed is decelerated at point B.
L L1 + L + L2 Therefore, to obtain the thread length of L, it is necessary to
carry out thread cutting in the range of (L1 + L + L2).
B A
L2 L L1
End of Thread Cutting Complete Thread Portion Start of Thread Cutting

L2 L L1
Calculating the Incomplete Thread Portion
The incomplete thread portions are calculated using the

following formula.
Description
Approximation Formula
L1: mm L1: Incomplete thread portion

L1 N•P•A L2: mm (at the start of thread cutting) (mm)
L1 >
1800 N: min 1) L2: Incomplete thread portion
P: mm (at the end of thread cutting) (mm)
N: Spindle speed (min 1)
P: Lead (mm)
L2 N•P
L2 > 1
1800 ln A = In 1
Thread accuracy
(In: Natural logarithm)
1/50 1/100 1/200 1/300
A 2.91 3.61 4.29 4.70
LT (Error in lead) 1/50 1/100 1/200 1/300

Thread accuracy =
L
G
G FUNCTIONS 109
A 2.91 3.61 4.29 4.70
In actual programming, the incomplete thread portions should

be taken a little larger than the calculated lengths to avoid
interference between the cutting tool and the workpiece and to
allow for margin for safety.
7 7 CAUTION
2 If the tailstock or spindle 2 is used for machining a
workpiece, pay sufficient care to avoid interference
/ 2 between the cutting tools or tool holders and the tailstock
body, the tailstock spindle or the center. (Tailstock
specifications/Spindle 2 tailstock specifications)
Precautions on Thread Cutting Operation
7 7 CAUTION
@ When the [EMERGENCY STOP] (Emergency Stop) button
or the @ (RESET) key has been pressed to stop the
machine during a threading operation, carefully feed the
axes after checking the workpiece and cutting tool
carefully for damage.
[Interferences, Machine damage]
2 2 NOTE
1. 1. The feedrate (lead) during thread cutting is limited by the value
calculated in the following formula.
R
F≤
N
N min 1) N: Spindle speed (min 1)
R mm/min R: Maximum cutting feedrate (mm/min)
F mm F: Lead (mm)
The lead calculated above is the theoretical value. Depending on
the machining conditions, load will become excessive causing a
servo alarm or the thread lead cannot be machined accurately.
Therefore, it is necessary to determine the machining conditions to
meet actual machining status.
1 “F ” 241 1 For the maximum cutting feedrate, refer to “F FUNCTION”

(page 241)
2. 2. During the thread cutting operation, the feedrate override setting is
ignored.
Override:
The feedrate override function is used to change the feedrate with
the switch on the operation panel.
3. 3. During the thread cutting cycle, feedrate override and spindle
speed override are fixed to 100% because a fixed lead thread
100% cannot be cut if feedrate or spindle speed is changed during thread
cutting cycle.
4. 4. Thread cutting must be executed while the spindle rotates at a
G97 fixed speed. Therefore, specify the G97 command to make spindle
speed constant.
5. G32 45 5. To execute chamfering of the thread in the G32 mode, specify the
commands to retract the tool in the 45 direction in the block that
follows the thread cutting command block. Chamfer distance must
be sufficient to clear the thread height.
6. 6. During continuous thread cutting operation, do not change the
thread lead.
If the thread lead is changed, incorrect thread is generated at the
portion between the blocks.
G
110 G FUNCTIONS
7. G92 7. If the automatic operation button w [STOP] (Stop) is pressed

while in the G92 thread cutting cycle, the cutting tool immediately
X Z retracts from the workpiece along the chamfering path and returns
to the start point in the order of the X-axis and the Z-axis.
This function is called the retract function.
Stop Point (The cutting tool stops at this position if the

automatic operation button : w [STOP] (Stop) is
pressed.)
Normal Tool Path
Tool Retraction Paths (After pressing

the automatic operation button : w
[STOP] (Stop))
End Point Start Point
The automatic operation button : w [STOP] (Stop)

is pressed when the tool is at this position.
8. G32 8. If the automatic operation button w [STOP] (Stop) is pressed

while in the G32 thread cutting cycle, execution of the program is
suspended in the feed hold mode after the execution of the
non-thread cutting block appearing first following the present
thread cutting mode blocks.
: :
X29.4; X29.4;
G32 Z 52.0 F2.0; G32 Z 52.0 F2.0; The automatic operation
G00 X60.0; button w [STOP] (Stop) is
pressed during execution of
this block.
Z10.0;
G00 X60.0; Feed hold after completion of
:
this block.
Z10.0;
:
9. 9. The cutting feedrate specified in a program is ignored and the
0 thread cutting is carried out at the feedrate set with the feedrate
5000 mm/min 21 override switch (0 to 5000 mm/min in 21 steps) if the dry run
function is made valid.
10. R G32, G92 10. If the G32 or G92 thread cutting command is specified in the
R automatic tool nose radius offset mode, the specified thread cutting
cycle is executed by temporarily canceling the tool nose radius
offset mode.
11. G98 G32, G92 11. Though the G32 or G92 thread cutting command is specified in the
feed per minute mode (G98), the feed per revolution mode is
selected.
G
G FUNCTIONS 111
12. 12. Depth of Cut and Number of Passes for Thread Cutting
0.1 0.2 The total depth of cut includes a finishing allowance of 0.1 to 0.2
mm, as shown in the diagram, to enable the data to be used for the
thread cutting operation using the tip with flat drag. Since the size
of the tip with flat drag is smaller than that of an ordinary tip,
selection of a smaller depth of cut while increasing the number of
passes to avoid plastic deformation of the tip nose as well as
chipping of the tip is strongly recommended.
R
Ordinary Tip Radius for Minimum Pitch
Thread
Ordinary Tip Crest of Threads (Face Finished in

the Preceding Process)
R
Tip with Flat Drag Radius which Corresponds to Pitch
Thread
Face finished in
the preceding 0.1 0.2 Tip with Flat
process Finishing Drag Crest of Threads (to
Allowance 0.1 to be Finished by the
0.2 Thread Cutting Tip)
ISO Depth of Cut and Number of Passes for Cutting ISO O.D. Thread
(Reference)
0.5 0.75 1.0 1.25 1.5 1.75 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0
Pitch
H 0.38 0.56 0.76 0.95 1.14 1.33 1.52 1.89 2.28 2.65 3.03 3.41 3.79
H0 0.32 0.47 0.63 0.79 0.95 1.11 1.27 1.58 1.90 2.21 2.53 2.85 3.16
R 0.06 0.09 0.13 0.16 0.19 0.22 0.25 0.31 0.38 0.44 0.50 0.56 0.63
1 0.15 0.18 0.25 0.25 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.35 0.35 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.45
2 0.12 0.12 0.20 0.20 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.30 0.30 0.35 0.35 0.35 0.35
3 0.10 0.10 0.13 0.15 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.25 0.25 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.30
4 0.05 0.10 0.10 0.14 0.15 0.16 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25
5 0.05 0.05 0.10 0.10 0.15 0.15 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.25 0.25
6 0.05 0.05 0.10 0.12 0.15 0.15 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20
7 0.05 0.10 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.20 0.20 0.20
8 0.05 0.10 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.20 0.20
9 0.05 0.10 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.20
10 0.10 0.10 0.15 0.15 0.15
11 0.05 0.10 0.10 0.15 0.15
12 0.05 0.10 0.10 0.15
13 0.10 0.10 0.10
14 0.05 0.10 0.10
15 0.10 0.10
16 0.05 0.10
17 0.10
G
112 G FUNCTIONS
0.5 0.75 1.0 1.25 1.5 1.75 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0
Pitch
18 0.05
19
20
13. 13. Basic profile and dimensions and dimensional deviations of taper
JIS B 0203 1982 pipe threads
(Extract from JIS B 0203 1982)
Basic profile applied for taper external and taper internal Basic profile applied for parallel internal threads
threads
H'
6
r r'
h
2
h
2
H
2
h
H'
27.5 27.5
h
27.5 27.5
r r'
h
2
H
55 55
h
2
H'
6
H
2
D1
D2
P
D
90 90
1
Axis of Thread Axis of Thread

16
25.4 25.4
P= P=
n n
H = 0.960237 P H' = 0.960491 P
h = 0.640327 P h = 0.640327 P
r = 0.137278 P r' = 0.137329 P
G
G FUNCTIONS 113
2 2 NOTE
Thick continuous line shows basic profile.
Fit between Taper External Thread and Taper Internal or Parallel Internal Thread
Parallel Internal Thread
l'
D
D2
D1
Taper Internal Thread Position of Gauge Plane
D
D2
D1
l
Taper Internal Thread
D
D2
t
a D1 f
d2
d1
d
Taper External Thread

G
114 G FUNCTIONS
mm
Unit : mm
Designation of Thread Gauge Dia. Position of Gauge Plane Length of Useful Thread (min.)
D, D2 Size of Carbon Steel
Thread
D1 Pipe for Ordinary
(25.4 mm P r External Thread External Thread Internal External Internal Thread
h Thread Piping (Given for
) ( ) Thread
Height Reference)
n Pitch r'
Tolerance
Number of P of Radius d d2 d1 When There is
From Pipe End A+ Pipe on D, D2
Threads (Given for Thread r Major Dia. Pitch Dia. Minor Dia. End and D1 of Incomplete
(In 25.4 Reference) h or d Thread Part
d2 d 1 Parallel
mm) r' f
Internal When
n Thread From There Is No
Position of Incomplete
Gauge Thread Part
Plane
Toward
Internal Thread Larger Dia.
a b c End Taper Parallel
Gauge Axial Axial f Internal Internal
Length Tolerance Tolerance Thread Thread Taper
a b c Internal
Thread,
Parallel
Internal
Thread
D D2 D1 O.D. Thickness
Major Dia. Pitch Dia. Minor Dia. l'
D D2 D1 ( )
l From End t
From of Pipe or From
Position of Coupler l' Gauge
Gauge (Given for Plane or
Plane Reference) End of
Toward Pipe or
Smaller Coupler
Dia. End t
l
R 1 16 28 0.9071 0.581 0.12 7.723 7.142 6.561 3.97 0.91 1.13 0.071 2.5 6.2 7.4 4.4
R (PT) 1 8 28 0.9071 0.581 0.12 9.728 9.147 8.566 3.97 0.91 1.13 0.071 2.5 6.2 7.4 4.4 10.5 2.0
R (PT) 1 4 19 1.3368 0.856 0.18 13.157 12.301 11.445 6.01 1.34 1.67 0.104 3.7 9.4 11.0 6.7 13.8 2.3
R (PT) 3 8 19 1.3368 0.856 0.18 16.662 15.806 14.950 6.35 1.34 1.67 0.104 3.7 9.7 11.4 7.0 17.3 2.3
R (PT) 1 2 14 1.8143 1.162 0.25 20.955 19.793 18.631 8.16 1.81 2.27 0.142 5.0 12.7 15.0 9.1 21.7 2.8
R (PT) 3 4 14 1.8143 1.162 0.25 26.441 25.279 24.117 9.53 1.81 2.27 0.142 5.0 14.1 16.3 10.2 27.2 2.8
R (PT) 1 11 2.3091 1.479 0.32 33.249 31.770 30.291 10.39 2.31 2.89 0.181 6.4 16.2 19.1 11.6 34 3.2
R (PT) 1 1 4 11 2.3091 1.479 0.32 41.910 40.431 38.952 12.70 2.31 2.89 0.181 6.4 18.5 21.4 13.4 42.7 3.5
R (PT) 1 1 2 11 2.3091 1.479 0.32 47.803 46.324 44.845 12.70 2.31 2.89 0.181 6.4 18.5 21.4 13.4 48.6 3.5
R (PT) 2 11 2.3091 1.479 0.32 59.614 58.135 56.656 15.88 2.31 2.89 0.181 7.5 22.8 25.7 16.9 60.5 3.8
R (PT) 2 1 2 11 2.3091 1.479 0.32 75.184 73.705 72.226 17.46 3.46 3.46 0.216 9.2 26.7 30.1 18.6 76.3 4.2
R (PT) 3 11 2.3091 1.479 0.32 87.884 86.405 84.926 20.64 3.46 3.46 0.216 9.2 29.8 33.3 21.1 89.1 4.2
R (PT) 4 11 2.3091 1.479 0.32 113.030 111.551 110.072 25.40 3.46 3.46 0.216 10.4 35.8 39.3 25.9 114.3 4.5
R (PT) 5 11 2.3091 1.479 0.32 138.430 136.951 135.472 28.58 3.46 3.46 0.216 11.5 40.1 43.5 29.3 139.8 4.5
R (PT) 6 11 2.3091 1.479 0.32 163.830 162.351 160.872 28.58 3.46 3.46 0.216 11.5 40.1 43.5 29.3 165.2 5.0
2 2 NOTE
1. 1. In the Designation of thread column, the symbol given in
parentheses is not the one stipulated by the main part of the
Standard, but the one stipulated by Annex. This symbol will be
repealed in the future.
2. PT 31/2 PT7 PT12 ISO 7/1 2. Concerning PT3 1/2 and PT7 to PT12, they are not given in the
table above since they are not stipulated by ISO 7/1.
3. a, f t 3. Concerning values of “a”, “f”, and/or “t”, if the values specified in
the table greatly differ from those stipulated in the standard specific
to the part to be machined or those specified in the drawing, use
the values stipulated in the standard specific to the part to be
machined or those specified in the drawing.
G
G FUNCTIONS 115
Example:
G32 G92 Programming using G32 or G92 (Straight thread cutting)
M30 Thread Size M30

2 mm Lead 2 mm
S45C Material AISI 1045 (Carbon steel)
1
4
3 2
30
60
Rapid Traverse
L2 50 L1 Cutting Feed
<Determining the Spindle Speed>

Limits due to the workpiece and cutting tool
1000V 1000 120

min 1
N= = = 1274 (min )
1
•D 3.14 30
V m/min V: Cutting speed (m/min)
: Circumference constant
D mm D: Thread diameter (mm)
1200 min 1 Thread cutting is carried out at 1200 min 1.
2 2 NOTE
The above numerical values are only for reference. Depending on the
selected cutting conditions, the cutting load may become excessive. If
a servo alarm occurs, change the cutting conditions.
<Calculating the Incomplete Thread Portions>
N • P • A 1200 × 2.0 × 3.61

L1 > = = 4.8 mm
1800 1800
N•P 1200 × 2.0
L2 > = = 1.3 mm
1800 1800
2 2 NOTE
1/100 If “thread accuracy = 1/100”
1 “G32 G92 ” 105 1 “G32 Thread Cutting, G92 Thread Cutting Cycle” (page 105)
5 L1, L2 L1 = 10 5When writing a program, L 1 and L2 should be longer than the

mm, L2 = 2 mm calculated theoretical values. Therefore, L1 and L2 should be set
to 10 mm and 2 mm, respectively.
G32, G92 The thread cutting programs in the G32 mode and in the G92
mode are compared below.
G32 G92
<Program in the G32 Mode> <Program in the G92 Mode>
O1; O1;
N1; N1;
G00 T0101; G00 T0101;
G97 S1200 M03; .......................... G97 S1200 M03; ......................... 1200 min 1 Starting spindle 1 in the
1 normal direction at 1200
min 1
X60.0 Z20.0 M08; X60.0 Z20.0 M08;
G01 Z10.0 F1.0; ........................... G01 Z10.0 F1.0 M24; .................. a Positioning at point a, the
thread cutting start point
G
116 G FUNCTIONS
G00 X29.4; ...............................b G92 X29.4 Z 52.0 F2.0; ............... Starting the thread cutting
G32 Z 52.0 F2.0; ......................c • X29.4 operation
G00 X60.0; ...............................d 1 • X29.4
• Z 52.0 Diameter where the first
Z10.0; .......................................a
thread cutting cycle is
• F2.0 executed
• Z 52.0
Z coordinate of the
thread cutting end point
• F2.0
Lead
X28.9; .......................................... X28.9;
G32 Z 52.0;
G00 X60.0;
Z10.0;
X28.5; .......................................... X28.5;
G32 Z 52.0;
G00 X60.0;
Z10.0;
X28.1; .......................................... X28.1;
G32 Z 52.0;
G00 X60.0;
Z10.0;
X27.8; .......................................... X27.8;
G32 Z 52.0;
G00 X60.0;
Z10.0;
X27.56; ........................................ X27.56;
G32 Z 52.0;
G00 X60.0;
Z10.0;
X27.36; ........................................ X27.36;
G32 Z 52.0;
G00 X60.0;
Z10.0;
X27.26; ........................................ X27.26; ........................................ Diameter where the final
executed
G32 Z 52.0;
G00 X60.0;
Z10.0;
X200.0 Z150.0 M09; ................... G00 X200.0 Z150.0 M09; ............ Positioning at a point at a
rapid traverse rate where
the turret head can be
rotated
M01; M01;
5 5
1. G32 4 G92 1. The program written in four lines, in the G32 mode, is
1 expressed by the commands in one line in the G92 mode.
2. G92 M23, M24 2. In the G92 thread cutting cycle, whether the chamfering is
executed or not can be selected using the M23 and M24
commands.
1 “M23 M24 ” 1 “M23 Chamfering ON, M24 Chamfering OFF” (page 196)
196
7 7 CAUTION
X 1 Generally, the start point (X coordinate) for thread cutting
is taken at a point more than one pitch away from the
thread cutting diameter.
G
G FUNCTIONS 117
For I.D. thread cutting, the cutting tool may interfere with
the workpiece when the I.D. is small if the start point is
taken in the manner as indicated above. In this case,
determine the start point where interference does not
occur.
2 2 NOTE
“G32 G92 For details of depth of cut and number of passes, refer to “G32 Thread
” 105 Cutting, G92 Thread Cutting Cycle” (page 105).
Note that the values given in this table are only for reference.
For programming, these values should be determined according to
actual machining status. The finished thread should be checked using
the thread gage.
Example:
G32, G92 R 2 1/2 Programming using G32 or G92 (Tapered thread cutting
(R2 1/2))
1
3
R
2
75.76
75.88
74.09
73.59
80
Rapid Traverse
a
L2 = 2 26.66 L1 = 8 Cutting Feed
<Determining the Spindle Speed>

1000V 1000 100

min 1
N= = = 424 (min 1)
•D 3.14 75
a 17.46 a 17.46
f 9.2 f 9.2
d 75.184 dia. 75.184
P 2.3091 P (lead) 2.3091
h 1.479 h (thread height) 1.479
t 1/16 t (taper size) 1/16
S45C 100 m/min (Material: AISI 1045 (Carbon Steel), Cutting Feedrate: 100
m/min)
420 min 1 Thread cutting is executed at spindle speed of 420 min 1.
1 “G32 G92 1 For the numerical values given above, refer to “G32 Thread Cut-
” 105 ting, G92 Thread Cutting Cycle” (page 105). When machining
“G32 G92 the taper pipe threads not described in the above example, refer
” 105 to “G32 Thread Cutting, G92 Thread Cutting Cycle” (page 105)
for details on reference dimensions and program creation.
2 2 NOTE
a servo alarm occurs, or if the thread lead cannot be machined
correctly, change the cutting conditions.
G
118 G FUNCTIONS
<Calculating Incomplete Thread Portions>
N•P•A 420 × 2.3091 × 3.61

L1 > = = 1.95 mm
1800 1800
N•P 420 × 2.3091
L2 > = = 0.54 mm
1800 1800
2 2 NOTE
5L 1 1/16 8 5When writing a program, L 1 and L2 should be longer than the

L1, L2 L1 = calculated theoretical values. Therefore, L1 and L2 should be set
8 mm, L2 = 2 mm to 8 mm and 2 mm, respectively. For L1, it is recommended to
select a multiple of “8”, because the taper size is “1/16”.
G32 G92
<Program in the G32 Mode> <Program in the G92 Mode>
O1; O1;
N1; N1;
G00 T0101; G00 T0101;
G97 S420 M03; ........................... G97 S420 M03; ........................... 420 min 1 Starting spindle 1 in the
1 normal direction at 420
min 1
X80.0 Z20.0 M08; X80.0 Z20.0 M08;
G01 Z8.0 F1.0; ............................ G01 Z8.0 F1.0 M23; .................... a Positioning at point a, the
thread cutting start point
G00 X73.59; .............................b G92 X75.88 Z 28.66 R 1.15
G32 X75.88 Z 28.66 F2.3091; ...................................... Starting the thread cutting
F2.3091;....................................c • X75.88 operation
G00 X80.0; ...............................d 1 • X75.88
• Z 28.66 Diameter where the first
Z8.0; ..........................................a
• R 1.15 executed
X • Z 28.66
Z coordinate of the
8.0 + 26.66 + 2.0 thread cutting end point
R=−
32 • R 1.15
= −1.15 Taper size (distance in
the X-axis direction)
8.0 + 26.66 + 2.0

R=−
32
= −1.15
X72.59;......................................... X74.88;
G32 X74.88 Z 28.66;
G00 X80.0;
Z8.0;
X71.59;......................................... X73.88;
G32 X73.88 Z 28.66;
G00 X80.0;
Z8.0;
X70.7;........................................... X72.99;
G32 X72.99 Z 28.66;
G00 X80.0;
Z8.0;
X70.64;......................................... X72.93; ........................................ Diameter where the final
G32 X72.93 Z 28.66; thread cutting cycle is
G00 X80.0; executed
Z8.0;
G
G FUNCTIONS 119
X200.0 Z150.0 M09; ..................... G00 X200.0 Z150.0 M09;............. Positioning at a point at a
rapid traverse rate where
the turret head can be
rotated
M01; M01;
2 2 NOTE
1. 1 1. In the example program above, the diameter where the first thread
cutting cycle is executed is specified in the outside diameter of the
workpiece. In actual programming, the diameter of the first thread
cutting path including the depth of cut must be specified.
2. 2. The depth of cut and the number of passes adopted to the
example program above are only for reference. For programming,
these values should be determined according to actual machining
status. The finished thread should be checked using the thread
gage.
1 R 1 For the sign (+, ) to be used for the R command, refer to the
instruction manual provided by the NC unit manufacturer.
Example:
G32 Programming using G32 (Scrolled thread cutting)
2 2 NOTE
1. G96 1. For the scrolled thread cutting operation on face, the G96
(constant surface speed control) mode cannot be used. Therefore,
cutting resistance is applied to the cutting tool.
Determine the spindle speed assuming thread cutting at the middle
of the varying diameters.
2. G92 2. In the G92 mode, scrolled thread cutting is not executed.
3 mm
S45C
Lead: 3 mm
Material: AISI 1045 (Carbon Steel)
L1 2 1
4
L2 3 20
106
100
70
Rapid Traverse
80 Cutting Feed
100 m/min <Determining the Spindle Speed (Cutting Feedrate: 100 m/

min)>
min 1 1000V 1000 100

N= = = 374 (min 1)
•D 3.14 85
370 min 1 Thread cutting is executed at spindle speed of 370 min 1.
2 2 NOTE
a servo alarm occurs, or if the thread lead cannot be machined
correctly, change the cutting conditions.
G
120 G FUNCTIONS
<Calculating the Incomplete Thread Portions>
N•P•A 370 × 3.0 × 3.61

L1 > = = 2.23 mm
1800 1800
N•P 370 × 3.0
L2 > = = 0.62 mm
1800 1800
2 2 NOTE
5 L1, L2 L1 = 3 mm, 5When writing a program, L 1 and L2 should be longer than the
L2 = 1 mm calculated theoretical values. Therefore, L1 and L2 should be set
to 3 mm and 1 mm, respectively.
1 0.1 mm 11 The thread is cut eleven times as depth of cut per thread
cutting is 0.1 mm.
O1;
N1;
G00 T0101;
G97 S370 M03; ........................................................ 370 min 1 1 Starting the spindle 1 in the normal
X106.0 Z20.0 M08; .................................................. a Positioning at point a, the start
point for thread cutting, at a rapid
traverse rate
Z 0.35; .................................................................b Starting the thread cutting operation
G32 X68.0 F3.0;....................................................c • Z 0.35 • Z 0.35
1 Z-axis position of the first thread
cutting path
G00 Z20.0; ...........................................................d • X68.0 • X68.0
The end point of thread cutting
X106.0; .................................................................a • F3.0 • F3.0
Thread lead
Z 0.65; ..................................................................... 2 Z-axis position of the second thread
cutting path
G32 X68.0;
G00 Z20.0;
X106.0;
Z 0.9; ....................................................................... 3 Z-axis position of the third thread
cutting path
G32 X68.0;
G00 Z20.0;
X106.0;
Z 1.1; ....................................................................... 4 Z-axis position of the fourth thread
cutting path
G32 X68.0;
G00 Z20.0;
X106.0;
Z 1.3; ....................................................................... 5 Z-axis position of the fifth thread
cutting path
G32 X68.0;
G00 Z20.0;
X106.0;
Z 1.45; ..................................................................... 6 Z-axis position of the sixth thread
cutting path
G32 X68.0;
G00 Z20.0;
X106.0;
Z 1.6; ....................................................................... 7 Z-axis position of the seventh thread
cutting path
G
G FUNCTIONS 121
G32 X68.0;
G00 Z20.0;
X106.0;
Z 1.75; ..................................................................... 8 Z-axis position of the eighth thread
cutting path
G32 X68.0;
G00 Z20.0;
X106.0;
Z 1.85; ..................................................................... 9 Z-axis position of the ninth thread
cutting path
G32 X68.0;
G00 Z20.0;
X106.0;
Z 1.95; ..................................................................... 10 Z-axis position of the tenth thread
cutting path
G32 X68.0;
G00 Z20.0;
X106.0;
Z 2.0; ....................................................................... 11 Z-axis position of the eleventh
thread cutting path
G32 X68.0;
G00 Z20.0;
X106.0 M09;
X200.0 Z100.0 M05; ................................................ Positioning at a point where the
turret head can be rotated, at a
rapid traverse rate
M30;
2-18 G34
G34 Variable Lead Thread Cutting
1 Specifying an increment or decrement value for a lead per

screw revolution enables variable lead thread cutting to be
performed.
G
122 G FUNCTIONS
F 8.0 The figure shows an example where 8.0 is specified by

K 1 0.3 address F (standard screw lead) and 0.3 is specified by
address K (lead increment or decrement per revolution).
Lead axis
Lead axis
F(8.0)
F+K (8.0+0.3=8.3)
F+2K (8.0+2×0.3=8.6)
F+3K (8.0+3×0.3=8.9)
F+4K (8.0+4×0.3=9.2)

G34 X(U)_ F(E)_ K_ Q_;

G34 X(U)_ Z(W)_ F(E)_ K_ Q_;
X(U),Z(W) ....................................... Thread cutting end point
F ..................................................... Standard screw lead
mm/rev 0.001 999.999 Programmable range (mm/rev) :0.001 to
999.999
E ..................................................... Standard screw lead
2 2 NOTE
E Specify address E when cutting precision lead
No.1229.1=1 threads (parameter No. 1229.1 = 1).
mm/rev 0.00001 999.99999 Programmable range (mm/rev) : 0.00001 to
999.99999
K ..................................................... 1 Lead increment or decrement per revolution
F E Programmable range : Same as address F
or address E
Q .................................................... Thread cutting start shift angle
0.001 360.000 Programmable range (degrees) : from 0.001
to 360.000
2
2 NOTE
Q
Address Q is used for multiple thread cutting.
2 2 NOTE
1. K 1. A positive value of K indicates incremental pitches and a negative
value of K indicates decremental pitches.
G
G FUNCTIONS 123
2. (P93) 2. If the screw lead is not set properly, an alarm (P93) occurs.
3. 3. The lead in the longitudinal axis direction is specified for the taper
thread lead.
X
X-axis
W
End point
Tapered thread section

U/2
a°
Start point
Z
Z-axis
a<45 Z When a<45 , Lead is in Z-axis direction.

a>45 X When a>45 , Lead is in X-axis direction.
a = 45 Z,X When a = 45 , Lead can be in either Z or X-axis direction.
4. 4. The constant surface speed control function should not be used for
taper thread cutting.
5. 5. The spindle speed should be kept constant throughout from rough
cutting until finishing.
6. 6. If the thread cutting feedrate exceeds the maximum cutting
feedrate, the feedrate is clamped at the maximum cutting feedrate.
7. 7. To assure the lead during thread cutting, the cutting feedrate may
exceed the maximum cutting feedrate.
8. (G94) 8. Synchronized feed is applied in thread cutting even with an
asynchronous feed command (G94).
9. 100% 9. Spindle override is invalid and the speed is fixed at 100% during
thread cutting.
10. G34 10. When the mode is switched to another automatic mode while G34
is being executed, the next block that contains no thread cutting
commands is executed and then automatic operation stops.
11. G34 11. When the mode is switched to manual mode while G34 is being
executed, the next block that contains no thread cutting commands
is executed and then automatic operation stops.
12. Q 12. Address Q (thread cutting start shift angle) is not modal. If address
G34 Q “Q 0” Q is not specified in G34, “Q0” is assumed.
13. G34 Q 360.000 13. If a value exceeding 360.000 is specified for address Q,
“Q360.000” “Q360.000” is assumed.

G
124 G FUNCTIONS
2-19 G51.2 G251 G50.2 G250

G51.2 (G251) Polygon Cutting, G50.2 (G250) Polygon Cutting Cancel (Option)
Polygon machining is a function to generate a polygon by

rotating the workpiece (spindle) and the tool (rotary tool
spindle) at a fixed ratio. By changing the rotating speed ratio
and the number of teeth set on the tool, polygons such as
C X squares and hexagons can be machined. This function has the
advantage that it can machine a polygon in a shorter time than
if it were done by controlling the X-axis and C-axis using the
polar coordinate interpolation function. However, polygons
generated using the polygon machining function are not
precise polygonal shapes and thus the function is mainly used
for machining bolt heads (square, hexagon) and also hexagon
nuts.
M306;
M03(M04) S_ ;
G51.2 P_ Q_ R_ ;
:
G50.2;
M05;
M307;
M306 ............................................... Polygon mode ON
M307 .............................................. Polygon mode OFF
P, Q ................................................ P_: Q_ Rotation ratio between the spindle and the
P rotary tool spindle (P_: Q_)
P: Spindle
1 999 Programmable range:
Q Integer value from 1 to 999
Q: Rotary tool spindle
1 999 Programmable range:
1 999 Integral value from 1 to 999 (direction of
rotation: normal)
Integral value from -1 to -999 (direction of
600min 1
rotation: reverse)
1200min 1 P1 Q2
Example:
If the spindle speed is 600 min 1 and
rotary tool spindle speed is 1200 min 1,
specify P1Q2.
R .................................................... Shift amount of synchronized spindle phase
5 2 2 5When executing polygon machining between spindle 2 and the

“G51.2 H2 D3 P_ Q_ R_ ; ” “H2 rotary tool spindle with the headstock 2 specification machine,
D3 ” 1 specify “G51.2 H2 D3 P_ Q_ R_ ;”. If “H2 D3” is not specified,
polygon machining between spindle 1 and the rotary tool spindle is
executed.
2 2 NOTE
1. S 1. The spindle speed and rotational direction are as specified by the
M S code and M code.
2. G51.2 2. The rotary tool spindle speed is determined by the rotation ratio
between the spindle and the rotary tool spindle specified in the
G51.2 block.
3. G51.2 Q 3. The rotational direction of the rotary tool spindle is determined by
Q “+” the minus or plus sign of address Q (rotation ratio of the rotary tool
Q spindle) specified in the G51.2 block. That is, when address Q is
“ ” specified with a “+” sign, the rotary tool spindle rotates in the same
direction as the spindle, and when address Q is specified with a “-”
sign, the rotary tool spindle rotates in the opposite direction from
the spindle.
4. 4. Polygon machining is canceled by the following.
• G50.2 • G50.2 command
• • Turning off the power
• • Emergency stop
G
G FUNCTIONS 125
• • Reset
5. 5. The spindle and the rotary tool spindle synchronization states are
held even at feed hold.
6. 6. When polygon machining is specified, even if neither a spindle
start in the normal direction nor a spindle start in the reverse
direction is specified for the rotary tool spindle, the rotary tool
spindle starts rotating.
7. 7. If a rotary tool spindle stop is specified during the polygon
machining mode, the rotary tool spindle stops rotating even if the
spindle is rotating.
8. S 8. The rotation speed command (S code) and constant surface speed
control are invalid for the rotary tool spindle during the polygon
machining mode. Note that the modal is updated, so these
commands will be validated when the polygon machining is
canceled.
9. 9. If the specified spindle rotation speed exceeds the maximum
rotation speed of the rotary tool spindle, the spindle rotation speed
is clamped so that the speed of the rotary tool spindle does not
exceed the maximum rotation speed.
10. G51.2 10. If G51.2 is specified, the spindle rotating at an arbitrary rotation
P, Q speed accelerates/decelerates to the rotation speed determined by
R the rotation ratio of addresses P and Q, then the spindle goes into
the synchronized state. After that, the phases are aligned to realize
the rotation phase specified by address R.
11. G51.2 G50.2 11. Specify the G51.2 and G50.2 commands in a block without other
commands.
12. R R0 12. If address R is not specified, “R0” is assumed.
13. R 13. For address R (synchronous spindle phase shift), specify the shift
1 from the reference point (one rotation signal) of the rotary tool
spindle. This is not the shift in relation to the spindle.
14. P Q (P33) 14. If address P or Q is not specified, an alarm (P33) occurs.
15. P, Q, R 15. To change the value specified in address P, Q or R during the

G51.2 polygon mode, specify G51.2 again. In this case, address R can be
R P, Q specified independently. However, if the value of either address P
P, Q or Q is changed, always specify both address P and Q.
Example:
T0101 ; ........................................... Selecting the rotary tool spindle

M46 ;
M306 ; ............................................ Polygon mode ON
M03 S_ ; ......................................... Starting the spindle in the normal direction
G51.2 P_ Q_ R_ ; .......................... Starting polygon machining
:
G50.2 ; ........................................... Polygon machining cancel
M05 ; .............................................. Spindle stop
M307 ; ............................................ Polygon mode OFF
G
126 G FUNCTIONS
2-20 G52
G52 Setting Local Coordinate System
G54 G59 It is possible to shift the workpiece zero point of the program
G52 created in the work coordinate system (G54 - G59) and
G54 G59 establish new coordinate systems. Even if the G52 local
coordinate system is set, the original work coordinate system
(G54 - G59) is not affected.
(Local Coordinate System)
G54 1
(G54: Work Coordinate System 1)
G55 (Local Coordinate System)

G56
G57
G58 G59 6
(G59: Work Coordinate System 6)
(Machine Coordinate System)
Zero Point in the Machine Coordinate System
G52 X_ Y_ Z_ B_ C_;
• X, Y, Z, B, C ........................ Amount of shift of the work coordinate
system
The position at the time of designation of the
command is taken as the zero point of the
local coordinate system.
2 2 NOTE
2. 2. The local coordinate system is canceled by the following
operations:
• “G52 X0 Y0 Z0 B0 C0;” • When “G52 X0 Y0 Z0 B0 C0;” is specified.
• • When all axes are returned to the zero points manually.
3. @ NC 3. A local coordinate system is not canceled by pressing the @
(RESET) key or by resetting the NC unit. Specify the local
G52 X0 Y0 Z0 B0 C0; coordinate system cancel command (G52 X0 Y0 Z0 B0 C0;) when
using a local coordinate system.
4. G41, G42 G52 4. If the G52 command is specified in the tool radius offset mode
(G41 or G42), the tool radius offset mode is temporarily canceled.
5. G52 5. When the G52 command is specified, the first axis movement
command after the execution of G52 must be specified using
absolute values.
6. G50 6. When a work coordinate system is set with the G50 command, the
G50 local coordinate system is canceled. However, the coordinate
system of an axis for which no coordinate system is specified in a
G50 block remains unchanged.
2-21 G53
G53 Selecting Machine Coordinate System
X, Y, Z The machine coordinate system means the coordinate system

having its origin at the machine zero point of X-, Y- and Z-axes.
G
G FUNCTIONS 127
G53 It is possible to move a cutting tool to a fixed position at rapid

traverse by specifying the G53 command.
Also specify the G53 command to retract the turret to the turret
rotation position before finishing the machining.
5 5The machine coordinate values of the axes can be confirmed by

the present position (machine coordinate) displayed on the screen.
G53 G00 X(U)_ Z(W)_ ;

G53 G01 X(U)_ Z(W)_ F_ ;
• G00 ...................................... Calls positioning at a rapid traverse rate.
• G01 ...................................... Calls the linear interpolation mode.
• X, Z ...................................... Specifies the cutting target point in absolute
values. (coordinate values in the machine
coordinate system)
• U, W .................................... Specifies the cutting target point in
incremental values. (direction and distance
of movement from the present position)
• F........................................... Specifies the feedrate.
2 2 NOTE
1. G53 00 G 1. The G53 command is a “00” group command.
G The G53 command is one-shot code. It is valid only in the
specified block.
2. R G53 2. If the G53 command is specified without canceling the automatic
R tool nose radius offset mode, positioning is made to the specified
position by canceling the automatic tool nose radius offset mode
temporarily.
Example:
X 50.0, Z 60.0 To write a program assuming that the turret head rotation
position is (X 50.0, Z 60.0) in the machine coordinate
system.
Machine Zero Point

Turret Head Rotation Position
50 mm
(In Diameter)
60 mm
O1;
N1;
G50 S2000;
G00 T0101;
G96 S180 M03;
:
: Machining program
:
G0 U1.0 Z10.0 M09;
G53 G00 X 50.0 Z 60.0; .......................................... X 50 mm, Z Moving the tool at the position, 50
60 mm mm in the X-axis direction and 60
mm in the Z-axis direction at a rapid
traverse rate
M01;
G
128 G FUNCTIONS
2-22 G54 G59

G54 to G59 Selecting Work Coordinate System
The operation to “set a work coordinate system” means the

operation by which the NC recognizes the location of the
workpiece zero point which is determined arbitrarily.
‘ ’ 6 Six work coordinate systems are preset using the ‘WORK
G54 G59 OFFSET’ screen and which of the work coordinate systems is
used is specified by a G54 to G59 command.
Machine Zero Point

X X X X
(G56) (G54) (G55) (G57)

X X
Z Z Z Z
(G58) (G59)
Y Y Z ZY Y
Y Y
G54 G59 1 2 G54 to G59 commands are used when machining the 1st and
2 1 the 2nd process continuously. With headstock 2 specification
1 machines, these commands are used to perform the 1st
2 2 process at spindle 1 and the 2nd process at spindle 2
continuously by transferring a workpiece between the two
spindles.
G54 (G55, G56, G57, G58, G59) X_ Y_ Z_;
7 7 CAUTION
2 1 2 With headstock 2 specification machines, set “0” at
‘ ’ ‘ Z’ “0” ‘COMMON Z’ on the ‘WORK OFFSET’ screen when
‘ ’ ‘ Z’ machining with spindles 1 and 2. If a value is set for this
1 2 item, the coordinate system is shifted in the same
direction, regardless of the spindle to be used for
machining. This may cause interference between the tool,
tool holder or turret head and the workpiece, chuck or
fixture.
[Machine damage]
2 2 NOTE
G54 When the power is turned on, the G54 work coordinate system is
selected automatically.
Example:
G54 G59 1 Programming positioning using a work coordinate
system (G54 to G59) (1)
1 2 To carry out continuous operation, it is necessary to transfer
1 G54 the workpiece from spindle 1 to spindle 2. The work
2 G55 coordinate system for spindle 1 is set to G54 and spindle 2 to
G55.
1 “ ” 1 For examples of machining programs with workpiece transfer,
433 refer to “WORKPIECE TRANSFER” (page 433).
G
G FUNCTIONS 129
Example:
G54 G59 2 Programming positioning using a work coordinate
system (G54 to G59) (2)
1 2 To carry out continuous operation of the first and second
processes using the same chuck jaws and the same O.D.
cutting tool.
1 2
1st Process 2nd Process
G54 G55
Workpiece Zero Point for G54 Workpiece Zero Point for G55
100
100
70
2
10 1.5
<Preparation>
1. 1 1. Set the temporary zero point for the first process on the
workpiece end face using the tool geometry offset function
and the tool wear offset function.
Temporary Zero Point
2. G54 Z 2. Input the distance (2.0 mm) from the workpiece zero point
2.0 mm ‘ ’ “G54” Z in the G54 work coordinate system to the temporary
workpiece zero point, measured along the Z-axis, to “Z” of
“G54” displayed on the ‘WORK OFFSET’ screen, in a
negative value.
G54
Workpiece Zero Point for G54
3. 1 2.0 mm G55 3. Input the sum (13.5 mm) of the cutting allowance (2.0 mm),
Z 1.5 mm to be removed in the first process, the Z-axis distance from
10.0 mm 13.5 mm the workpiece zero point in the G55 work coordinate
‘ ’ “G55” Z system to the workpiece end face (1.5 mm) and the chuck
jaw shift amount (10.0 mm) to “Z” of “G55” displayed on the
‘WORK OFFSET’ screen, in a negative value.
G55
Workpiece Zero Point for G55
10 1.5
Example:
O1;
N1;
G54; .......................................................................... G54 Selecting the G54 work coordinate
system
G50 S2000;
G
130 G FUNCTIONS
G00 T0101; ............................................................... 1 ‘ The workpiece zero point for the

’ “G54” G54 work coordinate system is set
‘ ’ by adding all the following offset
G54 data: tool offset data for No. 1 tool,
tool offset data for the “G54” and the
offset data set for ‘COMMON’ in the
‘WORK OFFSET’ screen.
:
Machining program
:
M00; .......................................................................... Stopping the operation
5 5Change or turn the workpiece.

N2;
system
G50 S2000;
G00 T0101; ............................................................... 1 ‘ The workpiece zero point for the
’ “G55” G55 work coordinate system is set
‘ ’ by adding all the following offset
G55 data: tool offset data for No. 1 tool,
tool offset data for the “G55” and the
offset data set for ‘COMMON’ in the
‘WORK OFFSET’ screen.
:
Machining program
:
M30;
2-23 G65
G65 Macro Call (One-Shot)
G65 P When G65 is specified, the custom macro specified at address

P is called.
Data (arguments) to be passed to the custom macro program
can be assigned.
G65 “G65” must be specified before any argument.
1 1 Refer to the instruction manual supplied by the NC manufacturer
for details.
G65 P_ L___ ;
G65 P_ L___<Argument assignment>;
• P .......................................... Macro program number to be called
5 M99 5Specify M99 in the called program to return to

1 the previous program.
• L .......................................... Specifies the number of program calls.
1 (If omitted, the call is repeated once.)
1 9999 Specify a number from 1 to 9999.
• Data passed to the macro
• <Argument assignment> By using argument assignment, values can
be substituted for the corresponding local
variables.
Argument Assignment
I II The argument assignment has 2 types, I and II. The type of

argument assignment is determined automatically according to
the addresses used.
G
G FUNCTIONS 131
I 0 Argument Assignment I
Local Variable Local Variable Local Variable

Address Address Address
Number Number Number
A #1 I #4 T #20
B #2 J #5 U #21
C #3 K #6 V #22
D #7 M #13 W #23
E #8 Q #17 X #24
F #9 R #18 Y #25
H #11 S #19 Z #26
2 2 NOTE
1. G, L, N, O, P 1. Addresses G, L, N, O and P cannot be used in the argument.
2. 2. Unnecessary addresses can be omitted. Local variables
corresponding to an omitted address are set to null.
3. 3. Addresses do not need to be specified in alphabetical order. The
addresses conform to word address format.
I, J, K However, I, J, and K need to be specified in alphabetical order.
II 0 Argument Assignment II
A, B, C I, J, K In the argument assignment II format, addresses A, B and C
10 3 are used only once and addresses I, J and K are used in a set
up to 10 times. This format is used to pass values such as
3-dimensional coordinate values as the argument.
2 2 NOTE
I, J, K The subscripts of I, J and K indicating the order of argument
assignment are not written in the actual program.
Address Variable Number Address Variable Number Address Variable Number

A #1 K3 #12 J7 #23
B #2 I4 #13 K7 #24
C #3 J4 #14 I8 #25
I1 #4 K4 #15 J8 #26
J1 #5 I5 #16 K8 #27
K1 #6 J5 #17 I9 #28
I2 #7 K5 #18 J9 #29
J2 #8 I6 #19 K9 #30
K2 #9 J6 #20 I10 #31
I3 #10 K6 #21 J10 #32
J3 #11 I7 #22 K10 #33
0 Mixture of Argument Assignments I and II

I II If both argument assignments I and II are specified, the type of
argument assignment specified later takes precedence.
G
132 G FUNCTIONS
Example:
#7 I4.0 D5.0 2 When both “I4.0” and “D5.0” are commanded as in the
D5.0 argument for variable #7 in this example, the latter, “D5.0”, is
valid.
G65 A1.0 B2.0 I 3.0 I4.0 D5.0 P1000;
<Variables>
#1: 1.0
#2: 2.0
#3
#4: 3.0
#5
#6
#7: 4.0 5.0
2 2 NOTE
The units used for argument data passed without a decimal point
correspond to the least input increment of each address.
Nesting Level for Calls
G65, G66, G66.1 4 Macro program calls (G65, G66 and G66.1) can be nested to a
depth of up to 4 levels. Subprogram calls can be nested to a
8 depth of up to 8 levels including macro calls.
MDI A macro program or a subprogram can also be called during
MDI operation in the same way.
1 “M98/M198 1 For details on subprogram calls, refer to “M98/M198 Sub-Pro-
M99 ” 213 . gram Call, M99 Sub-Program End” (page 213).
Example:
Z W 1 K Specify Z or W for the depth of a hole, K for the depth of a
F cut, and F for the cutting feedrate to drill the hole.
Z W
Cutting Feedrate Z: Hole Depth (Absolute Programming)

U: Hole Depth (Incremental Programming)
K: Cutting Amount per Cycle
Rapid Traverse F: Cutting Feedrate
<Program calling a macro program>

O2;
G00 T0101;
G97 S1000 M03;
G00 X100.0 Z200.0 M08;
G65 P9100 Z50.0 K20.0 F0.3; .................................. Macro program call
G00 X100.0 Z200.0 M05;
M30;
G
G FUNCTIONS 133
<Macro program (program to be called)>

O9100;
#1=0; ........................................................................ Clears the data for the depth of the
current hole.
#2=0; ........................................................................ Clears the data for the depth of the
preceding hole.
IF [#23 NE #0] GOTO 1; .......................................... N1 In case of incremental
programming, jumps to N1.
IF [#26 EQ #0] GOTO 8; .......................................... Z, W If neither Z nor W is specified, an
error occurs.
#23=#5002 #26; ...................................................... Calculates the depth of the hole.
N1 #1=#1+#6; .......................................................... Calculates the depth of the current
hole.
IF [#1 LE #23] GOTO 2; ........................................... N2 If overcut occurs, jumps to N2.
#1=#23; .................................................................... Clamps at the depth of the current
hole.
N2 G00 W #2; ......................................................... Moves the tool to the previous depth
at a rapid traverse rate.
G01 W [#1 #2] F#9; ................................................ Drills the hole.
G00 W#1; ................................................................. Returns the tool to the drilling start
point.
IF [#1 GE #23] GOTO 9; .......................................... Checks whether drilling is
completed.
#2=#1; ...................................................................... Stores the depth of the current hole.
GOTO 1;
N9 M99; .................................................................... Returns to the program that called
the macro program.
N8 #3000=1 (NO Z OR U COMMAND); .................. Issues an alarm.
1 1 For details on macro statements, refer to the instruction manual

supplied by the NC manufacturer.
2-24 G66
G66.1 G67
G66 Macro Modal Call (Call after Execution of Axis Movement Commands),
G66.1 Macro Modal Call (Call in Each Block), G67 Macro Modal Call Cancel
G66 <G66>
G66 G67 Once G66 (macro modal call) is specified, a macro program or
a subprogram is called every time a block containing a travel
command is executed. This continues until G67 is specified to
cancel the modal macro call.
2 2 NOTE
1. G66 1. In a G66 block, no macro program is called. Local variables
(arguments) are set, however.
2. 2. No macro program is called in a block containing commands for
compensation functions but no travel commands.
3. G66 3. The local variables (arguments) are set only in the block specifying
the G66 command. Note that local variables are not set each time
a modal call is performed.
G66.1 <G66.1>
NC In this mode, the specified macro is unconditionally called for
O each NC command block. All the data other than address O
N G (program number), address N (sequence number), and G
codes that are specified in each block is not executed and is
used as arguments.
G
134 G FUNCTIONS
G G66.1 The G code in the block in which G66.1 is specified is not used
as an argument. Only the last G code specified in subsequent
blocks is used as an argument.
NC O In other words, the situation is the same as if all blocks
N containing NC commands have a G65 command; either at the
G65 beginning of the block or, if one of these is present, following
the address O (program number) or address N (sequence
number).
2 2 NOTE
1. G66.1 1. In the block containing G66.1, a macro program is called.
2. G66.1 2. The block that follows the one containing G66.1 and performs a
G66.1 macro program call (not including the blocks containing G66.1)
• G, P, L G:#10, L:#12, • Addresses G, P and L can also be used as arguments. Address
P:#16 NC G corresponds to #10, address L to #12, and address P to #16.
“;G1000. P0.12 L 4” However, the restrictions on the input format that apply to normal
NC commands apply to the data. For example, “;G1000. P0.12
L 4” cannot be specified.
• G • When multiple G codes are specified, only the last G code is
O N used as an argument. An address O (program number),
00 G address N (sequence number), and G codes not in group 00 are
passed to the next and subsequent blocks as modal data.
3. O N 3. For blocks containing only an address O (program number),
EOB M99 address N (sequence number), EOB code, macro statements, or
an M99 command, the macro program call at every block is not
performed.
4. O N 4. When a block contains a command other than an address O
NC (program number), or address N (sequence number), it is
O assumed to be an NC command and the macro program call at
N N every block is performed. When N is specified following data other
N N than an address O (program number), or address N (sequence
#14 0 number), the N is used as an argument. In this case, the N
corresponds to variable #14 and the number of decimal places is
0.
1 1 Refer to the instruction manual supplied by the NC manufacturer

for details.
G66(G66.1) P_ L___ ;
G66 (G66.1) P_ L___ <Argument assignment>;
G67;
• P .......................................... Macro program number to be called
5 M99 5Specify M99 in the called program to return to

1 the previous program.
• L .......................................... 1 Number of macro program calls (If omitted,
1 9999 the call is repeated once.)
Programmable range: 1 - 9999
• Data passed to the macro
• <Argument assignment> 1 G65 “ 1 The argument assignment is the same as
” 130 G65. Refer to “Argument Assignment”
(page 130).
• G67 ..................................... Macro modal call cancel
2 2 NOTE
1. G66 G66.1 G67 1. The blocks containing G66 or G66.1 and G67 are specified in pairs
G66 G66.1 in the same program. If a G67 command is specified while the
G67 P276 G66 or G66.1 mode is not valid, the alarm P276 occurs.
2. G66 G66.1 2. The G66 and G66.1 commands must be specified before any
arguments.
3. G66 G66.1 3. If M99 is specified in a block in which a macro program is called
M99 M99 with G66 or G66.1, M99 is executed after performing the call.
1 “ ” 132 1 For details on the nesting level of macro program calls, refer to
“Nesting Level for Calls” (page 132)
G
G FUNCTIONS 135
Example:
This program cuts a groove at the specified positions.
U: Groove Depth (Incremental Programming)

F: Cutting Feedrate for Groove Cutting
G66
<Program calling a macro program with G66>

O3;
G00 T0202;
G97 S1000 M03;
G00 X100.0 Z200.0 M08;
G66 P9110 U5.0 F0.5; .............................................. O9110 #21 Assigns 5.0 to #21 and 0.5 to #9 of
5.0, #9 0.5 macro program O9110 and calls the
macro program.
X60.0 Z80.0; ............................................................ Z80.0 Executes macro program O9110 at
O9110 the Z80.0 position.
Z50.0; ....................................................................... Z50.0 Executes macro program O9110 at
Z30.0; ....................................................................... Z30.0 Executes macro program O9110 at
G67; ......................................................................... Cancels the macro call
G00 X100.0 Z200.0 M05;
M30;

O9110;
G01 U #21 F#9; ...................................................... Cuts the workpiece.
G00 U#21; ................................................................ Retracts the tool.
M99; ......................................................................... Ends the macro program
G
136 G FUNCTIONS
Example:
G66.1 Programming using G66.1
This program cuts a groove at the specified positions.
G66.1 G66.1 is used in cases where it is necessary to change the
groove depth each time.
U: Groove Depth (Incremental Programming)

F: Cutting Feedrate for Groove Cutting
G66.1
<Program calling a macro program with G66.1>
O4;
G00 T0303;
G97 S1000 M03;
G00 X100.0 Z200.0 M08;
G66.1 P9120 U5.0 Z80.0 F0.5; ................................ O9120 #21 Assigns 5.0 to #21, 80.0 at #26 and
5.0, #26 80.0, #9 0.5 0.5 at #9 of the macro program
Z80.0 O9120 and executes the macro
program at the Z80.0 position.
U8.0 Z50.0; .............................................................. O9120 #21 Assigns 8.0 to #21 and 50.0 at #26
8.0, #26 50.0 Z50.0 of macro program O9120 to change
U the groove depth (U) at the Z50.0
position and executes the macro
program.
U3.0 Z30.0; .............................................................. O9120 #21 Assigns 3.0 to #21 and 30.0 at #26
3.0, #26 30.0 Z30.0 of macro program O9120 to change
U the groove depth (U) at the Z30.0
position and executes the macro
program.
G67; ......................................................................... Cancels the macro call
G00 X100.0 Z200.0 M05;
M30;

O9120;
G00 Z#26; ................................................................ Z Positioning in the Z-axis direction
G01 U #21 F#9; ...................................................... Cuts the workpiece.
G00 U#21; ................................................................ Retracts the tool.
M99; ......................................................................... Ends the macro program
2-25 G90 G94

G90 O.D./I.D. Cutting Cycle, G94 Face Cutting Cycle
The G90 and G94 commands are used to call the cycles which
simplify programming for straight and tapered cutting on O.D.,
I.D. and end face.
G90 O.D./I.D. cutting cycle

G94 Face cutting cycle
5 5Usually, these cycle are not used.

G
G FUNCTIONS 137
1 • 1 • For details of the functions called by the G90 and G94

commands, refer to the instruction manual supplied by the
NC manufacturer.
• • For details on switching the format, refer to the separate
“ ” volume, OPERATION MANUAL “Setting Screen”
1.
<Straight cutting>
G90 X(U)_ Z(W)_ F_ ;
G94 X(U)_ Z(W)_ F_ ;
<Tapered cutting>
G90 X(U)_ Z(W)_ R_ F_ ;
G94 X(U)_ Z(W)_ R_ F_ ;
2. F15
F15 format
<Straight cutting>
G90 X(U)_ Z(W)_ F_ ;
G94 X(U)_ Z(W)_ F_ ;
<Tapered cutting>
G90 X(U)_ Z(W)_ I_ F_ ;
G
138 G FUNCTIONS
G94 X(U)_ Z(W)_ K_ F_ ;

• G90 ..................................... Calls the O.D./I.D. cutting cycle
• G94 ...................................... Face cutting cycle
• X, Z ..................................... Specify the coordinate values of the end
point of cutting cycle.
• U, W .................................... Specifies the distance and direction from the
cutting cycle start point to the cutting cycle
end point.
• R ......................................... G90 (G90):
X Specifies the distance of taper in the X-axis
direction (signed, in radius).
G94 (G94):
Z Specifies the distance of taper in the Z-axis
direction (signed).
• I ........................................... X Specifies the distance of taper in the X-axis
direction (signed, in radius).
• K .......................................... Z Specifies the distance of taper in the Z-axis
direction (signed).
• F .......................................... Specifies the feedrate.
W W
U/2 U/2
Z Z
X R
+Z +Z
X Rapid Traverse
X Cutting Feed
X
<Straight Cutting> <Tapered Cutting>
U/2 U/2
Z R W
+Z +Z Rapid Traverse
X Z X
X Cutting Feed
X
<Straight Facing> <Tapered Facing>
2-26 G50 G96

G50 Setting Maximum and Minimum Spindle Speeds, G96 Controlling Constant Surface Speed
(Constant surface speed control)
G50 G50 Specifies the maximum and minimum spindle speeds

G50 sets the spindle speed limits (maximum and minimum
spindle speeds) for automatic operation. Once G50 is set, the
spindle speed will be clamped at the set limit.
G96 G96 Calls the constant surface speed control mode
1 The surface speed is also called the cutting speed. It indicates
m/min the distance the cutting tool moves along the workpiece
surface (periphery) per minute.
When the surface speed is specified with this command, the
spindle speed is automatically controlled to maintain the
surface speed constant with the cutting diameter varied.
G
G FUNCTIONS 139
5 5Generally, the standard cutting speed is determined according to

the material of the workpiece and the cutting tool, the workpiece
shape, and the chucking method.
8 8 WARNING
1. G50 1. The spindle speed limit set using G50 must be no
higher than the lowest of the individual allowable
speed limits for the chuck, fixture, and cylinder.
[Workpiece ejection, Serious injury, Machine damage]
2. G96 2. Whenever G96 (constant surface speed control) is
G50 specified in a part program, G50 must be specified in a
G96 block before the G96 block in order to set the spindle
speed at the amount specified by G50. In the G96
mode, the spindle speed increases as the cutting tool
approaches the center of the spindle, reaching the
allowable maximum speed of the machine.
[Workpiece ejection, Serious injury, machine damage]
1• “ 1 ” 140 1 • For specifying G50, “Example1:” (page 140)
• • For the relationship between the spindle speed and chuck
gripping force, refer to the instruction manual supplied by
the chuck and cylinder manufacturers.
3. G50 3. The maximum spindle speed set by specifying G50 is
NC cleared when operation is suspended during
machining and the NC power is shut OFF. If the NC
power is turned ON again to restart machining from the
required block of the program, there is a possibility
that the program is executed without setting the
maximum spindle speed. When the NC power is turned
ON, always execute the program from the beginning.
Never restart operation from the required block of the
program.
7 7 CAUTION
G50 G50 X, Z When setting the coordinate system, specify the X and Z
values correctly in the G50 block.
[Component interference/Erroneous motion/Cutting tool
fails to reach cutting position]
Do not input the tool geometry offset data to prevent the
work zero point from being shifted by the amount in the
tool geometry offset data.
[Component interference]
G50 S_ Q_ ;
• S........................................... min 1 Specifies spindle speed limit (min 1).
1) Specifies the minimum spindle speed
• Q .......................................... (min
(min 1).
5 5Calculate the lower limit of the spindle speed from the machining
Q diameter of the workpiece, cutting conditions at each process, and
machining conditions and specify the calculated value following
address Q. By setting the lower limit of the spindle speed in this
manner, it is possible to reduce the spindle speed acceleration and
deceleration time, thus a total cutting time can be reduced.
G96 S_ M03(M04);
G96 S_ M203(M204);
• S........................................... m/min Specifies the cutting speed (m/min).
• M03(M04) ............................ M03 1 M04 1 Specifies spindle 1 rotation in the normal
(reverse) direction.
• M203(M204)......................... M203 2 M204 2 Specifies the spindle 2 rotation in the normal
G
140 G FUNCTIONS
1 Example1:
O0001;
N001;
G50 S1500; .............................................................. Specifying the maximum spindle
speed set
G96 S100 M03;......................................................... Spindle rotation using the constant
surface speed control function
:
N002;
speed set
:
N003;
speed set
2 Example 2:
G50, G96 Programming using G50 and G96
bDc To move the cutting tool at a cutting feedrate along the path
bDc to execute facing.
25
6
M60 P = 2 5
5
2
C1.5 1
4
C1
3 Rapid Traverse
54
Cutting Feed
O1;
N1;
G50 S2000 Q500; .................................................... 1 Setting the maximum and minimum
2000 min 1 spindle 1 speeds for automatic
500 min 1 operation
Maximum spindle speed: 2000
min 1
Minimum spindle speed : 500 min 1
G00 T0101;
G96 S200 M03;......................................................... 200 m/min 1 Starting the spindle 1 in the normal
direction; surface speed is 200 m/
min
The spindle speed is controlled to
maintain the surface speed constant
at 200 m/min.
the workpiece
1000V
N=
•D
min 1 1000 200
= 1137 (min 1)
3.14 56
G
G FUNCTIONS 141
1137 min 1 1 At this position, spindle 1 rotates at

1137 min 1 in the normal direction.
X30.0 F0.15; ............................................................. 0.15 mm/rev Facing at a feedrate of 0.15 mm/rev
1000V
N=
•D
1000 200
min 1
= 2123 (min 1)
3.14 30
2123 min 1 1 At this position, spindle 1 should

“G50 rotate at 2123 min 1 to provide the
S2000 G500;” surface speed of 200 m/min.
2000 min 1 However, since the spindle speed
2000 min 1 limit of 2000 min 1 is set in the “G50
S2000 G500;”, the spindle speed
does not exceed this limit value.
2-27 G97
G97 Controlling Spindle Speed at Constant Speed (Constant Surface Speed Control Cancel)
G97 G97 Calls the constant spindle speed command mode
G97 The G97 command is used to call the mode in which a

constant spindle speed is maintained.
G97 During automatic operation, the spindle rotates at the
programmed speed.
1000V
N=
π•D
N min 1 N: Spindle speed (min 1)

V m/min V: Cutting speed (m/min)
D mm D: Cutting diameter (mm)
: Circumference constant
The G97 command must be specified for thread cutting
G97 operations, turning drilling operations and milling operations.
5 G97 5The G97 mode is also specified for copy turning on straight bar
workpiece.
2 2 NOTE
During thread cutting operation, the thread is cut gradually by changing
the cutting diameter for each thread cutting path while maintaining the
start point of the thread. Therefore, if the spindle speed is not kept
constant, the start point shifts in each thread cutting cycle making
thread cutting impossible or chipping the tool nose.
G
142 G FUNCTIONS
8 8 WARNING
G97 G50 When a G97 speed command is used in a program,
specification of the maximum speed with a G50 command
G97 will be ignored. Therefore, when specifying the spindle
speed with a G97 command, specify a speed no higher
than the lowest speed among the allowable speed limits
for the chuck, fixture, and cylinder.
[Workpiece ejection, serious injury, machine damage]
G97 S_ M03(M04) ;
G97 S_ M203(M204);
G97 S_ M13(M14);
• G97 ..................................... Calls the constant spindle speed command
mode.
• S .......................................... min 1 Specifies the spindle speed (min 1).
• M03(M04) ............................ M03 1 M04 1 Specifies the spindle 1 rotation in the normal
• M203(M204) ........................ M203 2 M204 2 Specifies the spindle 2 rotation in the normal
• M13(M14) ............................ M13 M14 Specifies the rotary tool spindle rotation in
the normal (reverse) direction.
2 2 NOTE
1. G96 G97 1. When the spindle speed control mode is switched from the G96
G97 mode to the G97 mode, if no spindle speed is specified in the G97
block, the spindle speed obtained in the block immediately
preceding the G97 block is used as the spindle speed for the G97
mode operation.
G97 G97 Therefore, if no spindle speed is specified in the G97 block, the
spindle speed for the G97 mode will depend on the position of the
cutting tool in the block preceding the G97 block, and this could
adversely affect machining accuracy and shorten the life of the
tool.
When switching the spindle speed control mode to the G97 mode,
always specify a spindle speed.
2. mm/rev 2. Spindle speed is restricted by feedrate of cutting tool (mm/rev).
R
N<
F
F mm/rev F: Feedrate (mm/rev)
R mm/min R: Maximum cutting feedrate (mm/min)
1 “F ” 241 1 For the maximum cutting feedrate, refer to “F FUNCTION”

(page 241)
2-28 G98 G99

G98 Feedrate per Minute Command, G99 Feedrate per Revolution Command
2 G Axis feedrate units are determined by specifying the following

two G codes:
G
G FUNCTIONS 143
G98 G98 Specifies the Feedrate Per Minute

mm/min, /min (Linear axis: mm/min, rotary axis: /min)
F 1 The axis feedrate specified by F codes is interpreted in units of
(mm/min, /min) mm per minute (mm/min, /min).
5 5This mode is used when the bar feeder, the pull-out finger, or the
rotary tool is used.
G99 mm/rev G99 Specifies the Feedrate Per Revolution (mm/rev)
F 1 The axis feedrate specified by F codes are in units of mm per
mm/rev revolution (mm/rev).
5 G99 5This mode is used for general turning operations such as O.D.
cutting, I.D. cutting, and thread cutting.
7 7 CAUTION
G98 F In the G98 mode, the turret moves at the feedrate specified
1 by the F code even when the spindle is not rotating. Make
sure that the cutting tool will not strike the workpiece.
[Machine damage]
G98; G98;
G01 Z_ F100.0; G01 Z_ F100.0; The cutting tool moves at a
1 100 mm rate of 100 mm/min even
when the spindle is not
rotating.
G98; ............................. Specifies the feedrate per minute

mm/min, /min (Linear axis: mm/min, rotary axis: /min).
G99; ............................. mm/rev Specifies the feedrate per revolution (mm/
rev).
2 2 NOTE
1. G98 G99 G G99 1. The G98 and G99 commands are modal. Therefore, once the G99
G98 G99 command is specified, it remains valid until the G98 command is
specified, or vice versa.
2. G99 2. When the power is turned on, the G99 mode (feedrate per
revolution) is set.
Example:
The workpiece is pulled out of the chuck with the pull-out finger
mounted in the turret head while the spindle rotation is
stopped.
7 7 CAUTION
Always specify an M05 command to stop spindle rotation
M05 before using a pull-out finger or workpiece pusher.
G
144 G FUNCTIONS
[Machine damage]
3 2 G00 (Rapid Traverse)
4 Rapid Traverse
1 Cutting Feed
G98 (Feedrate per Minute)
O1;
N1;
G00 T0101 M05;
X0 Z20.0 M09; ......................................................... b Positioning at b at a rapid traverse
rate to grip the workpiece
G98; .......................................................................... G98 1 Establishing the “mm/min” mode
mm/min In the following blocks, the F codes
are all interpreted in the unit of “mm/
F mm/min min”.
G01 Z 60.0 F500; .................................................... 500 mm/min Positioning at c at 500 mm/min to

c grip the workpiece (bar stock)
M11; .......................................................................... Unclamping of the chuck
G04 U2.0; ................................................................. 2 Dwell for 2 seconds to ensure
unclamping of the chuck
2 2 NOTE
The dwell period should be a little longer
than the time required for the chuck to
operate (open, close) to ensure safe
operation.
Z 10.0; ..................................................................... 500 mm/min Moving to d at 500 mm/min to pull
d out the bar stock from the chuck
M10; .......................................................................... Clamping of the chuck
G04 U2.0; ................................................................. 2 Dwell for 2 seconds to ensure
clamping of the chuck
2 2 NOTE
The dwell period should be a little longer
than the time required for the chuck to
operate (open, close) to ensure safe
operation.
G00 Z20.0; ............................................................... Positioning at b at a rapid traverse
b rate to release the bar stock from
the pull-out finger
X200.0 Z50.0; .......................................................... Positioning at a where the turret
a head can be rotated
G99; .......................................................................... G99 1 Selecting the G99 (mm/rev) mode
mm/rev In the following blocks, the F codes
are all interpreted in the unit of “mm/
F mm/rev rev”.
2 NOTE
2
When G98 has been specified, G99
G98 must be specified at the end of the
G99 process to return to the feed per
revolution (mm/rev) mode.
M01;
:
G
G FUNCTIONS 145
2-29 G325
The values set on the screen for the tailstock can be changed
using the following commands:
G325 W_ T_ U_ A_ B_ C_ Q_ R_ S_ ;
• G325 ................................... Changes value set on screen
• W ......................................... 1 “1” To select Work 1, input “1”
2 “2” To select Work 2, input “2”
• T .......................................... 1 kN Specifies Thrust Force 1 (kN)
• U ......................................... 2 kN Specifies Thrust Force 2 (kN)
• A .......................................... mm Specifies pushing point (mm)
2 2 NOTE
“0” If this value is set at “0”, stroke confirmation alarm
detection is not performed.
• B .......................................... mm Specifies approach point at rapid traverse
rate (mm)
2
2 NOTE
If the value set is on the minus side of the work,
tailstock/work interference will occur.
• C ......................................... mm Specifies return position (mm)
• Q ......................................... mm Specifies thrust tolerance (mm)
5 5When the thrust force reaches the set value

within the thrust tolerance, the workpiece is
judged to have been pushed and tailstock out
operation is regarded as completed.
2
2 NOTE
1.
1. Even when the thrust force is caused to reach
the set value within the thrust tolerance by a
load other than pushing against the
workpiece, the tailstock out operation is
. regarded as being completed. Machining in
this state may involve dangers such as the
2. EX0461
ejection of the workpiece. Pay extra attention
when changing the thrust tolerance.
2. If the value exceeds the tolerance range,
EX0461 alarm message is displayed.
• R ......................................... “0” For no re-chucking, input “0”
“1” For re-chucking, input “1”
Setting specifies automatic chuck clamping/
unclamping of the workpiece following
tailstock/workpiece contact.
• S .......................................... Re-chucking timer (sec)
At re-chucking, set the timer in 0.1 second
increments to determine the interval
0.1 between unclamping and re-clamping
commands.
2 2 NOTE
1. 1. Values set on the display are valid if G325 has not been specified.
2. W1, W2 2. Specify W1 or W2 whenever G325 is specified.
3. ‘49 FORMAT ERROR’ 3. If the value set by G325 exceeds the specified range, ‘49 FORMAT
ERROR’ is displayed.
1 “M25, M26 1 For tailstock IN/OUT, refer to “M25, M26 Tailstock Forward/
M25, M26 Backward (Digital Tailstock), M25, M26 Tailstock Spindle OUT/IN
” 198 (Carriage Direct-Coupled Tailstock)” (page 198)
G
146 G FUNCTIONS
5 5During setup, you are recommended to record the position(s)

where the tailstock or steady rest should be positioned and the
position where the tailstock or steady rest should be returned after
the completion of machining.
2-30 G330 2
G330 Tailstock (Digital Tailstock)/Headstock 2 Reference Point Return
G330 2 If the G330 command is specified after workpiece transfer,

tailstock/headstock 2 returns to the machine zero point. With
2 the G330 command, tailstock/headstock 2 moves only in the
direction of the zero point from the present position regardless
of the setting for the work coordinate system, which prevents
tailstock/headstock 2 from moving in unexpected directions
and interfering with the workpiece and/or tools.
7 7 CAUTION
When executing the zero return at the end of the transfer
“G330” 2 process, always specify the “G330” (tailstock (digital
“G28 B0” tailstock) headstock 2 reference point return) command.
B On execution of the “G28 B0” command, if at this time a
work offset value is set for the B-axis in the selected work
B0 coordinate system, the axes temporarily move to the zero
B point (B0) of the set work coordinate system, then move to
the machine zero point. When a B-axis work offset is set,
there may be interference with other workpieces or a tool
during movement to the work coordinate zero point, as
shown in the figure.
2 2 NOTE
G330 2 G330 can be used with headstock 2 specification machines and digital
tailstock specification machines.
Interfer-
ence
Motion to the Work Coordinate System Zero Point (Rapid Traverse)
Motion to the Machine Zero Point (Rapid Traverse)
2-31 G374 G375

G374 Drilling with Tailstock Canned Cycle, G375 Drilling with Tailstock Canned Cycle Completion
Check (Option)
A tailstock can be used as a drill by mounting a drilling tool in it.

X, Z G Use a canned cycle invoked by G code to perform drilling and
O.D. cutting simultaneously. It is also possible to reduce the
machining time by operating the drill and tools mounted on the
turret head simultaneously.
G374 A_B_C_Q_R_F_;
• A........................................... mm Start point (mm)
• B........................................... mm Cutting bottom point (mm)
• C .......................................... mm Return position (mm)
G
G FUNCTIONS 147
• Q .......................................... 1 mm Depth of cut per one infeed motion (mm)

(Signed value)
• R .......................................... 1 mm Retract amount per one motion (mm)
• F........................................... mm/min Feedrate (mm/min)
2 2 NOTE
1. A, B, C, Q, F ‘ ’ 1. If A, B, C, Q, or F is not specified, ‘MACRO ALARM’ ‘49 FORMAT
‘49 FORMAT ERROR’ ERROR’ is triggered.
2. Q R 2. Specify “Q: Depth of cut” and “R: Retract amount” as signed
incremental values.
Example:
10 mm 5 mm When the depth of cut is 10 mm and the retract amount is
Q 10. R5. 5 mm:
Q 10. R5.
3. ‘ ’ ‘49 FORMAT 3. If the depth of cut is lower than the retract amount, ‘MACRO
ERROR’ ALARM’ ‘49 FORMAT ERROR’ is triggered.
4. 4. The movements to a start point or a retraction point are executed
at a rapid traverse rate, which is controlled by the rapid traverse
rate override switch.
5. G374 5. Since the G374 command is completed at the same time as the
drilling cycle starts, simultaneous operation can be executed by
specifying an O.D. cutting command in the next block.
6. 6. To execute commands in the next block after confirming the
“G375;” completion of drilling cycle, specify “G375;”.
7. R 7. When an automatic cutter radius offset is applied it is not possible
G40 R to specify drilling with the tailstock. Cancel the automatic cutter
radius offset before making such a specification.
8. R Q 8. If address R is omitted, after drill infeed of “Q”, the drill returns to
A R Q R the start position A. If R is specified, after drill infeed of “Q”, the drill
returns by the distance “R”.
7 7 CAUTION
Ensure the tools, the turret and the tailstock do not
interfere with each other.
[Serious injury/Machine damage]
Example:
***
S M03;
: (Machining Program)
:
G374 A 100. B 150. C 50. Q 10. R3. F500.; ......... 100. Approaching to 100. at a rapid
: F500 10.0 mm traverse rate
: F500 3. Cutting 10.0 mm at the speed
150. specified by F500
150. 50. Retracing 3. at the speed specified
by F500
Repeating this to the depth of 150.
After reaching 150., the drill
retracts to 50. at a rapid traverse
rate
: (Machining Program)
:
G375; ........................................................................ Drilling cycle completion checked
(The next block is executed after the
drilling cycle is completed.)
G
148 G FUNCTIONS
2-32 G479
G479 Automatic Centering Type Steady Rest/Tailstock Travel
G479 3 G479 command has three different functions depending on

machine models and specifications.
1. 1. Automatic centering type steady rest travel (carriage
direct-coupled travel)
<Applicable Model>
• NL1500 NL1500 series
• NL3000 700 NL3000 series/700
• NL3000 1250 NL3000 series/1250
1 “ ” 148 1 “Automatic Centering Type Steady Rest Travel (Carriage
Direct-Coupled)” (page 148)
2. 2. Automatic centering type steady rest travel (servo-driven)

<Applicable Models>
• NL3000 2000 NL3000 series/2000
• NL3000 3000 NL3000 series/3000
1 “ ” 150 1 “Automatic Centering Type Steady Rest Travel
(Servo-Driven)” (page 150)
3. 3. Tailstock travel (carriage direct-coupled)

<Applicable Models>
• NL3000 2000 NL3000 series/2000
• NL3000 3000 NL3000 series/3000
1 “ ” 151 1 “Tailstock Travel (Carriage Direct-Coupled)” (page 151)
Automatic Centering Type Steady Rest Travel (Carriage

Direct-Coupled)
“G479 S1.(Q2.) V_” Z When “G479 S1.(Q2.) V_” is specified, the Z-axis automatically
moves to the position where the steady rest can be connected
V_ to the saddle and then to the specified position (V_).
G479 S1.(Q2.) V_ ;
• G479 .................................... Calls the steady rest connect mode
• S1. ....................................... Specifies the steady rest
5“Q2.” 5The “Q2.” command also specifies the steady

rest.
• V........................................... Specifies the steady rest positioning point
(the machine coordinate value)
2 2 NOTE
1. G479 1. Specify the G479 command independently in a block without other
commands.
2. V 2. Specify address V using the machine coordinate value.
3. S(Q), V 3. For addresses S(Q) and V, specify a numeric value with a decimal
point.
4. G479 O9099 4. The G479 command for the steady rest connection uses program
O9099. This program number (O9099) cannot be used to make a
new program.
5. G479 5. To execute the G479 command, the following conditions must be
satisfied:
• • The spindle is stopped.
• • Turret head indexing has completed.
• • The steady rest is in the OPEN state.
G
G FUNCTIONS 149
6. V Z 6. If address V is omitted, the Z-axis moves to the position where the

steady rest can be connected to the saddle and is unclamped.
Therefore, to move the steady rest, move the steady rest to the
specified position and specify the steady rest clamp command.
: :
G479 S(Q)_; Z G479 S(Q)_; After moving the Z-axis to the
position where the steady rest
can be connected to the
saddle, unclalmps the steady
rest.
G00 Z_; G00 Z_; Moves the steady rest to the
specified position.
M78; M78; Clamps the steady rest.
G479 <Operation of G479>
G479 After the G479 command, specify the position where the
V O9099 steady rest is to be moved to using the machine coordinate
values, then the series of operation indicated below can be
executed by the sub-program O9099.
O9099 <Sub-Program (O9099)>

Z S1.(Q2.) (The Z-axis moves to the
position where the steady
rest can be connected to
the saddle.)
G479 S1.(Q2.) V_;

M79 (The steady rest unclamp;
joint pin extends from the
steady rest to connect with
V_ the saddle.)
V_ (Positioning of the steady rest

to the position specified by
“V_”)
M78 (The steady rest clamp; joint

pin extracts from the saddle
to release the steady rest.)
Example:
G479 G479 Programming using automatic centering type
steady rest travel (carriage direct-coupled)
O1;
N1;
G479 S1.(Q2.) V_; ................................................... "V_" Moving the steady rest to the
position specified by “V_” (machine
coordinate value)
5“Q2.”
5The “Q2.” command also specifies
the steady rest.
M341; ....................................................................... 1 Steady rest 1 close
G50 S1000;
G00 T0101;
G96 S100 M03;
:
:
:
M05;
M340; ....................................................................... 1 Steady rest 1 open
G
150 G FUNCTIONS
G479 S1.(Q2.) V_; ................................................... "V_" Moving the tailstock to the

previously located position,
specified by “V_” (machine
coordinate value)
:
Automatic Centering Type Steady Rest Travel

(Servo-Driven)
“G479 S1.(Q2.) V_” V_ When “G479 S1.(Q2.) V_” is specified, the steady rest
automatically moves to the specified position (V_ ).
G479 S1.(Q2.) V_ ;
• G479 .................................... Calls the steady rest movement command
• S1. ....................................... Specifies the steady rest
5“Q2.” 5The “Q2.” command also specifies the steady

rest.
• V........................................... Specifies the steady rest positioning point
(machine coordinate value)
2 2 NOTE
commands.
3. V 3. Address V cannot be omitted.
4. S(Q), V 4. For addresses S(Q) and V, specify a numeric value with a decimal
point.
5. G479 O9099 5. The G479 movement command for the steady rest/tailstock uses
program O9099. This program number (O9099) cannot be used to
make a new program.
satisfied:
• • The spindle is stopped.
• • Turret head indexing has completed.
• • The steady rest is in the OPEN state.
V O9099 steady rest is to be moved to using the machine coordinate
M640 (The steady rest unclamp)
V_
V_ (Positioning of the steady rest
to the position specified by
G479 Q2(S1.) V_; “V_”)
M639 (The steady rest clamp)

G
G FUNCTIONS 151
Example:
G479 G479 Programming using automatic centering type
steady rest (servo-driven)
O1;
N1;
G479 S1.(Q2.) V_; ................................................... “V_” Moving the steady rest to the
position specified by “V_” (machine
coordinate value)
M341; ....................................................................... 1 The steady rest 1 CLOSE
G50 S1000;
G00 T0101;
G96 S100 M03;
:
:
:
G28 U0;..................................................................... X Machine zero return of X-axis to
avoid interference with the steady
rest
M05;
M340; ....................................................................... 1 The steady rest 1 OPEN
G479 S1.(Q2.) V_; .................................................... “V_” Moving the steady rest to the
coordinate value)
:
Tailstock Travel (Carriage Direct-Coupled)
“G479 Q1. V_” Z When “G479 Q1. V_” is specified, the Z-axis automatically
moves to the position where the tailstock can be connected to
V the saddle and then to the specified position (V_ ).
G479 Q1. V_ ;
• G479 ................................... Calls the tailstock connect mode
• Q1. ...................................... Specifies the tailstock (can be omitted)
• V .......................................... Specifies the tailstock positioning point
(machine coordinate value)
2 2 NOTE
commands.
3. Q, V 3. For addresses Q and V, specify a numeric value with a decimal
point.
4. G479 O9099 4. The G479 command for the tailstock uses program O9099. This
program number (O9099) cannot be used to make a new program.

satisfied:
• • The main spindle is stopped.
• • The turret head index has completed.
• • When moving the tailstock, the tailstock is in the IN state.
G
152 G FUNCTIONS
6. V Z 6. If address V is omitted, the Z-axis moves to the position where the

tailstock can be connected to the saddle and is unclamped.
Therefore, to move the tailstock, move the tailstock to the specified
position and specify the tailstock clamp command.
: :
G479 Q1.; Z G479 Q1.; After moving the Z-axis to the
position where the tailstock
G00 Z_; saddle, unclalmps the
tailstock.
M78; G00 Z_; Moves the tailstock to the
specified position.
M78; Clamps the steady rest.
V O9099 tailstock is to be moved to using the machine coordinate
Z Q1. (The Z-axis moves to the

position where the tailstock
saddle.)
G479 Q1. V_;

M79 (The tailstock unclamp; joint
pin extends from the tailstock
to connect with the saddle.)
V_
V_ (Positioning of the tailstock at
the position specified by “V_”)
M78 (The tailstock clamp; joint pin

extracts from the saddle to
release the tailstock.)
Example:
G479 G479 Programming using tailstock travel (carriage
direct-coupled)
O1;
N1;
G479 (Q1.) V_; ......................................................... “V_” Moving the tailstock to the position
coordinate value)
M25; ......................................................................... The tailstock spindle moves OUT to
hold the workpiece by the tailstock
spindle center.
G04 U_ ;.................................................................... Calling for dwell to allow positive
support of the workpiece by the
tailstock spindle center
G50 S1000;
G00 T0101;
G96 S100 M03;
:
:
:
G
G FUNCTIONS 153
G28 U0;..................................................................... X Machine zero return of X-axis to

avoid interference with the tailstock
M05;
M26; ......................................................................... The tailstock spindle moves IN.
G04 U_; .................................................................... Calling for dwell to allow tailstock
spindle to correctly retract into the
tailstock body.
G479 (Q1.) V_; ......................................................... “V_” Moving the tailstock to the
coordinate value)
:
2-33
Cutting Feedrate Control
G01, G02, G03 The functions to control feedrate for cutting feed (G01, G02,
G03) are shown below.
G09 00 153
G61 13 154
M28, M29 155
G62 13 157
G63 13 156
G64 13 156
Applications Code Group Function Page

G09 00 Exact stop 153
Finishing corners sharply G61 13 Exact stop mode 154
M28, M29 Error detect ON/OFF 155
Finishing inner corners smoothly G62 13 Automatic corner override 157
Tapping G63 13 Tapping mode 156
Usual cutting G64 13 Cutting mode 156
2 2 NOTE
1. G09 1. G09 is valid only in the specified block.
2. G61, G62, G63, G64 G 2. G61, G62, G63, and G64 remain valid until another G code in the
same group is specified.
3. M28 M29 3. M28 is valid until M29 is specified.
G09 G09 Exact Stop

G
154 G FUNCTIONS
To finish a corner sharply, the tool is decelerated at the end

B point of the axis travel command (point B in the figure) , then
an in-position check is performed before executing the next
“DADBDCD” (G01) block. The tool path is the same as the programmed tool path
(G02, G03) G09 “DADBDCD” . Specify G09 at the beginning of the block
before a linear cutting command (G01) or a circular cutting
command (G02, G03).
2 2 NOTE
G09 The exact stop function is valid only in the block in which G09 is
specified.
1 “G01 ” 73 1 “G01 Moving Cutting Tool along Straight Path at Cutting Fee-
“G02 G03 ” 79 drate” (page 73)
“G02 Circular Interpolation (Clockwise), G03 Circular Interpola-
tion (Counterclockwise)” (page 79)
G61 G61 Exact Stop Mode

B point of the axis travel command (point B in the figure), then an
in-position check is performed before executing the next block.
“DADBDCD” The tool path is the same as the programmed tool path
“DADBDCD” .
2 2 NOTE
G61 G62, G63, G64 G61 is valid until G62, G63, or G64 is specified.
G
G FUNCTIONS 155
Example:
dDeDfDgDh M28 Using the M28 command for movement in
dDeDfDgDh in the following diagram.
25
11
M60 P2 5
10
9 8
7 2
5
1
C1.5 6
4
C1
Rapid Traverse
54
Cutting Feed
O1;
N1;
G50 S2000;
G00 T0101;
G96 S200 M03;
X56.0 Z20.0 M08;
G01 Z0 F1.0;
X30.0 F0.15;
G00 X50.0 W1.0;
G61; ......................................................................... Exact stop mode
G01 X54.0 Z 1.0;...................................................... 0.15 mm/rev Moving the cutting tool from point
Z 5.0; ?dDeDfDgDh ?dDeDfDgDh at a
X56.8; e, f, g, feedrate of 0.15 mm/rev.
X59.8 Z 6.5; h The exact positioning at each end
NC point e, f, g, h of movement is
e, f, g, checked by the NC. Before starting
h the movement commands in the
next block, the feed stops at each
end point of movement e, f, g,
h once.
G64; ......................................................................... Usual cutting mode
Z 23.0 F0.2;.............................................................. 0.2 mm/rev hDi Moving the cutting tool from point
hDi at a feedrate of 0.2 mm/rev
i Without deceleration at i, the
cutting tool starts executing the
command in the next block.
G00 U1.0 Z20.0;
X200.0 Z150.0 M09;
M01;
M28 M29 M28 Error Detect ON, M29 Error Detect OFF
G
156 G FUNCTIONS

B point of the axis travel command (point B in the figure), then an
in-position check is performed before executing the next block.
“DADBDCD” The tool path is the same as the programmed tool path
“DADBDCD” .
2 2 NOTE
1. M28 G01 G02, G03 1. M28 is valid for linear cutting (G01) and circular cutting (G02,
G03).
2. M28 M29 2. M28 is valid until M29 is specified.
G64 G64 Cutting Mode
The next block is executed without decelerating the tool at the

“DADBDCD” end point of the axis travel command. When the tool path
“DADCD” “DADBDCD” is specified in a program, the actual tool path
is “DADCD” .
2 2 NOTE
1. G64 G61, G62, G63 1. G64 is valid until G61, G62, or G63 is specified.
2. @ 2. The cutting mode (G64) becomes valid when the power is turned
G64 on or when the @ (RESET) key is pressed.
G63 G63 Tapping Mode
The next block is executed without decelerating the tool at the

“DADBDCD” end point of the axis travel command. When the tool path
“DADCD” “DADBDCD” is specified in a program, the actual tool path
is “DADCD” .
2 2 NOTE
1. G63 G61, G62, G64 1. G63 is valid until G61, G62, or G64 is specified.
2. G63 2. G63 allows the control mode best suited to tapping to be entered,
as indicated below.
• • Feedrate override is invalid. (fixed at 100%)
• • Deceleration commands at joints between blocks are invalid.
• • Feed hold is invalid.
• • Single block operation is invalid.
• • The in-tapping mode signal is output.
G
G FUNCTIONS 157
G62 G62 Automatic Corner Override
R When a tool radius offset is applied, G62 automatically

decelerates the movement of the tool to reduce the load during
inner corner cutting or during cutting of an internal corner with
the automatic corner rounding function and finishes the corner
smoothly.
<Overriding during machining of an inner corner>
Programmed tool path
Tool center path
a b
Override is applied from point a to point b
G62 When G62 is specified, and the tool path with tool radius offset
applied forms the inner corner, the feedrate is automatically
overridden at both ends of the corner.
2 2 NOTE
1. G62 G40 R G61, 63, G64 1. G62 is valid until G40 (tool nose radius offset cancel), G61, G63, or
G64 is specified.
2. G62 G01 G02, G03 2. G62 is valid for linear cutting (G01) and circular cutting (G02, G03).
SEICOS
158 COMPATIBLE SPECIFICATIONS WITH SEICOS (OPTION)
3 SEICOS
SEICOS This section describes the method of specifying the functions
below, which are compatible with machines equipped with a
SEICOS NC unit.
• R • Automatic tool nose radius offset mode (automatic
determination of offset direction)
• • Cutter radius offset mode
• • Groove width tool offset mode
3-1 R
Automatic Tool Nose Radius Offset Mode (Automatic Determination of Offset Direction)
R If the automatic tool nose radius offset mode is validated, the

R direction of the tool nose radius offset is automatically
determined depending on the imaginary tool nose orientation
and the offset is executed.
G143; .......................... R Automatic tool nose radius offset mode valid

G140; .......................... R Automatic tool nose radius offset mode
cancel
G141; .......................... Compulsory determination of offset direction
(left side)
G142; .......................... Compulsory determination of offset direction
(right side)
2 2 NOTE
1. R 1. For machines equipped with this option, the automatic tool nose
radius offset mode is valid when the power is turned on. (This can
be invalidated by a parameter setting)
2. R G41/G42 2. If the G41/G42 command is specified in the automatic tool nose
P34 radius offset mode, an alarm (P34) is triggered.
3. R G00 R 3. If the G00 command is specified in the automatic tool nose radius
offset mode, the tool nose radius offset mode is temporarily
canceled.
4. R 0 9 4. The automatic tool nose radius offset cannot be executed at the
imaginary tool nose point 0 or 9.
5. R G41/G42 5. In the automatic tool nose radius offset cancel mode, an ordinary
tool nose offset can be used by specifying G41/G42.
5 G141/G142 5To offset the tool in a different direction from the direction
automatically determined, the offset direction can be determined
compulsorily by specifying the G141/G142 commands.
1 “ ” 161 1 “Compulsory Determination of Offset Direction” (page 161)
Automatic Determination of Offset Direction
G143 R By specifying the G143 command, the direction of the tool

nose radius offset is automatically determined from the
imaginary tool nose point and the direction of movement in the
manner indicated in the table below.
R Automatic determination of the offset direction is executed in
the same way at start-up and during the tool nose radius offset
mode.
SEICOS
COMPATIBLE SPECIFICATIONS WITH SEICOS (OPTION) 159
5 R G41/G42 5The movement of the tool nose radius offset during automatic
R determination of the offset direction is same as with the ordinary
tool nose radius offset function called by the G41/G42 command.
Tool Nose Point

Offset Direction
Tool Nose Moving Direction 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
D \ \
Right Right Left Left Right Left
\ \
Right Left Left Right Right Left
W \ \
Left Right Right Left Left Right
\ \
Left Right Left Left Right Right
Motion vector
A \ \
Left Left Right Right Left Right
\ \
X \ \
\ \
Right Left Right Right Left Left
2 2 NOTE
1. 1. The cross symbol ( ) indicates that the direction of offset cannot be
determined from the programmed direction of axis movement and
the imaginary tool nose point.
2. 0 90 2. The symbol ( ) indicates that the axes (tool nose) move in the
range from 0 to 90 .
3. 3. If the offset direction is not determined ( symbol in the table) and
4 no blocks with axis movement that can determine the offset
direction exist within 4 blocks, offset operation is started from the
first block with axis movement that can determine the offset
direction.
4. R 4. In the automatic tool nose radius offset mode, if the direction of
G00 offset cannot be determined ( symbol in the table), the direction of
3. offset that applied in the previous block is used. However, the G00
block does not follow the previous offset direction. The direction of
offset in the later block is applied, as in 3..
5. R 5. In the automatic tool nose radius offset mode, the offset direction
G141/G142 of the circular interpolation command follows the direction of offset
G141/G142 that applied in the previous block. However, when compulsory
determination of offset direction (G141/G142) is specified, the
direction of the G141/G142 command is applied.
6. R 6. In the automatic tool nose radius offset mode, an alarm does not
No. 8016 occur if the direction of offset is reversed and offset operation is
G46 executed in the automatically determined direction. (Parameter
No. 8016: the setting for protection against G46 reverse axis error
is invalid.)
SEICOS
Start-Up and Cancel
In the start-up and cancel block, an imaginary vector is created

in the axial direction on the machining plane based on the
direction of motion, and the start-up and cancellation points are
acquired according to calculation of the offset intersection in
relation to the imaginary vector.
Example:
G00 - G01 G00 - G01
N3 The offset intersection of the block including a cutting
command (N3) and the imaginary vector becomes the
start-up point.
:
N1 G143;
R Imaginary Vector
N2 G00 X_Z_; Tool Nose Radius Center
N3 G01 X_Z_F_;
:
Intersection
N3
Program
N2
N1
Example:
G01 - G01 G01 - G01
N2/N3 The offset intersection of the blocks including cutting
commands (N2/N3) becomes the start-up point. (No
imaginary vector is created.)
:
N1 G143; R
Tool Nose Radius Center
N2 G01 X_Z_F_;
N3 G01 X_Z_;
: N3
Intersection
Program
N2
N1
Example:
G01 - G00 - G01 G01 - G00 - G01
Cancellation and start-up are executed in the same block. In
N2D N3 N3 the case shown below, N2 D N3 cancels the offset and N3
D N4 N2 D N4 executes start-up. This time, the cancellation point in
N2 the N2 block becomes the offset intersection of the block
N3 including cutting commands (N2) and the imaginary vector,
N4
SEICOS
and the start-up point in the N3 block becomes the offset

intersection of the block including cutting commands (N4)
and the imaginary vector.
:
N1 G143;
R Imaginary Vector
N2 G01 X_Z_F_; Tool Nose Radius Center
N3 G00 X_Z_;
N4 G01 X_Z_;
: Intersection
N4
Program
Intersection
N3
Imaginary Vector
N2
N1
Example:
G00 - G02 - G00 G00 - G02 - G00
If the block including a cutting command and start-up or
cancellation describes an arc, the offset intersection of the
arc block and the imaginary vector becomes the start-up/
cancellation point.
:
N1 G143;
N2 G00 Z_; N4 Intersection
N3 G02 X_Z_F_;
N4 G00 X_;
: Intersection
R
N3 Tool Nose Radius Center
N2 N1
Program
2 2 NOTE
If no offset intersection in relation to the imaginary vector exists, the
offset vector at start-up is perpendicular to the start point and offset
vector at cancellation is perpendicular to the end point.
:
N1 G143;
N2 G00 Z_; N4 Perpendicular to End Point
N3 G02 X_Z_F_;
N4 G00 X_;
Perpendicular to Start Point
:
R
N3 Tool Nose Radius Center
N2 N1
Program
Compulsory Determination of Offset Direction
R To offset the tool in a different direction from the direction

G141/G142 automatically determined during the automatic tool nose radius
offset mode, the offset direction can be determined
compulsorily by specifying the G141/G142 commands.
SEICOS
2 2 NOTE
1. G141/G142 R 1. The G141/G142 commands can be specified only during the
R automatic tool nose radius offset mode. If the G141/G142
commands are specified when the automatic tool nose radius
offset mode is invalid, they are ignored.
2. G141/G142 G 2. The G141/G142 commands are one-shot G codes; they are valid
only in the specified block. However, they can be valid in other
blocks in the cases below.
a) a) When the offset direction cannot be determined automatically
G141/G142 at start-up and the G141/G142 command is specified in the
G141/G142 block ahead. (The offset direction at start-up is the direction
specified by G141/G142.)
b) G141/G142 b) When the offset direction is changed by specifying the G141/
G142 command and the offset direction cannot be
G141/G142 automatically determined in the next block. (The offset
direction in the next block follows the direction of the G141/
G142 command.)
3-2
Cutter Radius Offset Mode
G145 G41/G42 The cutter radius offset mode starts with the G41/G42
G40/G140/G143 command after G145 and is ended by specifying the G40/
G140/G143 command.
2 2 NOTE
G00 G01/G02/G03 In the cutter radius offset mode, start-up/cancellation by switching
positioning and cutting (G00 G01/G02/G03) is not executed.
G145;
G41(G42);
• G145 ................................... Cutter radius offset mode valid
• G41 ...................................... Cutter radius offset (offset to the left)
• G42 ...................................... Cutter radius offset (offset to the right)
Start-Up During Cutter Radius Offset Mode
G41/G42 Start-up is executed when a movement command is included in

the same block as the G41/G42 command.
1. 1. Inside the corner
The tool moves to a position perpendicular to the next
block.
:
N1 G145; N3
N2 G42 G00 X_Z_; Program
N3 G01 X_Z_F_;
N2
: Center of Tool
N1
SEICOS
2. 90 180 2. Outside the corner (obtuse angle) [90 180 ]

The tool moves to the intersection with the next block.
:
N1 G145;
Intersection
N2 G41 G00 X_Z_;
N3 G01 X_Z_F_; Center of Tool
:
N3 Program
N2
N1
3. < 90 3. Outside the corner (acute angle) [ < 90 ]

The tool skirts around the outside of the corner.
:
N1 G145;
Center of Tool
N2 G41 G00 X_Z_;
N3 G01 X_Z_F_;
: Program
N3
N2
N1
Operation in Cutter Radius Offset Mode
1. 1. Inside the corner

The tool passes through the offset intersection.
:
G145; N2 N2
Program
G42;
: N1 Program Intersection
N1 G01 X_Z_F_;
N2 G01 X_Z_; Center of Tool
Center of Tool N1
:
Intersection
2. 90 180 2. Outside the corner (obtuse angle) [90 180 ]

The tool passes through the offset intersection.
:
G145;
G41;
:
N1 G01 X_Z_F_; N2
N2 G01 X_Z_; Program
N1
:
Center of Tool
Intersection
SEICOS
3. < 90 3. Outside the corner (acute angle) [ < 90 ]

The tool skirts around the outside of the corner.
:
G145;
Center of Tool
G41;
:
N1 G01 X_Z_F_;
N1 Program
N2 G01 X_Z_;
:
N2
Canceling Cutter Radius Offset Mode
1. G40 1. When the G40 command is specified without other

commands in a block.
G40 After the tool moves to a position perpendicular to the end
A/B point, the offset is canceled by the first movement after
specifying the G40 command. (Same operation for both
offset types A and B)
:
N1 G01 X_Z_F_; N2 N1
N2 G40; Program
N3 G00 X_Z_;
N3 Center of Tool
:
2. G40 2. When the G40 command and movement command are

specified in a same block.
a) a) Inside the corner
G40 After the tool moves to a position perpendicular to the
A/B end point, the offset is canceled by the movement of a
block including the G40 command. (Same operation for
both offset types A and B)
:
G01 X_ Z_ F_; N1
Program
N1 G01 X_Z_;
N2 G40 G00 X_Z_; N2
: Center of Tool
b) b) Outside the corner (obtuse angle)

G40 After the tool moves to the intersection with the
canceling block, the offset is canceled by the movement
of a block including the G40 command.
:
G01 X_ Z_ F_;
Intersection
N1 G01 X_Z_;
Center of Tool
N2 G40 G00 X_Z_;
:
N1 Program
N2
SEICOS
c) c) Outside the corner (acute angle)

G40 After the tool skirts around the outside of the corner, the
offset is canceled by the movement of a block including
the G40 command.
:
G01 X_ Z_ F_;
Center of Tool
N1 G01 X_Z_;
N2 G40 G00 X_Z_;
: N1 Program
N2
2 2 NOTE
1. G18 R 1. When the automatic tool nose radius offset is executed on a plane
other than the G18 plane, the axes composing the plane being
selected are offset as vertical/horizontal axes.
2. G140/G143/G145, G40/G41/G42 2. Specify the G140/G143/G145 or G40/G41/G42 command during
the arc mode in a block without any other commands. If the circular
P151 interpolation command is specified in the same block, the alarm
(P151) is triggered.
3. 3. If the commands below are specified when the offset is not
P159 canceled yet (the offset amount is still remaining), the alarm (P159)
is triggered.
a) R G143 a) Automatic tool nose radius offset command (G143)
b) G145 b) Cutter radius offset command (G145)
c) G17 G19 c) Plane selecting command (G17 - G19)
d) G31, G31.1, G31.2, G31.3 d) Skip command (G31, G31.1, G31.2, G31.3)
e) G81 G89 e) Hole machining canned cycle (G81 - G89)
f) II G74 G76 f) Multiple repetitive cycle II commands (G74 - G76)
5G143 b) f) b) f) 5When b) - f) are specified during the G143 mode, if a G00

G00 G00 movement command is specified in the previous block, the tool
b) moves to the offset cancellation position, and if movement is
f) G00 specified by another command in this previous block, the tool
P159 moves to a position perpendicular to the end point. Therefore, if
the G00 movement command is specified in the block before the
b) - f) commands, the operation can proceed without triggering the
alarm (P159).
3-3
Groove Width Tool Offset Function (Option)
1 The groove width tool offset function is used to create

programs for grooving operation, using just one work offset
data without considering the tool width. The groove width tool
offset function shifts the coordinate system by the tool width
and switches the imaginary tool nose point.
‘ ’ Set the number of the imaginary tool nose point before
switching and the shift amount of the coordinate system (tool
width) on the ‘TOOL GEOMETRY OFFSET’ screen in
advance.
1 ‘ ’ “ ” 1 For the details of the ‘TOOL GEOMETRY OFFSET’ Screen,
refer to the separate volume, “OPERATION MANUAL”.
G151; .......................... Face groove width tool offset function valid

G152; .......................... O.D/I.D groove width tool offset function
valid
G150; .......................... Groove width tool offset function cancel
SEICOS
Groove Width Tool Offset Mode
G151/G152 By specifying G151/G152, the offset operations below are

executed and the groove width offset mode is validated.
1) 1) Shifts the coordinate system by the tool width.
2) 2) Switches the imaginary tool nose point to the tool nose
point on the other side.
Tool Width
Tool Width
G151 G152
G151 Command: Grooving on an End Face G152 Command: Grooving on an O.D.
G18 <Switching the imaginary tool nose point and shift amount
of the coordinate system (in the case of the G18 plane)>
G18 The imaginary tool nose point switch and the shift amount of
the coordinate system on the G18 plane are as follows. Set the
‘ ’ number of the imaginary tool nose point before switching and
the shift amount of the coordinate system (tool width) on the
‘TOOL GEOMETRY OFFSET’ screen in advance.
1 ‘ ’ “ ” 1 For the details of the ‘TOOL GEOMETRY OFFSET’ Screen,
refer to the separate volume, “OPERATION MANUAL”.
Imaginary Tool Nose Point
Switching the Imaginary Tool Nose Offset

Command Coordinate System Shift Amount
Point Axis
aDd
(Tool width)
bDc
(Tool width)
G151 X
cDb +
+ (Tool width)
dDa +
+ (Tool width)
SEICOS
Switching the Imaginary Tool Nose Offset

Command Coordinate System Shift Amount
Point Axis
aDb
(Tool width)
bDa +
+ (Tool width)
G152 Z
cDd +
+ (Tool width)
dDc
(Tool width)
2 2 NOTE
H + J Tool width: Dimensions (H) + Wear amount (J)
Groove Width Tool Offset Mode Cancel
G150 Specifying the G150 command in the groove width tool offset
mode causes execution of the operations below and the
groove width tool offset mode is canceled.
1) 1) The coordinate system is reset. (Cancels shifting by the
tool width)
2) 2) The imaginary tool nose point is reset to the original
position.
2 2 NOTE
1. 1 4 P158 1. If the imaginary tool nose points are at other than 1 - 4, the alarm
2. G151/G152 G151/ 2. If plane selection is executed during the G151/G152 mode, or the
G152 P34 G151/G152 and plane selection are specified in the same block,
the alarm (P34) is triggered.
3. G151 G152 G152 3. If G152 is specified in the G151 mode, or G151 is specified in the
G151 G152 mode, it is necessary to input the offset data after canceling
the offset mode.
4. G150 4. If the reset operation is executed during groove width tool offset,
the G150 mode is validated, and both the imaginary tool nose point
and the shift amount are returned to the initial state.
5. 0 5. When a groove width offset is applied to a tool with a width of “0”,
the coordinate system is not shifted and only the switching of the
imaginary tool nose point is executed.
6. G151/G152 G50 G92 6. If the coordinate system is set by the G50 (G92) command in the
G151/G152 mode, the coordinate system setting is executed with
respect to the coordinate system after the groove width offset.
7. G151/G152 T G150 7. If a T command is specified in the G151/152 mode, the G150
mode (no offset) is validated.
8. G151/G152 T T 8. If the G151/G152 and T command are specified in a same block,
G151/G152 G150 just the T command is executed. The G151/G152 command is
ignored and the G150 mode (no offset) is validated.
9. G151 G151 9. If the G151 command is specified in the G151 mode, no change
G152 occurs (Once an offset has been applied, a further offset is not
G150 G150 applied). The same applies for the G152 command. If the G150
G150 command (no offset) is specified in the G150 mode, the G150
mode (no offset) remains in effect.
10. G151/G152 10. If the G151/G152 command is specified during the milling mode,
P481 polar coordinate interpolation, or cylindrical interpolation, the alarm
11. G151/G152 11. If the milling mode start command, the polar coordinate
interpolation mode start command, or the cylindrical interpolation
P485 mode start/cancel command is specified in the G151/G152 mode,
the alarm (P485) is triggered.
SEICOS
12. G151/G152 12. The chuck barrier/tailstock barrier check during the G151/G152
mode is executed at the tool nose point. The software limit check is
executed at the machine position as before.
13. G151/G152 G150 13. If the manual coordinate system is set in the G151/G152 mode, the
G150 mode (no offset) is validated.
14. G150/G151/G152 14. If the G150/G151/G152 command and movement command are
specified in a same block, the tool moves so that the tool nose
point becomes the specified position. If the G150/G151/G152 and
another command are specified in the same block, the other
command and the shift of the coordinate system are executed at
the same time. However, this does not apply if the other command
is the plane selecting command, the milling mode start command,
the polar coordinate interpolation mode start command, or the
cylindrical interpolation mode start/cancel command.
Example:
G152/G150 3 Programming using G152/G150 (the imaginary tool nose
point: 3)
N9 N4 X
80
N5
N1 N8 N3 N6
N7
N2
40
Z
−40 −30 −20
G18 G00 X80. Z 40.;

N1 G99 G01 X40. F0.5;
N2 G01 Z 30.;
N3 G00 X80.;
N4 G152; .................................................................. O.D. groove width tool offset
function valid
N5 G00 Z 20.;
N6 G01 X40.;
N7 G01 Z 30.;
N8 G00 X80.;
N9 G150;................................................................... Groove width tool offset function
cancel
2
2èÕ M
CHAPTER 2
CHAPTER 2 M FUNCTIONS
1 M 171
M FUNCTIONS
2 225
M
M FUNCTIONS 171
1 M
M FUNCTIONS
2 2 NOTE
R Tool tip R is not taken into consideration in program examples provided
in this chapter.
1-1 M
M Code List
M G M codes are also called the miscellaneous functions. They

control program flow, coolant discharge on/off, etc. in addition
to realize the functions supplementary to those called by the G
codes.
2 2 NOTE
1. M 1. The M codes described in this section are generic ones and all of
them are not usable by all machine models or with some models
M those not specified below may be used. There are also cases that
the function of the M code stated below has different function on
specific models. For details, refer to the ladder diagram supplied
with your machine or contact Mori Seiki.
2. 1 M 3 2. Up to three M codes may be specified in a block.
1 “ M ” 186 1 For details, refer to “Multiple M Code Function” (page 186).
7 7 CAUTION
Always specify an M05 command to stop spindle
M05 rotation before using a pull-out finger or workpiece
pusher.
[Machine damage]
M00
187
M01
M02 188
M03
188
M04
188
M05
195
M08 190
M09 190
M10
192
M11
M13 MC, Y
195
M14 MC, Y
M17 —
M17, M18
M18 —
M19 1 —
M20 2 —
M23
196
M24 G92, G76
M
172 M FUNCTIONS
M25
/ 2 198
M26
M27 A 448
M28
155
M29
M30 & 188
M34
M35 S, SMC 435
M36
M37 —
M38 —
M45 C 203
C C MC, Y 203
M46
218
M47 2 204
M48
205
M49
M50 —
M51 205
M52 206
M53 —
M55 —
M57 206
M58 —
M59 205
M60 —
45
M61 —
90
M62 —
180
M64 —
M68
MC, Y 206
M69
M
M FUNCTIONS 173
M70 221
M71 —
M72 —
M73
207
M74
M78 —
M79 —
M80 441
M81 —
2
M82 —
M83 1 —
2
M84 2 —
M85
209
M86
M87 —
M88 —
M89 209
M90
MC, Y 211
M91
M92 —
M93 —
M98
M99
213
M198
M200
215
M201
M203 2 2 2
188
M204 2 2 2
M210
2 2 192
M211
2
M
174 M FUNCTIONS
M219 1 —
2 2 2
M220 2 —
2
M242 —
M243 —
M244 —
M245 C 2
C 2 SMC SY 203
M246
M250 —
2
M251 205
2
M252 206
2
2
M255 —
2
M257 206
2
M259 205
2
M268
2
SMC, SY 206
M269
2
M273 —
2
2
M274 —
2
M283 1 —
2
2 2
M284 2 —
2
M290 2
SMC, SY 211
M291 2
M303 1 —
2
M304 2 —
M306 —
M307 —
M319 MC, Y , SMC, SY —
M
M FUNCTIONS 175
M329 —
M329 379
M340 1 —
M341 1 —
M342 2 —
M343 2 —
M344 3 —
M345 3 —
M346 4 —
M347 4 —
M382
216
No. 6419.7 = 1
M383
M384 & —
M387 2 & 2 —
M392 —
M432 216
M434 1
/ 2 198
M435 2
M440 —
M441 —
M442 —
M443 —
M444 —
M445 —
M446 —
M447 —
M448 —
M449 —
M456 —
M457 —
M458
218
M459
M476 —
M
176 M FUNCTIONS
M477 —
M478
218
M479
M480 C SMC, SY 218

M482 221
M483 221
M560
MC, Y 219
M561
M570 —
M571 —
M588 —
M589 —
M590 —
M598 C2 —
M599 C2 —
M610 Y 220
M611 Y 220
M612 —
M613 —
M617 —
M618 —
M623 —
M624 —
M625 1 198
/ 2
M626 2 198
M639 —
NL3000 /2000, 3000
M640 —
M661
NL3000 2000 NL3000 3000 220
M662
M690 221
M
M FUNCTIONS 177
M712 220
M713 220
M1003 M —
M1004 M —
M1005 M —
M1010 M —
M1011 M —
M1013 M —
M1014 M —
M1019 1 M —
M1020 2 M —
M1037 M —
M1038 M —
M1071 M —
M1072 M —
M1073 M —
M1074 M —
M1078 M —
M1079 M —
M1085 M —
M1086 M —
M1203 2 M —
M1204 2 M —
M1210 M —
2
M1211 M —
2
M1219 1 —
M
2
M1220 2 —
M
2
M1319 M —
M1340 1 M —
M1341 1 M —
M1342 2 M —
M1343 2 M —
M1384 & —
M
M
178 M FUNCTIONS
M1387 2 & M —
M1440 M —
M1442 M —
M1443 M —
M1444 M —
M2040
0
M2041
1
M2042
2
M2043
3
191
M2044
4
M2045
5
M2046
6
M2047
7
M2200 221
Code Function Description Page

M00 Program stop Suspends program execution temporarily.
Suspends program execution temporarily. 187
M01 Optional stop Whether the function is valid or not is selectable by a switch on the
operation panel.
M02 Program end Ends program execution and resets the NC. 188
Starts the spindle in the normal direction.
Normal direction:
M03 Spindle start (normal)
Clockwise rotation, viewing the workpiece from the rear of the
spindle. 188
Starts the spindle in the reverse direction.
M04 Spindle start (reverse) Reverse direction: Counterclockwise rotation, viewing the workpiece
from the rear of the spindle.
Spindle (rotary tool 188
M05 Stops the spindle or the rotary tool spindle rotation.
spindle) stop 195
M08 Coolant ON Starts coolant discharge. 190
M09 Coolant OFF Stops coolant discharge. 190
M10 Chuck clamp operation Opens and closes the chuck.
These M codes are used when the machine is equipped with the bar 192
M11 Chuck unclamp operation feeder or loader, or for both-center work.
M
M FUNCTIONS 179

Starts the rotary tool spindle in the normal direction.
Normal direction:
Rotary tool spindle start
M13 Clockwise rotation, viewing the workpiece from the rear of the rotary
(normal)
tool spindle. (This function is valid for MC specifications and Y-axis
specifications.)
195
Starts the rotary tool spindle in the reverse direction.
Reverse direction:
M14 Counterclockwise rotation, viewing the workpiece from the rear of the
(reverse)
rotary tool spindle. (This function is valid for MC specifications and
Y-axis specifications.)
Turret head rotation
M17 Starts turret head rotation. —
(normal)
Whether the M17 and M18 codes are valid or invalid is set using a
Turret head rotation parameter.
M18 —
(reverse)
M19 Spindle orientation 1 Sets the spindle in the predetermined angular position. —
M20 Spindle orientation 2 Sets the spindle in the predetermined angular position. —
M23 Chamfering ON Makes chamfering in thread cutting valid or invalid. (These functions
196
M24 Chamfering OFF are valid only in the thread cutting mode called by G92 and G76.)
Tailstock (digital tailstock)

M25
OUT
Tailstock specifications/spindle 2 tailstock specifications 198
Tailstock (digital tailstock)
M26
IN
This function is valid for the machine equipped with the tool life
M27 Tool skip ON 448
management A function.
M28 Error detect ON
155
M29 Error detect OFF
M30 Program end and rewind Ends program execution, resets the NC and rewinds the program. 188
Phase synchronized
M34
operation ON
Speed synchronized S, SMC specifications 435
M35
operation ON
M36 Synchronization OFF
M37 Ceiling shutter open —
(The device is optional.)
M38 Ceiling shutter close —
M45 C-axis joint 203
C-axis release/C-axis These functions are valid for MC specifications and Y-axis
specifications. 203
M46 synchronous mode
218
cancel
M47 Workpiece ejector out Headstock 2 specifications (The device is optional.) 204
Feedrate override cancel
M48 Feedrate override cancel invalid
OFF
205
Feedrate override cancel
M49 Feedrate override cancel valid
ON
M
180 M FUNCTIONS

Sensor air blow ON for
M50 automatic in-machine tool —
presetter
Spindle chuck air blow
M51 205
ON
Through-spindle air blow
M52 206
ON
Contact sensor air blow
M53 —
ON
Sensor air blow OFF for
presetter
Through-spindle air blow
M57 206
OFF
Contact sensor air blow
M58 —
OFF
Spindle chuck air blow
M59 205
OFF
Indexing chuck 45 work
M60 —
index
M61 Indexing chuck specifications —
index
M62 —
index
M64 Robot service call This function is valid for the machine equipped with the robot. —
M68 Spindle brake clamp These functions are valid for MC specifications and Y-axis
206
M69 Spindle brake unclamp specifications.
Feeds the bar stock into the machine.

M70 Bar feeder operation This function is valid for the machine equipped with the bar feeder. 221
(The corresponding signal is output to an external device.)
Automatic in-machine tool
M71 Moves the tool presetter arm up/down. —
presetter arm DOWN
These functions are valid for the machine equipped with the
Automatic in-machine tool automatic in-machine tool presetter.
M72 —
presetter arm UP
M73 Work unloader OUT Moves the work unloader out/in.
These functions are valid for the machine equipped with the work 207
M74 Work unloader IN unloader.
Tailstock body/steady rest
M78 —
clamp These functions are valid for the machine equipped with the
Tailstock body/steady rest programmable tailstock or programmable steady rest.
M79 —
unclamp
M80 Cut-off detection 441
Workpiece pushing check
M81 —
ON Headstock 2 specifications
Workpiece pushing check
M82 —
OFF
M83 Chucking pressure 1 Selects chucking pressure level. —
These functions are valid for the machine equipped with the chuck
M84 Chucking pressure 2 high/low pressure system. —
M
M FUNCTIONS 181

M85 Automatic door open Opens/closes the automatic door.
These functions are valid for the machine equipped with an automatic 209
M86 Automatic door close door.
M87 Sensor switching ON Switches the sensors to be used. —
M88 Sensor switching OFF These functions are valid for the machine equipped with the sensors. —
Work counter/total
M89 (Option) 209
counter
Spindle/rotary tool spindle
M90 simultaneous operation
mode ON These functions are valid for MC specifications and Y-axis
211
Spindle/rotary tool spindle specifications.
M91 simultaneous operation
mode OFF
Load monitoring
M92 (teaching, monitoring) —
valid
These functions are valid for the load monitoring specifications.
Load monitoring
M93 (teaching, monitoring) —
invalid
M98 Sub-program call
Sub-program end Returns the program flow from the current sub-program to the main
M99
repetition of program program. 213
Sub-program call (from
M198 (Option)
external I/O device)
Chip conveyor start
M200 These functions are valid for the machine equipped with the chip
(forward direction) 215
conveyor.
M201 Chip conveyor stop
Headstock 2 specifications,
Starts spindle 2 in the normal direction.
M203 Spindle 2 start (normal)
Normal direction:
Clockwise rotation, viewing the workpiece from the rear of spindle 2.
Headstock 2 specifications, 188
Starts spindle 2 in the reverse direction.
M204 Spindle 2 start (reverse) Reverse direction:
Counterclockwise rotation, viewing the workpiece from the rear of
spindle 2.
M210 Chuck clamp <spindle 2> Opens and closes the chuck. These M codes are used when the
Chuck unclamp machine is equipped with the bar feeder or loader, or for both-center 192
M211 work for headstock 2 specifications.
<spindle 2>
Spindle orientation 1
M219 —
<spindle 2> Headstock 2 specifications,
Spindle orientation 2 Sets spindle 2 in the predetermined angular position.
M220 —
<spindle 2>
Work unloader interlock
M242 —
bypass ON
Work unloader interlock These functions are valid on machines equipped with the in-machine
M243 —
bypass OFF running type work unloader
Work unloader waiting
M244 —
position
M
182 M FUNCTIONS

C-axis connection
M245
<spindle 2> These functions are valid for SMC specifications and SY
203
C-axis connection cancel specifications.
M246
<spindle 2>
Sensor air blow ON for
presetter <spindle 2>
Spindle air blow on
M251 205
<spindle 2>
In-spindle air blow on
M252 206
<spindle 2>
Headstock 2 specifications (The device is optional.)
Sensor air blow OFF for
presetter <spindle 2>
In-spindle air blow OFF
M257 206
<spindle 2>
Spindle air blow OFF
M259 205
<spindle 2>
Spindle brake clamp
M268
<spindle 2>
This function is valid for SMC specifications and SY specifications. 206
Spindle brake unclamp
M269
<spindle 2>
Work unloader OUT
M273 —
<spindle 2> These functions are valid on machines equipped with the in-machine
Work unloader IN running type work unloader for headstock 2 specifications.
M274 —
<spindle 2>
Chucking pressure 1
M283 Selects chucking pressure level. These functions are valid on the —
<spindle 2>
machine equipped with the chuck high/low pressure system for
Chucking pressure 2 headstock 2 specifications.
M284 —
<spindle 2>
Spindle 2/rotary tool
M290 spindle simultaneous
operation mode ON These functions are valid for SMC specifications and SY
211
Spindle 2/rotary tool specifications.
M291 spindle simultaneous
operation mode OFF
Spindle 1 selection signal
M303 —
ON
Headstock 2 specifications
Spindle 2 selection signal
M304 —
ON
M306 Polygon mode ON —
Polygon specifications
M307 Polygon mode OFF —
Rotary tool spindle zero
M319 MC, Y-axis, SMC, SY specifications —
return
Synchronized tapping
M329 —
mode ON
Spindle synchronized
M329 (Option) 379
tapping mode ON
M
M FUNCTIONS 183

M340 Steady rest 1 open —
M341 Steady rest 1 close —
M343 Steady rest 2 close These functions are valid for the machine equipped with the steady —
M344 Steady rest 3 open rest. —
Bed cover chip flush
M382 coolant ON/chuck top
coolant ON Bed cover chip flush coolant specification/chuck top coolant
specifications 216
Bed cover chip flush (Parameter No. 6419.7 = 1)
M383 coolant OFF/chuck top
coolant OFF
Spindle orientation and
M384 (Option) —
ceiling shutter open
Spindle 2 orientation and
M387 Headstock 2 specifications (Option) —
Clams/unclamps the tailstock body.
Tailstock body positioning
M392 These functions are valid for the machine equipped with the —
to connection position
programmable tailstock.
M432 Work unloader cycle This functions is valid on machines equipped with the work unloader 216
M434 Tailstock thrust force 1
Digital tailstock specifications/spindle 2 tailstock specifications 198
M435 Tailstock thrust force 2
M440 External output —
Tailstock spindle air blow
M456 —
ON
Tailstock spindle air blow
M457 —
OFF
M458 Tool tip air blow ON
(The device is optional.) 218
M459 Tool tip air blow OFF
Spindle high-speed
M476 —
winding lock command
Spindle winding lock
M477 —
cancel command
M
184 M FUNCTIONS

Through-spindle coolant
M478
ON These functions are valid for the through-spindle coolant
218
Through-spindle coolant specifications.
M479
OFF
C-axis synchronization This function is valid for SMC specifications and SY specifications.
M480 218
mode ON (The C-axis synchronous function is optional.)
M482 Change bar stock Feeds the bar stock into the machine. 221
These functions are valid for the machine equipped with the bar
M483 Bar stock feed OFF feeder. (The corresponding signal is output to an external device.) 221
Rotary tool spindle

M560
reverse rotation mode ON
Rotary tool spindle MC, Y-axis specifications 219
M561 reverse rotation mode
OFF
Chuck/tailstock barrier
M570 —
ON
Chuck/tailstock barrier
M571 —
OFF
Oil mist air main valve
M588 —
open
Oil mist air bypass valve
M589 —
open
M590 Oil mist air valve close —
M598 C2 axis torque limit ON —
M599 C2 axis torque limit OFF —
Y-axis zero point interlock
M610 220
valid
Y-axis zero point interlock
M611 220
invalid
M612 Mist collector ON —
M613 Mist collector OFF —
Turret index time
M617 —
shortening mode ON
Turret index time
M618 —
shortening mode OFF
Drilling with tailstock cycle
M623 —
ON
(Option)
Drilling with tailstock cycle
M624 —
completion check
Tailstock workpiece 1
M625 198
select
Digital tailstock specification/spindle 2 tailstock specifications
Tailstock workpiece 2
M626 198
select
M639 Steady rest clamp —
NL3000 series/2000, 3000 only
M640 Steady rest unclamp —
M661 Steady rest coolant ON This function is valid only for the automatic centering type steady rest
220
M662 Steady rest coolant OFF of the NL3000 series/2000 and NL3000 series/3000.
M690 Signal for bar stock feed Bar feeder specifications 221
M
M FUNCTIONS 185

Tailstock spindle interlock
M712 220
function OFF
Tailstock spindle interlock
M713 220
function OFF cancel
M1003 Spindle start (normal) Quick M code —
M1004 Spindle start (reverse) Quick M code —
Spindle (rotary tool
M1005 Quick M code —
spindle) stop
M1010 Chuck clamp operation Quick M code —
M1011 Chuck unclamp operation Quick M code —
(normal)
(reverse)
M1019 Spindle orientation 1 Quick M code —
M1020 Spindle orientation 2 Quick M code —
M1037 Ceiling shutter open Quick M code —
M1038 Ceiling shutter close Quick M code —
presetter arm DOWN
presetter arm UP
M1073 Work unloader OUT Quick M code —
M1074 Work unloader IN Quick M code —
clamp
unclamp
M1085 Automatic door open Quick M code —
M1086 Automatic door close Quick M code —
M1203 Spindle 2 start (normal) Quick M code —
M1204 Spindle 2 start (reverse) Quick M code —
M1210 Chuck clamp <spindle 2> Quick M code —
Chuck unclamp
<spindle 2>
<spindle 2>
<spindle 2>
Rotary tool spindle zero
return
M1340 Steady rest 1 open Quick M code —
M1341 Steady rest 1 close Quick M code —
M1342 Steady rest 2 open Quick M code —
M1343 Steady rest 2 close Quick M code —
Spindle orientation and
M
186 M FUNCTIONS

Spindle 2 orientation and
M1440 External output Quick M code —
Coolant discharge
M2040
pressure level 0
Coolant discharge
M2041
pressure level 1
Coolant discharge
M2042
pressure level 2
Coolant discharge
M2043
pressure level 3
Knoll specifications 191
Coolant discharge
M2044
pressure level 4
Coolant discharge
M2045
pressure level 5
Coolant discharge
M2046
pressure level 6
Coolant discharge
M2047
pressure level 7
M2200 Pre-read stop 221
1-2 M
Multiple M Code Function
M 1 M 3 The multiple M code function allows entry of a maximum of

three M codes in a block.
M By using the multiple M code function for the robot or the
loader specification, cycle time can be reduced.
M M The multiple M code function can use the M codes indicated

below as multiple M code function m codes.
M <Multiple M Code>
• M10 1 • M10 .......Chuck clamp/Chuck clamp <spindle 1>
• M11 • M11 .......Chuck unclamp/Chuck unclamp <spindle 1>

1
• M210 2 • M210 .....Chuck clamp <spindle 2>
• M211 2 • M211 .....Chuck unclamp <spindle 2>
• M19 1 • M19 .......Spindle orientation/Spindle orientation <spindle 1>
• M219 2 • M219 .....Spindle orientation <spindle 2>

• M25 • M25 .......Tailstock OUT
• M26 • M26 .......Tailstock IN
• M85 • M85 .......Automatic door open
• M86 • M86 .......Automatic door close
• M37 • M37 .......Ceiling shutter open
• M38 • M38 .......Ceiling shutter close
M
M FUNCTIONS 187
7 7 CAUTION
M 1 3 M The multiple M code function simultaneously executes up
M to three M codes specified in the same block. Therefore,
operations called out by these M codes and the
combination of them must be carefully examined.
[Machine damage]
2 2 NOTE
1. 1 3 M 1 M 1. Although the first M code among the two or three M codes
M M 2 specified in a block may be other than the M code allowed to be
3 M M used by the multiple M code function, the second and the third M
code must be the multiple M code function M codes.
2. M03, M04, M13, M14, M203, M204 2. A spindle (or rotary tool spindle) rotation M code (M03, M04, M13,
M M14, M203, M204) must not be specified with a multiple M code
function M code in the same block.
1-3 M00 M01

M00 Program Stop, M01 Optional Stop
M00 <M00 Program Stop>

• • Program execution and the machine stop temporarily.
M01 <M01 Optional Stop>
• x • If the x [OSP] (Optional Stop) button on the operation
panel is ON: The machine stops temporarily.
• x • If the x [OSP] (Optional Stop) button on the operation
panel is OFF: The M01 command is ignored and the
program is executed continuously.
M00, M01 <Using the M00 or M01 Command>
• • To check the dimensions of the machined workpiece
• • To check the tool nose
• • To remove chips during machining
• • To remove or mount a workpiece
7 7 CAUTION
1. M00, M01 S F NC 1. The S code and F code remain in the memory after the
M00, M01 execution of the M00 or M01 command. However, to
S F ensure correct operation, it is recommended that these
codes be written in the block that follows the block
which contains the M00 or M01 command.
2. M00, M01 2. After the operation is suspended temporarily by the
M00 or M01 command, do not rotate the turret or move
an axis manually. If either or both of such manual
operations had to be carried out, return the axes
having been operated to the previous state before
manual operation. After that the automatic operation
may be restarted.
[Interference, machine damage, cutting tool damage]
2 2 NOTE
1. M00, M01 1. Specify the M00 or M01 command in a block without other
commands.
2. M00, M01 2. When the M00 or M01 command is executed, the operation is
suspended.
q The program is continuously executed when the automatic
operation button q [START] (Start) on the operation panel is
pressed.
M
188 M FUNCTIONS
3. M00, M01 M03, M04 1 M13, 3. When the M00 or M01 command is executed, the spindle 1 start M
M14 M203, M204 2 commands (M03, M04), the rotary tool spindle start M commands
M08 (M13, M14), the spindle 2 start M commands (M203, M204), and
M00, M01 the coolant discharge M command (M08) are canceled. Therefore,
when specifying the M00 or M01 command in a program,
determine the positions where these M commands are entered
taking this into consideration.
M00, M01 When restarting the program after suspending program execution
M03, M04 1 M13, by the M00 or M01 command, specify the spindle 1 start M
M14 M203, M204 2 commands (M03, M04), the rotary tool spindle start M commands
(M13, M14), or the spindle 2 start M commands (M203, M204) at
M08 the restart block. If coolant discharge is required, specify the M08
command as well.
1-4 M02 M30

M02 Program End, M30 Program End and Rewind
M02 M30 When the M02 or M30 command is executed,
1. 1. All machine operations stop.

• The spindle and rotary tool spindle stop.
• Axis movement stops.
• Coolant discharge stops.
2. NC 2. The NC is reset.
•G G17 In the reset state, the G codes that are valid when the
G19, G20/G21, G54 G59, G96/G97 G98/G99 power is turned on are valid. However, G17 to G19, G20/
G21, G54 to G59, G96/G97 and the G98/G99 modes
remain unchanged.
•F S Both F and S codes are stored without canceled.
3. M30 3. In the case of the M30 command, the cursor returns to the
start of the program.
This is called the program rewind function.
5M30 M02 5The M30 command includes the program rewind function in
M02 addition to the functions supported by the M02 command. Since
M30 this feature is convenient when machining the same kind of
q workpieces continuously, the M30 command is usually used at the
end of a program. By using the M30 command, the same program
is executed repeatedly by simply pressing the automatic operation
button q [START] (Start).
2 2 NOTE
1. 1. Since the machine has the door interlock function, an alarm
1 message (EX1024) is displayed on the screen unless the door is
EX1024 opened/closed if the automatic operation button q [START]
(Start) is pressed after the completion of the program.
2. M02, M30 2. Specify the M02 or M30 command in a block without other
commands.
3. M02, M30 q 3. The indicator above the automatic operation button q [START]
(Start) goes off when the M02 or M30 command is executed.
1-5 M03 1 M203 2 M04 1 M204 2 M05

M03 Spindle Start (Normal), M203 Spindle 2 Start (Normal),
M04 Spindle Start (Reverse), M204 Spindle 2 Start (Reverse), M05 Spindle Rotation Stop
5 5
1. 1. Normal direction: Clockwise rotation, viewing the workpiece
from the rear of the spindle to be rotated.
2. 2. Reverse direction: Counterclockwise rotation, viewing the
workpiece from the rear of the spindle to be rotated.
3. MC Y M05 3. With the MC type machine or the Y-axis specification machine,
the M05 command is used to stop the rotary tool spindle.
M
M FUNCTIONS 189
7 7 CAUTION
1. M05 1. Do not stop the spindle by specifying the M05
command while the cutting tool is in contact with the
workpiece.
[Damage to cutting tool]
2. M03 M04 2. Start the spindle by executing either the M03 or M04
M203 M204 command or the M203 or M204 command before the
cutting tool comes into contact with the workpiece.
[Damage to cutting tool]
2 2 NOTE
1. M05 1. Before changing the spindle rotating direction from normal to
reverse or from reverse to normal, stop the spindle once by
specifying the M05 command. After that specify the M code which
calls the spindle to rotate in the opposite direction.
M05 If the spindle rotating direction is changed without specifying the
EX0401 M05 command, an alarm message (EX0401) is displayed on the
screen and the spindle stops.
2. 2. The spindle cannot start if the chuck is unclamped.
M03, M203, M04, M204 1 Before specifying the M03, M203, M04, or M204 command, make
1 2 sure that the status indicator CH1CL (chuck 1 clamp) is
illuminated or the status indicator CH1CL (chuck 1 clamp) and the
status indicator CH2CL (chuck 2 clamp) are illuminated.
3. M03, M203, M04, M204 S 3. Before specifying the M03, M203, M04, or M204 command, it is
necessary to specify the required spindle speed using an S code.
4. M203 M204 2 4. M203 and M204 are valid for the headstock 2 specifications.
5. 5. When the tailstock spindle interlock function is valid and machining
M03 (M04) M712 is executed without using the tailstock spindle temporarily, specify
M712 the M712 (tailstock spindle interlock OFF) command before
M03 (M04) specifying the M03 (M04) command. An alarm (EX1345) occurs if
(EX1345) the M03 (M04) command is specified without the M712 command
specified in advance.
1 “M712 M713 1 Refer to “M712 Tailstock Spindle Interlock Function OFF,

” 220 M713 Tailstock Spindle Interlock Function OFF Cancel”
(page 220)
Example:
M03, M04, M05 Programming using M03, M04, and M05
O1;
N1;
G50 S1500;
G00 T0101;
G96 S120 M03;......................................................... 120 m/min 1 Starting the spindle or spindle 1 in
the normal direction; surface speed
is 120 m/min.
:
:
:
G00 X200.0 Z150.0 M09;
M01;
N2;
G50 S1500;
G00 T0202;
M
190 M FUNCTIONS
G96 S120 M03;......................................................... 120 m/min 1 Starting spindle 1 in the normal

M00 M01 1 min.
Since there are cases that the
“G96 spindle or spindle 1 is stopped by
S_” “G97 S_” the execution of the M00 or M01
M03 M04 command, the M03 (M04)
command must be specified in the
“G96 S_” or “G97 S_” block at the
beginning of each part program.
:
: Machining program
:
G00 X200.0 Z150.0 M05; ......................................... 1 Stopping the spindle 1 rotation
2 2 NOTE
If the following part program includes the
machining which requires the spindle
M05 rotation to the reverse direction, the
spindle rotation must be stopped by
specifying the M05 command.
M01;
N3;
G50 S1500;
G00 T0303;
G97 S640 M04; ......................................................... 640 min 1 1 Starting the spindle or spindle 1 in
the reverse direction at 640 min 1
(For cutting such as left-hand
thread)
:
:
:
G00 X200.0 Z150.0 M09;
M05; ......................................................................... 1 Stopping the spindle or spindle 1
rotation
M30;
1-6 M08 M09

M08 Coolant Discharge ON, M09 Coolant Discharge OFF
7 7 CAUTION
1. 1. Do not try to change the coolant nozzle setting angle or
discharge volume of coolant during automatic
operation.
[Entanglement]
2. 2. Do not discharge coolant directly to the spindle end
face.
[Machine damage]
2 2 NOTE
If coolant is used for automatic operation, it is necessary to make sure
that the coolant tank has sufficient volume of coolant.
1 M08 1 For coolant discharge control using the coolant switches on the
“ ” operation panel in combination with the M08 command, refer to
the separate volume, “OPERATION MANUAL”.
M
M FUNCTIONS 191
Example:
M08, M09 Programming using M08 and M09
O1;
N1;
G50 S1500;
G00 T0101;
G96 S120 M03;
X75.0 Z20.0 M08; .................................................... Specifies coolant discharge ON.
:
:
:
G00 Z20.0;
X200.0 Z150.0;
M01; ......................................................................... Optional stop
N2;
G50 S1500;
G00 T0202;
G96 S120 M03;
X33.0 Z20.0 M08; .................................................... Starting coolant discharge
M00 M01 M00 M01 Since coolant discharge might have
been stopped by the execution of
the M00 or M01 command, the M08
M08 command must be specified at the
beginning of a part program.
:
:
:
G00 X200.0 Z150.0 M09; ........................................ Stopping coolant discharge
M05;
M30;
I/F Changing Coolant Discharge Pressure (Knoll I/F Only)
M 8 The discharge pressure of the coolant can be changed in the

eight steps by specifying M codes below.
M2040; ......................... 0 Coolant discharge pressure level 0

5 M 5The relationship between the M codes for changing the coolant

discharge pressure and the signals for changing the pressure is
indicated below.
M2040 M2041 M2042 M2043 M2044 M2045 M2046 M2047
0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Output of Pressure Change 0
1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
2 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
1 1 Refer to the circuit diagrams for the machine and the instruction
manual for the coolant unit supplied by Knoll.
M
192 M FUNCTIONS
PC <Related PC parameter>
Set Description
Value
Parameter
Number
The state of the pressure change output is
1 1
memorized.
6552.0
The state of the pressure change output is
0 0
not memorized.
1 1 1 Coolant alarm 1 is not displayed.
6552.1
0 1 0 Coolant alarm 1 is displayed.
6552.2
6552.3
6552.4
6552.5
6552.6
6552.7
1-7 M10 1 M210 2

M11 1 M211 2
M10 Spindle 1 Chuck Clamp, M210 Spindle 2 Chuck Clamp,
M11 Spindle 1 Chuck Unclamp, M211 Spindle 2 Chuck Unclamp
Unclamp Clamp
These M codes are used to continuously machine workpieces

in the machine equipped with a bar feeder or a loader. They
M10, M210, M11, M211 are also used for carrying out both-center work or transferring a
workpiece between the spindles.
2 2 NOTE
M210 M211 2 M210 and M211 are valid with the headstock 2 specification.
7 7 CAUTION
1. z 1. Do not execute the M11 or M211 command when a
M11 M211 workpiece is clamped by the chuck with the z
[SINGLE BLOCK] (Single Block) button set ON. A cycle
start does not work while the chuck is opened.
[Dropped workpiece, Machine damage]
M
M FUNCTIONS 193
2. M10, M210, M11, M211 2. Specify the M10, M210, M11, or M211 command in a
block without other commands, and specify the G04
G04 command in the next block to suspend program
operation for a period long enough to allow the chuck
to clamp or unclamp the workpiece correctly.
[Next block starts before completion of chuck clamp
and unclamp operation]
2 2 NOTE
1. 1. At the start of an operation, the workpiece must be clamped
manually. This is because the automatic operation cannot be
started with the chuck in the unclamp state due to the chuck
interlock function.
2. 2. The chucking direction (O.D. chucking, I.D. chucking) can be
‘ 1 ’ ‘ 2 changed using the ‘CHUCK 1 CLAMP DIRECTION’ and ‘CHUCK 2
’ CLAMP DIRECTION’ on the ‘OPERATION PANEL’ screen.
1 “ ” 1 For the operation panel, refer to the separate volume,

“OPERATION MANUAL”.
3. 1 M11 3. Due to the chuck interlock function, the M11 command must not be
2 M211 specified while spindle 1 is rotating. Similarly, the M211 command
must not be specified while spindle 2 is rotating.
4. M11, M211 4. Due to the chuck interlock function, the M11 and M211 commands
must not be specified while the rotary tool spindle is rotating.
Example:
M11 Programming using M11
Spindle Side Tailstock Side
5 M11 5For both-center work, the M11 command may be used to ensure
safe operation.
O1;
N1;
:
: Machining program
:
M05; ......................................................................... Stopping the spindle
M01;
M11; ......................................................................... Unclamping the chuck
The status indicator CHUCK
CLAMP (chuck clamp) goes off.
M30;
2 2 NOTE
To start the next cycle after changing the workpiece, it is necessary to
step on the foot switch to turn on the status indicator CHUCK CLAMP
(chuck clamp). Otherwise, the chuck interlock function disables the
cycle start.
8 8 WARNING
M30 In machining programs for both-center-work, specify the
M11 M11 command to unclamp the chuck before the M30
M11 command to reset and rewind the program. If the M11
q command is not executed and the automatic operation
button q [START] (Start) is pressed by mistake, automatic
operation will start and the operator may be injured.
M
194 M FUNCTIONS
7 7 CAUTION
Do not clamp the spindle center in the chuck. Clamping
M11 the center in the chuck will cause the center, and therefore
the workpiece, to shift or fall when M11 is specified.
(Applies only to machines equipped with a tailstock.)
[Machine damage]
As explained above, although the M11 command does not
work to clamp/unclamp a workpiece actually, it calls for the
chuck interlock function to ensure safe operation.
Example:
M210, M211 Programming using M210 or M211
1 1 2 To transfer a workpiece machined in spindle 1 from spindle 1
to spindle 2.
O1;
N1;
:
1 Machining program (machining on
:
spindle 1 side)
:
M05;
G97 S1000 M03;
M35;
M211; ........................................................................ 2 Unclamping chuck 2
The spindle 2 rotates in the reverse
2 1000 min 1 direction at 1000 min 1 with the
chuck unclamped.
2 2 NOTE
In the synchronous operation mode, it is
possible to rotate the spindle even if the
chuck is unclamped.
G53 G00 B_ ;
G53 G98 G01 B_ F1000;
G38 J_ K_ F_ Q_ ; .................................................... Detecting the pushing of workpiece
2 2 NOTE
2 Chuck 2 clamp operation is included.
Therefore, it is not necessary to specify
M210 the M210 command.
G99;
:
: Machining program (cutting off of
: workpiece)
M36; ......................................................................... Canceling the speed synchronized
operation mode
system
2
2 NOTE
B
A work coordinate system with no
workpiece offset set on the B-axis is
specified here.
G330;
M01;
:
M
M FUNCTIONS 195
1-8 M13 M14 M05

M13 Rotary Tool Spindle Start (Normal), M14 Rotary Tool Spindle Start (Reverse),
M05 Rotation Stop
2 2 NOTE
M13, M14 MC Y The M13 and M14 commands can be used only with the MC type
machine or the Y-axis specification machine.
5 5
1. 1. Normal direction: Clockwise rotation, viewing from the rear of
the rotary tool spindle.
2. 2. Reverse direction: Counterclockwise rotation, viewing from the
rear of the rotary tool spindle.
3. M05 1 2 3. The M05 command is also used to stop spindle 1 or spindle 2.
7 7 CAUTION
1. M05 1. Do not stop the rotary tool spindle by specifying the
M05 command while the cutting tool is in contact with
the workpiece.
[Damage to Cutting Tool]
2. 2. Do not have the cutting tools contact with a workpiece
while the rotary tool spindle is not rotating.
M13 M14 Start the rotary tool spindle by executing either the M13
or M14 command before the cutting tool comes into
contact with the workpiece.
[Damage to Cutting Tool]
3. 3. Before using a rotary tool, the tool must be registered
correctly. If tool registration is incorrect, the rotary tool
spindle rotates in the direction opposite to the
direction it should rotate.
[Rotary tool and machine damaged]
2 2 NOTE
1. M05 1. Before changing the rotary tool spindle rotating direction from
normal to reverse or from reverse to normal, stop the rotary tool
spindle by specifying the M05 command. After that specify the M
code which calls the rotary tool spindle to rotate in the opposite
direction.
M05 If the rotary tool spindle rotating direction is changed without
EX0401 specifying the M05 command, an alarm message (EX0401) is
displayed on the screen and the rotary tool spindle stops.
2. 2. The rotary tool spindle cannot start if the chuck is unclamped.
M13, M14 1 Before specifying the M13 or M14 command, make sure that the
1 2 status indicator CH1CL (chuck 1 clamp) is illuminated or the
status indicator CH1CL (chuck 1 clamp) and the status indicator
CH2CL (chuck 2 clamp) are illuminated.
3. M13, M14 M45 M245 C 3. Before specifying the M13 or M14 command, it is necessary to
M68 M268 connect the C-axis by executing M45 or M245, or clamp the
spindle by executing M68 or M268.
4. M13, M14 S 4. Before specifying the M13 or M14 command, specify the required
spindle speed using a S code.
M13 (M14) M712 is executed without using the tailstock spindle temporarily, specify
M13 (M14) specifying the M13 (M14) command. An alarm (EX1345) occurs if
(EX1345) the M13 (M14) command is specified without the M712 command

(page 220)
M
196 M FUNCTIONS
Example:
O1;
N1;
M45;
G28 H0;
G00 T0101;
G97 S600 M13;......................................................... 600 min 1 Starting the rotary tool spindle in the
normal direction at 600 min 1
G98
:
:
:
G00 X200.0 Z150.0 M05; ......................................... Stopping the rotary tool spindle
rotation
M46;
M30;
1-9 M23 M24

M23 Chamfering ON, M24 Chamfering OFF
(1) (M23) (2) (M24)

Chamfering ON (M23) Chamfering OFF (M24)
U/2
Rapid Traverse
Thread Cutting
G92, G76 The M23 and M24 commands indicate whether or not
chamfering is carried out in the thread cutting cycle called by
the G92 and G76 commands.
1 M23 If the thread to be cut does not have a groove at the end, as
illustrated on the left, the chamfering ON command (M23) is
required.
2 Specify the chamfering OFF command (M24) when the thread
M24 has a groove at the end, as illustrated on the right, and
chamfering is not necessary.
2 2 NOTE
1. U/2 1. Distance U/2 must be greater than chamfering distance.
2. 2. When the power is turned on, chamfering is ON.
3. NC # 8015 3. Angle of chamfering ( ) should be set for NC parameter #8015.
1 0 89 Setting is possible in 1 units in the range from 0 to 89.
4. r NC #8014 4. Amount of chamfering (r) should be set for NC parameter #8014.
“ /10” 1 0 127 Setting is possible in units of “lead/10” (= 1) in the range from 0 to
127. This amount may be set in a program using the format below.
G76 P [[^^@@ R_ ; G76 P [[^^@@ R_ ;
Thread chamfering amount

M
M FUNCTIONS 197
P 6 ^^ Specify a 6-digit number following address P. If the parameter is

00 99 set in this method, setting range of ^^ is from 00 to 99.
Example:
M30 P2.0 50 mm Performing M30 P2.0, 50 mm effective length thread cutting.
S45C 120 m/min (Material: AISI 1045 (carbon steel),

Cutting feedrate: 120 m/min)
(1) 50 (2) 50
P=2 P=2
30
30
M23 M24
M23 Chamfering ON M24 Chamfering OFF
O1;
N1;
G50 S1500;
G00 T0101;
G97 S1200 M03;
X60.0 Z20.0 M08;
G01 Z10.0 F1.0 M23(M24); ..................................... <M23> <M23>
1 For workpiece with shape as
G92 illustrated in (1), chamfering is
executed if the G92 command is
specified after the M23 command.
<M24> <M24>
2 For the workpiece which has the
G92 shape as illustrated in (2),
chamfering is not executed if the
G92 command is specified after the
M24 command.
G92 X29.4 Z 55.0 F2.0; ........................................... G92 Starting the G92 thread cutting cycle
51 5In the case of (1):

Z Z 55.0 The Z coordinate of the thread end
“ + ” point (Z 55.0) is “effective thread
2 length + chamfering distance”.
Z Z 55.0 In the case of (2):
“ + The Z coordinate of the thread end
L2” point (Z 55.0) is “effective thread
1 L2 length + incomplete thread length
“G32 G92 L2”.
” 105 1 For details of the “incomplete
thread length L2”, refer to “G32
Thread Cutting, G92 Thread Cut-
ting Cycle” (page 105).
M
198 M FUNCTIONS
X28.9......................................................................... G92 The G92 thread cutting cycle is

X28.5; executed at each thread cutting
X28.1; X27.26 diameter
X27.8; The final thread cutting diameter is
X27.56; X27.26.
X27.36;
X27.26;
G00 X200.0 Z150.0 M09;
M01;
2 2 NOTE
The values given in the table are only for reference. The depth of cut
and the number of passes should be determined according to actual
machining status. Use the thread gage to check the machined thread
accuracy.
1 “G32 G92 1 For details of depth of cut and number of passes, refer to “G32
” 105 Thread Cutting, G92 Thread Cutting Cycle” (page 105).
1-10 M25, M26 M25, M26

M25, M26 Tailstock Forward/Backward (Digital Tailstock), M25, M26 Tailstock Spindle OUT/IN
(Carriage Direct-Coupled Tailstock)
8 8 WARNING
When starting automatic operation after setting a
workpiece held by the tailstock, validate the tailstock
interlock by choosing “ON”.
1 1 For details on setting the tailstock spindle interlock refer to the

separate volume, OPERATION MANUAL
7 7 CAUTION
1. M25 M26 1. Specify the M25 or M26 command in a block without
other commands, and specify the G04 command in the
G04 next block to suspend program operation for a period
long enough to allow the tailstock spindle to extend
and the center to hold the workpiece correctly, or long
enough to allow the tailstock spindle to retract into the
M25, M26 G04 tailstock correctly.
If G04 is not specified in the block following the M25 or
M26 block, the next block will be executed before the
workpiece is held by the center properly, or before the
tailstock spindle has retracted properly.
[Tool, tool holder or turret head and tailstock or
tailstock spindle interference, Machine damage]
2. M05 2. Before moving the tailstock spindle IN or OUT, M05
must be specified to stop spindle rotation.
Tailstock Forward/Backward (Digital Tailstock)
M25 The digital tailstock moves to the approach position and push a
M26 workpiece by the M25 command. The tailstock moves back to
the retract position by the M26 command.
5 5The following machine models are equipped with a digital tailstock.

NL1500 NL1500 series
NL3000 700 NL3000 series/700
M
M FUNCTIONS 199
NL3000 1250 NL3000 series/1250
M25; ............................ Tailstock forward

The tailstock moves forward to the approach
position and pushes a workpiece
M26; ............................ Tailstock backward
The tailstock returns to the retract position
M
<Related M Code>
M625; .......................... 1 Tailstock workpiece 1 select
M626; .......................... 2 Tailstock workpiece 2 select
M434; .......................... 1 Tailstock thrust force 1
M435; .......................... 2 Tailstock thrust force 2
M712; .......................... Tailstock spindle interlock function OFF
M713; .......................... Tailstock spindle interlock function OFF
cancel
1 1 For selecting workpiece 1 or 2, and thrust force 1 or 2, refer to

“ ” the separate volume, “OPERATION MANUAL”.
2 2 NOTE
1. M25, M26 1. Specify the M25 or M26 commands in a block without other
commands.
2. ‘ ’ ‘ ’ ‘ ’ ‘ ’ 2. Set the ‘THRUST POSITION’, ‘THRUST’, and ‘RETRACT POS.’
G325 on the ‘TAILSTOCK’ screen in advance. The set values can be
changed by the G325 command.
1 ‘ ’ “ ” 1 For setting on the ‘TAILSTOCK’ screen, refer to the separate

G325 “G325 volume, “OPERATION MANUAL”.
” 145 For changing the set values by G325 command, refer to
“G325 Change of Value Set for Tailstock (Digital Tailstock)”
(page 145)
3. M 3. The state of workpiece and thrust force specified last on the screen
or by the M code commands is valid. The last command prior to
power OFF is stored in the memory and is valid at power ON.
4. 4. When starting automatic operation after setting a workpiece held
by the tailstock, validate the tailstock spindle interlock by choosing
“ON”.
M712 is executed without using the tailstock temporarily, specify the
M712 command to cancel the interlock function.
Example:
G00 X200.0 Z150.0 M09;.......................................... Moving the turret at a rapid traverse

rate to a position out of the range of
tailstock travel
M05; .......................................................................... Stops the spindle rotation.
M01;
N2;
M625; ....................................................................... 1 Selecting workpiece 1
M25; ......................................................................... Moving the tailstock forward and
pushing the workpiece.
G00 X60.0 Z20.0 M09;.............................................. Moving the turret at a rapid traverse
rate to a position out of the
interference range of tailstock travel
:
M05;
M26; ......................................................................... Retracting the tailstock
M
200 M FUNCTIONS
Tailstock Spindle OUT/IN (Carriage Direct-Coupled

Tailstock)
M25 The carriage direct-coupled tailstock only performs workpiece

pushing by the M25 command and does not move to the
G479 approach position. Connect the tailstock(carriage
direct-coupled) with the turret by the G479 command and
G479 move it to the approach position in advance. After machining a
workpiece, specify the G479 command again to return the
tailstock(carriage direct-coupled) to the original position.
5 5
1. 1. The following machine models are equipped with a carriage
direct-coupled tailstock.
NL3000 2000 NL3000 series/2000
NL3000 3000 NL3000 series/3000
2. M25 2. The M25 command moves the tailstock spindle out from the
M26 tailstock(carriage direct-coupled) body and the M26 command
moves the tailstock spindle into the tailstock(carriage
direct-coupled).
1 “G479 1 For the actual example program, “G479 Automatic Centering

” 148 Type Steady Rest/Tailstock Travel” (page 148).
Center-Work Programming with Safety
Primary requirement:
“ ” The tailstock spindle interlock switch must be valid. In this
state, even if the automatic operation is started, the spindle
does not rotate when the tailstock spindle is “IN”.
<For Short Workpieces>
“ ” Definition of short workpieces: Workpieces that can be
securely supported by only the chuck if the tailstock spindle is
retracted to its “IN” position.
Example:
(Safety)
M26 By inserting the M26 (tailstock spindle IN) command in the
q program, after completion of the program, rotating the
spindle is prevented even if the automatic operation button
q [START] (Start) is pressed by mistake.
This is due to the tailstock spindle interlock function.
O ______ ; O ______ ;
_____________; _____________;
_____________; _____________;
; Machining program ;
_____________; _____________;
M05; M05; Spindle stop
M26; M26; Tailstock spindle IN
M30; M30;
(Manual operation)
Opening the front door
Supporting the workpiece
Unclamping the chuck (by footswitch)
Removing the workpiece
1. 1. Automatic operation
M
M FUNCTIONS 201
• M05 Spindle stop (M05)
Chuck
Workpiece Tailstock Spindle
• M26 Tailstock spindle “IN” (M26)
M26
Tailstock Spindle “IN” (M26)
Chuck
2. 2. Manual operation
a) a) Opening the front door
b) b) Supporting the workpiece
c) c) Unclamping the chuck (by footswitch)
d) d) Removing the workpiece
c)
c) Chuck Unclamp Operation
b)
b) Supporting the Workpiece
Chuck
d)
d) Removing the Workpiece
<For Long Workpiece>

Definition of long workpieces: Workpieces that cannot be
securely supported by only the chuck. Secure support of such
workpieces requires the use of the center (tailstock spindle) or
other proper means.
Example:
(Safety)
M11 In this program, the M11 (chuck unclamp) command, to be
executed after the spindle stops, unclamps the chuck. If the
q automatic operation button q [START] (Start) or the spindle
T Y
M
202 M FUNCTIONS
rotation button T [NOR] (Forward), Y [REV] (Reverse) is

pressed by mistake, the cycle start or the spindle rotation will
not be enabled, due to the chuck interlock function.
(If a hydraulic chuck is not used, the internal signal is set to
the chuck unclamp state so that the chuck interlock function
is made valid. In such a case, if the footswitch is stepped on
to set the internal signal to the chuck clamp state, both the
cycle start and spindle rotation start are enabled.)
@ ______ ; @ ______ ;
_____________; _____________;
_____________; _____________;
; Machining progr ;
_____________; _____________;
M05; M05; Spindle stop
M11; M11; Chuck unclamp
M30; M30;
(Manual operation)
Opening the front door
Supporting the workpiece
2 a Pressing the Tailstock/Spindle 2 button a
[Return]to retract the tailstock spindle into
the tailstock body
Removing the workpiece
1. 1. Automatic operation
• M05 Spindle stop (M05)
Chuck
• M11 Chuck unclamp (M11)
M11
Chuck Chuck Unclamp (M11)
2. 2. Manual operation
a) a) Opening the front door
b) b) Supporting the workpiece
c) 2 a c) Pressing the Tailstock/Spindle 2 button a [Return] to
retract the tailstock spindle into the tailstock body
d) d) Removing the workpiece
b)
b) Supporting the
Workpiece c)
c) Tailstock
Spindle IN
Chuck
d)
d) Removing the Workpiece
M
M FUNCTIONS 203
1-11 M45 C 1 M245 C 2

M46 C 1 M246 C 2
M45 C-Axis Connection (Spindle 1), M245 C-Axis Connection (Spindle 2),
M46 C-Axis Connection Cancel (Spindle 1), M246 C-Axis Connection Cancel (Spindle 2)
5• MDI M45, M245 5• By specifying the M45 or M245 command in the automatic or
1 2 MDI mode, it is possible to index the spindle, spindle 1, or
spindle 2 in the required angular position to carry out hole
machining on the workpiece circumference or end face.
In the M45 or M245 mode, it is also possible to control spindle
M45, M245 rotation in synchronization with the tool movement to cut
notches or grooves.
7 7 CAUTION
2 M45, M245, M68 With the headstock 2 specification machines, the chuck
1 M268 interlock function is valid only for the spindle for which
2 the M code is specified last if more than one of the M45,
M245, M68 (spindle brake clamp for spindle 1), and M268
(spindle brake clamp for spindle 2) are specified in the
M same block, and the chuck interlock function is not valid
for the other spindle. Therefore, machining must be
carried out using the spindle corresponding to the M code
specified last. If machining is carried out using the other
spindle, the rotary tool spindle does not stop even if the
chuck is unclamped during machining.
[Workpiece fall/Ejection]
2 2 NOTE
1. M45, M245 M05 1 2 1. Stop spindle 1 or spindle 2 by specifying the M05 command before
1 2 specifying the M45 or M245 command. If the M45 or M245
M45, M245 command is specified although spindle 1 or spindle 2 is rotating,
EX1424 the machine stops with alarm message (EX1424) displayed on the
screen.
2. M46, M246 M05 2. Before specifying the M46 or M246 command, it is necessary to
stop rotary tool spindle by specifying the M05 command. If the
M46, M246 EX1426 M46 or M246 command is specified although the rotary tool
spindle has not been stopped, an alarm message (EX1426) is
displayed on the screen and the machine stops.
3. 2 M45 M245 M245 3. With headstock 2 specifications, cancellation of the C-axis function
M45 M46 C by M46 command is not necessary when changing from the M45
to M245 condition or from M245 to M45 condition.
4. 2 M45 M245 4. With headstock 2 specifications, both of spindles 1 and 2 function
1 2 C 1 as the C-axis if either the M45 or M245 command is specified. To
2 carry out turning by using either spindle 1 or spindle 2, cancel the
M46 1 2 C C-axis function for both of spindles 1 and 2 by specifying the M46
command.
5. 2 M45 1 5. With headstock 2 specifications, it is necessary to return the C-axis
M245 2 C to the machine zero point to carry out machining using spindle 2
after carrying out machining using spindle 1.
6. M45, M245 6. After finishing the operation performed in the C-axis connection
M46, M246 mode, called by the M45 or M245 command, always specify the
M46 or M246 command at the end of a program.
M45 M712 is executed without using the tailstock spindle temporarily, specify
M45 (EX1345) specifying the M45 command. An alarm (EX1345) occurs if the
M45 command is specified without the M712 command specified
in advance.

(page 220)
M
204 M FUNCTIONS
1-12 M47
M47 Workpiece Ejector Out (Option)
2 The M47 command is used to discharge the workpiece from

the headstock 2 chuck when machining has been completed.
2 2 NOTE
1. M47 2 1. The M47 command can be used with headstock 2 specifications
only.
2. M47 M73 M74 2. Usually, the M47 command is used in combination with the M73
work unloader OUT command and M74 work unloader IN
command.
1 M73, M74 “M73 1 For details of the M73 and M74 commands, refer to “M73
M74 ” 207 Work Unloader OUT, M74 Work Unloader IN (Option)”
(page 207).
3. M47 M05 2 3. When specifying the M47 command, it is necessary to stop spindle
2 2 by specifying the M05 command. The workpiece ejector does not
start if the spindle is not stopped.
4. M47 2 4. The chuck on spindle 2 is automatically unclamped if the M47
command is specified.
Example:
O1;
:
2 Machining program (machining on
:
spindle 2 side)
:
M05; .......................................................................... 2 Stopping spindle 2
G53 B_ ; .................................................................... 2 Moving spindle 2 to position where
the workpiece is dropped into the
work unloader.
7 7 CAUTION
The work unloader operates irrespective of the turret
position.
B 2 Specify B-axis coordinate values to ensure the work
unloader receives the workpiece correctly without
B interference between the work unloader and the turret or
40 mm spindle 2. Note that the work unloader OUT operation is
not possible if the B-axis is at a position 40 mm or more
in the minus direction (machine coordinate system).
M73; ......................................................................... Work Unloader OUT

M47; ......................................................................... Specifies the workpiece ejector
OUT.
M252; ........................................................................ 2 Turning ON through-spindle air blow
(spindle 2)
G04 U_ ;.................................................................... Dwell
G330; ........................................................................ 2 Moving spindle 2 to the machine
zero point
M74; ......................................................................... Work unloader IN
M
M FUNCTIONS 205
M257; ........................................................................ 2 Turning OFF through-spindle air

blow (spindle 2)
M251; ........................................................................ 2 Spindle chuck air blow ON (spindle
2)
G04 U_ ;.................................................................... Dwell
M259; ........................................................................ 2 Spindle chuck air blow OFF (spindle
2)
:
1-13 M48 M49

M48 Feedrate Override Cancel OFF, M49 Feedrate Override Cancel ON
M49 The override setting for cutting feedrate during automatic

F operation is canceled when the M49 command is executed. In
this mode, axis feedrate is fixed to the one programmed by the
100% 100% F code. Therefore, if the setting for the feedrate override dial
on the operation panel is not 100%, the setting is ignored and it
is assumed to be 100%.
M48, M49 In daily operation, the M48 and M49 commands are rarely
M48 F used. In test cut, these M codes may be used. That is, the
M48 command is specified in a program so that cutting
feedrates may be adjusted to meet actual machining status.
M49 F After determining proper feedrates, the M49 command should
be specified in a program so that mass production may be
executed by using the fixed feedrates.
7 7 CAUTION
M49 F When the M49 command is executed, actual feedrates
cannot be set faster than the programmed feedrates.
F However, if this command is specified in a program, it is
impossible to lower the feedrate programmed by the F
code using the feedrate override switch even if the
programmed feedrate seems too fast.
2 2 NOTE
1. 1. During thread cutting, feedrate must be kept constant. The
G override function is automatically ignored if the G code calling
M48, M49 thread cutting operation is executed. Therefore, it is not necessary
to specify the M48 and M49 commands in a program for thread
cutting operation.
2. 2. During tapping, feedrate must be kept constant. The override
G function is automatically ignored if the G code calling tapping
M48, M49 operation is executed. Therefore, it is not necessary to specify the
M48 and M49 commands in a program for tapping operation.
3. M48, M49 M49 3. The M48 and M49 commands are not valid for rapid traverse
operation. Therefore, the rapid traverse rate override switch is
operative while the M49 command is valid.
1-14 M51 M251 2

M59 M259 2
M51 Spindle Chuck Air Blow ON, M251 Spindle 2 Chuck Air Blow ON,
M59 Spindle Chuck Air Blow OFF, M259 Spindle 2 Chuck Air Blow OFF (Option)
This function automatically keeps the chuck free of chips by

blowing air across the front surface of the headstock.
2 2 NOTE
M251, M259 2 M251 and M259 are available with headstock 2 specifications only.
M
206 M FUNCTIONS
1-15 M52
M252 2
M57
M257 2
M52 Through-Spindle Air Blow ON,
M252 Spindle 2 Through-Spindle Air Blow ON,
M57 Through-Spindle Air Blow OFF,
Air Blow
This function prevents chips from entering the spindle during

inner diameter machining by ejecting air from the through
spindle hole.
2 2 NOTE
M252, M257 2 M252 and M257 are available with headstock 2 specifications only
1-16 M68 1 M268 2

M69 1 M269 2
M68 Spindle 1 Brake Clamp, M268 Spindle 2 Brake Clamp,
M69 Spindle 1 Brake Unclamp, M269 Spindle 2 Brake Unclamp
5 5
1. 1. When carrying out hole machining or heavy-duty cutting at the
1 2 desired positions in the end face or circumference of the
M68, M268 workpiece, specify the M68 or M268 command while spindle 1
or spindle 2 is stopped to apply powerful brake.
2. M69 1 M269 2 2. To carry out ordinary turning operation, specify M69 to unclamp
the brake of spindle 1 and specify M269 to unclamp the brake
of spindle 2.
7 7 CAUTION
2 M68, M268, M45 C 1 With headstock 2 specifications, the chuck interlock
M245 C 2 function is valid only for the spindle for which the M code
was specified last if more than one of M45 (C-axis
connection for spindle 1), M245 (C-axis connection for
spindle 2), M68, and M268 are specified in the same block:
it will not be valid for the other spindle. Therefore,
machining must be carried out using the spindle
corresponding to the M code specified last. If machining
is carried out using the other spindle, the rotary tool
spindle will not stop even if the chuck is unclamped
during machining.
[Workpiece fall/Ejection]
2 2 NOTE
1. C M68, M268 1. When specifying the M68 or M268 command in the state the
M05 1 2 C-axis is not connected, stop spindle 1 or spindle 2 by specifying
1 2 the M05 command. If the M68 or M268 command is specified
M68, M268 EX1424 although spindle 1 or spindle 2 has not stopped, an alarm
message (EX1424) is displayed on the screen and the machine
stops.
M
M FUNCTIONS 207
2. C M69 2. When specifying the M69 command in the state the C-axis is not
M05 connected, stop the rotary tool spindle by specifying the M05
M69 command. If the M69 command is specified although the rotary
EX1426 tool spindle has not stopped, an alarm message (EX1426) is
displayed on the screen and the machine stops.
3. 2 M68 M268 3. With headstock 2 specifications, spindle brake is clamped for both
1 2 of spindles 1 and 2 if either of the M68 and M268 commands is
1 2 specified. To carry out turning by using either spindle 1 or spindle
M69 1 2 2, unclamp the spindle brake for both of spindles 1 and 2 by
specifying the M69 command.
4. 2 M268 4. With headstock 2 specifications, it is not possible to specify an
G329 M268 command in a block that contains a hole machining canned
M268 2 cycle command. However, note that in a synchronized tapping
cycle specified by a G329 command, spindle 2 brake clamping can
be performed by specifying M268.
1-17 M73 M74

M73 Work Unloader OUT, M74 Work Unloader IN (Option)
The work unloader is installed inside the machine and

automatically discharges completed workpieces from the
machine.
The function allows unattended continuous operation with the
use of a bar feeder.
<Conditions under which the work unloader can be
operated>
• • The door is closed
• • The presetter arm is folded up (up/down type)/presetter arm
base is covered (detachable type).
• • Compressed air is supplied.
• “ ” / 2 • The tailstock (spindle) is in the IN status (tailstock
• • The programmable tailstock and steady rest are clamped.
1 “ 1 For in machine running type work unloader, refer to the separate

” volume, “OPERATION MANUAL”.
7 7 CAUTION
1. M73 1. When an M73 command is specified, ensure the turret
is retracted to a position where interference with the
work unloader does not occur when the unloader is on
the chuck side.
2. M73 2. When an M73 command is specified to move the work
unloader to the chuck side, adjust the position of the
work unloader in advance.
[Workpiece fall/Interference/Machine damage]
1 1 For details on adjusting the position of the work unloader,
“ ” refer to the separate volume, OPERATION MANUAL
“ADJUSTING THE WORK UNLOADER (BUILT-IN TYPE)”.
3. 3. If the mass of the workpiece exceeds the capacity of
the work unloader, do not use the work unloader to
unload the workpiece from the machine.
[Machine damage]
4. M73 M74 4. M73 or M74 must be specified in a single block.
When M73 or M74 is specified in a block, G04 must be
G04 specified in the next block to pause the program for a
longer period to enable the work unloader to complete
its IN/OUT movement.
(Work unloader specifications only)
M
208 M FUNCTIONS
5. 5. The work unloader operates irrespective of the turret

position.
B 2 Specify B-axis coordinate values to ensure the work
unloader receives the workpiece correctly without
B interference between the work unloader and the turret
40 mm or spindle 2. Note that the work unloader OUT
2 operation is not possible if the B-axis is at a position
40 mm or more in the minus direction (Headstock 2
specifications).
2 2 NOTE
1. 2 1. With headstock 2 specifications, it is necessary to move the
2 B spindle 2 (B-axis) to an appropriate position on the work unloader
side to enable workpiece discharge after transferring the work
2 unloader to the chuck side. However, note that moving the spindle
B 2 B 2 (B-axis) too close to the work unloader side with the work
unloader positioned on the chuck side may cause interference
2 B 40 mm between the spindle 2 (B-axis) and the work unloader. To avoid
M73 interference, default parameters are set prior to shipment to
disable M73 if the spindle 2 (B-axis) is positioned at more than 40
mm (in the machine coordinate system) on the negative side. This
value must be adjusted by the customer to conform to the
dimensions of the chuck, the jaws, and the workpiece. If necessary
to change this value, contact the Mori Seiki Service Department for
assistance.
2. 2 2. With headstock 2 specifications, the spindle 2 (B-axis) cannot be
2 B moved in the negative direction if the work unloader is on the
chuck side.
Example:
2 The following is a program example for headstock 2
specifications.
O1;
:
:
:
M05; ......................................................................... 2 Stopping spindle 2
G53 B_ ; .................................................................... Moving the headstock 2 to a
2 position enabling the workpiece to
be dropped into the work unloader.
M73; .......................................................................... Work unloader OUT
M47; .......................................................................... Specifies the workpiece ejector
OUT.
M252; ....................................................................... 2 Turning ON through-spindle air blow
(spindle 2)
G04 U_ ;.................................................................... Dwell
G330; ........................................................................ 2 Moving spindle 2 to the machine
zero point
M74; .......................................................................... Work Unloader IN.
M257; ....................................................................... 2 Turning OFF through-spindle air
blow (spindle 2)
M251; ....................................................................... 2 Spindle chuck air blow ON (spindle
2)
G04 U_ ;.................................................................... Dwell
M259; ....................................................................... 2 Spindle chuck air blow OFF (spindle
2)
:
M30;
M
M FUNCTIONS 209
1-18 M85 M86

M85 Automatic Door Open, M86 Automatic Door Close (Option)
8 8 WARNING
MDI For the machines equipped with the robot system, if the
M85 door is opened by the execution of the M85 command
MDI during automatic operation (including the MDI operation),
the operation is continuously executed. Therefore, pay
sufficient care so that you will not touch or stand near the
rotating or moving parts of the machine.
[Entanglement, Workpiece ejection, Coolant and chip
ejection]
7 7 CAUTION
M86 When the automatic door is closed by specifying the M86
command, make sure that your fingers, etc., do not get
M86 caught in the door and that there are no obstacles that will
prevent the door from closing. If your fingers are caught
in the door you could be injured.
2 2 NOTE
1. M85 M86 1. M85 and M86 are valid for the automatic door specifications.
2. M85, M86 2. The M85 and M86 commands are usually used in combination with
the loader, robot system, or other automatic workpiece loading/
unloading equipment.
3. M85 3. Before opening the door by the M85 command, always stop the
spindle and the rotary tool spindle, axis movements, and coolant
discharge.
4. M86 4. Specify the M86 command to close the automatic door at the start
of the program.
Although automatic operation can be executed while the door is
M00, M01, M02, M30 M open, only the following M codes are executable until the door is
M85/M86 M S closed:
M00, M01, M02, M30, and automatic door open/close M codes
(M85, M86)
Other commands such as S codes, and axis movement
commands are not executable until the door is closed.
1-19 M89
M89 Work Counter, Total Counter, Multi Counter (Option)
M89 PC ‘ ’ Each time the M89 command written in a program is read, the
1 ‘CURRENT’ value of the PC work counter increases “1”.
‘PC ’ Set the required number of cycle repetitions for ‘PRESET’ on
‘ ’ the ‘PC WORK COUNTER’ screen before starting the
operation.
‘PC ’ ‘ ’ “100” Suppose “100” is set for ‘PRESET’ on the ‘PC WORK
COUNTER’ screen.
M89 100 If the M89 command is executed 100 times as the program is
executed repeatedly, the NC will be placed in either the cycle
start interlocked state or the block delete valid state according
to your selection.
5 5How the cycle start interlocked state and the block delete valid
state differ from each other is explained below.
Cycle start interlocked state:
M89 When the M89 command has been executed by the preset
number of times, cycle start of automatic operation is disabled.
q In other words, the program is not executed even when the
automatic operation button q [START] (Start) is pressed.
M
210 M FUNCTIONS
Block delete valid state:

M89 The block delete function is invalid until the M89 command is
executed by the preset number of times. After the count-up of
the counter, the block delete function becomes valid.
1 1 For the block delete function, refer to the separate
“ ” volume, OPERATION MANUAL “Signs and Symbols
Entered in Programs”.
2 2 NOTE
1. 1. The internal work counters are standard. Other work counters are
all optional.
2. 2. The work counter and multi counter are used for tool life
management function as well as to control the number of finished
workpieces.
In comparison to the work counter, the total counter is used for
simply counting the number.
3. ‘ ’ 3. Whether the work counter function is used or not is set on the
‘OPERATION PANEL’ screen.
4. 4. If the machine is equipped with a work counter, specify the M89
M89 command at the start of a program which is to be executed
repeatedly so that each execution of the program is correctly
counted by the work counter.
Example:
M89 1 Programming using M89 (1)
The cycle start interlocked state is selected for the count-up
‘ ’ ‘ MAX’ “100” state. “100” is set for ‘WORK LIMIT’ on the ‘TIMER’ screen.
O1;
M89; .......................................................................... O1 The count data of the number of
1 machined workpieces increases “1”
each time program O1 is executed.
N1;
G50 S1500;
G00 T0101;
: Machining program
G00 X200.0 Z150.0 M05;
M30; ......................................................................... O1 100 When the cursor has returned to the
start of the program after the
execution of the program 100 times,
q the program cannot be started even
if the automatic operation button q
[START] (Start) is pressed.
O1;
M89;
M30;
M
M FUNCTIONS 211
Example:
M89 2 Programming using M89 (2)
The program is executed in the block delete function valid
‘ ’ ‘ MAX’ “100” state.
“100” is set for ‘WORK LIMIT’ on the ‘TIMER’ screen.
O1;
M89;.......................................................................... O1 The count data of the number of
1 machined workpieces increases “1”
each time program O1 is executed.
: Machining program
/M99; ........................................................................ O1 100 Until the program O1 is executed
100 times, the block delete function
M99;” is invalid and the “M99;” block is
“O1;” executed.
The cursor returns to “O1”, the start
1 M99 “M98/ of the program and the program is
M198 executed continuously.
M99 ” 213 1 For the function of M99 code, refer
to “M98/M198 Sub-Program Call,
100 M99 Sub-Program End”
“M99;” (page 213).
“M30;” In the execution of the program at
the 100th time, the block delete
function is made valid and the
“M30;” block is executed by skipping
the “M99;” block.
M30;
O1;
M89;
1 − 99
100
/M99;
M30;
1-20 M90 1
M91 1
M290 2
M291 2
M91 Spindle 1/Rotary Tool Spindle Simultaneous Operation Mode OFF,
M291 Spindle 2/Rotary Tool Spindle Simultaneous Operation Mode OFF
M90, M290 The M90 and M290 commands are used to rotate the spindle
and the rotary tool spindle simultaneously to machine a hole at
the center of the spindle (workpiece) at a proper cutting speed
if necessary cutting speed cannot be obtained by rotating only
the spindle or the rotary tool spindle.
M
212 M FUNCTIONS
2 2 NOTE
1. M90, M91 MC Y 1. The M90 and M91 commands can be used only for the MC type
and the Y-axis specification machines.
2. M290, M291 2 MC Y 2. The M290 and M291 commands can be used for MC and Y-axis
specification machines with headstock 2 specifications.
M90 S_ ;
M91;
M290 S_ ;
M291;
• S .......................................... min 1 Specifies the speed of the rotary tool spindle
(min 1).
• M90 ..................................... 1 Simultaneous operation mode of spindle 1
and rotary tool spindle, ON
• M91 ..................................... 1 Simultaneous operation mode of spindle 1
and rotary tool spindle, OFF
• M290 ................................... 2 Simultaneous operation mode of spindle 2
and rotary tool spindle, ON
• M291 ................................... 2 Simultaneous operation mode of spindle 2
and rotary tool spindle, OFF
2 2 NOTE
1. M90, M290 G97 1. Specify the M90 command in the G97 (controlling spindle speed at
constant speed) mode.
2. 2. When determining a feedrate of the rotary tool, the sum of the
spindle speed and the rotary tool spindle speed must be used as
the revolutionary speed of the rotary tool.
3. M90, M290 3. The block where the M90 or M290 command is specified must
M90, M290 always contain the rotary tool spindle speed command. Unless the
M90, M290 rotary tool spindle speed is specified in such a block, the rotary tool
spindle rotates at the spindle speed specified in a previous block.
4. M90, M91, M290, M291 M05 4. Stop the spindle and the rotary tool spindle by specifying the M05
command before specifying the M90, M91, M290, or M291
M90, M91, M290, command. If the M90, M91, M290, or M291 command is specified
M291 EX1424 in the state the spindle and the rotary tool spindle are not stopped,
the machine stops with an alarm message (EX1424) displayed on
the screen.
Example:
2000 min 1 The program for executing hole machining operation (10 mm
1
3000 min 10 mm deep) at the center of the workpiece (spindle) at the spindle
speed of 2000 min 1 and the rotary tool spindle speed of
3000 min 1.
O1;
N1;
M46;
G00 T0101;
M05;
G97;
M90 S3000;............................................................... 1 Turning the simultaneous spindle 1/
rotary tool spindle operation mode
ON
3000 min 1 Setting the rotary tool spindle speed
at 3000 min 1
G97 S2000 M03; ...................................................... 2000 min 1 1 Starting the spindle 1 in the normal
3000 min 1 Starting the rotary tool spindle in the
X0 Z30.0 M08; .......................................................... Positioning of the tool at the center
of the workpiece (spindle) at a rapid
traverse rate
M
M FUNCTIONS 213
Z3.0;
G98 G01 Z 10.0 F500; ............................................ Specifying the feed per minute
500 mm/min mode
10 mm Machining a hole (10 mm deep) at
the feedrate of 500 mm/min
2
2 NOTE
2000 min 1
3000 min 1 Determine the feedrate of the tool
5000 min 1 assuming the spindle speed of
5000 min 1, which is the sum of 2000
min 1 (spindle speed) and 3000 min 1
(rotary tool spindle).
G00 Z10.0 M09;
G99 X200.0 Z150.0 M05; ......................................... 1 Stopping spindle 1 and the rotary
tool spindle
Specifying the feed per revolution
mode
M91;.......................................................................... 1 Turning the simultaneous spindle 1/
rotary tool spindle operation mode
OFF
M01;
1-21 M98/M198 M99

When carrying out machining on a machine equipped with the

bar feeder or the loader, for example, the same machining
cycle is repeated to machine the workpieces. When performing
such operations, the portion of the program executed
repeatedly can be stored in the NC memory as a sub-program
and the sub-program program number and the number of
times the sub-program should be called can be specified in the
main program.
2 2 NOTE
1. 1. It is possible to specify sub-program call from one sub-program to
the other as illustrated below. This is called nesting and allowable
8 nesting level is eight. If sub-program call exceeds this limit, alarm
9 P230 number (P230) is displayed.
2. DNC 2. If the main program is stored in a data server, specify the M98
M98 NC command in the DNC mode. If the main program is stored in NC
‘ ’ M98 M198 memory, specify the M98 or M198 command in the ‘MEMORY’
mode.
1 2 7 8
1st Call 2nd Call 7th Call 8th Call
1 7 8
2 6
Main Sub-Program Sub-Program 2 to 6
Sub-Program Sub-Program
Program 1
7 8
5 5By storing the portion of the program to be executed repeatedly as

a sub-program, required memory capacity can be reduced and
programming errors can be reduced accordingly.
M98 Specify M98 in the format below.
M98 P_ H_ L_ ;
• P .......................................... Specifies sub-program number.
• H .......................................... Specifies the sequence number in the
sub-program.
• L .......................................... Specifies the number of sub-program calls.
M
214 M FUNCTIONS
2 2 NOTE
1. P 1. If the sub-program number specified by address P is not found, an
P232 alarm message (P232) is displayed on the screen.
2. H 2. If the sequence number specified by address H is not found, an
3. L0 3. If “L0” is specified, the M98 block containing such L command is
not executed and the execution of program jumps to the next
block.
5 5
1. P M98 1. If address P is omitted, sub-program is not called but the
H program jumps to the sequence number which is specified by
the H command in the same program in which the M98
command is specified.
2. H P 2. If address H is omitted, the sub-program specified by address
P is called and the called sub-program is executed from the
beginning.
3. P, H, L M98 3. If addresses P, H, and L are omitted, sub-program is not called
and the program jumps to the beginning of the same program
in which the M98 command is specified.
4. L 1 4. If an L command is omitted, the specified sub-program is called
one time.
5. 9999 5. The number of program repetition is max. 9999.
5M198 5By specifying the M198 command, a program in a data server can
NC ‘ be called as a sub-program. Specify the M198 command in the NC
’ M198 program in the ‘MEMORY’ mode and specify the M99 command in
M99 the sub-program in the external I/O device.
M198 P_ H_ L_ ;
• P .......................................... Specifies sub-program number.
• H Specifies the sequence number in the
sub-program.
• L .......................................... Specifies the number of sub-program calls.
2 2 NOTE
1. DNC M198 1. The M198 command cannot be executed in the DNC operation.
2. RS232C M198 2. The M198 command is not available with the RS232C interface in
the electrical cabinet.
3. M198 3. It is not possible to call a program in a data server by specifying the
M198 command in another program in another data server.
M99 P_ ;
• P .......................................... Specifies the sequence number in the main
program, where the program flow should
return. (omissible)
2 2 NOTE
1. P 1. If the sequence number specified by address P is not found, an
2. P 2. If address P is specified, the return sequence number is searched,
which will take a time. Therefore, this must be taken into
P consideration when specifying address P.
5 5
1. P M98 1. If a P command is omitted, the program flow returns to the
block that follows the one where jump to the sub-program has
been made.
M99 P Address P is not normally specified in an M99 block.
M
M FUNCTIONS 215
2. M99 P 2. If “M99 P_ ;” is specified in the main program: The program

P flow jumps to the sequence number specified by P in the main
program. If a P command is omitted, the program flow jumps to
the start of the main program. The main program is executed
endlessly.
Example:
Main program Sub-program

O1; O100;
N001 ; N101 ;
1 N002 M98 P100; N102 ;
N003 ; N103 M99;
N004 ;
2 N005 M98 P200 L2; O200;
N006 ; N201 ;
N202 ;
N203 M99;
2
(Repeats twice)
N011;
3 N012 M98 P300; O300;
N013 ; N301 ;
N014 ; N302 ;
N015 ; N303 M99 P015;
5M98 M198 5The command can also be given with M198 instead of M98.
Example:
O1;
N1;
N2;
:
/N7 M99; ................................................................... When the block delete function is
invalid:
The “N7 M99;” command is
"N7 M99;" executed and the program flow
returns to the start of the program.
The program is repeated endlessly
between N1 and N7 blocks until the
block delete function becomes
invalid.
N8;
M30; .......................................................................... Ends program execution
5 M99 5If the M99 command is executed in a main program, execution

returns to the start block of that main program and the same main
program is executed again. This programming is used for
executing the same program repeatedly in such as a warm up
program.
1-22 M200 M201

M200 Chip Conveyor Forward Rotation Start, M201 Chip Conveyor Stop
8 8 WARNING
Do not attempt to reach inside the chip conveyor or put
your feet in it while it is operating.
[Entanglement]
M
216 M FUNCTIONS
7 7 CAUTION
Keep the chip conveyor operating during automatic
operation. If chips accumulate on the chip conveyor, it
cannot discharge the chips.
[Damage to the chip conveyor]
1 “ ” 1 For the chip conveyor buttons, refer to the separate volume,

1-23 M382
M383
M382 Bed Cover Chip Flush Coolant ON/Chuck Top Coolant ON,
M383 Bed Cover Chip Flush Coolant OFF/Chuck Top Coolant OFF (Option)
2 2 NOTE
M382, M383 M382 and M383 are valid when “1” is set to the parameter No. 6419.7
No. 6419.7 = 1 with the bed cover chip flush coolant specification machine.
Normally, when the chip conveyor is operated, bed cover chip
flush coolant or chuck top coolant are discharged (parameter
No. 6419.7 = 0 No. 6419.7 = 0 (default setting)).
The bed cover chip flush coolant and chuck top coolant can be
turned OFF individually by each manual valve.
<Chuck Top Coolant>
1
Spindle 1
1-24 M432
M432 Work Unloader Cycle Function (Option)
2 2 With headstock 2 specifications, it is possible to carry out a

1 machining cycle again on the headstock side for the workpiece
machined in the headstock 2 after completion of the cycle
indicated below.
2 D D Headstock 2 stop D Work unloader OUT D Workpiece
D ejection D Work unloader IN
The program does not advance to the next block while the
cycle indicated above is executed.
M432 By using the M432 command, it is possible to execute the next
block of the program simultaneously with the execution of the
cycle indicated above.
2 1 This allows the workpiece to be machined in spindle 1
immediately after the completion of machining in spindle 2.
7 7 CAUTION
1. 2 1. Use the work unloader cycle function before machining
1 the workpiece again in spindle 1 after it has been
machined in spindle 2. And adjust the position of the
work unloader in advance.
[Work piece fall/Interference/Machine damage]
1 1 Concerning details on adjusting the position of the work
“ ” unloader, and retract position on the TAILSTOCK screen,
M
M FUNCTIONS 217
refer to the separate volume, OPERATION MANUAL

“ADJUSTING THE WORK UNLOADER (BUILT-IN TYPE)”.
2. 2. The work unloader operates irrespective of the turret
B 2 position. Specify B-axis coordinate values to ensure
the work unloader receives the workpiece correctly
B without interference between the work unloader and
40 mm the turret or spindle 2. Note that the work unloader OUT
operation is not possible if the B-axis is at a position
2
40 mm or more in the minus direction (Headstock 2
specifications).
2 2 NOTE
only.
2. 2 2. The chuck clamp and unclamp commands (M210, M211) for the
M210, M211 headstock 2 cannot be executed during the work unloader cycle.
3. 3. If the following operations are specified during the work unloader
cycle, execution is performed after completion of the work unloader
cycle.
• B • B-axis movement command
• M34 • Phase synchronized operation (M34)
• M35 • Speed synchronized operation (M35)
• M71 • Arm DOWN command (M71) for the automatic in-machine tool
presetter
• M30 • Manual door open command (M30)
• M85 • Automatic door open command (M85)
• 2 M203/M204 • Spindle normal/reverse rotation command
<spindle 2> (M203/M204)
• 2 M219 • Spindle orientation command <spindle 2> (M219)
• 2 M251 • Spindle chuck air blow command <spindle 2> (M251)
4. 2 B 40 mm 4. Use of an M432 command when the headstock 2 (B-axis) is
M432 positioned at 40 mm or more in the negative direction (machine
coordinate system) is prohibited.
5. 2 B M432 5. If the headstock 2 (B-axis) positioning command is specified with a
2 B M432 M432 command in the same block, the M432 command is
executed after completion of headstock 2 (B-axis) positioning.
Example:
The following is an example program for the machine
equipped with the bar feeder.
O1;
: 2 Machining program (machining of
: workpiece in headstock 2)
:
G53 B_ ;.................................................................... Moving headstock 2 to a position
2 enabling the workpiece to be
dropped into the work unloader.
M432; ....................................................................... Specifies the work unloader cycle.
2 2 NOTE
2 Spindle 2 stops rotating
N10;
M11; ......................................................................... 1 Spindle 1 chuck unclamp.
G04 U_ ; ................................................................... 1 Calling for dwell; program execution
is suspended to allow the chuck of
spindle 1 to unclamp correctly
M70; ......................................................................... Feeding the bar stock from the bar
feeder to the machine
M10; ......................................................................... 1 Spindle 1 chuck clamp.
M
218 M FUNCTIONS
G04 U_ ; ................................................................... 1 Calling for dwell; program execution

is suspended to allow the chuck of
spindle 1 to clamp correctly
G330; ....................................................................... 2 Moving headstock 2 to the machine
zero point.
1-25 M458 M459

M458 Tool Tip Air Blow ON, M459 Tool Tip Air Blow OFF (Option)
This function prevents chips from entering the tool by blowing

air across the tool tip.
1-26 M478 M479

M478 Through-Spindle Coolant ON, M479 Through-Spindle Coolant OFF (Option)
2 2 NOTE
1. M478, M479 1 ) 1. The M478 and M479 commands can be used with through-spindle
coolant specifications (spindle 1) only.
2. 2. The through-spindle coolant can be turned OFF by the manual
valve.
<Through-Spindle Coolant>
1-27 M480C M46C

M480 Calls C-Axis Synchronized Operation Mode
M46 C-Axis Synchronous Mode Cancel
2 1 C 2 C The M480 command is used with headstock 2 specifications to

1 2 synchronize C-axis indexing of spindles 1 and 2. This control is
necessary to perform milling operations by clamping a
workpiece in both spindle 1 and spindle 2.
1
Follows Spindle 1 Operation
M480 <M480 Operation>

M480 C The M480 command executes the series of operation as
M480 indicated below. If the M480 command is specified again
although the C-axis synchronous mode is already called,
execution of the command ends without operation.
1 1 C Operation 1:
C-axis connection for spindle 1
2 1 C Operation 2:
C-axis zero return for spindle 1
3 2 C Operation 3:
4 2 C Operation 4:
C-axis zero return for spindle 2
M
M FUNCTIONS 219
5 1 C Operation 5:
6 1 2 C Operation 6:
C-axis synchronous mode ON for spindle 1 and spindle 2
2 2 NOTE
1. M480 1. For the execution of the M480 command, the conditions below
must be satisfied.
• • The spindles are stopped.
• C • The spindles are in the C-axis connection canceled state
(turning operation mode).
• 1 2 • Either the spindle 1 or spindle 2 chuck is in the unclamped state.
2. C 2. The C-axis synchronous mode is not canceled by the reset

operation. The mode is canceled by any of the operations below.
• M46 • Execution of the M46 command
• P` • Selection of main spindle using the spindle selection buttons P
` at the operation panel
• OFF • Turning the machine ready state off (emergency stop, etc.)
3. 1 2 2 3. To align the spindle phase (chuck jaw positions) between spindle 1
C and spindle 2, set appropriate value for the C-axis zero return
position shift parameter of spindle 2.
#2027 G28 sft C 2 0.001 Parameter #2027 G28 sft <C> (spindle 2 side) (Unit: 0.001 )
4. C B 4. Even during milling operation in the C-axis synchronous mode,
1 2 B-axis feed is enabled. While a workpiece is clamped by both
B spindle 1 and spindle 2, pay attention so that the B-axis will not be
moved.
1-28 M560 M561

M560 Rotary Tool Spindle Reverse Rotation Mode ON, M561 Rotary Tool Spindle Reverse Rotation
Mode OFF
MC C With MC specifications, if M560 is specified while C-axis is

M560 connected or spindle brake is clamped, rotary tool spindle
M560 reverse rotation mode is validated and the rotary tool spindle
rotates in the reverse direction. M560 is used to execute
synchronized tapping cycle in the reverse direction.
Example:
M560, M561 Programming using M560/M561
G99; ......................................................................... Specifying the feed per revolution

mode.
M45; ......................................................................... C C-axis connection
G28 H0; .................................................................... C Returning the C-axis to the machine
T0101; zero point
G97; ......................................................................... Constant spindle speed command
G00 X150.0 Z30.0 C30.0; ........................................ Positioning at the hole machining
start position and the initial point at
a rapid traverse rate
M560; ....................................................................... Rotary tool spindle reverse rotation
mode ON
M329 S300; .............................................................. Calling a synchronized tapping
G88 Z _ R 15.0 F600 K0; cycle
G80; ......................................................................... Canceling the side synchronized
G00 X200.0 Z100.0 M09; (M329 G88) tapping cycle (M329 G88)
M05; ......................................................................... Rotary tool spindle rotation stop
M561; ....................................................................... Rotary tool spindle reverse rotation
mode OFF
M01;
M
220 M FUNCTIONS
1-29 M611 Y M610 Y

M611 Y-Axis Zero Point Interlock Invalid, M610 Y-Axis Zero Point Interlock Valid
M611 Y By specifying M611, turning can be carried out even when the
Y-axis is not at the workpiece zero point.
Y For example, M611 is specified when machining a workpiece
using an O. D. cutting tool Y-shape dual-tool holder.
M611 M611 is canceled by the following operations.
• M610 • M610 command
• • Turret head rotation
• • MRDY OFF
2 2 NOTE
M611 T M611 must be specified before T command.
T M611 Otherwise, M611 will be canceled by turret head rotation.
1-30 M661 M662

M661 Steady Rest Coolant ON, M662 Steady Rest Coolant OFF (Option)
2 2 NOTE
NL3000 2000 NL3000 This function is valid only for the automatic centering type steady rest
3000 of the NL3000 series/2000 and NL3000 series/3000.
NL3000 2000 NL3000 3000 When M661 is specified with the automatic centering type
M661 steady rest of the NL3000 series/2000 or NL3000 series/3000,
& coolant is discharged to the roller part and rack & pinion part of
the steady rest. Steady rest coolant specifically for the roller
& part prevents chips from being caught in the roller part. Steady
rest coolant specifically for the rack & pinion part prevents wear
by preventing chips from being caught in the rack & pinion part.
2 2 NOTE
1. 1. Steady rest coolant for the roller part is optional with the automatic
centering type steady rest.
2. & 2. Steady rest coolant for the rack & pinion part is standard with the
automatic centering type steady rest.
5 5
1. 1. When the steady rest is unclamped, steady rest coolant for the
& M661 rack & pinion part is always discharged without M661.
2. 2. When the steady rest is unclamped, specify M661 to discharge

& M661 steady rest coolant for the rack & pinion part.
1-31 M712 M713

M712 Tailstock Spindle Interlock Function OFF, M713 Tailstock Spindle Interlock Function OFF
Cancel
M712 When the tailstock spindle interlock function is valid, specifying

the M712 command sets the tailstock spindle interlock function
in the OFF state temporarily.
2 2 NOTE
1. M 1. When specifying the M codes below in the state that the tailstock
M712 M712 spindle interlock function is valid and the tailstock is IN, specify the
M M712 command in advance. An alarm (EX1345) occurs if any of
(EX1345) the M codes below are specified without the M712 command
• M03 • M03 .......... Spindle rotation in the normal direction
• M04 • M04 .......... Spindle rotation in the reverse direction
• M13 • M13 .......... Rotary tool spindle rotation in the normal direction
• M14 • M14 .......... Rotary tool spindle rotation in the reverse direction
M
M FUNCTIONS 221
• M19 1 • M19.......... Spindle orientation 1

• M20 2 • M20.......... Spindle orientation 2
• M45 .......... C • M45.......... C-axis joint
• M329 • M329........ Synchronized tapping mode ON
2. M712 (EX0333) 2. If the M712 command is specified when the tailstock spindle is
OUT, an alarm (EX0333) occurs.
3. M712 3. The M712 command is canceled by the operations below.
• M713 • When the M713 command is specified.
• h • When the h (RESET) key is pressed.
• • When the tailstock spindle OUT operation is completed.
1-32 M2200
M2200 Pre-Read Stop
NC When stopping pre-read by NC intentionally, specify M2200

M2200 where pre-read needs to be stopped.
2 2 NOTE
M2200 Specify M2200 in a block without other commands.
1-33 I/F M
Bar Feeder I/F and M Code Commands (Bar Feeder Specifications)
7 7 CAUTION
When using a bar feeder, check the length, mass, and
diameter of the bar stock to be handled and the bar stock
exceeding the capacity of the bar feeder must not be used.
Bar feeder can feed a bar stock through the spindle from the
5 rear side. The following five types of interface for bar feeders
are available.
• 1 1 • Type 1 (Alps, single bar stock type)
• 2 • Type 2 (Alps, multiple bar stock type)
• 3 LNS 1 • Type 3 (LNS, single bar stock type)
• 4 LNS • Type 4 (LNS, multiple bar stock type)
• 5 LNS • Type 5 (LNS, multiple bar stock type) (servo type)
M M codes that can be used for each type are as shown below.
M 1 2 3 4 5
M Code Contents Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Type 4 Type 5
M70 @ @ \ @ @
M70 Bar feeder operation Supplies a bar stock from the bar
feeder to the machine
M482 \ | \ @ @
M482 Bar stock change Supplies a bar stock from the
stocker to the bar feeder
M483 \ \ \ @ \
M483 Bar stock feed OFF Stops feeding a bar stock
M690 \ @* \ \ \
M690 Signal for bar stock feed Enables bar feeding per one
workpiece several times
| ASQ-80, ASQ-51 | Only for ASQ-80 and ASQ-51

M
222 M FUNCTIONS
2 2 NOTE
1. * M70 1. *On an Alps bar feeder, specifying M70 feeds the bar stock. When
there is a short bar stock remnant, a top cut signal is output and
M70 under this condition, specifying M70 executes a bar change
1 operation instead of feeding the bar stock. Therefore, if a top cut
M70 signal is output during machining of a workpiece that requires
several bar feed operations, the workpiece cannot be completed
M690 with M70. In such a case, specify M690 to enable bar feed even
when a top cut signal is output.
2. M70 M11 2. Before feeding a bar stock into the machine by specifying M70,
M10 unclamp the chuck by specifying M11. After feeding, clamp the
chuck by specifying M10.
3. 3. The door on the bar feeder side cannot be opened during spindle
rotation. (The spindle cannot be rotated while the door on the bar
feeder side is open.)
1 Example 1:
1 1 Type 1 (Alps, single bar stock type)
2 Processing a block delete 2 when all the bar stock has
been used
O1111;
: Machining program
M11; ......................................................................... Chuck unclamp
M70; ......................................................................... Bar stock feed ON
M10; ......................................................................... Chuck clamp
: Machining program
M89; ......................................................................... Work counter/total counter
/2 M99; ..................................................................... Returning to the start

M11; ......................................................................... Chuck unclamp
M70; ......................................................................... Disposing of the remaining stock
M30;
2 Example 2:
2 Type 2 (Alps, multiple bar stock type)
2 Processing a block delete 2 when the top cut signal is
output
O1111;
: Machining program
M11; ......................................................................... Chuck unclamp
M10; ......................................................................... Chuck clamp
: Program for machining the end of
the bar stock (top cut machining)
N100;
: Machining program
M11; ......................................................................... Chuck unclamp
M10; ......................................................................... Chuck clamp
: Machining program
/2 M99 P100; ............................................................ N100 Returning to N100

M99; ......................................................................... Returning to the start
3 Example 3:
2 Type 2 (Alps, multiple bar stock type)
output
M
M FUNCTIONS 223
1 (When several bar feed operations are performed per

workpiece)
O1111;
: Machining program
M11; ......................................................................... Chuck unclamp
M70;.......................................................................... Bar stock feed ON
M10; ......................................................................... Clamping of the chuck
N100;
: Machining program
M11; ......................................................................... Chuck unclamp
M690; ....................................................................... Bar stock feed ON
M10; ......................................................................... Chuck clamp
: Machining program

4 Example 4:
3 LNS 1 Type 3 (LNS, single bar stock type)
2 Processing a block delete 2 when all the bar stock has
been used
O1111;
: Machining program
M11; ......................................................................... Chuck unclamp
G04 X3.0; ................................................................. Feeding bar stock
M10; ......................................................................... Chuck clamp
: Machining program
/2 M99; ..................................................................... Returning to the start

M11; ......................................................................... Chuck unclamp
G04 X3.0; ................................................................. Disposing of the remaining stock
M30;
5 Example 5:
4 LNS Type 4 (LNS, multiple bar stock type)
output
O1111;
: Machining program
M11; ......................................................................... Chuck unclamp
M10; ......................................................................... Chuck clamp
M483; ....................................................................... Bar stock feed OFF
N100;
: Machining program
M11; ......................................................................... Chuck unclamp
M
224 M FUNCTIONS
M10; ......................................................................... Chuck clamp

M483; ....................................................................... Bar stock feed OFF
: Machining program

M482; ....................................................................... Bar stock change
6 Example 6:
5 LNS Type 5 (LNS, multiple bar stock type) (servo type)
2 Processing a block delete 2 all the time, but not
2 processing a block delete 2 when the top cut signal is
output
O1111 O1111: Workpiece machining program
O1112 + O1112: Bar stock change + program for machining the
end of the bar stock
O1111;
/2 M98 P1112;
M11; ......................................................................... Chuck unclamp
M10; ......................................................................... Chuck clamp
: Machining program
O1112;
M11; ......................................................................... Chuck clamp
M482; ....................................................................... Bar stock change
M10; Chuck clamp
M99; ......................................................................... Returning to the main program
PROGRAM TO SHORTEN PROCESSING TIME 225
2
G97 G96 If the G97 command is specified before tools are exchanged,
the spindle speed is raised while the G96 command is in effect
in order to shorten the time required for spindle acceleration/
deceleration.
<Example of Former Program>
G50 S2000;............................................................... The spindle stops.

G00 T0202; .............................................................. The spindle remains
stopped while the tool is
selected.
G96 S180 M03;......................................................... 191 min 1 Rotating at the speed of 191
min 1 from the stopped
state.
D DResulting in loss of
machining time
X70.0 Z10.0; ............................................................ 191 min 1 818 min 1 The speed increases from
191 min 1 to 818 min 1
G01 Z5.0 F0.25;........................................................ 818 min 1 Machining the workpiece at
an RPM of 818 min 1
G00 X300.0 Z200.0; ................................................. 191 min 1 After the machining
operation, the speed
decreases to 191 min 1 and
the tool moves to the point
where the turret head can be
rotated.
G50 S2000; D DResulting in loss of
G00 T0404; machining time
G96 S180 M03;......................................................... (191 RPM regulated. (191
min 1) min 1)
X50.0 Z10.0; ............................................................. 1146 The speed increases up to
min 1 1146 min 1 for finishing.
G01 Z5.0 F0.25;........................................................ 1146 min 1 Finishing at RPM of 1146
min 1
G00 X300.0 Z200.0; ................................................. 191 min 1 After the machining
operation, the speed
decreases to 191 min 1 and
the tool moves to the point
where the turret head can be
rotated.
D DResulting in loss of
machining time
M30; ......................................................................... The spindle stops.
In former programs, as each cutting pass finished the spindle
speed slowed down and it was necessary to speed up again
before the next cutting could start. This time spent on
acceleration/deceleration (shown with an underline) caused
idle time.
<Program To Shorten Processing Time>
G97 S818 M1003;..................................................... * The spindle starts rotating.*
G50 S2000; The spindle increases its speed
G00 T0202; gradually while the next tool is being
G96 S180 X70.0 Z10.0; D indexed.
D Reduced machining time
G01 Z5.0 F0.25;........................................................ 818 min 1 The workpiece is machined at an
RPM of 818 min 1
226 PROGRAM TO SHORTEN PROCESSING TIME
G97 G00 X300.0 Z100.0 1146 min 1 The speed increases up to 1146
S1146 M1003; .......................................................... min 1 for finishing.
G50 S2000; Immediately after finishing one
G00 T0404; process, the spindle speed is
G96 S180 X50.0 Z10.0; adjusted for the next process.
D D Reduced machining time
G01 Z2.0 F0.25; ........................................................ 1146 min 1 The workpiece is machined at an
RPM of 1146 min 1
G97 G00 X300.0 Z200.0; ......................................... The tool moves to the point where
the turret head can be rotated
without decreasing the rotational
speed.
M30; The tool returns to the zero point
after completing machining without
D reducing the spindle speed.
D Reduced machining time
2 2 NOTE
* M M1003 * Quick M code M1003 can start execution of the commands in the
next block without waiting for the spindle rotation completion signal.
In the program to shorten processing time, no idle time occurs
where the spindle speed reaches the cutting feedrate in one go
before cutting is started.
2 The following graph shows a comparison of the two programs.
Conventional Program (Spindle 1

Speed) 1146 min
1
818 min
1
191 min
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1
Improved Program (Machining Time Reduced) (Spindle Speed) Reduction of 1 Second
1
1146 min
818 min 1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
5 5Note that the operation time can also be reduced by using the
in-machine running type work unloader (option).
1 “ ” 1 For the automatic operation, refer to the separate volume,

3
3èÕ T, S, F
CHAPTER 3
CHAPTER 3 T, S, F FUNCTIONS
1 T 229
T FUNCTION
2 S 239
S FUNCTION
3 F 241
F FUNCTION
T
T FUNCTION 229
1 T
T FUNCTION
2 2 NOTE
R Tool tip R is not taken into consideration in program examples provided
in this chapter.
T The T function is used to select the specified tool and to set the
coordinate system using the tool offset.
R It also reads the data necessary to execute the automatic tool
nose radius offset function.
1 “ R ” 247 1 “AUTOMATIC TOOL NOSE RADIUS OFFSET” (page 247)
T 4 A four-digit number entered following address T specifies a tool
number and an tool offset number.
A tool number is the same as the number of the turret station
12 where the tool is installed. Therefore, the 12-station turret has
1 12 the tool numbers “1” to “12”.
1 “ ” 230 “ ” 232 1 “Tool Geometry Offset” (page 230), “Tool Wear Offset”
(page 232)
T[[[[;
• T[[[[; ............................ 2 The first two digits of a T number:
Tool number and tool geometry offset
2 number
<Headstock 2 Specifications>:
Tool number
• T[[[[; ............................ 2 The last two digits of a T number:
2 Tool wear offset number.
<Headstock 2 Specifications>:
The tool geometry number and tool wear
offset number
2 2 NOTE
2 With headstock 2 specifications, always set the same offset number in
the tool geometry offset data and the tool wear offset data.
T <Settings Relating to Offset Numbers and T Codes>
NC
NC Parameter Setting Value Function
T 2
0 T 2
The first two digits of the T command: Tool number
The last two digits of the T command: Geometry and wear offset number
No. 1098
T 2
1 T 2
The first two digits of the T command: Tool and geometry offset number
The last two digits of the T command: Wear offset number
2 2 NOTE
Y NC No. 1098 When using an O.D. Y-axis double holder, set NC parameter No.1098
0 to 0.
5 5
1. T 2 1. The last two digits of the T command (wear offset number) are
as follows;
1 10 10 1 12 12 1 16 16 1 1 - 10 (10 stations), 1 - 12 (12 stations), 1 - 16 (16 stations), or
20 20 1 - 20 (20 stations).
2. 2 T 2 2. With the headstock 2 specifications, the last two digits of the T
command (geometry and wear offset number) are as follows;
1 P 1 10 10 1 12 12 When (spindle 1) P button is selected: 1 - 10 (10 stations), 1 -
1 16 16 1 20 20 12 (12 stations), 1 - 16 (16 stations), or 1 - 20 (20 stations).
T
230 T FUNCTION
2 ` 17 26 10 17 28 12 When (spindle 2) ` button is selected: 17 - 26 (10 stations),

17 32 16 21 40 20 17 - 28 (12 stations), 17 - 32 (16 stations), or 21 - 40 (20
stations).
Example:
• T0101 1 Spindle 1
• T0117 2 Spindle 2
• T0121 2 20 Spindle 2 (20 stations)
3. 3. If the machine has the manual coordinate system function
(option), the coordinate system can also be set by indexing the
turret in manual mode.
2 2 NOTE
‘ ’ When the manual coordinate system function (option) is valid,
the offset numbers above are validated by indexing the turret in
manual mode, even if the cursor follow-up function on the
‘TOOL GEOMETRY OFFSET’ screen is invalid.
4. MDI 4. When setting the workpiece zero point with the tool offset data
MAPPS 1 read in MDI mode, set the following MAPPS parameter to 1:
No. 754 = 1 No. 754 = 1:
T : Work coordinate system setting function that requires turret
indexed by the T command: Valid
2 2 NOTE
No. 754 = 1 With No. 754 = 1, the work coordinate system cannot be set by
indexing the turret manually.
1 “ 1 For how to set the work coordinate system, refer to the
” “ ” separate volume, OPERATION MANUAL “SETTING
TOOL GEOMETRY OFFSET VALUE” and “SETTING
OF COORDINATE SYSTEM”
1-1
Tool Geometry Offset
The data which describes the distance between workpiece

X0, Z0 zero point (X0, Z0) and the tool nose of the cutting tool
positioned at the machine zero point, is called the tool
geometry offset data.
NC The workpiece zero point is determined and the coordinate
XZ system (X-Z) set when the NC reads the tool geometry offset
data.
2 2 NOTE
X The tool geometry offset data in the X-axis should be set in diameters.
T
T FUNCTION 231
Example:
Specifying the tool geometry offset
1 An O.D. cutting tool is mounted in station No. 1, as shown in
the diagram.
Machine Zero Point

+X
450
(T01)
240
+Z
X0, Z0
Workpiece Zero Point (X0, Z0)
Tool Tool No. Tool Geometry Offset No. Tool Geometry Offset Data
1 X 240 mm
T01
O.D. Cutting Tool Tool No. 1 Z 450 mm
2 2 NOTE
Input the tool geometry offset data as a negative value.
O1;
N1; ........................................................................... (O.D.)
G50 S2000;
G00 T0101; ............................................................... “T0101” With the “T0101” command, the
1 workpiece zero point is set at the
‘ ’ position which is away from the
1 programmed point (tool nose) of tool
No. 1, positioned at the machine
zero point, by the tool geometry
offset data of tool No. 1 in the
‘TOOL GEOMETRY OFFSET’
screen.
G96 S120 M03;
:
M01;
2 2 NOTE
It is not necessary to cancel the tool geometry offset data for each
T cutting tool; the offset data is automatically canceled when the tool
geometry offset command (T command) is read for the next tool.
8 8 WARNING
G50 When the coordinate system is set using G50, the start
and end points of the part program must be the same
point.
At the end of a part program, the tool wear offset data of
the cutting tool used to set the coordinate system must be
canceled.
T
232 T FUNCTION
If you do not cancel the tool wear offset data, the X and Y
coordinate values will be shifted by the tool wear offset
data each time the program is executed. Displacement of
the start and end points will shift the start point of the
program, which could cause interference.
N1;
G50 X240.0 Z450.0;
G00 T0101; ............................................................... 1 Indexing the No. 1 tool.
: Machining program
G00 X240.0 Z450.0;.................................................. The end point of a part program
must be the same point as the start
point of the next part program.
T0100;....................................................................... Canceling the tool wear offset data
M01;
7 7 CAUTION
G50 When the coordinate system is set using G50, do not input
the tool geometry offset data. If tool geometry offset data
is input, the workpiece zero point will be shifted by the
amount of the tool geometry offset data, which could
cause interference.
1-2
Tool Wear Offset
If the tool position is offset using the tool geometry offset data,
it is simply the static offsetting. In actual cutting, dynamic
offsetting is also necessary to compensate for deflection of
cutting tool and elastic deformation in mechanical system
generated by the cutting force. In addition, compensation for
initial wear and wear during production of the cutting tools must
also be made. The tool wear offset function is used for
dynamic offsetting to finish the workpiece within the specified
tolerance.
2 2 NOTE
X The tool wear offset data in the X-axis should be set in diameters.
Example:
1 Specifying the tool wear offset (1)
T
T FUNCTION 233
2 2 NOTE
The illustration below shows the tool paths, before and after offset for
tool wear.
+X Z
Z-Axis Coordinate Value
X
X-Axis Offset Data
After Tool Wear Offset
Before Tool Wear Offset

( 0.060) Z
Z-Axis Offset Data
(0.030)
X
X-Axis Coordinate Data

(in Diameter)
Tool Tool No. Tool Wear Offset No. Tool Wear Offset Data
1 X 0.06 mm
T01
O.D. Cutting Tool Tool No. 1 Z 0.03 mm
O1;
N1; (O.D.)
G50 S2500;
G00 T0101; ............................................................... “T0101” ‘ With “T0101” command, the tool
’ 1 position is offset by the offset data of
tool No. 1 in the ‘TOOL WEAR
OFFSET’ screen.
G96 S120 M03;
: Machining program
M01;
5 5The same procedure is used for other tools. In a program, only the
tool wear offset number is specified in a T command. The actual
offset data to be input must be found by the operator.
2 2 NOTE
1. 1. It is not necessary to cancel the tool wear offset data for each
T cutting tool; the offset data is automatically canceled when the tool
wear offset command (T command) is read for the next tool.
2. T ‘ ’ 2. The tool position is shifted by the amount set on the ‘TOOL WEAR
OFFSET’ screen when a T command is executed.
Example:
2 2 Specifying the tool wear offset (2) (Adjusting
dimensions at two or more places)
1 By assigning more than one tool wear offset number for a
single tool, it is possible to adjust the tool paths by different
amounts to offset the cutting at two or more places.
When cutting a workpiece with multiple steps, as illustrated
below, and if the tolerance at each diameter is strict, it is
1 difficult to finish the workpiece to the required accuracy if the
tool position is offset uniformly at each diameter. In this
case, it is necessary to use different offset data for each
diameter. After cutting the first workpiece, measure the
T
234 T FUNCTION
diameters and adjust the offset data as measured for each

diameter to finish the workpiece within the specified
tolerance.
2 2 NOTE
2 This feature cannot be used with headstock 2 specifications.
60 0.015
80 00.01
40 00.02
5
0
100
20
10 Rapid Traverse
15
Cutting Feed
O1;
N1;
G50 S3000;
G00 T0101; .............................................................. 1 40, 60 Using the tool specified in this block,
40 mm and 60 mm diameter
portions are machined using the
offset data of tool wear offset
number 1.
G96 S180 M03;
X16.0 Z20.0 M08;
G01 Z0 F1.0;
X39.99 F0.2;
Z 5.0 F0.1;
X59.99 F0.2;
Z 10.0 F0.1;
X80.0 Z 10.0 T0111 F0.2; ....................................... 11 80 Using the tool specified in this block,
80 mm diameter portion is
machined using the offset data of
tool wear offset number 11.
Z 15.0 F0.1;
X104.0 F0.2;
G00 X150.0 Z100.0 M09;
M01;
This is summarized in the table below.
Tool Wear Offset Data

Offset Direction
01 11
X 0.235 mm 0.230 mm
Z 0.150 mm 0.150 mm
01 11 First, set the same tool offset data to the tool wear offset
Nos. 01 and 11. After cutting a workpiece, measure the
dimensions and adjust the tool wear offset data so that the
dimensions can be finished within the specified tolerance.
2 2 NOTE
1. 01 1. For first cutting, set the same tool geometry offset and tool wear
11 offset data for both tool offset data of Nos. 01 and 11.
T
T FUNCTION 235
2. 2 Z 2. For the offset data in the Z-axis of the two tool wear offset number,
always set the same offset data.
Example:
3 Specifying the tool wear offset (3) (Adjusting a taper
angle)
The tool wear offset data may be used in a special method.
Check the cut taper with a gage. It is possible to adjust the
finished taper using the results obtained from checking the
contact between the cut taper and the gage.
2 2 NOTE
Rapid Traverse
Cutting Feed
1
1/4
Taper 1/4
106.37 +0.01
0
45
120
O1;
N1;
G50 S2000;
G00 T0101; .............................................................. 1 Using the tool specified in this block,
ordinary offset for dimensions is
made using the offset data of tool
wear offset number 1.
G96 S180 M03;
X40.0 Z20.0 M08;
G01 Z0 F1.0;
X76.375 F0.2;
X106.375 Z 120.0 T0111 F0.05; ............................. 11 Using the tool specified in this block,
taper angle is adjusted using the
number 11.
X130.0 F0.25;
G00 X250.0 Z100.0 M09;
M01;
<To Adjust the Taper Angle>
• a X • Change the X Value of Point a
T
236 T FUNCTION
• b Z • Change the Z Value of Point b
2 2
1
1

Offset Direction
01 11
X 0.196 mm 0.199 mm
Z 0.270 mm 0.270 mm
01 11 First, set the same tool offset data to the tool wear offset
2 2 NOTE
1. 01 11 1. For first cutting, set the same tool wear offset data for both tool
offset data of Nos. 01 and 11.
2. 2. Specify the new offset data (11) without canceling the existing
offset data (01).
3. 3. Specify the new offset number (11) at the taper cutting command
point.
4. 2 X Z 4. Since either of the X or Z offset data of the two tool wear offset
numbers is taken as the reference of the taper, always specify the
same data for both offset numbers (01, 11).
5. R “0” 5. The program is created assuming that tool nose radius is R0.
6. 6. When straight machining is specified in the program and executing
X taper offset using tool ware offset, add the command in
T parentheses shown below even if there is no X-axis movement. If
X X-axis movement is not specified in the block with the T command,
taper offset is validated in the next block.
No. 1100 = 1 Parameter No. 1100 = 1 (default setting)
G00 T0101; G00 T0101;
X100.0 Z1.0; X100.0 Z1.0;
G01 (X100.0) Z 50.0 F0.2 T0111; G01 (X100.0) Z 50.0 F0.2 T0111;
Example:
4 Specifying the tool wear offset (4) (Adjusting the groove
width)
In a grooving operation, the cut groove width might fall
outside the specified tolerance due to tool wear. To offset,
the groove width can be adjusted by setting different tool
wear offset data for the right side wall and for the left side
wall.
T
T FUNCTION 237
2 2 NOTE
5
5
6
3 7
1
4 8
C1 C1
5 2 9
6
100
20
95
Rapid Traverse
Cutting Feed
O1;
N1;
G50 S500;
G00 T0101; ............................................................... 1 Using the tool specified in this block,
ordinary offset for dimensions is
made using the offset data of tool
wear offset number 1.
G96 S80 M03;
X110.0 Z20.0 M08;
G01 Z 19.5 F2.0;
X102.0;.................................................................. a
X95.1 F0.1; .......................................................... b
X102.0 F0.5; ......................................................... a
Z 22.0;.................................................................. c
X98.0 Z 20.0 F0.07; ............................................. d
X95.0;.................................................................... e
X102.0 W0.1 F0.5; ................................................ f
X102.0 Z 17.0 F1.0 T0111; .................................. g 11 Using the tool specified in this block,
groove width is adjusted using the
number 11.
X98.0 Z 19.0 F0.07; ............................................. h
X95.0;.................................................................... i
X95.0 Z 20.0 T0101 F0.1; .................................... e 1 Using the tool specified in this block,
G00 X110.0 W0.5; ordinary offset for dimensions is
Z20.0; made using the offset data of tool
X150.0 Z100.0; wear offset number 1.
:

Offset Direction
01 11
X 0.160 mm 0.160 mm
Z 0.325 mm 0.315 mm
01 11
T
238 T FUNCTION
First, set the same tool offset data to the tool wear offset
2 2 NOTE
1. 01 11 1. For first cutting, set the same tool wear offset data for both tool
offset data of Nos. 01 and 11.
2. 2. Specify the new offset data (11) without canceling the existing
offset data (01).
3. Z 3. Specify the new offset number (11) in the block where Z-axis
Z 17.0 movement (Z 17.0) is specified at the position the cutting tool has
released from the workpiece.
4. 2 X 4. For the X offset data, specify the same data for both offset
numbers (01, 11).
5. R “0” 5. The program is created assuming that tool nose radius is R0.
S
S FUNCTION 239
2 S
S FUNCTION
S The S function is used to specify the rotation speed and the
S surface speed of the spindle or the rotary tool spindle, and the
S G97, G96, G50 spindle speed limit with the address S. The address S is
specified with the G97, G96, and G50 commands.
G Please refer to the pages for each G code for details.
min 1 <Specify Rotation Speed of Spindle or Rotary Tool Spindle
(min 1)>
G97 S_ M03(M04) ;
G97 S_ M203(M204);
G97 S_ M13(M14);
• G97 ..................................... Specifies the constant spindle speed mode
• S .......................................... min 1 Specifies the spindle speed (min 1).
• M03(M04) ............................ M03 1 M04 1 Specifies the spindle 1 rotation in the normal
• M13(M14) ............................ M13 M14 Specifies the rotary tool spindle rotation in
the normal (reverse) direction.
1 “G97 ” 141 1 “G97 Controlling Spindle Speed at Constant Speed (Constant

Surface Speed Control Cancel)” (page 141)
m/min <Specify Surface Speed (m/min)>
G96 S_ M03(M04);
G96 S_ M203(M204);
• G96 ..................................... Specifies the constant surface speed mode
• S .......................................... m/min Specifies the surface speed (m/min).
• M03(M04) ............................ M03 1 M04 1 Specifies spindle 1 rotation in the normal
1 “G50 G96 1 “G50 Setting Maximum and Minimum Spindle Speeds, G96 Con-
” 138 trolling Constant Surface Speed (Constant surface speed con-
trol)” (page 138)
min 1 <Specify Maximum Spindle Speed (min 1)>
G50 S_ Q_ ;
• G50 ..................................... Specifies the spindle speed limit setting
mode
• S .......................................... min 1 Specifies the spindle speed limit (min 1).
• Q .......................................... (min 1) Specifies the minimum spindle speed
(min 1)
1 “G50 G96 1 “G50 Setting Maximum and Minimum Spindle Speeds, G96 Con-
” 138 trolling Constant Surface Speed (Constant surface speed con-
trol)” (page 138)
S
240 S FUNCTION
2-1 - -
Relationship among Cutting Speed, Diameter, and Spindle Speed
2000
1500
min 1 Surface Speed

Spindle Speed (min 1)
1000
250 m/mi n
200 m/min
150 m/min
500
100 m/min
50 m/min
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120130 140 150
mm
Workpiece Diameter (mm)
G96 S_ When a program is executed in the G96 constant surface

X speed mode, the spindle is controlled to maintain the specified
S_ surface speed (S_ ) when the tool moves along the X-axis.
The formula to calculate spindle speed:
1000V
N=
π•D
N min 1 N : Spindle Speed (min 1)

V m/min V : Surface Speed (m/min)
D mm D : Workpiece Diameter (mm)
3.14 : Circumference Constant (3.14)
F
F FUNCTION 241
3 F
F FUNCTION
F F The F function is used to specify the feedrate of tools with
G01, G02, G03 address F. The address F is specified with the linear or circular
G98, G99 F cutting commands such as G01, G02, and G03. The units for
the address F are determined by specifying the G98 or G99
command.
1 • “G01 ” 73 1 • “G01 Moving Cutting Tool along Straight Path at Cutting

Feedrate” (page 73)
• “G02 G03 ” • “G02 Circular Interpolation (Clockwise), G03 Circular
79 Interpolation (Counterclockwise)” (page 79)
• “G98 G99 ” 142 • “G98 Feedrate per Minute Command, G99 Feedrate per
Revolution Command” (page 142)
5G98 G99 F 5When the G code mode is switched between the G98 mode and
the G99 mode, it is necessary to specify an F code.
3-1 1 mm/rev
Specify Feedrate per Spindle Revolution (mm/rev)
G99; ............................ Specifies the feed per revolution mode

F_; ............................... mm/rev Feedrate (mm/rev)
5 5
1. 1. Generally, O.D. cutting, I.D. cutting, thread cutting are
G99 programmed using the G99 command.
2. 2. Feedrate is limited according to the following formula.
mm/rev in./rev Metric System (mm/rev) Inch System (in./rev)
R R
F< F<
N 25.4 × N
F mm/rev, in./rev F: Feedrate (mm/rev, in./rev)

R 20000 mm/min R: Maximum cutting feedrate (20000 mm/min)
2 2 NOTE
1. G99 G98 1. When power is turned on, the NC is in the G99 mode. Therefore, it
G99 is not necessary to specify the G99 command in a program unless
the mode has been changed to the G98 mode.
2. 2. Once specified, the feedrate remains valid until another feedrate is
specified.
3-2 1 mm/min, /min

Specify Feedrate per Minute (mm/min, /min)
G98; ............................ Specifies the feed per minute mode

F_; ............................... mm/min, Feedrate (Linear axis: mm/min, rotary axis:
/min /min)
F
242 F FUNCTION
7 7 CAUTION
G98 F In the G98 mode, the tool moves at the feedrate specified
1 by the F code even when the spindle is not rotating. Make
sure that the cutting tool will not strike the workpiece.
[Machine damage]
G98; G98;
G01 Z_ F100.0; G01 Z_ F100.0; The cutting tool moves at a
1 100 mm rate of 100 mm/min even
when the spindle is not
rotating.
2 2 NOTE
1. G98 1. The G98 command cannot be used for thread cutting operation.
2. 2. Once specified, the feedrate remains valid until another feedrate is
specified.
3. F 3. The feedrate F specified for machining that is conducted using a
/min 1 rotary axis or by the combination of a rotary axis and other
controlled axes is expressed in the format “ /min” (angle of rotation
per minute) and, therefore, it differs from the actual cutting
feedrate.
f <Calculating the Actual Machining Feedrate (f)>
2 R F
f=
360
f /min
Tangential Speed f mm
F mm/min
Angular Velocity F
Center of Rotation F: Feedrate to be Specified ( /min)
R: Workpiece Radius (mm)
R f: Actual Machining Feedrate (mm/min)
5 5
1. F 1. To calculate the feedrate F to be specified, use the formula
below after determining an actual machining feedrate.
360 × f
F=
2πR
2. 2. The programmable feedrate range is given in the table below.
mm/min in./min Metric System

Inch System (in/min)
(mm/min)
1 0.01 1 to rapid Rapid traverse rate

traverse rate 0.01 to
25.4
5 5This mode is used when a rotary tool, and the bar feeder or the
pull-out finger are used.
3-3
Feedrate for Finishing
R Feedrates for finishing are determined based on the nose

radius of the cutting tool to be used and the surface roughness
specified on the drawing.
F
F FUNCTION 243
<Ideal Surface Roughness for Finishing>
Rmax
Nr
Insert
f2
Rmax =
8 • Nr
Rmax = Ry Rmax : Maximum value of ideal finish surface
mm/rev roughness (Rmax = Ry)
R mm f: Feedrate (mm/rev)
Nr : Tool nose radius (mm)
Nr
Surface Roughness Rmax (mm)
Indication 0.4 0.5 0.8 1.0
Symbol
25-S 0.025 0.2828 0.3162 0.4000 0.4472

Max. 0.025
18-S 0.018 0.2400 0.2683 0.3394 0.3794

Max. 0.018
12-S 0.012 0.1959 0.2190 0.2771 0.3098

Max. 0.012
6-S 0.006 0.1385 0.1549 0.1959 0.2190

Max. 0.006
3-S 0.003 0.0979 0.1095 0.1385 0.1549

Max. 0.003
1.5-S 0.0015 0.0692 0.0774 0.0979 0.1095

Max. 0.0015
0.8-S 0.0008 0.0506 0.0565 0.0715 0.0800

Max. 0.0008
Max. 0.0004
0.4-S 0.0357 0.0400 0.0505 0.0565
Max. 0.0004
(mm/rev)
2 2 NOTE
The values indicated above are theoretical values obtained in
calculation. During actual cutting, the specified surface roughness may
not be achieved, depending on various factors. Factors that can effect
finishing accuracy include how far the tool projects, how the workpiece
is clamped or vibration.
4
4èÕ
CHAPTER 4
CHAPTER 4 TOOL OFFSET
1 R 247
2 R 278
3 307
TOOL RADIUS OFFSET
R
AUTOMATIC TOOL NOSE RADIUS OFFSET 247
1 R
R The tool nose does not have a sharp edge but is slightly
R rounded (tool nose radius) as illustrated below. Therefore, the
point of the tool nose used for programming differs from the
actual cutting point. The tool nose radius offset function is
used to eliminate dimensional errors caused by this difference.
Actual Cutting Point
Programmed Point
R If a program is created without taking the nose radius into

consideration, it will cause excessive or insufficient cutting.
The automatic tool nose radius offset function is used to
R eliminate excessive or insufficient cutting.
•
Workpiece Zero Point Programmed Point • Actual Cutting Point
1. X
Facing carried out perpendicular to the spindle center line
(Cutting in the X-axis direction) There is no uncut material
left since the programmed
point and the actual
cutting point lie on the
same line.
2. Z
O.D. or I.D. cutting carried out in parallel with the spindle center
line (Cutting in the Z-axis direction) There is no uncut material
left since the programmed
point and the actual
cutting point lie on the
same line.
3.
Taper cutting
If taper cutting, including

chamfering, is
programmed without
R taking into consideration
the radius of the tool
Uncut Portion nose, dimensional errors
will occur due to overcut
or uncut portion as
illustrated on the left.
Overcut Portion
R
248 AUTOMATIC TOOL NOSE RADIUS OFFSET
•
Workpiece Zero Point Programmed Point • Actual Cutting Point
4.
Arc cutting
If arc cutting is
programmed without
R taking into consideration
the radius of the tool
nose, dimensional errors
will occur due to overcut
or uncut portion as
illustrated on the left.
Uncut Portion
G01(G00) G41 X_ Z_ F_ ;
G01(G00) G42 X_ Z_ F_ ;
G01(G00) G46 X_ Z_ F_ ;
G01(G00) G40 X_ Z_ I_ K_ F_ ;
• G01(G00) ............................ R Calls the interpolation mode in which the
G00 tool nose radius offset function is specified.
G01 G00: Rapid traverse
G01: Cutting feed
• G41 ..................................... R Calls the tool nose radius offset (left)
function.
The tool position is offset to the left in
reference to the tool advancing direction.
• G42 ..................................... R Calls the tool nose radius offset (right)
function.
The tool position is offset to the right in
reference to the tool advancing direction.
• G46 ...................................... R Tool tip R offset automatic direction
determination
Automatically determines the offset direction
and offsets the tool center point based on
the imaginary tool tip position and the
programmed tool movement direction.
• G40 ..................................... R Cancels the tool nose radius offset function.
• X, Z ..................................... Specifies the coordinate values of the end
point.
• I, K ....................................... When making an imaginary setting that
represents the direction of the workpiece
I shape in the following block, the direction
ratio for this setting is specified as a vector,
with “I” as the radius command.
1 <Tool Nose Radius Offset Direction for Spindle 1>
G42
Tool Advancing
Direction
Workpiece
Tool Advancing
Direction
G41
R
7 7 CAUTION
G41, G42 The programmer must thoroughly understand the nature
of the G41 and G42 functions as well as the tool paths to
be generated.
[Tool breakage/Machining defect]
2 <Tool Nose Radius Offset Direction for Spindle 2>
2 2 NOTE
1 2 Z When using programs created for the spindle 1 on the spindle 2 side,
R G41, G42 pay careful attention to the “+/ ” direction of the Z-axis and the
direction of tool nose radius offset when creating programs for such
purposes since they will be reversed.
+X
G41
Tool Advancing Direction
Workpiece
Tool Advancing Direction
G42
+Z
1-1 R G40, G41, G42

Set to Use Automatic Tool Nose Radius Offset Function (G40, G41, G42)
“ ” 249 Setting the “Imaginary Tool Tip Position” (page 249) of

the Tools to be Used
4 4
“ R ” 252 “Setting Tool Nose Radius” (page 252)
4 4
“ ” 252 “Specifying Offset Direction” (page 252)
To identify the point which is used for programming, the term

“imaginary tool tip position” is used.
0 9 ‘ ’ It is necessary to set the code number (0 to 9) which
“C” represents the imaginary tool tip position to the C column
displayed on the ‘TOOL WEAR OFFSET’ screen.
2 2 NOTE
1. 1. The imaginary tool tip position, in reference to the center of the tool
nose, is determined according to the tool shape and the tool
mounting method in the turret head. The imaginary tool tip position
data must be set in advance as with tool offset data.
R
2. G46 1 8 2. When G46 is used, set the imaginary tool tip position with a
number from 1 to 8.
+X
2 6 1
7 0 5
R 9
3 8 4
+Z
0 9
0 to 9: Imaginary Tool Tip Position
2 2 NOTE
The number of tool offset data pairs will vary according to the machine
model and the NC and machine specifications.
C
Imaginary Tool Tip Position Examples
R
0 In normal operation, the center of the tool nose is not specified as the imaginary tool
tip position.
In normal operation, to specify such point is really rare.

5
.
Workpiece
7
R
C
Imaginary Tool Tip Position Examples
9 0
Same as in the case of “0”.
2 2 NOTE
The number indicated above for the imaginary tool tip position (T
number) is for general applications and, in some cases, specifying a T
number different from this indication might give better results.
The most appropriate T number should be determined and specified
on the process sheet by a programmer when he/she creates the
tooling sheet.
The imaginary tool tip position is explained below using an
O.D. cutting tool and an I.D. cutting tool as examples.
<O.D. Cutting Tool>
“3” The imaginary tool tip position in reference to the center of tool
nose is defined by the T number “3”.
T 2 The imaginary tool tip position code number (T number) should
be set for offset number that corresponds to the last two digits
of a T code.
Turret
2 6 1
7 5
3 8 4
“T0202” ‘ ’ “2” When setting the selected T number for “T0202” tool, set “3” to
C “3” the C column for offset number “2” on the ‘TOOL WEAR
OFFSET’ screen.
<I.D. Cutting Tool>

“2” The imaginary tool tip position in reference to the center of tool
nose is defined by the T number “2”.
R
T 2 The imaginary tool tip position code number (T number) should

be set for offset number that corresponds to the last two digits
of a T code.
Turret
2 6 1
7 5

3 8 4
“T0303” ‘ ’ “3” When setting the selected T number for “T0303” tool, set “2” to
C “2” the C column for offset number “3” on the ‘TOOL WEAR
OFFSET’ screen.
R Setting Tool Nose Radius
G41, G42, G46 R When the automatic tool nose radius offset function, called by
R ‘ ’ ‘ ’ the G41, G42 or G46 is used, it is necessary to set the tool
“R” nose radius to the R column in either the ‘TOOL GEOMETRY
OFFSET’ or ‘TOOL WEAR OFFSET’ screen.
R T The offset number for which the nose radius is set should
correspond to the offset number which is specified in a T code.
1 T “T ” 229 1 For a T code, refer to “T FUNCTION” (page 229).
2 2 NOTE
‘ ’ ‘ ’ If the nose radius is set to the R column in both of the ‘TOOL
R 2 GEOMETRY OFFSET’ and ‘TOOL WEAR OFFSET’ screens, offset is
made by both of the input data, causing excessive or insufficient
cutting.
0 Specifying Offset Direction

There are only three directions for offsets; offset to the left
G41 G42 viewed in the direction of tool advance (G41) or the right
viewed in the direction of tool advance (G42), or automatic
G46 3 determination based on the imaginary tool tip position and the
programmed tool movement direction (G46).
G When the direction the tool paths should be offset is
determined, specify the corresponding G code to the program.
The location where the G code should be specified in a
program and related cautions are explained in the following
sections.
R
R Switching Absolute Coordinate during Automatic Tool

Nose Radius Offset
R R During the automatic tool nose radius offset, whether

displaying the absolute coordinate by the imaginary tool tip
position (including nose radius) or by the programmed position
can be switched by the parameter setting below.
No. 1227.3 No. 1227.3
0 R 0: displaying the imaginary tool tip position (including tool nose
radius) (default setting)
1 1: programmed position
G46 Direction of Offset Determined by G46
G41, G42 G If the G41 or G42 command is used to call up the tool nose
G46 radius offset function, the direction of offset is determined by
the specified G command. In comparison to these G
commands, the G46 command is used to call up the tool nose
radius offset function in which the direction of offset is
automatically determined from the imaginary tool tip position
and the direction of movement in the manner indicated in the
table below.
Offset Direction Imaginary Tool Tip Position Offset Direction
Tool Nose Moving Tool Nose Moving

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Direction
Direction
\ \ D
Right Right Left Left Right Left
E \ \
\ \ W
5
1 Q \ \
Left Right Left Left Right Right 8
4 Moving
Moving
Direction
Direction
\ \ A (imaginary tool
(imaginary tip Left Left Right Right Left Right tip position: 5
position: 1 to 4)
to 8)
Z \ \
\ \ X
C \ \
Right Left Left Right Left Left
2 2 NOTE
1. 1. The cross symbol ( ) indicates that the direction of offset cannot be
determined from the programmed direction of axis movement and
the imaginary tool tip position.
2. E 45 2. Arrow symbols indicate the direction of tool tip (axes) movements.
The symbol (E), for example, indicates the axes (tool tip) move in
the 45 direction.
R
3. 45 135 3. If the tool tip (axes) movement direction is indefinite and can be
determined only in a certain range, it is expressed by two arrow
symbols with arc in dots. The symbol ( ), for example, indicates
that the axes (tool tip) move in the range from 45 to 135 .
4. 4. In the offset mode, if the direction of offset cannot be determined
for a certain block, the direction of offset active for the previous
block is used.
5. 5. If the direction of offset cannot be determined for the execution of
the start-up block, it is determined using the direction of
5 movements specified in the next block. If the direction of offset
P156 cannot be determined even after reading the next block
commands, the block that follows the next block is read. When the
direction of offset cannot be determined even after buffering five
blocks, an alarm message (P156) is displayed on the screen.
6. G00 6. An alarm message (P157) is displayed if the direction of offset is
P157 reversed while in the offset mode (excepting for the reversal due to
G28, G30, G53 G00). Note that an alarm does not occur if the direction of offset is
reversed before and after the execution of the G28, G30, or G53
block because the offset mode is temporarily canceled for the
execution of these blocks.
1-2 R
Technical Terms Used in Explanation of Automatic Tool Nose Radius Offset Function
Cancel Mode
Offset Mode
Start-Up
+Z
:
G42 G00 X_ Z_; ....................................................... Start-up
1“ R 1 “Start-Up (Automatic Tool Nose
” 254 Radius Offset)” (page 254)
G01 X_ Z_ F_; .......................................................... Offset mode
X_ Z_ ; 1“ R ” 1 “Offset Mode (Automatic Tool Nose
256 Radius Offset)” (page 256)
X_ Z_ ;
G40 G00 X_ Z_; ....................................................... Cancel mode
1“ R 1 “Cancel Mode (Automatic Tool
” 257 Nose Radius Offset)” (page 257)
:
R Start-Up (Automatic Tool Nose Radius Offset)
G41, G42 G46 The first block in which the G41, G42 or G46 command is
specified is called the start-up block.
In the start-up block, positioning is made so that the center of
R tool nose lies at right angles to the axis motion specified in the
next block.
R
1 Example 1:
G42 (Start-Up)
R
This distance must be larger :

G42
than the tool nose radius. G42(G46) G00 X100.0 Z20.0; .............................. a
2 1
X100.0, G01 Z_ F_ ; .......................................................... b
Z20.0 :
Start Point of the Next Block
(X100.0, Z20.0)
Z0 R
This distance must be larger than the

tool nose radius.
2 Example 2:
G42
:
G00 X94.0 Z20.0; .............................................. a
1 (X94.0, Z20.0)
2 G42 G42(G46) G01 Z2.0 F_ ;....................................... b
(Start-Up) X_ Z_ ;................................................................... c
Z0
X94.0, Z2.0
R Start Point of the Next Block(X94.0,
Z2.0)
This distance must be larger
than the tool nose radius.
3 Example 3:
This distance must be larger

than the tool nose radius.
(Start-Up) :
G41
G00 X50.0 Z20.0; ................................................ a
2 1 (X50.0, Z20.0) G41 (G46) G01 Z2.0 F_ ;...................................... b
X_ Z_ ;................................................................... c
:
3 X50.0,
Z2.0
Start Point of the Next Block
(X50.0, Z2.0)
2 2 NOTE
1. R 1. The start-up block must include an axis movement command; the
called distance must be larger than the offset amount (tool nose
radius).
2. G00, G01 2. The start-up must be specified in the G00 or G01 (linear motion)
G02, G03 mode. Do not specify the start-up in the G02 or G03 mode. If the
P151 start-up is specified in such a mode, an alarm is generated, the
corresponding alarm message (P151) is displayed on the screen
and the machine stops operating.
R
R Offset Mode (Automatic Tool Nose Radius Offset)
R The mode in which the automatic tool nose radius offset

function is valid, after the start-up, is called the offset mode.
1. 1. Behavior when the direction of tool offset (right, left) is not
changed
R The tool moves along the workpiece shape with its nose in
contact with the shape.
1 Example 1:
:
G42(G46) G00 X70.0 Z20.0; . . . . a (Start-up)
G01 Z 20.0 F_ ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . b
X80.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . c
Offset mode
G03 X100.0 Z 30.0 R10.0; . . . . . . d
G01 Z 45.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . e
6 X_ Z_ ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . f
5
4
(X100.0, Z 45.0) (X100.0, Z 30.0)

3
(X80.0, Z 20.0)
2 1
(X70.0, Z 20.0)
(X70.0, Z20.0)
2 2 NOTE
1. 1. In the offset mode, specification of the following is not allowed.
If such blocks or M code is specified in a program, it will cause
excessive or insufficient cutting. It will also cause overload to a
cutting tool to be damaged.
• M, S, T G04 • Continuously specified four or more blocks not containing an
4 axis movement command, but only with an M, S, or T code,
or G04 dwell command, for example.
• M (M00, M01, M02, M30) • The M code (M00, M01, M02, M30) with which buffering is
not allowed.
2. R G41, G42, G46 2. In the automatic tool offset mode (G41, G42, G46), if the same
G41, G42, G46 G code as the one specified to call up the present automatic
tool nose radius offset mode is specified again, it is
disregarded.
3. G46 G46DG41, G46DG42 3. While in the G46 mode, it is possible to change the G code
G40 mode to G41 or G42. In this changeover of the G code mode,
designation of the G40 command is not necessary.
4. R G31 4. Do not specify the G31 (skip) command in the automatic tool
R nose radius offset mode. An alarm message (P608) is
P608 displayed on the screen if a skip command is specified in the
automatic tool nose radius offset mode.
5. R G74, G75, G76 5. Do not specify the G code (G74, G75, G76) that calls up a
G83, G85, G87, G89 multiple repetitive cycle or the G code (G83, G85, G87, G89)
R G74, that calls up a hole machining canned cycle in the automatic
G75, G76 G83, G85, G87, G89 tool nose radius offset mode. An alarm message (P155) is
displayed if a multiple repetitive cycle or a hole machining
P155 canned cycle is called up in the automatic tool nose radius
offset mode.
5 2 5At the start-up or in the offset mode, two blocks that contain an
2 4 axis movement command are buffered. If blocks not
containing an axis movement command are specified
continuously, four such blocks are buffered.
R
2. 2. Behavior when the direction of tool offset (right, left) is

changed
If the direction of tool offset changes in a program, i.e., if
G G41 G42 the G code calling the tool nose radius offset function
changes between G41 and G42, the tool nose will come
into contact with the workpiece shape that is defined in the
two consecutive blocks where the G code changes from
G41 to G42, or vice versa.
2 Example 2:
2 :
1 G41 X90.0 Z0;
X80.0; ................................................................. a
(X80.0, Z0) G42 X_ Z_ ; ........................................................... b
:
7 7 CAUTION
G41 G42 Changing the G code mode between G41 and G42 must
not be specified in the block following the start-up the
block.
R Cancel Mode (Automatic Tool Nose Radius Offset)
G40 R The G40 command, specified in the offset mode, cancels the
tool nose radius offset function.
The cancel mode starts from the end point of the block that
R precedes the G40 block. The center of the tool nose lies at
right angles to the tool path programmed in reference to block.
G40 Tool moves to the end point in G40 block.
1 Example 1:
2
(Cancel Mode)
(X150.0, Z100.0)
:
Start-Up (G42) X100.0 Z 50.0; . . . . . a
G40 G00 X150.0 Z100.0; . . b (Cancel Mode)
1 (X100.0 Z 50.0) :
2 Example 2:
2
:
1 (G42) X90.0 Z 5.0; ............................................. a
(X150.0, Z100.0)
G40 G00 X150.0 Z100.0;...................................... b
:
(X90.0 Z−5.0)
R
2 2 NOTE
1. R G41, G42 G41, 1. In the automatic tool nose radius offset mode (G41, G42), do not
G42 R G41, specify the same G code that has been specified to call the present
G42 G41, G42 offset mode again. If the same G code is specified, positioning is
R made so that the tool nose lies at the right angle to the tool path at
R the end point of the preceding block, in the same manner as in the
G41, G42 cancel block. Therefore, uncuts or overcuts occur in the block in
which the same G code (G41, G42) as the one presently valid is
specified.
G42 U100.0 W 200.0

G42
G42 is specified in the G42 mode.
G42
(G42)
(G42)
(G42)
2. G00, G01 2. The cancel block must be specified in the G00 or G01 (linear
G02, G03 motion) mode. To specify the cancel block in the G02 or G03
P151 circular interpolation mode is not allowed. If specified, an alarm
message (P151) is displayed on the screen and the machine
stops.
3. R “G40;” 3. Designation of “G40;” or an automatic nose radius offset cancel
R command associated with position command of the present
position, meaning no axis movements, when exiting the automatic
R nose radius offset mode, the tool stays at the start point of cancel
mode and axis movements for cancellation do not take place. In
such cases, cancel movements take place when the command that
calls for actual axis movements (movements in the same plane as
used for the automatic nose radius offset) is specified next.
“G40;” If the program ends without axis movement commands after the
R designation of the cancel command such as “G40;” that does not
@ cause actual movements, the automatic nose radius offset mode
R @ remains active. To cancel the automatic nose radius offset mode,
in such a case, it is necessary to press the @ (RESET) key.
However, pressing the @ (RESET) key to cancel the automatic
nose radius offset mode does not call for cancel movements.
R For the axis movement commands to be specified for canceling the
G00 G01 automatic nose radius offset mode, it is necessary to specify the
position other than the present position in the G00 or G01 mode so
that axes actually move in the execution of the cancel command.
4. 4. Conditions in which the offset mode is canceled:
• G40 • Execution of the G40 command
• • The initial state established when the power is turned on.
• @ • Reset state; the @ (RESET) key is pressed.
• M02, M30 • Program end; the program ends when the M02 or M30
command is executed.
• 0 • After selecting tool No. 0
5. R 0 5. During the automatic tool nose radius offset mode, if tool No. 0 is
specified in a block without any other commands, at the end point
R of the block preceding this one the center of the tool nose radius
moves to a position perpendicular to the motion in the preceding
block.
R
1-3 R
General Cautions on Automatic Tool Nose Radius Offset Function
R If Wall Lies at Endpoint of Cutting (Automatic Tool Nose

Radius Offset)
G40 If the workpiece wall lies in a direction independent of the

direction of tool motion specified by the commands in the G40
I, K block: Specify the workpiece wall's direction (workpiece
I, K I shape) with vectors (I, K). Use incremental values for I and K
commands; the I command should be specified in radius.
Wall
I, K G40
(200, 30)
(G42) Actual Tool Motion Commands
+I 5 G40 G00 X200.0 Z 30.0 I5.0 K 4.0;
4
+K
The workpiece is cut until the tool nose comes into contact with the wall.
2 2 NOTE
1. “I_” “K_” G40 1. Specify the addresses I and K in the same block as the first G40
after entry into the offset mode.
• •
• Valid • Invalid
G42 X_ Z_ ; G42 X_ Z_ ;
X_ Z_ ; :
: : Offset Mode
: :
: Offset Mode G40 X_ Z_ ;
: :
: : Cancel Mode
G40 G00 X_ Z_ I_ K_ ; :
G40 G00 X_ Z_ I_ K_ ;
Ignored
2. “I_ K_ ” 2. If “I_ K_ ” is not specified in the G40 block, the offset mode cancel
point is set at the end point of the preceding block; at this end
R point, the tool nose center lies at right angles to the tool path
generated by the commands in the preceding block. This causes
an overcut on the wall.
G40 G00 X_ Z_ ; G40 G00 X_ Z_ ;
G40
(G42)
Overcuts occur.
R
Example:
Calculating wall direction (blank workpiece shape)
30° (G40)
I = 15
(G42) 30°
C 60°
I=C A
A
+X
60°
φ100
φ70
K=B
K 80
+Z
1. I 1. Value “I” is calculated as indicated below, based on the

illustration above.
φ100 − φ70
I= = 15
2
X + “I15.0” Because it is measured in the positive direction on the

X-axis, the designation should be “I15.0”.
K Next, value “K” is calculated as:
K = AC = 15 tan30 = 8.660 K = AC = 15 tan30 = 8.660
Z “K 8.66” Because it is measured in the negative direction on the
Z-axis, the designation should be “K 8.66”.
2. I, K 2. Since I and K commands are used to define the direction of
the wall, the ratio between the sides of a triangle may be
used instead of calculating actual lengths.
The ratio of three sides of the triangle given above is known
as:
A:B:C=2:1: (= 1.732) A:B:C=2:1: (= 1.732)
“I1.732, K 1.0” Therefore, the designation should be “I1.732, K 1.0”.
I, K 1, 2 I and K commands may be specified in either method as
described above.
:
G01 Z 80.0;
I1.73 K 1.0
G40 G00 X200.0 Z50.0 I15.0 K 8.66; I1.73 K 1.0 Interchangeable
R
Example:
C2 2 1
3
100 45 4
40
5
30
Rapid Traverse
Cutting Feed
O1;
N1;
G50 S2000;
G00 T0101;
G96 S180 M03;
X46.0 Z20.0 M08; ................................................ a
G41 G01 Z1.0 F1.0; ............................................. b Approach to b (start-up)
X40.0 Z 2.0 F0.15; .............................................. c Offset mode
Z 30.0; ................................................................. d Offset mode
G40 G00 U 1.0 Z20.0 I 1.0 K 1.0; .......................... Escape (cancel mode)
I 1.0 X 1 mm I 1.0
Specifies X component of the vector
( 1 mm in the X-axis direction; in
radius)
K 1.0 Z 1 mm K 1.0
Specifies Z component of the vector
( 1 mm in the Z-axis direction)
I, K The I and K commands indicate the
wall direction.
X150.0 Z100.0 M09;

M01;
K −1.0
45° 1
I −1.0
45°
1
√2
R
R Overcut in Automatic Tool Nose Radius Offset Mode
1. R 1. Cutting an inside an arc whose radius is smaller than the

tool nose radius
R When the radius of the specified arc is smaller than the tool
nose radius, overcutting will occur if the tool is offset on the
inner side of the arc, so immediately after the start of the
P153 preceding block (if there is corner interpolation motion,
immediately after the end of that motion), alarm P153 will
be displayed on the screen and the machine will stop.
2 2 NOTE
If a single block function is called during the execution of the
preceding block, the axes are fed to the end point of that block,
causing overcuts.
R
Tool Nose Center Path
Alarm-Stop in a Single Block Stop

Operation
Machine Stops Due to the Alarm.
Programmed Tool Path
Corner Motion
R
Arc with Radius Smaller
than the Tool Nose
Overcuts occur if the axes move as

programmed.
2. R 2. Cutting a groove whose width is narrower than the width of

tool nose
R R Since overcuts occur if the tool nose radius center path is
generated in the direction opposite to the path specified in
the program as the result of automatic tool nose radius
P153 offset, an alarm (P153) occurs just after the start of the
block that precedes the one causing overcuts. The
corresponding alarm number is displayed and the machine
stops.
Alarm-Stop in a Single Block Stop Operation

R
Machine Stops
Due to the Alarm.
Overcuts occur if the axis move as programmed.

R
3. R 3. Cutting an arc-shaped step whose height is smaller than

the tool nose radius
R If cutting an arc-shaped step whose height is smaller than
the tool nose is called in a program, the tool nose center
2 path generated by the tool nose radius offset might cause
axis motion in the direction opposite to the programmed
tool path direction.
In such a case, the first vector is ignored and the tool
moves along the straight line to the tip point of the second
vector.
Although the operation is continued without causing an
alarm, uncut portion is left in the workpiece.
Tool Motion Along a Straight Line
R
Arc
Uncut Portion
4. X Z 2 4. No axis motion commands being specified in two or more

consecutive blocks
X Z 2 If no axis motion commands are specified in two or more
2 consecutive blocks while in the offset mode, overcuts could
occur as indicated below since buffering of two blocks is not
possible.
:
G42
(G42 mode)
X30.0 Z 20.0; ....................................................... [1]
3 2 X60.0; ................................................................... [2]
(X60.0, Z−25.0) (X60.0, Z−20.0) Z 25.0;.................................................................. [3]
:
1 2
(X30.0, Z−20.0) Tool paths are offset correctly due to the 2-block buffering function.
:
G42
Overcutting (G42 mode)
X30.0 Z 20.0; ....................................................... [1]
X60.0; ................................................................... [2]
M_ ; 2 X Z
3 2 S_ ;
(X60.0, Z 25.0) (X60.0, Z 20.0) No X- or Z-axis movement
commands in two or more
blocks.
1
(X30.0, Z 20.0) :
Z 25.0;.................................................................. [3]
:
Overcuts occur as illustrated above. This is because the
[2] center of the tool nose is positioned, when the preceding
R block [2] is executed, at the right angle to the tool path
called by the commands in reference to this block.
R
1-4 R
R G40, G41, G42, G46 Examples of programs that use the automatic tool nose radius
offset (G40, G41, G42, G46) are indicated below.
Refer to these examples when creating a program.
R Basic Programs (Automatic Tool Nose Radius Offset)
Example:
O.D. cutting with an O.D. cutting tool
Cancel Mode
6 7
5
Offset Mode Start-Up
4 2 1
3
100
40
R5
35
C2
6 7
5
Cancel Mode
Offset Mode
4
Start-Up
Rapid Traverse 3 2 1
Cutting Feed
O1;
N1;
G50 S2000;
G00 T0101;
G96 S180 M03;
G42(G46) G00 X40.0 Z20.0 M08;............................. a X40.0, Z20.0 Positioning at a (X40.0, Z20.0) at a
rapid traverse rate (Start-up)
The tool is offset to the right in
reference to the direction the cutting
tool will advance.
G01 Z2.0 F1.0;.......................................................... 1.0 mm/rev b Traveling to b at feedrate of 1.0
mm/rev
Z 30.0 F0.15; ........................................................... 0.15 mm/rev c Cutting to c at feedrate of 0.15
mm/rev
G02 X50.0 Z 35.0 R5.0; .......................................... 5 mm d Cutting to d along a circle of 5 mm
radius in the clockwise direction
G01 X96.0; ............................................................... e Cutting to e along a straight line
X102.0 Z 38.0; ........................................................ Cutting to f to allow the cutting tool
f to be completely off the workpiece
G40 G00 Z20.0; ........................................................ g Positioning at g at a rapid traverse
rate to retract cutting tool from the
workpiece (Cancel mode)
X150.0 Z100.0 M09;
M01;
R
Example:
D Facing and O.D. cutting with in O.D. cutting tool
Cancel Mode 8
7
6 Offset Mode
Start-Up
2
1
100
5
40
4
3
30
50
G40 8
G42
7 (G42) 6
(G42)
2 (G42) 1
G41
5
100
G42
3 4
Rapid Traverse
Cutting Feed
O1;
N1;
G50 S2000;
G00 T0101;
G96 S180 M03;
[1] G42 X45.0 Z20.0 M08;.............................................. a X45.0, Z20.0 Positioning at a (X45.0, Z20.0)
at a rapid traverse rate. (Start-up)
The tool is offset to the right in
reference to the direction the
cutting tool will advance.
[2] G01 Z0 F1.0; ............................................................ 1.0 mm/rev b Moving to b at feedrate of 1.0
mm/rev
[3] G41 X0 F0.15;........................................................... 0.15 mm/rev c Cutting to c at feedrate of 0.15
G41 mm/rev
Since the block contains G41, the
cutting tool moves up to the
position where the tool position is
offset to the left.
G40 G00 W1.0; ......................................................... d Positioning at d at a rapid
traverse rate (Cancel mode)
G42 X38.0; ................................................................ e Positioning at e at a rapid
G42 traverse rate
Since the block contains G42, the
cutting tool moves up to the
position where the tool position is
offset to the right.
G01 X100.0 Z 30.0; ................................................. 0.15 mm/rev f Cutting to f at a feedrate of 0.15
mm/rev
Z 50.0; ..................................................................... g Cutting to g along a straight line
R
G40 G00 U1.0 Z20.0;............................................H h Positioning at h at a rapid

traverse rate to retract cutting tool
from the workpiece (Cancel
mode)
X150.0 Z100.0 M09;
M01;
5 [1], [2], [3] 5Blocks [1], [2], and [3] may be specified as indicated below.
G40
8
7 (G42) 6 (G42)
2
G41 1
(G41)
5
φ 100
G42
3 4
[1] X45.0 Z20.0; ............................................................ a X45.0, Z20.0 Positioning at a (X45.0, Z20.0)

at a rapid traverse rate
[2] G41 G01 Z0 F1.0; .................................................... 1.0 mm/rev b Positioning at b at feedrate of
1.0 mm/rev
(Start-up) The tool is offset to the
left in reference to the direction
the cutting tool will advance.
[3] X0 F0.15; ................................................................. 0.15 mm/rev c Cutting to c at feedrate of 0.15
mm/rev
2 2 NOTE
Z In this program, although block [2] specifies only Z-axis movement, the
X X-axis also moves since this is the start-up block.
R Here, the X-axis moves in the negative direction by the tool nose
radius.
[1] X Therefore, specify the X coordinate value in block [1] so that
interference can be avoided.
R
Example:
D Chamfering and I.D. cutting with an I.D. cutting tool
C2 2 1
3
4 5
100
40
Rapid Traverse
Cutting Feed
60
G41 (G46)
2 1
4 G41 (G46) 3 G41 (G46)
G40
5
O1;
N1;
G50 S2000;
G00 T0101;
G96 S180 M03;
X48.0 Z20.0 M08; .................................................... a X48.0, Z20.0 Positioning at a (X48.0, Z20.0) at a
rapid traverse rate
G41 G01 Z2.0 F1.0; .................................................. Moving to b, including offset
b motion to the left in reference to the
direction the cutting tool will
advance. (Start-up)
2
2 NOTE
b X
The tool moves in the X-axis direction
also since the tool is offset to the left at
b.
X40.0 Z 2.0 F0.15; ................................................... Offset mode
Z 62.0;
G40 G00 U 1.0 Z20.0;.............................................. e Positioning at e at a rapid traverse
rate to retract cutting tool from the
workpiece (Cancel mode)
d At the start point of the cancel
mode, the center of the nose circle
R is positioned right angle to the
programmed path in reference to
the block at the end d of the
preceding block.
X150.0 Z100.0 M09;
M01;
R
Example:
D D Arc D O.D. D Arc cutting with an O.D. cutting tool
7 8
6
5
R3
3
4
R5 2 1
90
50
40
80
8
7
G40
G42 (G46)
6
5 G42 (G46)
Rapid Traverse G42

(G42)(G46)
4 3 G42 (G46)
Cutting Feed 2
1
G42 (G46)
O1;
N1;
G50 S2000;
G00 T0101;
G96 S180 M03;
[1] X40.0 Z20.0 M08; ..................................................... a X40.0, Z20.0 Positioning at a (X40.0, Z20.0)
at a rapid traverse rate
G42(G46) G01 Z0 F0.15;.......................................... Moving to b, including offset
b motion to the right in reference to
the direction the cutting tool will
advance (Start-up)
2
2 NOTE
b X
The tool moves in the X-axis direction
also since the tool is offset to the right
at b.
G03 X50.0 Z 5.0 R5.0; ............................................. Offset mode
G01 Z 40.0;
X84.0;
G03 X90.0 Z 43.0 R3.0;
G40 G00 X100.0; ...................................................... g Positioning at g at a rapid
traverse rate to retract cutting tool
from the workpiece (Cancel
f mode)
At the start point of the cancel
R mode, the center of the nose
circle is positioned right angle to
the programmed path in
reference to the block ([3] D [6])
at the end point f of the
preceding block.
R
[2] X150.0 Z100.0 M09; ................................................. h Moving to h at a rapid traverse

rate
M01;
If the profile begins with an arc, as in this example, the block
preceding the block that defines the arc should be used as the
start-up block.
Similarly, if the profile ends with an arc, the block where the arc
is defined should be used as the cancel mode block.
2 2 NOTE
If start-up or cancel of the tool nose radius offset mode is specified in
the wrong block, an uncut portion will be left.
[1] G42 G46 For example, if the G42 (G46) command is specified in block [1], an
uncut portion will be left.
3 Start-Up
2
1
Uncut Portion
[2] G40 If the G40 command is specified in block [2], an uncut portion will be
left.
Cancel Mode
8
7
Uncut Portion
General start-up patterns are summarized below. Cautions to

be taken into consideration when creating a program are
specified for the related tool paths.
R
Example:
1 R0.4 mm Chuck work (1) (Tool nose radius: 0.4 mm)
O1;
N1;
G50 S2000;
G00 T0101;
Generally, at the start of a program, the
programmed point and the imaginary G96 S150 M03;
tool tip position are at the same G42(G46) X50.0 Z3.0 M08; .................................. a
position. G01 Z 30.0 F0.15;................................................ b
:
Start Point
G00
G42 (G46) R
2
G01 G42 (G46) At the end of this start-up block, the
1 center of the tool nose is positioned
at a point which is at a right angle
to the path to be generated by the
3
50
commands in the next block.
Programmed Point (at Start-Up)
R
Taking into account tool motion in the start-up block,
allow a distance that is equal to, or larger than the tool
nose radius so that the cutting tool will not be hit
against the workpiece.
Example:
2 R0.4 mm Chuck work (2) (Tool nose radius: 0.4 mm)
O1;
N1;
G00
G42 (G46)
G50 S2000;
G00 T0101;
G96 S150 M03;
G42(G46) X50.0 Z20.0 M08; ................................ a
2 1
3 G01 1 G01 Z3.0 F1.0;...................................................... b
First approach at a Rapid Traverse Rate
50
Z 30.0 F0.15;
2
Second Approach at a Faster Cutting Feedrate
Allow a distance that is equal to, or larger than

the tool nose radius so that the cutting tool will
not be hit against the workpiece.
R
Example:
R0.4 mm Center work (Tool nose radius: 0.4 mm)
O1;
N1;
1
G50 S2000;
1
First Approach at a Rapid Traverse Rate G00 T0101;
G00
G96 S150 M03;
2 Z3.0 M08;.............................................................. a
X50.0; ................................................................... b
G42(G46) G01 X30.0 F1.0;................................... c
2 Second Approach at a Faster Z 30.0 F0.15; ....................................................... d
Cutting Feedrate; This block is used :
G42 (G46) as the start-up.
G01
G01
4
3 R
3
30
Allow a distance that is equal to, or

larger than the tool nose radius so that
the cutting tool will not be hit against
the workpiece.
Example:
1 R0.4 mm Facing (1) (Tool nose radius: 0.4 mm)
O1;
N1;
G41 (G46) G50 S2000;
G00 G00 T0101;
G96 S150 M03;
1 G41(G46) X56.0 Z0; ............................................. a
3 G01 X20.0 F0.15; ................................................ b
:
G01 R
Allow a distance that is equal to, or larger than the
50
tool nose radius so that the cutting tool will not be

hit against the workpiece.
2
Example:
O1;
G41 (G46) G00
N1;
G01 G50 S2000;
R
G00 T0101;
Allow a distance that is equal to, G96 S150 M03;
or larger than the tool nose
3 2 1 X56.0 Z20.0; ......................................................... a
radius so that the cutting tool will G41(G46) G01 Z0 F1.0;........................................ b
not be hit against the workpiece. G01 X30.0 F0.15; ......................................................... c
:
50
Example:
2 2 NOTE
In this example, positioning in the start-up block requires corner
interpolation motion.
R
“ 1 R0.4 mm ” The program should use the G41 (G46) command, instead of the G42
G42 G46 G41 G46 (G46) command used in “Chuck work (1) (Tool nose radius: 0.4 mm)”.
O1;
R 2 N1;
G50 S2000;
Allow a distance that is equal to, or larger than G00 T0101;
two times the tool nose radius so that the
cutting tool will not be hit against the workpiece.
G96 S150 M03;
G41(G46) X56.0 Z20.0 M08; ................................ a
G01 Z0 F1.0;......................................................... b
G41 (G46)
G00 X30.0 F0.15; ......................................................... c
R
2 G01 1
:
3
At the end of this start-up block,
G01
the center of the tool nose is
positioned at a point which is at a
Corner Motion right angle to the path generated
50
by the commands in the next

block. Then, corner interpolation
3
motion is inserted so that the tool
nose comes into contact with the
tool path generated by the
commands in the next block.
Example:
1 R0.4 mm Chamfering (1) (Tool nose radius: 0.4 mm)
O1;
G01 2 N1;
3
G01 G50 S2000;
G42 (G46)
G00 G00 T0101;
C1 G96 S150 M03;
G42(G46) X46.0 Z1.0; .......................................... a
50
G01 X50.0 Z 1.0 F0.15; ....................................... b

1 Z 30.0;.................................................................. c
:
CAUTION: Tool nose comes to a point lower

than the programmed point.
Example:
O1;
N1;
G50 S2000;
G00 T0101;
G01 2 G96 S150 M03;
3
G01 G42(G46) G01 X46.0 F1.0;................................... a
G01 X50.0 Z 1.0 F0.15; ....................................... b
C1 Z 30.0;.................................................................. c
:
50
CAUTION: Tool nose comes to a point lower

than the programmed point.
R
Example:
O1;
G42 (G46) N1;
G01 3 G00
4 G01 G50 S2000;
C1 G00 T0101;
G96 S150 M03;
50
2 G01 1
G42(G46) X46.0 Z20.0 M08; ................................ a
R
G01 Z1.0 F1.0;...................................................... b
Allow a distance that is equal to, or larger than the X50.0 Z 1.0 F0.15; ............................................... c
tool nose radius so that the cutting tool will not be Z 30.0;.................................................................. d
hit against the workpiece. :
Example:
O1;
G42 (G46) N1;
G00 G50 S2000;
G01 3 1 G00 T0101;
4 G01
G01 G96 S150 M03;
C1 G42(G46) X60.0 Z2.0; .......................................... a
G01 X44.0 F1.0; ................................................... b
50
X50.0 Z 1.0 F0.15; ............................................... c

2
Z 30.0;.................................................................. d
:
R 2
Allow a distance that is equal to, or larger than two times
the tool nose radius so that the cutting tool will not be hit
against the workpiece.
R
R Recommended Example Programs (Automatic Tool

Nose Radius Offset)
Example:
D R0.4 mm Approach D O.D. cutting (Tool nose radius: 0.4 mm)
Chuck work
O1;
N1;
G50 S2000;
1 G00 T0101;
G41
G41 G96 S150 M03;
G00 G41 X70.0 Z1.0 M08;............................................ a
First Approach at a Rapid
Traverse Rate; G41 Start-Up G01 X50.0 F1.0; ................................................... b
Block G42 Z 30.0 F0.15;................................................ c
1 :
(G00 )
G01 (G00 may be used.)
(G41)
G42
3
(G01) 2
2 G41
Second Approach at a Faster Cutting

50
Feedrate; G41 Offset Mode Block.

Always specify this block.
The programmed point and the

imaginary tool tip position are at the
same position.
G42 R
Specify the G42 command in Tool nose radius may be ignored.

this block. Allow a minimum distance so that the
cutting tool will not be hit against the
workpiece.
Example:
D R0.4 mm Approach D Facing (Tool nose radius: 0.4 mm)
O1;
2 N1;
G42 G50 S2000;
Second Approach
G00 T0101;
G42 Offset Mode
G96 S150 M03;
G42 X52.0 Z20.0 M08;.......................................... a
G42 1 G42 G01 Z0 F1.0;......................................................... b
G00
G41 X0 F0.15;....................................................... c
(G42) First Approach at a Rapid Traverse G40 W1.0;
G01 Rate; G42 Start-Up Block
:
R
2
1
Tool nose radius may be ignored.
Allow a minimum distance so that the
cutting tool will not be hit against the
workpiece.
50
3 The programmed point and the imaginary tool tip

position are at the same position.
G41
Specify the G41 command in this block.
R
Example:
D D R0.4 mm Approach D Chamfering D O.D. cutting (Tool nose
radius: 0.4 mm) Chuck work
O1;
N1;
G50 S2000;
G00 T0101;
1
G41 G96 S150 M03;
G41 G41 X60.0 Z1.0 M08;............................................ a
G00 First Approach at a Rapid G01 X46.0 F1.0; ................................................... b
Traverse rate; G41 Start-Up G42 X50.0 Z 1.0 F0.15; ....................................... c
Block
Z 30.0;.................................................................. d
2 :
1
(G42, G01) G41
4
3 G42 G41
(G01) (G01) Second Approach at a Faster
Cutting Feedrate; G41 Offset
C1
Mode block
2
50
1 1
CAUTION: In shaft work, pay

G42 careful attention to possible
1 mm interference between the
Specify the G42 Allow 1 mm clearance; cutting tool and the center if
command in this this value makes the workpiece is small.
block. calculations simple.
Example:
D D R0.4 mm Facing D Chamfering D O.D. cutting (Tool nose radius:
0.4 mm)
O1;
N1;
7 G50 S2000;
G00 T0101;
G96 S150 M03;
G42 G42 X152.0 Z20.0 M08;........................................ a
G01 Z0 F1.0;......................................................... b
G41 X100.0 F0.15;................................................ c
G00
G42 G00 X146.0 Z1.0;.......................................... d
2 (G42) 1 G01 G01 X150.0 Z 1.0; ............................................... e
6 (G42) 5 Z 30.0;.................................................................. f
G40 G00 X200.0 Z30.0 M09;................................ g
C1
M05;
4 M30;
G41
φ150
G42
3
R
R Corner interpolation motion examples in automatic tool

nose radius offset mode
2 2 NOTE
The start point in the start-up motion varies depending on the
imaginary tool tip position.
R
Programmed tool paths Actual tool paths (nose radius center)
G42
G42 D G41 G42 D G40
G40 D G42 In the Same Offset
Corner Angle Offset Mode Changed Cancel Mode
Start-Up (G40 D G42) Mode (G42)
(G42 D G41) (G42 D G40)
1 90
1 to 90
90
90 180
90 to 180
180
180 270
180 to 270
270
270 360
270 to 360
360 0
360 to (0 )
R
R
Programmed tool paths Actual tool paths (nose radius center)
G42
G42 D G41 G42 D G40
G40 D G42 In the Same Offset
Corner Angle Offset Mode Changed Cancel Mode
Start-Up (G40 D G42) Mode (G42)
(G42 D G41) (G42 D G40)
0 1
0 to 1
R
278 MANUAL TOOL NOSE RADIUS OFFSET
2 R
Because the tool edge does not come to a sharp point, but is
slightly rounded, the point of the tool nose actually engaged
with cutting differs slightly from the point assumed for writing a
program. By calculating the offset data manually and shifting
the tool nose, the programmed point (imaginary tool nose) can
be made to coincide with the cutting point.
R If a program is written without taking into consideration the tool
nose radius, overcuts or uncuts occur. Since it is possible to
calculate the overcut and uncut amount, a workpiece can be
finished to the dimensions specified on the part drawing by
creating the program where the offset amount is included.
R The method to offset the programmed tool paths in the manner
as indicated above is called the manual tool nose radius offset.
1 “ R ” 247 1 For overcuts (excessive cutting) and undercut (insufficient cut-
ting), refer to “AUTOMATIC TOOL NOSE RADIUS OFFSET”
(page 247).
5 5
1. R 1. The function to automatically calculate the offset amount is the
automatic tool nose radius offset.
2. R 2. Almost all the cutting tools have rounded tool tip whose radius
varies among the type of the cutting tools and inserts. In
addition, the necessary offset amount varies according to the
tool path patterns.
R To finish the workpiece to the dimensions specified on the part
drawing, the offset amount must be calculated correctly from
the tool nose radius and tool path patterns. Therefore, the
programmers are required to understand the principle on the
manual tool nose radius offset.
3. 3. Since there are a number of tool patterns which will be used for
actual machining and they will differ among users, it is not
possible to explain all of the tool patterns in this manual. The
explanation given in this chapter is concentrated on the basic
tool path patterns along with the cautions to be taken into
consideration for programming so that the readers will be able
to acquire basic knowledge of the automatic tool nose radius
offset function.
2-1
Offset for Taper Cutting and Chamfering
R Tool Nose Radius Offset Method
a b R a' b' In O.D. cutting, a' and b' are offset positions from a and b
when taking nose radius into consideration.
X50.0 Z0; ............................................................. a

X80.0 Z 15.0; ...................................................... b
80
1
15
50
Z0
Uncut Portion
R
MANUAL TOOL NOSE RADIUS OFFSET 279
a b Xc, Calculate the offset data (Xc, Zc) and add this offset to the
Zc original program (a and b) to eliminate uncut portion.
2'
Zc X(50.0 2 Xc) Z0;............................................. a'

X80.0 Z( 15.0 Zc); ............................................ b'
φ80
Xc
1'
φ50
15
Z0
a b R a' b' In I.D. cutting, a' and b' are offset positions from a and b
when taking nose radius into consideration.
Z0
3
X54.0 Z0; .............................................................. a

X50.0 Z 3.0; ......................................................... b
54
2
50
Uncut Portion
a b Xc, Calculate the offset data (Xc, Zc) and add this offset to the
Zc original program (a and b) to eliminate uncut portion.
Z0
3
1'
Xc
Zc X(54.0 + 2 Xc) Z0;............................................. a'

X50.0 Z( 3.0 Zc); .............................................. b'
φ54
2'
φ50
Xc, Zc The procedure used to calculate Xc and Zc is explained below.
R Calculating Tool Nose Radius Offset Data
1. 1. Uncut portion
The additional movement along an axis required to
eliminate uncut portions is called the offset data or
additional cutting amount.
Xc, Zc The following shows the diagrams and formulas used to
calculate the offset data Xc and Zc required to eliminate
uncut portion.
R
<O.D. Taper Cutting>
Rn : Tool Nose Radius

R Zc
Xc : Offset Data, X-Axis
X Zc : Offset Data, Z-Axis
Z : Taper Angle, Measured
Z from the Z-Axis
Xc /2 Rn
+X /2
Zc a
+Z Rn
Xc, Zc Calculating Xc and Zc

•X Offset data in the X-axis direction
Xc = Zc tan = (Rn a) tan Xc = Zc tan = (Rn a) tan
= Rn {1 tan( /2)} tan 1 = Rn {1 tan( /2)} tan : Formula 1
•Z Offset data in the Z-axis direction
Zc = Rn a = Rn Rn tan( /2) Zc = Rn a = Rn Rn tan( /2)
= Rn {1 tan( /2)} 2 = Rn {1 tan( /2)}: Formula 2
1 1, 2 X, Z “ R 1 The offset data calculated using the formulas 1 and 2 is
” 291 summarized in the table in “Tool Nose Radius Offset Data
Table” (page 291) in this chapter.
<I.D. Taper Cutting>
+X Rn
Zc a
+Z
Xc /2 /2
Rn
Zc
R Xc : Offset Data, X-Axis
X Zc : Offset Data, Z-Axis
Z from the Z-Axis
Xc, Zc Calculating Xc and Zc

Xc = Zc tan Xc = Zc tan
Zc = Rn a = Rn Rn tan( /2) Zc = Rn a = Rn Rn tan( /2)
= Rn {1 tan( /2)} 2 = Rn {1 tan( /2)}: Formula 2
1 1, 2 X, Z “ R 1 The offset data calculated using the formulas 1 and 2 is
” 291 summarized in the table in “Tool Nose Radius Offset Data
Table” (page 291) in this chapter.
2. 2. Overcut portion
The additional movement along an axis required to
eliminate overcut portions is called the offset data or
additional cutting amount.
Xc, Z'c The following shows the diagrams and formulas used to
calculate the offset data Xc and Z'c required to eliminate
overcutting.
R
<O.D. Taper Cutting>
+X
+Z
R Xc : Offset Data, X-Axis
X /2 /2
Z'c : Offset Data, Z-Axis

Z (Additional Cutting Amount)
Rn a Zc : Offset Data for Angle
Z’c Zc (Data in Offset Data Table)
from the Z-Axis
Xc
Xc, Z'c Calculating Xc and Z'c

Z'c = Rn + a = Rn {1 + tan( /2)} 2 Z'c = Rn + a = Rn {1 + tan( /2)}: Formula 2
or
Z'c = 2 Rn Zc 2' Z'c = 2 Rn Zc: Formula 2'
2 2 NOTE
2' To use the offset data table, use the formula 2' to calculate the
offset data.
1 1 X Xc 2' Z 1 The offset data Xc, calculated using formula 1, and the
Z'c Zc temporary offset data Zc, used for calculating the offset
“ R ” 291 data Z'c by formula 2' are summarized in the table in “Tool
Nose Radius Offset Data Table” (page 291) in this chap-
ter.
<I.D. Taper Cutting>
Xc
Z'c Zc
Xc : Offset Data, X-Axis
R Rn a Z'c : Offset Data, Z-Axis
X (Additional Cutting Amount)
Z Zc : Offset Data for Angle
Xc
(Data in Offset Data Table)
/2
/2
: Taper Angle, Measured
Z +X from the Z-Axis
+Z
Xc, Z'c Calculating Xc and Z'c

Z'c = Rn + a = Rn {1 + tan( /2)} 2 Z'c = Rn + a = Rn {1 + tan( /2)}: Formula 2
or
Z'c = 2 Rn Zc 2' Z'c = 2 Rn Zc : Formula 2'
2 2 NOTE
2' To use the offset data table, use the formula 2' to calculate the
offset data.
1 1 X Xc 2' Z 1 The offset data Xc, calculated using formula 1, and the
Z'c Zc temporary offset data Zc, used for calculating the offset
“ R ” 291 data Z'c by formula 2' are summarized in the table in “Tool
Nose Radius Offset Data Table” (page 291) in this chap-
ter.
R
R Tool Nose Radius Offset Direction and Calculation of

Coordinate Values
R 0 Tool Nose Radius Offset Direction

The programmed shape is obtained if the imaginary tool nose
moves along the path indicated by the dotted lines.
2 2 NOTE
A B In the following diagrams, “A” represents O.D. cutting while “B”
represents I.D. cutting.
Offset Direction
1-A 2-A 3-A

θ Zc θ
θ
Zc Xc
Xc
Xc
Zc
1-B 2-B Zc
3-B
Xc
Xc
Zc Zc
θ
θ Xc
θ
4-A 5-A 6-A

θ
θ
Xc Z'c
Z'c
Zc θ
Xc Z'c
4-B Zc 5-B 6-B
θ
Xc Z'c
Z'c
Z'c
Xc
θ
θ
R
0 Calculating Coordinate Values

R Rn = 0.8 To obtain the coordinate values of the individual axes when the
tool nose radius is Rn = 0.8.
1-A
40°
Zc
b
d
a
Xc
c
θ = 40° Rn = 0.8
X Z Point X Z
a 50.0 0 a 50.0 0
b 60.0 5.96 b 60.0 5.96
Xc Zc Xc and Zc are found in the offset data table:

c Point c:
Xc = 0.4269 0.427 Xc = 0.4269 0.427
X = 50.0 (2 0.427) = 49.146 X = 50.0 (2 0.427) = 49.146
c X49.146, Z0 Point c (X49.146, Z0)
d Point d:
Zc = 0.5088 0.509 Zc = 0.5088 0.509
Z = 5.96 0.509 = 6.469 Z = 5.96 0.509 = 6.469
d X60.0, Z 6.469 Point d (X60.0, Z 6.469)
1-B Xc
c
a
Zc
d
b
30°
θ = 30° Rn = 0.8
X Z Point X Z
a 50.0 0 a 50.0 0
b 43.08 6.0 b 43.08 6.0

c Point c:
Xc= 0.3381 0.338 Xc= 0.3381 0.338
X= 50.0 + (2 0.338) = 50.676 X= 50.0 + (2 0.338) = 50.676
c X50.676, Z0 Point c (X50.676, Z0)
d Point d:
Zc = 0.5856 0.586 Zc = 0.5856 0.586
Z= 6.0 0.586 = 6.586 Z= 6.0 0.586 = 6.586
d X43.08, Z 6.586 Point d (X43.08, Z 6.586)
2-A
25° b
d
Zc
a
c
Zc
θ = 25° Rn = 0.8
X Z Point X Z
a 50.0 10.0 a 50.0 10.0
b 68.65 30.0 b 68.65 30.0
Zc Zc is found in the offset data table:

R
Zc = 0.6226 0.623 Zc = 0.6226 0.623

c Point c:
Z = 10.0 0.623 = 10.623 Z = 10.0 0.623 = 10.623
c X50.0, Z 10.623 Point c (X50.0, Z 10.623)
d Point d:
Z = 30.0 0.623 = 30.623 Z = 30.0 0.623 = 30.623
d X68.65, Z 30.623 Point d (X68.65, Z 30.623)
Zc
2-B
c
a
Zc
d
b
38°
θ = 38° Rn = 0.8
X Z Point X Z
a 50.0 10.0 a 50.0 10.0
b 34.38 20.0 b 34.38 20.0

Zc = 0.5245 0.525 Zc = 0.5245 0.525
c Point c:
Z = 10.0 0.525 = 10.525 Z = 10.0 0.525 = 10.525
c X50.0, Z 10.525 Point c (X50.0, Z 10.525)
d Point d:
Z = 20.0 0.525 = 20.525 Z = 20.0 0.525 = 20.525
d X34.38, Z 20.525 Point d (X34.38, Z 20.525)
3-A
b
d 20° a
Xc
c
Xc
θ = 20° Rn = 0.8
X Z Point X Z
a 50.0 0 a 50.0 0
b 60.92 15.0 b 60.92 15.0
Xc Xc is found in the offset data table:

Xc = 0.2398 0.240 Xc = 0.2398 0.240
c Point c:
X = 50.0 (2 0.240) = 49.52 X = 50.0 (2 0.240) = 49.52
c X49.52, Z0 Point c (X49.52, Z0)
R
d Point d:
X = 60.92 (2 0.240) = 60.44 X = 60.92 (2 0.240) = 60.44
d X60.44, Z 15.0 Point d (X60.44, Z 15.0)
3-B
c
Xc
a
d 40°
Xc
b θ = 40° Rn = 0.8
X Z Point X Z
a 50.0 0 a 50.0 0
b 33.22 10.0 b 33.22 10.0

Xc = 0.4269 0.427 Xc = 0.4269 0.427
c Point c:
X = 50.0 + (2 0.427) = 50.854 X = 50.0 + (2 0.427) = 50.854
c X50.854, Z0 Point c (X50.854, Z0)
d Point d:
X = 33.22 + (2 0.427) = 34.074 X = 33.22 + (2 0.427) = 34.074
d X34.074, Z 10.0 Point d (X34.074, Z 10.0)
4-A
b
Xc
d
a
c
Zc 33°
θ = 33° Rn = 0.8
X Z Point X Z
a 50.0 10.0 a 50.0 10.0
b 62.98 20.0 b 62.98 20.0

c Point c:
Zc = 0.5630 0.563 Zc = 0.5630 0.563
Z = 10.0 0.563 = 10.563 Z = 10.0 0.563 = 10.563
c X50.0, Z 10.563 Point c (X50.0, Z 10.563)
R
d Point d:
Xc = 0.3656 0.366 Xc = 0.3656 0.366
X = 62.98 (2 0.366) = 62.248 X = 62.98 (2 0.366) = 62.248
d X62.248, Z 20.0 Point d (X62.248, Z 20.0)
4-B Zc 55°
c
a
d
Xc
b θ = 55° Rn = 0.8
X Z Point X Z
a 50.0 10.0 a 50.0 10.0
b 35.72 15.0 b 35.72 15.0

c Point c:
Zc = 0.3835 0.384 Zc = 0.3835 0.384
Z = 10.0 0.384 = 10.384 Z = 10.0 0.384 = 10.384
c X50.0, Z 10.384 Point c (X50.0, Z 10.384)
d Point d:
Xc = 0.5477 0.548 Xc = 0.5477 0.548
X = 35.72 + (2 0.548) = 36.816 X = 35.72 + (2 0.548) = 36.816
d X36.816, Z 15.0 Point d (X36.816, Z 15.0)
5-A
40°
c
a
Z'c
b
Xc
d
θ = 40° Rn = 0.8
X Z Point X Z
a 50.0 10.0 a 50.0 10.0
b 24.82 25.0 b 24.82 25.0
Zc Xc Zc and Xc are found in the offset data table:

Zc = 0.5088 0.509 Zc = 0.5088 0.509
c Point c:
Z'c = 2 Rn Zc = 2 0.8 0.509 = 1.091 Z'c = 2 Rn Zc = 2 0.8 0.509 = 1.091
Z = 10.0 1.091 = 11.091 Z = 10.0 1.091 = 11.091
c X50.0, Z 11.091 Point c (X50.0, Z 11.091)
R
d Point d:
Xc = 0.4269 0.427 Xc = 0.4269 0.427
X = 24.82 (2 0.427) = 23.966 X = 24.82 (2 0.427) = 23.966
Z = 25.0 (2 Rn) = 25.0 1.6 = 26.6 Z = 25.0 (2 Rn) = 25.0 1.6 = 26.6
d X23.966, Z 26.6 Point d (X23.966, Z 26.6)
2Rn
5-B Xc
b Z'c
d
a
c
30°
θ = 30° Rn = 0.8
X Z Point X Z
a 50.0 10.0 a 50.0 10.0
b 61.54 20.0 b 61.54 20.0
Zc Xc Zc and Xc are found in the offset data table:

Zc = 0.5856 0.586 Zc = 0.5856 0.586
c Point c:
Z'c = 2 Rn Zc = 2 0.8 0.586 Z'c = 2 Rn Zc = 2 0.8 0.586
= 1.014 = 1.014
Z = 10.0 1.014 = 11.014 Z = 10.0 1.014 = 11.014
c X50.0, Z 11.014 Point c (X50.0, Z 11.014)
d Point d:
Xc = 0.3381 0.338 Xc = 0.3381 0.338
X = 61.54 + (2 0.338) = 62.216 X = 61.54 + (2 0.338) = 62.216
Z = 20.0 (2 Rn) = 20.0 1.6 = 21.6 Z = 20.0 (2 Rn) = 20.0 1.6 = 21.6
d X62.216, Z 21.6 Point d (X62.216, Z 21.6)
6-A
35°
a
c
Z'c
d b
Z'c
θ = 35° Rn = 0.8
X Z Point X Z
a 50.0 10.0 a 50.0 10.0
b 40.0 17.14 b 40.0 17.14

Zc = 0.5478 0.548 Zc = 0.5478 0.548
c Point c:
Z'c = 2 Rn Zc = 2 0.8 0.548 = 1.052 Z'c = 2 Rn Zc = 2 0.8 0.548 = 1.052
Z = 10.0 1.052 = 11.052 Z = 10.0 1.052 = 11.052
c X50.0, Z 11.052 Point c (X50.0, Z 11.052)
R
d Point d:
Z = 17.14 1.052 = 18.192 Z = 17.14 1.052 = 18.192
d X40.0, Z 18.192 Point d (X40.0, Z 18.192)
6-B Z'c
b
d
Z'c
c a θ = 45° Rn = 0.8
45°
X Z Point X Z
a 50.0 10.0 a 50.0 10.0
b 60.0 15.0 b 60.0 15.0

Zc = 0.4686 0.469 Zc = 0.4686 0.469
c Point c:
Z'c = 2 Rn Zc Z'c = 2 Rn Zc
= 2 0.8 0.469 = 1.131 = 2 0.8 0.469 = 1.131
Z = 10.0 1.131 = 11.131 Z = 10.0 1.131 = 11.131
c X50.0, Z 11.131 Point c (X50.0, Z 11.131)
d Point d:
Z = 15.0 1.131 = 16.131 Z = 15.0 1.131 = 16.131
d X60.0, Z 16.131 Point d (X60.0, Z 16.131)
2-2 R
Example Program (Manual Tool Nose Radius Offset)
Example:
O.D. and I.D. cutting
T01
1 10
9 11 19
8 3 2
30 6 T02
7 C2 5
13 12
15 14 4
60
40
25
16
15
17
18
30
15
Rapid Traverse
15
20 Cutting Feed
R R0.4
<Without taking into consideration the tool nose radius> <Tool nose radius = 0.4 mm>
O1; O1;
N1; N1;
G50 S2000;............................................................... a .............. G50 S2000;
G00 T0101; G00 T0101;
G96 S180 M03; G96 S180 M03;
X46.0 Z20.0 M08; .................................................... b .............. X46.0 Z20.0 M08;
G01 Z0 F1.0; c .............. G01 Z0 F1.0;
X20.0 F0.15; ............................................................ d .............. X20.0 F0.15;
G00 X34.0 Z1.0; ....................................................... e .............. G00 X33.532 Z1.0;
R
G01 X40.0 Z 2.0; ..................................................... f .............. G01 X40.0 Z 2.234;

Z 15.0; ..................................................................... g .............. Z 15.0;
X42.679;.................................................................... h .............. X42.094;
X60.0 Z 20.0; .......................................................... i .............. X60.0 Z 20.169;
G00 X200.0 Z100.0;.................................................. j .............. G00 X200.0 Z100.0;
M01; M01;
N2; N2;
G50 S2500;............................................................... k .............. G50 S2500;
G00 T0202; G00 T0202;
G96 S200 M03; G96 S200 M03;
X31.0 Z20.0; ............................................................. l .............. X31.468 Z20.0;
G01 Z1.0 F1.0;.......................................................... m .............. G01 Z1.0 F1.0;
X25.0 Z 2.0 F0.15; ................................................... n .............. X25.0 Z 2.234 F0.15;
Z 12.113; .................................................................. o .............. Z 12.282;
X15.0 Z 15.0; ........................................................... p .............. X15.586 Z 15.0;
X0;............................................................................. q .............. X0.8;
G00 U 1.0 Z20.0; ..................................................... r .............. G00 U 1.0 Z20.0;
X200.0 Z100.0; ......................................................... s .............. X200.0 Z100.0;
M01; M01;
2 2 NOTE
“ ” R Underlined “ ” coordinate values include offset data.
e X33.532 e X33.532
= 45 Rn = 0.4 = 45 Rn = 0.4
Xc = 0.2343 0.234 Xc = 0.2343 0.234
X = 40.0 2 (2.0 + 1.0 + 0.234) X = 40.0 2 (2.0 + 1.0 + 0.234)
= 33.532 = 33.532
2 2 NOTE
X Value X should be given in diameters.
f Z 2.234 f Z 2.234
= 45 Rn = 0.4 = 45 Rn = 0.4
Zc = 0.2343 0.234 Zc = 0.2343 0.234
Z = 0 2.0 0.234 Z = 0 2.0 0.234
= 2.234 = 2.234
Zc = 0.234
6
C2
2
φ 40
2 1
1 5
Xc = 0.234
Z0 X
h X42.094 h X42.094
= 60 Rn = 0.4 = 60 Rn = 0.4
Xc = 0.29282 0.2928 Xc = 0.29282 0.2928
8.66 = 5 tan60 8.66 = 5 tan60
X = 60.0 2 (8.66 + 0.2928) X = 60.0 2 (8.66 + 0.2928)
= 42.094 = 42.094
2 2 NOTE
R
i Z 20.169 i Z 20.169
= 60 Rn = 0.4 = 60 Rn = 0.4
Zc = 0.1690 0.169 Zc = 0.1690 0.169
Z = 15.0 5.0 0.169 Z = 15.0 5.0 0.169
= 20.169 = 20.169
φ 60
30°
8.66
Zc = 0.169
60° 8
5
Xc = 0.2928
Z−15.0
m X31.468 m X31.468
= 45 Rn = 0.4 = 45 Rn = 0.4
Xc = 0.2343 0.234 Xc = 0.2343 0.234
X = 25.0 + 2 (2.0 + 1.0 + 0.234) X = 25.0 + 2 (2.0 + 1.0 + 0.234)
= 31.468 = 31.468
12 13 X The X coordinates of points 12 and 13 are the same.
2 2 NOTE
n Z 2.234 n Z 2.234
= 45 Rn = 0.4 = 45 Rn = 0.4
Zc = 0.2343 0.234 Zc = 0.2343 0.234
Z = 0 2.0 0.234 Z = 0 2.0 0.234
= 2.234 = 2.234
Z0
Xc = 0.234
1
2 1 13
Zc = 0.234 2
C2
14
φ 25
o Z 12.282 o Z 12.282
= 60 Rn = 0.4 = 60 Rn = 0.4
Zc = 0.1690 0.169 Zc = 0.1690 0.169
2.887 = 5 tan30 2.887 = 5 tan30
Z = 15.0 + 2.887 0.169 Z = 15.0 + 2.887 0.169
= 12.282 = 12.282
p X15.586 p X15.586
= 60 Rn = 0.4 = 60 Rn = 0.4
Xc = 0.2928 0.293 Xc = 0.2928 0.293
X = 15.0 + (2 0.293) X = 15.0 + (2 0.293)
= 15.586 = 15.586
R
Zc = 0.169
2.887
60° 15
φ 25
5
30°
Xc = 0.293
16
φ15
Z−15.0
q X0.8 q X0.8
“X0” A If “X0” is specified in this block, the tool tip moves beyond
the spindle center line. In this position, the cutting edge
R direction does not correspond to the rotating direction of
the spindle (workpiece).
Rn = 0.4 Therefore, in this block, the X coordinate must be away
X = 2 0.4 = 0.8 from the spindle center line by the nose radius.
Rn = 0.4
X = 2 0.4 = 0.8
X0 X0.8
In the case of X0: In the case of X0.8:
Workpiece Workpiece (X0.8, Z 15.0)
(X0, Z 15.0)
0.4
Spindle Center
Tool Tool
A B
Fig. A Fig. B
Offset Data
R Tool Nose Radius Offset Data Table
1 45 X, Z R Find the required offset data.

Use the left column Nose R (X, Z) if the taper angle is 1 to 45 .
45 89 Z, X R Use the right column Nose R (Z, X) if the taper angle is 45 to
89 .
R 0.4 0.5 0.8 1.0 1.2 R

Nose R Nose R
X .006921 .008651 .013842 .017303 .020763 Z
1 89
Z .396509 .495636 .793019 .991273 1.189528 X
X .010337 .012922 .020675 .025843 .031012 Z
1 30' 88 30'
Z .394764 .493455 .789527 .986909 1.184291 X
X .013724 .017156 .027449 .034311 .041173 Z
2 88
Z .393018 .491272 .786036 .982545 1.179054 X
X .017083 .021354 .034167 .042708 .051250 Z
2 30' 87 30'
Z .391272 .489090 .782544 .978180 1.173816 X
X .020414 .025518 .040828 .051035 .061243 Z
3 87
Z .389526 .486907 .779051 .973814 1.168577 X
R
R 0.4 0.5 0.8 1.0 1.2 R

Nose R Nose R
X .023718 .029647 .047435 .059294 .071153 Z
3 30' 86 30'
Z .387779 .484724 .775558 .969447 1.163337 X
X .026994 .033742 .053988 .067485 .080982 Z
4 86
Z .386032 .482540 .772063 .965079 1.158095 X
X .030244 .037805 .060488 .075610 .090731 Z
4 30' 85 30'
Z .384284 .480355 .768568 .960710 1.152852 X
X .033468 .041834 .066935 .083669 .100403 Z
5 85
Z .382536 .478170 .765071 .956339 1.147607 X
X .036666 .045832 .073331 .091664 .109997 Z
5 30' 84 30'
Z .380787 .475983 .761573 .951967 1.142360 X
X .039838 .049798 .079677 .099596 .119515 Z
6 84
Z .379037 .473796 .758074 .947592 1.137111 X
X .042986 .053733 .085973 .107466 .128959 Z
6 30' 83 30'
Z .377286 .471608 .754573 .943216 1.131859 X
X .046110 .057637 .092220 .115275 .138330 Z
7 83
Z .375535 .469419 .751070 .938837 1.126605 X
X .049209 .061512 .098419 .123024 .147628 Z
7 30' 82 30'
Z .373783 .467228 .747565 .934457 1.121348 X
X .052285 .065357 .104571 .130713 .156856 Z
8 82
Z .372029 .465037 .744059 .930073 1.116088 X
X .055338 .069172 .110676 .138345 .166014 Z
8 30' 81 30'
Z .370275 .472844 .740550 .925687 1.110825 X
X .058368 .072960 .116735 .145919 .175103 Z
9 81
Z .368519 .460649 .737039 .921298 1.105558 X
X .061375 .076719 .122750 .153438 .184125 Z
9 30' 80 30'
Z .366763 .458453 .733525 .916906 1.100288 X
X .064360 .080450 .128720 .160900 .193080 Z
10 80
Z .365005 .456256 .730009 .912511 1.095014 X
X .067324 .084154 .134647 .168309 .201971 Z
10 30' 79 30'
Z .363245 .454056 .726490 .908113 1.089735 X
X .070265 .087832 .140531 .175664 .210796 Z
11 79
Z .361484 .451855 .722969 .903711 1.084453 X
X .073186 .091483 .146373 .182966 .219559 Z
11 30' 78 30'
Z .359722 .449653 .719444 .899305 1.079166 X
X .076086 .095108 .152173 .190216 .228259 Z
12 78
Z .357958 .447448 .715917 .894896 1.073875 X
X .078966 .098708 .157932 .197415 .236898 Z
12 30' 77 30'
Z .356193 .445241 .712386 .890482 1.068579 X
X .081826 .102282 .163651 .204564 .245477 Z
13 77
Z .354426 .443032 .708852 .886064 1.063277 X
R
R 0.4 0.5 0.8 1.0 1.2 R

Nose R Nose R
X .084665 .105832 .169331 .211664 .253996 Z
13 30' 76 30'
Z .352657 .440821 .705314 .881642 1.057971 X
X .087486 .109357 .174972 .218714 .262457 Z
14 76
Z .350886 .438608 .701772 .877215 1.052659 X
X .090287 .112859 .180574 .225717 .270861 Z
14 30' 75 30'
Z .349114 .436392 .698227 .872784 1.047341 X
X .093069 .116337 .186138 .232673 .279208 Z
15 75
Z .347339 .434174 .694678 .868348 1.042017 X
X .095833 .119791 .191666 .239582 .287499 Z
15 30' 74 30'
Z .345562 .431953 .691125 .863906 1.036687 X
X .098578 .123223 .197157 .246446 .295735 Z
16 74
Z .343784 .429730 .687567 .859459 1.031351 X
X .101306 .126632 .202612 .253265 .303917 Z
16 30' 73 30'
Z .342003 .427503 .684006 .855007 1.026008 X
X .104016 .130019 .208031 .260039 .312047 Z
17 73
Z .340220 .425274 .680439 .850549 1.020659 X
X .106708 .133385 .213416 .266770 .320124 Z
17 30' 72 30'
Z .338434 .423043 .676868 .846085 1.015302 X
X .109383 .136729 .218766 .273457 .328149 Z
18 72
Z .336646 .420808 .673292 .841616 1.009939 X
X .112041 .140052 .224082 .280103 .336124 Z
18 30' 71 30'
Z .334856 .418570 .669712 .837140 1.004568 X
X .114683 .143353 .229366 .286707 .344048 Z
19 71
Z .333063 .416329 .666126 .832657 .999189 X
X .117308 .146635 .234616 .293270 .351924 Z
19 30' 70 30'
Z .331267 .414084 .662535 .828169 .993802 X
X .119917 .149896 .239834 .299792 .359751 Z
20 70
Z .329469 .411837 .658938 .823673 .988408 X
X .122510 .153138 .245020 .306275 .367530 Z
20 30' 69 30'
Z .327668 .409585 .655336 .819171 .983005 X
X .125088 .156360 .250175 .312719 .375263 Z
21 69
Z .325864 .407330 .651729 .814661 .977593 X
X .127650 .159562 .225299 .319124 .382949 Z
21 30' 68 30'
Z .324058 .405072 .648115 .810144 .972173 X
X .130197 .162746 .260393 .325491 .390590 Z
22 68
Z .322248 .402810 .644496 .805620 .966744 X
X .132729 .165911 .265457 .331821 .398186 Z
22 30' 67 30'
Z .320435 .400544 .640870 .801088 .961305 X
X .135246 .169057 .270492 .338114 .405737 Z
23 67
Z .318619 .398274 .637238 .796548 .955857 X
R
R 0.4 0.5 0.8 1.0 1.2 R

Nose R Nose R
X .137749 .172186 .275497 .344371 .413246 Z
23 30' 66 30'
Z .316800 .396000 .633600 .792000 .950400 X
X .140237 .175296 .280474 .350592 .420711 Z
24 66
Z .314977 .393722 .629955 .787443 .944932 X
X .142711 .178389 .285423 .356778 .428134 Z
24 30' 65 30'
Z .313151 .391439 .626303 .782879 .939454 X
X .145172 .181465 .290344 .362930 .435516 Z
25 65
Z .311322 .389153 .622644 .778305 .933966 X
X .147619 .184523 .295238 .369047 .442856 Z
25 30' 64 30'
Z .309489 .386862 .618978 .773723 .928468 X
X .150052 .187565 .300105 .375131 .450157 Z
26 64
Z .307653 .384566 .615305 .769132 .922958 X
X .152472 .190591 .304945 .381181 .457417 Z
26 30' 63 30'
Z .305813 .382266 .611625 .764531 .917438 X
X .154880 .193600 .309759 .387199 .464639 Z
27 63
Z .303968 .379961 .607937 .759921 .911905 X
X .157274 .196593 .314548 .393185 .471822 Z
27 30' 62 30'
Z .302121 .377651 .604241 .755302 .906362 X
X .159656 .199570 .319312 .399139 .478967 Z
28 62
Z .300269 .375336 .600538 .750672 .900806 X
X .162025 .202531 .324050 .405063 .486075 Z
28 30' 61 30'
Z .298413 .373016 .596826 .746032 .895239 X
X .164382 .205477 .328764 .410955 .493146 Z
29 61
Z .296553 .370691 .593106 .741382 .889659 X
X .166727 .208409 .333454 .416817 .500181 Z
29 30' 60 30'
Z .294689 .368361 .589378 .736722 .884066 X
X .169060 .211325 .338120 .422650 .507180 Z
30 60
Z .292820 .366025 .585641 .732051 .878461 X
X .171381 .214226 .342762 .428453 .514143 Z
30 30' 59 30'
Z .290947 .363684 .581895 .727369 .872842 X
X .173691 .217114 .347382 .434227 .521073 Z
31 59
Z .289070 .361338 .578140 .722675 .867211 X
X .175989 .219987 .351978 .439973 .527968 Z
31 30' 58 30'
Z .287188 .358985 .574377 .717971 .861565 X
X .178276 .222845 .356553 .445691 .534829 Z
32 58
Z .285302 .356627 .570604 .713255 .855906 X
X .180552 .225691 .361105 .451381 .541657 Z
32 30' 57 30'
Z .283411 .354263 .566821 .708527 .850232 X
X .182818 .228522 .365635 .457044 .548453 Z
33 57
Z .281515 .351893 .563029 .703787 .844544 X
R
R 0.4 0.5 0.8 1.0 1.2 R

Nose R Nose R
X .185072 .231340 .370144 .462681 .555217 Z
33 30' 56 30'
Z .279614 .349517 .559227 .699034 .838841 X
X .187316 .234145 .374632 .468291 .561949 Z
34 56
Z .277708 .347135 .555415 .694269 .833123 X
X .189550 .236937 .379100 .473875 .568649 Z
34 30' 55 30'
Z .275797 .344746 .551593 .689492 .827390 X
X .191733 .239716 .383546 .479433 .575320 Z
35 55
Z .273880 .342351 .547761 .684701 .821641 X
X .193986 .242483 .387973 .484966 .581959 Z
35 30' 54 30'
Z .271959 .339949 .543918 .679897 .815877 X
X .196190 .245237 .392380 .490475 .588569 Z
36 54
Z .270032 .337540 .540064 .675080 .810096 X
X .198383 .247979 .396767 .495959 .595150 Z
36 30' 53 30'
Z .268100 .335125 .536200 .670249 .804299 X
X .200567 .250709 .401135 .501418 .601702 Z
37 53
Z .266162 .332702 .532324 .665405 .798486 X
X .202742 .253427 .405484 .506855 .608225 Z
37 30' 52 30'
Z .264218 .330273 .528437 .660546 .792655 X
X .204907 .256134 .409814 .512267 .614721 Z
38 52
Z .262269 .327836 .524538 .655672 .786807 X
X .207063 .258829 .414126 .517657 .621189 Z
38 30' 51 30'
Z .260314 .325392 .520627 .650784 .780941 X
X .209210 .261512 .418420 .523024 .627629 Z
39 51
Z .258353 .322941 .516705 .645881 .775058 X
X .211348 .264185 .422696 .528369 .634043 Z
39 30' 50 30'
Z .256385 .320482 .512771 .640963 .769156 X
X .213477 .266846 .426954 .533692 .640431 Z
40 50
Z .254412 .318015 .508824 .636030 .763236 X
X .215597 .269497 .431195 .538994 .646792 Z
40 30' 49 30'
Z .252432 .315540 .504864 .631081 .757297 X
X .217709 .272137 .435419 .544274 .653128 Z
41 49
Z .250446 .313058 .500892 .626115 .751338 X
X .219813 .274766 .439626 .549533 .659439 Z
41 30' 48 30'
Z .248454 .310567 .496907 .621134 .745361 X
X .221909 .277386 .443817 .554771 .665726 Z
42 48
Z .246454 .308068 .492909 .616136 .739363 X
X .223996 .279995 .447992 .559989 .671987 Z
42 30' 47 30'
Z .244449 .305561 .488897 .611121 .733346 X
X .226075 .282594 .452150 .565188 .678225 Z
43 47
Z .242436 .303045 .484872 .606090 .727307 X
R
R 0.4 0.5 0.8 1.0 1.2 R

Nose R Nose R
X .228146 .285183 .456293 .570366 .684439 Z
43 30' 46 30'
Z .240416 .300520 .480832 .601040 .721249 X
X .230210 .287763 .460420 .575525 .690630 Z
44 46
Z .238390 .297987 .476779 .595974 .715169 X
X .232266 .290333 .464532 .580665 .696798 Z
44 30' 45 30'
Z .236356 .295445 .472711 .590889 .709067 X
X .234315 .292893 .468629 .585786 .702944 Z
45 45
Z .234315 .292893 .468629 .585786 .702944 X
R
2-3
Offset in Circular Interpolation
R When cutting an arc, it is possible to cut the arc as specified on

a drawing by offsetting the tool position.
Convex Arc
By specifying the arc, shown by the dotted lines, it is possible

to cut an arc as specified on the drawing.
R Programmed arc radius (R)
= r + R Rn = Radius (r) of the arc specified on the drawing + Tool nose
radius (Rn)
Arc Specified on a Drawing
Arc to be Programmed
Workpiece
r: Arc Radius (Specified on
r Drawing)
R = r + Rn Rn: Tool Nose Radius
O: Arc Center (Specified on
R Drawing)
Rn O Rn O': Arc Center (for
O’ Programmed Arc)
Rn
Concave Arc
By specifying the arc, shown by the dotted lines, it is possible

to cut an arc as specified on the drawing.
R Programmed arc radius (R)
= r R Rn = Radius (r) of the arc specified on the drawing Tool nose
radius (Rn)
Rn
O Rn
r O'
R=r Rn
r: Arc Radius (Specified on

Drawing)
R Rn: Tool Nose Radius
O: Arc Center (Specified on
Drawing)
Rn O': Arc Center (for
Programmed Arc)
Arc Specified on a Drawing
Arc to be Programmed
Calculating Coordinate Values to be Specified in

Program
R 2 The coordinate values to be specified in a program to offset for

the tool nose radius are explained below.
R
<Calculating the required coordinate values directly>
Arc Center (on Drawing)
Arc Center (on Program)
Command Point
When calculating the required coordinate values, assume the

shape shown by the dotted lines. The center of the arc
specified on a drawing and the center of the arc to be
programmed will differ from each other.
R <Calculating the required coordinate values after
calculating the tool nose center>
Arc Center (on Drawing)

Calculated Value
R
Tool Nose Center
Command Point
R In this method, the coordinate values of the tool nose center is

R calculated first. After that, the programmed points are
calculated by adding or subtracting the tool nose radius to, or
from, the calculated center of the arc.
2 2 NOTE
R 2 In the following examples, the tool nose center is calculated using
method 2.
R
Example Program
Example:
Cutting of O.D. with arc profile
11
1
10
9 8
6 5
7
4
R1.5
3
25 2
φ60
φ40
φ20
R2
R1 R5
20
40
R R0.8
<Without taking into consideration the tool nose radius> <Tool nose radius = 0.8 mm>
O1; O1;
N1; N1;
G50 S2000;............................................................... a .............. G50 S2000;
G00 T0101; G00 T0101;
G96 S150 M03; G96 S150 M03;
X18.0 Z20.0 M08; ..................................................... b .............. X18.0 Z20.0 M08;
G01 Z0 F1.0; c .............. G01 Z0 F1.0;
X36.0 F0.25; ............................................................. d .............. X34.4F0.25;
G03 X40.0 Z 2.0 R2.0; ............................................. e .............. G03 X40.0 Z 2.8 R2.8;
G01 Z 15.0; ............................................................. f .............. G01 Z 15.8;
G02 X50.0 Z 20.0 R5.0; .......................................... g .............. G02 X48.4 Z 20.0 R4.2;
G01 X58.0; ............................................................... h .............. G01 X56.4;
G03 X60.0 Z 21.0 R1.0; ........................................... i .............. G03 X60.0 Z 21.8 R1.8;
G01 Z 25.0; .............................................................. j .............. G01 Z 25.0;
G00 X100.0 Z50.0;.................................................... k .............. G00 X100.0 Z50.0;
: :
2 2 NOTE
d e <Points d and e>
5 G03
5'
R2
R
Rn = 0.8
φ 40
4'
Z0
A convex arc is cut.

d e X Z The X and Z coordinate values are calculated for d and e.
90 1/4 X Z For a quarter circle, X and Z coordinate values can be
calculated easily.
As shown on the drawing,
d Z Z coordinate value of d:
R
Z=0 Z = 0 (end face to be finished),

e X X coordinate value of e:
X = 40.0 ( 40) X = 40.0 ( 40)
Next,
d X X coordinate value of d:
X=e' X = Diameter of e'
2 + R 2 (Arc radius + Tool nose radius Rn)
=40.0 2 (2.0 + 0.8) = 40.0 2 (2.0 + 0.8)
=34.4 = 34.4
e Z Z coordinate value of e:
Z= + R Z = (Arc radius + Tool nose radius Rn)
= (2.0 + 0.8) = (2.0 + 0.8)
= 2.8 = 2.8
R Radius (R) to be used in a program is:
R= + R R = Arc radius + Tool nose radius Rn
= 2.0 + 0.8 = 2.0 + 0.8
= 2.8 = 2.8
f g <Points f and g>
20
7'
7
R5 R
G02
6 6'
φ 40
A concave arc is cut.

As shown on the drawing,
d e f g As in the explanation for d and e, the coordinate values of f
and g are calculated similarly.
f Z X coordinate value of f:
X = 40.0 ( 40) X = 40.0 ( 40)
g Z Z coordinate value of point g:
Z = 20.0 Z = 20.0
Next,
f Z Z coordinate value of f:
Z = |g' Z |+ - R Z = |Z coordinate value of g'|
= |20.0|+(5.0 0.8) + (Arc radius Tool nose radius Rn)
= 15.8 = |20.0| + (5.0 0.8)
= 15.8
2 2 NOTE
| | The pair of a vertical bar (| |) is the mathematical symbols indicating an
absolute value.
g X X coordinate value of g:
X = f' X = Diameter of f'
+2 - R + 2 (Arc radius Tool nose radius Rn)
= 40.0 + 2 (5.0 0.8) = 40.0 + 2 (5.0 0.8)
= 48.4 = 48.4
R Radius (R) to be used in a program is:
R= R R = Arc radius + Tool nose radius Rn
= 5.0 0.8 = 5.0 0.8
= 4.2 = 4.2
2-4 R
Example Program for Sample Workpiece (Manual Tool Nose Radius Offset)
The part programs for the facing, O.D. finishing, and I.D.
finishing are written for the sample workpiece illustrated below.
R
<Drawing>
41
25
3 5
C1
C1.5
C0.5 C1
C1
15 R2
C1.5
69
56
32
44
54
M60 P2
Finishing unless otherwise
specified:
<Dimensions of Blank Workpiece>
Blank Workpiece Data

S45C
Material AISI 1045 (Carbon steel)
70
O.D.
mm 30
Dimensions (mm) I.D.
43
Length
<Part Programs for Facing, O.D. Finishing and I.D.

Finishing>
10
8 2
7 5
9 1
6
4
23
22 21
24
3
25
26
Rapid Traverse
27
Cutting Feed
N3(FIN. OF. OUT.); ........................................... Part program for finish facing and
R0.4 O.D. finishing (tool nose radius: 0.4)
G50 S2000;....................................................... 1 Setting the spindle speed limit for
2000 min 1 automatic operation at 2000 min 1
G00 T0303; ....................................................... 3 Selecting the No. 3 tool
G96 S200 M03;................................................. 200 m/min 1 Starting the spindle or spindle 1 in
the normal direction at the cutting
speed of 200 m/min
R
a X56.0 Z20.0 M08; ............................................ Approaching cutting tool to the

workpiece at a rapid traverse rate
b G01 Z0 F1.0;
c X30.0 F0.15;
d G00 X49.54 W1.0;............................................. R Positioning; tool nose radius is
taken into consideration.
e G01 X54.0 Z 1.23; ........................................... R Cutting to the specified position; tool
nose radius is taken into
consideration.
f Z 5.0;
g X56.34; ............................................................. R Cutting to the specified position; tool
consideration.
h X59.8 Z 6.73; .................................................. R Cutting to the specified position; tool
consideration.
i Z 23.0 F0.2;
j G00 U1.0 Z20.0;
X200.0 Z150.0; ................................................. Retracting cutting tool from the
M01; .................................................................. If optional stop is valid:
The machine stops temporarily.
If optional stop is invalid:
The machine does not stop and the
program is continuously executed.
N4 (FIN. OF. IN.); .............................................. Part program for I.D. finishing (tool
R0.4 nose radius: 0.4)
G50 S2000;....................................................... 1 Setting the spindle speed limit for
G00 T0404; ....................................................... 4 Selecting the No. 4 tool
G96 S200 M03;................................................. 200 m/min 1 Starting the spindle or spindle 1 in
speed of 200 m/min
u X47.869 Z20.0 M08;.......................................... X R Positioning of only X-axis; tool nose
radius is taken into consideration.
v G01 Z1.0 F1.0;
w Z0 F0.2;
x G02 X43.233Z 1.779
R2.4 F0.07; ....................................................... R 2.4 mm Circular cutting in the clockwise
direction in 2.4 mm radius; tool nose
radius is taken into consideration.
y G01 X32.0 Z 22.74; ......................................... R Cutting to the specified position; tool
consideration.
z Z 41.0 F0.1;
A G00 U 1.0 Z20.0;.............................................. Escape of cutting tool from the
workpiece to execute I.D. cutting in
the next process (cancel mode)
X200.0 Z150.0; ................................................. Retracting cutting tool from the
M01; .................................................................. If optional stop is valid:
The machine stops temporarily.
If optional stop is invalid:
The machine does not stop and the
program is continuously executed.
2 2 NOTE
R
<O.D. Finishing>
d e f g h The programmed points d, e, f, g, and h in the part
program are explained below.
Rn0.4
Zc
54
C1
Rn0.4
Xc
A
R
1.0
Tool Nose Radius
1) A 1 mm 1) Point A is taken at a point 1 mm away from the Z position

where facing is carried out.
A X Calculate the X coordinate value of point A.
X = D 2 (C + Xc + a) D D: Outside diameter
= 54.0 2 (1.0 + 0.23 + 1.0) C C: Chamfer size
= 49.54 Xc X Xc: Offset data, X-axis
a a: Distance away from workpiece
A X49.54, W1.0 (Z1.0) Therefore, the coordinate values of point A are: X49.54,
W1.0 (Z1.0)
2) B Z 2) Calculate the Z coordinate value of point B.
Z = (C + Zc) C C: Chamfer size

= (1.0 + 0.23) Zc Z Zc: Offset data, Z-axis
= 1.23
X = 54.0
B X54.0, Z 1.23 Therefore, the coordinate values of point B are: X54.0
Z 1.23
Rn0.4
E
Zc
59.8
1.5 Rn0.4
Xc
D
Z 5.0
R
Tool Nose Radius
C
3) C R 3) Point C is not influenced by the tool nose radius. Specify

the coordinate values found on the part drawing.
C Z 5.0 Therefore, the Z coordinate value of point C is: Z 5.0
4) D X 4) Calculate the X coordinate value of point D.
X = D 2 (C + Xc) D D: Outside diameter
= 59.8 2 (1.5 + 0.23) C C: Chamfer size
= 56.34 Xc X Xc: Offset data, X-axis
D X56.34 Therefore, the coordinate value of point D is: X56.34
5) E Z 5) Calculate the Z coordinate value of point E.
Z = (5.0 + C + Zc) C C: Chamfer size

= (5.0 + 1.5 + 0.23) Zc Z Zc: Offset data, Z-axis
= 6.73
X = 59.8
E X59.8, Z 6.73 Therefore, the coordinate values of point E are: X59.8,
Z 6.73
R
<I.D. Finishing>
w x y The programmed points w, x and y in the part program are
explained below.
Center of Arc
X F
Z 2.0 R2
Rn0.4
44
R
15 Tool Nose Radius
1) R2 X 1) Calculate the X coordinate value of the center of arc R2.
R2 R2
O O
B 37.5° B
75°
H
H
105°
52.5°
A 52.5°
A
C C 75°
φ 44
φ 44
15° 15°
D D
a) O A a) Draw the line from the center O to point A.

H H Length H of side AB of a right angled triangle ÂBO
ÂBO BOA BAO should be calculated. For this calculation either BOA
or BAO must first be calculated.
b) ÂBO ÂCO b) ÂBO and ÂCO are congruent.
Therefore,
AOB = 37.5 AOB = 37.5
OAB = 52.5 OAB = 52.5
c) H c) Now, calculate length H.
H H
tan37.5 ° = tan37.5 ° =
2 2
H=2 tan37.5 = 1.5346 H=2 tan37.5 = 1.5346
5H R2 X 5The X coordinate value of the center of arc R2 can be

calculated from “H”.
d) X d) The X coordinate value of the center of arc R2 is
calculated in the following manner:
X= 44.0 + 2 H* X= 44.0 + 2 H*
= 44.0 + 2 1.5346 = 47.069 = 44.0 + 2 1.5346 = 47.069
R2 X47.069, Z 2.0 Therefore, the coordinate values of the center of arc R2
are: X47.069, Z 2.0
2 2 NOTE
*X H 2 * Value “H” must be doubled because X coordinate values are
all expressed in diameter.

e) F X e) Next, calculate the X coordinate value of point F.
X = 47.069 + 2 Rn X = 47.069 + 2 Rn
= 47.069 + 2 0.4 = 47.869 = 47.069 + 2 0.4 = 47.869
Rn R Rn: Tool nose radius
Z=0 Z=0
F X47.869, Z0 Therefore, the coordinate values of point F are:
X47.869, Z0
R
2) R F 2) Calculate the coordinate values of the center F of tool nose.
Center of Arc
K
X47.069
Z 2.0 O G B
75
I
2.4
a) R F BO G a) Draw the line from F, the center of the tool nose,

perpendicular to side BO. Take the point of intersection
as G.
b) ^FGO I, K b) In the right angled triangle ^FGO, calculate length I
and length K of side FG and side GO, respectively.
OF = + R Hypotenuse OF
= 2.0 + 0.4 = 2.4 = Radius R (specified on the drawing)
+ Tool nose radius
= 2.0 + 0.4 = 2.4
I I
sin75 ° = I= 2.4 × sin75 ° = 2.318 sin75 ° = I= 2.4 × sin75 ° = 2.318
2.4 2.4
K K
cos75 ° = K= 2.4 × cos75 ° = 0.621 cos75 ° = K= 2.4 × cos75 ° = 0.621
2.4 2.4
c) R F c) Calculate the coordinate values of the center F of the

tool nose.
X= 47.069 2 I X= 47.069 2 I
= 47.069 2 2.318 = 42.433 = 47.069 2 2.318 = 42.433
Z= (2.0 K) Z= (2.0 K)
= (2.0 0.621) = 1.379 = (2.0 0.621) = 1.379
F X42.433, Z 1.379 Therefore, the coordinate values of the center F of the
tool nose are:
X42.433, Z 1.379
d) G d) Calculate the coordinate values of point G.
X= 42.433 + 2 Rn X= 42.433 + 2 Rn
= 42.433 + 2 0.4 = 43.233 = 42.433 + 2 0.4 = 43.233
Rn R Rn: Tool nose radius
Z= (1.379 + Rn) Z= (1.379 + Rn)
= (1.379 + 0.4) = 1.779 = (1.379 + 0.4) = 1.779
G X43.233, Z 1.779 Therefore, the coordinate values of point G are:
X43.233, Z 1.779
3) H 3) Calculate the coordinate values of point H.
A
Zc
6.0
H M 15°
φ44
D
φ32
a) H X a) The X coordinate value of point H is the inner diameter

to be finished.
X = 32.0 X = 32.0
R
b) L b) Calculate length L.
6.0 (44.0 − 32.0) 6.0 (44.0 − 32.0)

tan15 ° = 6.0 = tan15 ° = 6.0 =
L 2 L 2
6.0 6.0
L= = 22.3923 L= = 22.3923
tan15 ° tan15 °
c) 15 R0.4 Zc c) Find the offset data (Zc) for nose radius 0.4 mm at
angle of 15.
Zc = 0.3473 Zc = 0.3473
(to be found in the offset data table)
d) H Z d) Calculate the Z coordinate value of point H.
Z= (L + Zc) Z = (L + Zc)
= (22.3923 + 0.3473) = 22.74 = (22.3923 + 0.3473) = 22.74
H X32.0, Z 22.74 Therefore, the coordinate values of point H are: X32.0,
Z 22.74
TOOL RADIUS OFFSET 307
3
TOOL RADIUS OFFSET
The tool radius offset means shifting of the tool paths to the
right or left by the radius from the programmed paths.
Generally, when cutting a pocket or carrying out contouring
operation using an end mill, the tool radius offset function is
used to finish the workpiece in the shape specified in the
drawing.
2 2 NOTE
Since there are a number of tool path patterns which will be used for
actual machining and they will differ among users, it is not possible to
explain all of the tool path patterns in this manual. The explanation
given in this chapter is concentrated on the basic programming so that
the readers will be able to acquire basic knowledge of the tool radius
offset function.
1 1 For more details, please refer to the instruction manuals sup-

plied by the NC unit manufacturer.
1 For example, finish the profile in Fig. 1.
aDbDcDd Specify in the program: aDbDcDd
Since the center of a cutting tool moves along the defined
2 paths, the cutting tool moves along the paths shown in Fig. 2 if
the program is created without using the tool radius offset
function.
Overcut of workpiece occurs by the radius of the cutting tool
( ).
3 4
3 4
3 4
2 2 2
Workpiece Workpiece Workpiece
1 1 1
1 2 3
Fig. 1 Tool Fig. 2 Fig. 3
‘ ’ Input the radius of the cutting tool as the tool radius offset data
to the ‘TOOL GEOMETRY OFFSET’ screen.
3 If the tool radius offset function is used, the tool paths are
1 shifted outside from the programmed paths by the input offset
amount as shown in Fig. 3 to finish the required shape.
In this manner, by using the tool radius offset function, it is not
necessary to obtain the coordinate values using complicated
calculation to generate the tool paths to finish the workpiece to
the required shape.
1. XY
Tool radius offset in the XY plane
G17 G01(G00) G41(G42) X_ Y_ F_ ;
G40 G01(G00) X_ Y_ I_ J_ F_ ;
2. YZ
Tool radius offset in the YZ plane
G19 G01(G00) G41(G42) Y_ Z_ F_ ;
308 TOOL RADIUS OFFSET
G40 G01(G00) Y_ Z_ J_ K_ F_ ;
• G17, G19 ............................ Selects the plane where tool radius offset is
executed.
• G01(G00) ............................ Selects the interpolation mode in which the
G00 tool radius offset function is executed.
G01 G00: Rapid traverse
G01: Cutting feed
• G41 ..................................... Calls the tool radius offset mode (offset to
the left).
The tool paths are generated by shifting the
programmed paths to the left in reference to
the tool advancing direction by the specified
offset amount.
<G41>
Workpiece
Tool Advancing
Direction
• G42 ..................................... Calls the tool radius offset mode (offset to

the right).
The tool paths are generated by shifting the
programmed paths to the right in reference
to the tool advancing direction by the
specified offset amount.
Tool Advancing
Direction Workpiece
<G42>
• G40 ..................................... Cancels the tool radius offset mode.

• X, Y, Z ................................. Specifies the coordinate values of the end
point.
• I, J, K ................................... When making a virtual setting that
represents the direction of the workpiece
I shape in the following block, the direction
ratio for this setting is specified as a vector,
with “I” as the radius command.
2 2 NOTE
7 7 CAUTION
G41, G42 The programmer must thoroughly understand the nature
of the G41 and G42 functions as well as the tool paths to
be generated.
[Tool damage/Machining defect]
3-1
Setting Tool Radius Offset Amount
G41, G42 ‘ To use the tool radius offset function (G41, G42), it is
’ “R” necessary to set the tool radius in the R column on the ‘TOOL
GEOMETRY OFFSET’ screen.
T Set the cutter radius corresponding to the offset number to be
specified in T code.
<Input of Tool Radius Offset Amount>
R
End Mill and
R Other Tools
Tool Radius Offset Amount (Cutter Radius Value)
3-2
Technical Terms Used in Explanation of Tool Radius Offset Function
Start-Up (Tool Radius Offset)
G41 G42 The first block in which the G41 or G42 command is specified
is called the start-up block.
In the start-up operation, the center of the cutting tool is offset
at the stopped position in right angle to the movement in the
next block by its radius.
Example:
Start-Up (This distance must be larger than the cutter

radius.)
1 :
+Y G00 X100.0 Y100.0; ............................................. a
G17 G42 X80.0 Y50.0;.......................................... b
3 G01 X 45.0 F_ ; .................................................. c
2 X80.0, Y50.0 :
50
Start Point of the Next Block (X80.0,

Y50.0)
+X
45 80
This distance must be larger than the
cutter radius.
2 2 NOTE
1. 1. The start-up block must include an axis movement command; the
called distance must be larger than the offset amount (radius of a
tool).
2. G00, G01 2. The start-up must be specified in the G00 or G01 (linear motion)
G02, G03 mode. Do not specify the start-up in the G02 or G03 mode. If the
P151 start-up is specified in such a mode, an alarm is generated, the
corresponding alarm message (P151) is displayed on the screen
and the machine stops operating.
Offset Mode (Tool Radius Offset)
The mode in which the tool radius offset function is valid, after
the start-up, is called the offset mode.
<Behavior when the direction of tool offset (right, left) is
not changed>
The tool moves along the workpiece shape with its periphery in
contact with the shape.
:
G17 G42 G00 X100.0 Y20.0; . . a (Start-up)
G01 X70.0 F200; . . . . . . . . . . . . b
Y45.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . c
Offset mode
G03 X50.0 Y55.0 R10.0; . . . . . d
6
G01 X25.0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . e
X_ Y_ ;
5 (X25.0, Y55.0) 4 :
(X50.0, Y55.0)
R10.0
3
(X70.0, Y45.0)
2 (X70.0, Y20.0) 1 (X100.0,Y20.0)
2 2 NOTE
G17, G19 Do not change the plane with G17 or G19 in the offset mode. If
P112 changed, an alarm occurs, and an alarm message (P112) is displayed
on the screen and the machine stops operating.
<Behavior when the direction of tool offset (right, left) is
changed>
If the direction of offset changes in a program, as illustrated
G G41 G42 below, i.e., if the G code calling the cutter offset function
changes between G41 and G42, the periphery will come into
contact with the workpiece shape that is defined in the two
consecutive blocks where the G code changes from G41 to
G42, or vice versa.
2 :
1 G17 G41 X70.0 Y60.0;
Y40.0; .................................................................. a
(X70.0, Y40.0) G42 X_ Y_ ; ........................................................... b
:
7 7 CAUTION
G41 G42 Changing the G code mode between G41 and G42 cannot
be specified in the start-up and the next block.
Cancel Mode (Tool Radius Offset)
G40 The G40 command, specified in the offset mode, cancels the
tool radius offset function.
The cancel mode starts from the end point of the block that
precedes the G40 block. The center of the cutting tool lies at
right angles to the tool path programmed in the preceding
block.
Example:
:
G17 (G41) X100.0 Y50.0;
(X60.0, Y50.0) 1 (X100.0, Y50.0) X60.0; .................................................................. a
G40 G00 X40.0 Y20.0; ......................................... b
: (Cancel mode)
Cancel Mode
(X40.0, Y20.0)
2
2 2 NOTE
1. G40 1. The tool radius offset function is canceled by pressing the @
@ (RESET) key on the operation panel in addition to the execution of
the G40 command.
2. G00, G01 2. The cancel block must be specified in the G00 or G01 (linear
G02, G03 motion) mode. To specify the cancel block in the G02 or G03
P151 circular interpolation mode is not allowed. If the cancel block is
specified in the circular interpolation mode, an alarm message
(P151) is displayed on the screen and the machine stops.
3. “G40;” 3. Designation of “G40;” or a tool radius offset cancel command
associated with position command of the present position,
meaning no axis movements, when exiting the tool radius offset
mode, the tool stays at the start point of cancel mode and axis
movements for cancellation do not take place. In such cases,
cancel movements take place when the command that calls for
actual axis movements (movements in the same plane as used for
the tool radius offset) is specified next.
“G40;” If the program ends without axis movement commands after the
designation of the cancel command such as “G40;” that does not
@ cause actual movements, the tool radius offset mode remains
@ active. To cancel the tool radius offset mode, in such a case, it is
necessary to press the @ (RESET) key. However, pressing the
@ (RESET) key to cancel the tool radius offset mode does not call
for cancel movements.
For the axis movement commands to be specified for canceling the
G00 G01 tool radius offset mode, it is necessary to specify the position other
than the present position in the G00 or G01 mode so that axes
actually move in the execution of the cancel command.
3-3
General Cautions on Offset Function
G40 If the workpiece wall lies in a direction independent of the

direction of tool motion specified by the commands in the G40
block:
I, J Specify the workpiece wall direction (workpiece shape) with
I, J I vectors (I, J). Use incremental values for I and J commands.
Note that value I must be specified in a radial value.
2 2 NOTE
XY G17 The following gives an explanation assuming that the tool radius offset
YZ G19 function is used in the XY plane (G17). When executing the tool radius
J, K offset function in the YZ plane (G19), specify the direction of wall
(workpiece shape) using vector (J, K).
Wall
I, J G40
(100, 30)
(G42) Actual Tool Motion Commands
+J 5 G40 G00 X100.0 Y30.0 I –4.0 J5.0 ;
4
+I
The workpiece is cut until the tool nose comes into contact with the wall.
2 2 NOTE
1. I, J 1. The I and J commands, used to define the vectors that represent
G40 the workpiece wall direction, should be specified in the G40 block
that appears first after entry into the offset mode.
• •
• Valid • Invalid
G42 X_ Y_ ; G42 X_ Y_ ;
X_ Y_ ; :
: : Offset Mode
: :
: Offset Mode G40 X_ Y_ ;
: :
: : Cancel Mode
: :
G40 G00 X_ Y_ I_ J_ ; G40 G00 X_ Y_ I_ J_ ;
Ignored
2. I_ J_ 2. If “I_ J_” is not specified in the G40 block, the offset mode cancel
point is set at the end point of the preceding block; at this end
point, the center of the tool lies at right angles to the tool path
generated by the commands in the preceding block. This causes
an overcut on the wall.
G40 G00 X_ Y_ ; G40 G00 X_ Y_ ;
G40
(G42)
Overcut occurs.
Example:
Calculating the wall direction (blank workpiece shape)
B
30° (G40)
J = 15
(G42)
60° 30°
C
A
+Y A
J =C
50
35
I 40 60°
+X
I=B
1. J 1. Value “J” is calculated as shown in the diagram above.

J = 15 J = 15
Y + “J15.0” Because it is measured in the positive direction of Y, the
designation should be “J15.0”.
I Next, value “I” is calculated as:
I = AC = 15 tan30 = 8.660 I = AC = 15 tan30 = 8.660
X “I 8.66” Because it is measured in the negative direction on the
X-axis, the designation should be “I 8.66”.
2. I, J 2. Since I and J commands are used to define the direction of
the wall, the ratio between the sides of a triangle may be
used instead of calculating actual lengths.
The ratio of three sides of the triangle given above is known
as:
A:B:C=2:1: (= 1.732) A:B:C=2:1: (= 1.732)
“I 1.0 J1.732” Therefore, the designation should be “I 1.0 J1.732”.
I, J 1, 2 I and J commands may be specified in either method as
described above.
:
G01 X 40.0;
I 1.0 J1.732
G40 G00 X 10.0 Y100.0 I 8.66 J15.0; Interchangeable with I 1.0 J1.732
Positive (+) and Negative ( ) Designation for Tool Radius

Offset Amount and Tool Paths
Generally, a program is created assuming that the tool radius

offset amount is set in a positive value.
G41 If an offset amount is set in a negative value, tool paths are
G42 generated as if G41 and G42 are entirely exchanged with each
other. The paths having been generated outside the
programmed profile will be generated inside the profile and
those having been generated inside the programmed profile
will be generated outside the profile.
1 If a negative value is set for the offset amount while the tool
2 paths as shown in Fig. 1 are specified in a program, the cutting
tool moves along the paths shown in Fig. 2.
2 Conversely, if a negative value is set for the offset amount
1 when the tool paths shown in Fig. 2 are specified in a program,
the cutting tool moves along the paths shown in Fig. 1.
1 2
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
Overcut in Tool Radius Offset Mode
1. 1. Cutting the inside of arc whose radius is smaller than the

cutter radius
If the specified arc radius is smaller than the cutter radius,
offsetting inside the arc causes overcut. The alarm
message is displayed on the screen just after the start of
the block which precedes the block containing the arc
command, and the machine stops.
2 2 NOTE
If a single block function is called during the execution of the
causing overcuts.
Path of the Tool Center
Machine stops due to the alarm.
Programmed Tool Path Alarm-Stop in a Single Block Stop Operation
Overcuts occur if the axes move as programmed.
2. 2. Cutting a groove whose width is narrower than the cutter

radius
If the tool path is generated in the direction opposite to the
programmed path due to offsetting, it causes overcut. The
alarm message is displayed on the screen just after the
start of the block which precedes such a block, and the
machine stops.
2 2 NOTE
If the single block function is called during the execution of the
causing overcuts.
Alarm-Stop in a Single Block Stop Operation
Machine stops Path of the Tool Center

due to the alarm.
Overcut occurs if the axes move as programmed.

3. 3. Cutting an arc-shaped step whose height is smaller than

the cutter radius
The tool path to be generated in ordinary offset processing
might be reversed at the stepped portion. In such a case,
2 the first vector is ignored and the tool path is generated for
a second vector that will move along a straight line.
Tool Motion Along a Straight Line
Path of the Tool Center
Arc
Uncut Portion
4. X Y 2 4. No X- and Y-axis movement is specified in more than two

blocks
G17 XY X When the XY plane is selected, for example, the tool radius
Y offset function is valid only for the X- and Y-axes.
2 2 NOTE
YZ Y Z The tool radius offset function is valid only for the Y- and Z-axes in
the YZ plane.
X Y 2 If there are two or more blocks, containing neither X- nor
2 Y-axis movement commands, given in succession,
over-cutting may occur as buffering is not possible.
b This is because the center of the tool nose is positioned at
R right angles to the tool path at the end point b of the
preceding block by commands issued in reference to that
block.
:
G42
(G42 mode)
X30.0 Y35.0; ........................................................ a
3 2 Y55.0; .................................................................. b
(X10.0, Y55.0) (X30.0, Y55.0) X10.0; .................................................................. c
2
1 Tool paths are offset correctly due to the 2-block buffering function.
(X30.0, Y35.0)
:
G42
Overcutting (G42 mode)
X30.0 Y35.0; ........................................................ a
Y55.0; ................................................................... b
M_ ; 2 X Y
3 2
Z _;
(X10.0, Y55.0) (X30.0, Y55.0)
No X- or Y-axis
movement commands
1 in two or more blocks
(X30.0, Y35.0)
X10.0; .................................................................. c
2 2 NOTE
Pay attention when a sub-program is called from a main program.
<Main Program>
:
G17 G41 G01 X_ Y_ ;
M98 P1; ............................................................... (a)
:
O1; ....................................................................... (b)

X_ Y_ ;
X_ Y_ ;
:
M99;
(a), (b) X, Y 2 By the call of a sub-program from a main program, two blocks
(a) and (b) are executed in succession; these blocks do not
contain X- or Y-axis movement commands.
Therefore, the program should be created in the following
manner.
<Main Program>
:
X_ Y_ ;
M98 P1;
:
O1;
G17 G41 G01 X_ Y_ ;
X_ Y_ ;
:
G40 X_ Y_ ;
M99;
5
5èÕ
CHAPTER 5
CHAPTER 5 CANNED CYCLE
1 319
2 353
MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CYCLES 319
1
The multiple repetitive cycles simplify the programs for rough
and finish cutting processes on O.D. and I.D.
For example, by defining only the workpiece finish shape, the

tool paths for executing rough cutting operation are
automatically generated.
G Roughing processes that require several blocks of commands
1 can be specified by a single block of commands preceded by a
G code calling a multiple repetitive cycle, and blocks that
define the finished shape. The tool paths for rough cutting
cycles are automatically determined.
2 2 NOTE
F15 When specifying a multiple repetitive cycle, standard format and F15
F15 format are used. If the command format differs between standard
G format and F15 format, the difference is explained in the related G
code items. Pay sufficient care to the difference when creating a
program.
1 • 1 • For switching the format, refer to the separate volume,

“ ” OPERATION MANUAL “Setting Screen”.
• • For details, refer to the instruction manuals provided by the
NC manufacturer.
1-1
Multiple Repetitive Cycles List
O.D./I.D. rough cutting cycle

Z X (Cutting along the Z-axis, infeed along the
X-axis)
In O.D./I.D. cutting operation, when the
finish shape is defined in the program, the
G71
workpiece is machined to the shape which
includes a finishing allowance on the
defined shape.
The tool paths used for rough cutting are
automatically determined.
Rough facing cycle
X Z (Cutting along the X-axis, infeed along the
Z-axis)
In facing operation, when the finish shape is
G72 defined in the program, the workpiece is
machined to the shape which includes a
finishing allowance on the defined shape.
The tool paths used for rough cutting are
automatically determined.
Closed-loop cutting cycle
The workpiece is machined to the defined
shape by executing the fixed pattern
G73 repeatedly.
Finishing cycle
G71, G72, G73 After completing a rough cutting cycle for
G70 O.D., I.D., or end face, called by the G71,
G70 G72, or G73 command, the shape is
finished by the G70 cycle.
320 MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CYCLES
Face cut-off cycle, face grooving cycle,

deep hole drilling cycle
Z Infeed is made along the Z-axis
X intermittently.
G74 If a command for the depth of cut along the
X-axis is omitted, the deep hole drilling
cycle is called.
Intermittent Feed
O.D./I.D. grooving cycle, cut-off cycle

Infeed is made along the X-axis
X intermittently.
Z If a command for the depth of cut along the
G75 Z-axis direction is omitted, the cut-off cycle
is called.
Intermittent Feed
Multiple thread cutting cycle

The thread cutting pattern is repeated by
gradually infeeding the cutting tool.
G76
To explain how the multiple repetitive cycle function simplifies

G71 programming, the rough cutting cycle for the shape illustrated
below is programmed with and without using the G71 cycle.
2 2 NOTE
R “0” In the programming, tool nose radius is assumed to be “0”.
1 4 mm
X 0.3 mm
Z 0.1 mm
Depth of Cut Per Pass: 4 mm (in Diameter)

Finishing Allowance (X): 0.3 mm (in Diameter)
60 Finishing Allowance (Z): 0.1 mm
100 65
90
80
Cutting Allowance
G71
<Programming without Using the Multiple Repet- <Programming Using the Multiple Repetitive
itive Cycle> Cycle (G71)>
O1; O1;
: :
G00 X100.0 Z20.0 M08; ...................................... a G00 X100.0 Z20.0 M08; ..................................... a
G01 Z2.0 F1.0; .................................................... b G01 Z2.0 F2.0; .................................................... b
G00 X96.0; .......................................................... c G71 U2.0 R0.5; ................................................... [1]
G01 Z 64.9 F0.3; ................................................ d G71 P100 Q200 U0.3 W0.1 F0.3;
G00 U1.0 Z2.0; .................................................... e N100 G00 X80.0; ............................................ c[2]
X92.0; .................................................................. f G01 Z 60.0; ........................................................ d
G01 Z 64.9; ........................................................ g X90.0 Z 65.0; ..................................................... e
G00 U1.0 Z2.0; .................................................... h N200 X102.0; .................................................. f[3]
X88.0; .................................................................. i G00 X200.0 Z100.0 M09; ................................... g
G01 Z 63.9; ........................................................ j :
G00 U1.0 Z2.0; .................................................... k
X84.0; .................................................................. l
G01 Z 61.9; ........................................................ m
G00 U1.0 Z2.0; .................................................... n
X80.3; .................................................................. o
G01 Z 59.9; ....................................................... p
X90.3 Z-64.9; ...................................................... q
X102.0; ................................................................ r
G00 Z2.0; ............................................................ s
X200.0 Z100.0; .................................................... t
:
[1] G71
[1] Executes the O.D. rough cutting cycle (G71).
• G71 ..................................... Calls the O.D. rough cutting cycle.
• U2.0 .................................... Specifies the depth of cut (radius value).
• R0.5 .................................... Specifies the relief amount (radius value).
• P100 .................................... Specifies the sequence number of the first
block of the blocks that define the finish
shape of the workpiece.
• Q200 ................................... Specifies the sequence number of the last
• U0.3 .................................... X Specifies the finishing allowance in the
X-axis direction (in diameter).
• W0.1 .................................... Z Specifies the finishing allowance in the
Z-axis direction.
• F0.3 ..................................... Specifies the feedrate.
[2] [3] N100 N200
[2] to [3] The blocks from sequence number N100 to N200 define the finish shape.
0.1 19
20 0.1
7 1
1
5 6 2
4 8 2
18 6
3
9
12
5 Rapid Traverse
17 13 15
16
4 3 Cutting Feed
100
100
0.15 0.15
90
80
90
80
60 60
65 65
G71 By specifying the data for finishing such as finishing allowance

a g 7 and depth of cut in the G71 block, the cycles as indicated
above are executed by the commands written in the seven
lines of the program (a to g).
52 5From the comparison of the two programs shown above, it is

known that the programming is simplified by using the multiple
repetitive cycle function. Since programming is simplified,
programming error can be reduced accordingly.
1-2
Rough Cutting Cycle
X, Z The O.D./I.D. rough cutting cycle is used for workpieces which

have monotonously varying shapes both in the X- and Z-axis
directions.
Generally, a finishing cycle called by the G70 command is used
G70 to finish the workpiece after completing the rough cutting cycle.
G71 <G71 O.D/I.D Rough Cutting Cycle>

A D A' D B When the finish shape (A D A' D B) is defined in a program,
U(2)/2, W U(1) rough cutting paths are automatically generated leaving
allowance of U(2)/2 and W for finishing on the workpiece
circumference and end face, respectively. The depth of cut for
rough cutting cycle is U(1).
45 C
A
B U(1) Rapid Traverse
R
Cutting Feed
X
U(2)/2
Z A' Finishing Allowance
W
R: #8052
(R: Relief amount, to be set for parameter #8052)
1.
G71 U(1) R_ ;
G71 A_ P_ Q_ U(2) W_ F_ S_ T_ ;
2. F15
F15 format
G71 P_ Q_ U(2) W_ D_ F_ S_ T_ ;
G72 <G72 Rough Facing Cycle>
A D A' D B When the finish shape (A D A' D B) is defined in a program,
U/2, W(2) W(1) rough cutting paths are automatically generated leaving
allowance of U/2 and W(2) for finishing on the workpiece
circumference and end face, respectively. The depth of cut for
rough cutting cycle is W(1).
W(2) W(1)
A'
C
A
Rapid Traverse
R
45 Cutting Feed
X U/2
B Finishing Allowance
Z
R: #8052
(R: Relief amount, to be set for parameter #8052)
1.
G72 W(1) R_ ;
G72 A_ P_ Q_ U_ W(2) F_ S_ T_ ;
2. F15
F15 format
G72 P_ Q_ U_ W(2) D_ F_ S_ T_ ;
G71, G72 <Applicable to Both G71 and G72>
• G71 ..................................... Calls the O.D./I.D. rough cutting cycle.

• G72 ..................................... Calls the rough facing cycle.
• U(1), D ................................. X Specifies depth of cut (X-axis direction)
(unsigned, in radius).
2
2 NOTE
#8051 Since this command is modal, it remains valid
until it is replaced with the value specified next.
This value can also be set for parameter #8051;
the value set for the parameter is changed
according to the value specified in the program.
• W(1), D................................. Z Specifies depth of cut (Z-axis direction)

(unsigned).
2
2 NOTE
• R ......................................... G71 Specifies the relief amount (in radius for
G71).
2
2 NOTE
• A........................................... Specifies the program number of the
program that defines the finish shape of the
workpiece.
• P .......................................... Specifies the sequence number of the first
• Q ......................................... Specifies the sequence number of the last
• U(2)(G71)/U(G72) ............... X Specifies the distance and direction of the
finishing allowance in the X-axis direction (in
diameter).
• W(G71)/W(2)(G72) .............. Z Specifies the distance and direction of the
finishing allowance in the Z-axis direction.
• F .......................................... Specifies feedrate to be adopted for the
rough cutting cycle.
• S .......................................... Specifies spindle speed control to be
adopted for the rough cutting cycle.
2
2 NOTE
G96 m/min G97
1
min In the G96 mode:
The value specifies cutting speed (m/min).
In the G97 mode:
The value specifies spindle speed (min 1).
• T........................................... + 4 Specifies a tool number and an offset
number in a four digit number.
2 2 NOTE
1. F, S, T G71 G72 1. If no F, S or T command is specified, the command which has been
specified preceding the G71or G72 block is valid.
2. A 2. If address A is omitted, blocks beginning and ending with the
P, Q sequence numbers P and Q in the presently executed program are
regarded as the program for the finish shape of the workpiece.
3. A P 3. If address P is omitted with address A specified, the first block of
A the program specified by address A is regarded as sequence P of
P the program which defines the finish shape of the workpiece.
4. Q M99 4. If the M99 command exists in the program for the finish shape of
M99 the workpiece, the program up to this block is regarded as the
program that defines the finish shape even if address Q is
specified in the G71/G72 block.
5. Q M99 5. If address Q is omitted and there is no M99 command in the
program for the finish shape of the workpiece, this finish shape
defining program is executed up to the last block.
6. X, Z 6. The workpiece shape must be monotonously increasing or
#8110 = 0 decreasing pattern in the X- and Z-axis directions as shown in the
illustration below. (If parameter #8110 = 0)
X, Z The pattern to be generated must increase or decrease

monotonously both in the X- and Z-axis directions as illustrated
below left.
< G71 > < G72 >
B A'
X X
X-Axis Direction X-Axis Direction
A' B
Z Z
Z-Axis Direction Z-Axis Direction
When there is a monotonous increase or decrease When there is a monotonous increase or decrease
G71, G72 If the machining shape has a pocket, set “1” for parameter #8110.
#8110 = 1
< G71 > < G72 >
Pocket
Pocket
When there is a depression (pocket) When there is a depression (pocket)
7. G71 X 7. Before specifying the G71 command, it is necessary to move the

tool along the X-axis to a point beyond workpiece diameter
dimensions (O.D. rough cutting cycle) or within workpiece diameter
dimensions (I.D. rough cutting cycle).
8. P Q 8. Do not specify the same P and Q sequence number.
9. #8017 d 9. By setting the variation amount in depth of cut ( d) for parameter

d 1 #8017, it is possible to carry out the cycle while changing the
d specified depth of cut (d) in each cutting so that the tip will not be
d P204 worn only at a specific place. If the set variation amount ( d) is
larger than the depth of cut (d), the alarm message (P204) is
displayed on the screen.
G71 <G71>
1 d+ d
1st Path d+ d 1
2 d
2nd Path d 2
3
3rd Path d d d d
3
4 d+ d
Fourth Cut d+ d 4
d,
d d,
d + d,
d, d d and d +
Depth of cut changes

as d, d d and d + d
repeatedly. n
Remainder
Last Cut Remainder
G72 <G72>
1 d+ d
1st Path
2 4 3 2 1
d
2nd Path
3 d d
3rd Path
4
d+ d
Fourth Cut
d, d d and d +
Depth of cut changes

as d, d d and d +
d repeatedly. d, d+ d d d d d+ d
d d,
Last Cut Remainder Remainder d + d,
Example:
To finish the shape illustrated below by using the G71
G70 O.D./I.D. rough cutting cycle and the G70 finishing cycle
R0.4 (Nose radius of finishing tool: 0.4 mm)
O1;
N1 (ROUGH. OF OUT); ..............
Part program for rough cutting
9 25 1
M60 P = 2
G50 S1500;
8
5
G00 T0101;
C0.5 6
7 G96 S120 M03;
5 3
C1.5 2
X75.0 Z20.0 M08;
4
C1 G01 Z0.1 F1.0;
X25.0 F0.25;
φ54
φ32
φ69
G71
G00 X70.0 Z1.0; ....................................................... G71 Positioning at a, the start point of

a the O.D. rough cutting cycle (G71)
G71 U2.0 R0.5; ......................................................... G71 Execution of the O.D. rough cutting
G71 P100 Q200 U0.3 W0.1 F0.3; • U2.0 cycle (G71)
2 mm • U2.0
• R0.5 Depth of cut: 2 mm (radius
0.5 mm designation)
• P100 • R0.5
Relief amount: 0.5 mm
N100 • P100
Sequence number of the first
• Q200
block of the finish shape defining
blocks: N100
N200
• Q200
• U0.3
Sequence number of the last
X 0.3 mm block of the finish shape defining
blocks: N200
• W0.1 • U0.3
Z 0.1 mm Finishing allowance in the X-axis
• F0.3 direction: 0.3 mm (in diameter)
0.3 mm/rev • W0.1
Finishing allowance in the Z-axis
direction: 0.1 mm
• F0.3
Feedrate: 0.3 mm/rev
N100 G00 X49.54; ................................................... N100 N200 The blocks from N100 to N200
G01 X54.0 Z 1.23 F0.15; b i define the finish shape including b
Z 5.0; to i.
X56.34;
X59.8 Z 6.73;
2 2 NOTE
Z 25.0; 1. R 0.4 mm 1. The command values in these
X67.54; blocks are determined taking into
N200 X70.0 Z 26.23; consideration the tool nose radius
(0.4 mm) of the finishing tool.
2. “F0.15”
2. The feedrate command “F0.15”
F0.3 0.3 mm/rev specified in these blocks is ignored
for rough cutting cycle. Feedrate
during rough cutting cycle is F0.3
(0.3 mm/rev).
G00 X200.0 Z150.0;
M01;
N2 (FIN. OF OUT); ................................................... Part program for face and O.D.
finishing
G50 S2000;
G00 T0202;
G96 S200 M03;
X56.0 Z20.0 M08;
G01 Z0 F1.0;
X30.0 F0.15;
G00 X70.0 Z1.0; ....................................................... G70 Positioning at a, the start point of
a the finishing cycle (G70)
G70 P100 Q200; ...................................................... G70 Execution of the finishing cycle

N100 N200 (G70)
Finish cutting is executed for the
shape defined by the blocks from
2 N100 to N200.
S200 2 NOTE
200 m/min F0.15 0.15
mm/rev Cutting conditions for finishing:
Cutting speed
S200 (200 m/min)
Feedrate
F0.15 (0.15 mm/rev)
G00 X200.0 Z150.0;
M01;
G72
G01 X72.0 Z1.0 F1.0; ............................................... G72 a Positioning at a, the start point of
G72
G72 W2.0 R0.5; ........................................................ G72 Execution of G72
G72 P100 Q200 U0.3 W0.1 F0.3; • U2.0 • U2.0
2 mm Depth of cut: 2 mm (radius
• R0.5 designation)
0.5 mm • R0.5
• P100 Relief amount: 0.5 mm
• P100
N100 Sequence number of the first
• Q200
blocks: N100
• Q200
N200
Sequence number of the last
• U0.3
X 0.3 mm blocks: N200
• U0.3
• W0.1 Finishing allowance in the X-axis
Z 0.1 mm direction: 0.3 mm (in diameter)
• F0.3 • W0.1
0.3 mm/rev Finishing allowance in the Z-axis
direction: 0.1 mm
• F0.3
N100 G00 Z 27.23; ................................................. N100 N200 The blocks from N100 to N200
G01 X67.54 Z 25.0 F0.15; b k define the finish shape including b
X59.8; to k.
Z 6.73;
X56.34 Z 5.0;
2 2 NOTE
X54.0; 1. R 0.4 mm 1. The command values in these
Z 1.23; blocks are determined taking into
X51.54 Z0; consideration the tool nose radius
X25.0; (0.4 mm) of the finishing tool.
2. “F0.15”
N200 Z1.0; 2. The feedrate command “F0.15”
(0.3 mm/rev).
G00 X200.0 Z150.0;
M01;
finishing
G50 S2000;
G00 T0202;
G96 S200 M03;
X75.0 Z20.0 M08;
G01 X72.0 Z1.0 F1.0; .............................................. G70 Positioning at a, the start point of

N100 N200 (G70)
2 N100 to N200.
S200 2 NOTE
200 m/min F0.15 0.15
Cutting speed: S200 (200 m/min)
Feedrate: F0.15 (0.15 mm/rev)
G00 X200.0 Z150.0;
M01;
<Tool Paths for Rough Cutting Cycle>
G71 <G71>
U/2
a (X70.0, Z1.0)
U/2, W
Start from the point shifted by U/2, W
G72 <G72>
U/2
a (X72.0, Z1.0)
U/2, W
Start from the point shifted by U/2, W
G71, G72 <Applicable to Both G71 and G72>

N100 N200 The blocks from N100 to N200 define the finishing shape.
N100 N200 During the blocks from N100 to N200, cutting speed is S100
S100 100 m/min F0.2 0.2 mm/rev (100 m/min) and feedrate is F0.2 (0.2 mm/rev).
1-3 G73
G73 Closed-Loop Cutting Cycle
B A
Rapid Traverse
U(1)
X
Cutting Feed
U(2)/2
A'
W(2) W(1) Finishing Allowance
Z
In the G73 closed-loop cutting cycle, the defined pattern is

repeated while it is being shifted to finish the workpiece.
A D A' D B By specifying the finish shape, A D A' D B, in the illustration
U(2)/2, W(2) above, the workpiece is machined by executing the specified
pattern repeatedly until the finishing allowance of U(2)/2 and
W(2) is left on the finish shape.
This cycle is used to efficiently machine workpieces that have
uniform stock to be removed, such as forged or cast
workpieces.
G73 Generally, a finishing cycle called by the G70 command which
G70 is explained later is used to finish the workpiece after
completing the rough cutting using the G73 closed-loop cutting
cycle.
1.
G73 U(1) W(1) R_ ;
G73 A_ P_ Q_ U(2) W(2) F_ S_ T_ ;
2. F15
F15 format
G73 P_ Q_ U(2) W(2) I_ K_ D_ F_ S_ T_ ;
• G73 ..................................... Calls the closed-loop cutting cycle.
• U(1) ..................................... X Specifies the distance and direction of entire
stock for rough cutting in the X-axis direction
(in radius).
2
2 NOTE
• W(1) .................................... Z Specifies the distance and direction of entire
stock for rough cutting in the Z-axis
2 direction.
2 NOTE
#8054
Since this command is modal, it remains valid
• R, D ..................................... Specifies the number of divisions in which
rough machining is executed.
2
2 NOTE
workpiece.
• U(2) ..................................... X Specifies the distance and direction of the
finishing allowance in the X-axis direction (in
diameter).
• W(2) .................................... Z Specifies the distance and direction of the

finishing allowance in the Z-axis direction.
• I ........................................... X Specifies the distance and direction of entire
stock for rough cutting in the X-axis direction
(in radius).
• K .......................................... Z Specifies the distance and direction of entire
stock for rough cutting in the Z-axis
direction.
• F .......................................... G73 Specifies feedrate to be adopted for the G73
cycle.
• S .......................................... G73 Specifies spindle speed control to be
adopted for the G73 cycle.
2
2 NOTE
G96 m/min G97
min 1 In the G96 mode: The value specifies cutting
speed (m/min).
In the G97 mode: The value specifies spindle
speed (min 1).
• T........................................... + 4 Specifies a tool number and an offset
number in a four digit number.
2 2 NOTE
1. F, S, T G73 1. If no F, S or T command is specified, the command which has been
specified preceding the G73 block is valid.
specified in the G73 block.
6. U(1), W(1) 6. The direction of entire stock specified by U(1) and W(1) for the
closed-loop cutting cycle is automatically determined by the
program for the finish shape of the workpiece.
7. X, Z 7. The workpiece shape must be monotonously increasing or
decreasing pattern in the X- and Z-axis directions as shown in the
illustration below.
X, Z The pattern to be generated must monotonously increases or
decreases both in the X- and Z-axis directions as illustrated
below.
Pocket
X
X-Axis Direction
Z A'
Z-Axis Direction
When there is a monotonous increase or decrease When there is a depression (pocket)
The pattern shown above and to the right has a pocket in it and
therefore cannot be machined.
Example:
G73 To finish the shape illustrated below by using the G73
G70 closed-loop rough cutting cycle and the G70 finishing cycle
R0.4 (Nose radius of finishing tool: 0.4 mm).
9 25 1
M60 P = 2 5
8
C0.5 6
7
5 3
C1.5 2
4
C1
φ54
φ32
φ69
O1;
N1 (ROUGH. OF OUT); ............................................ Part program for face and O.D.
rough cutting
G50 S1500;
G00 T0101;
G96 S120 M03;
X75.0 Z20.0 M08;
G01 Z0.1 F1.0;
X25.0 F0.25;
G00 X75.0 Z10.0; ..................................................... G73 Positioning at a, the start point of
a the closed-loop rough cutting cycle
(G73)
G73 U5.0 W5.0 R3;................................................... G73 Execution of the closed-loop rough
cutting cycle (G73)
G73 P100 Q200 U0.3 W0.1 F0.3;
• U5.0 .............................................................. X 5.0 mm Entire stock for rough cutting in the
X-axis direction: 5.0 mm (in radius)
• W5.0 .............................................................. Z 5.0 mm Entire stock for rough cutting in the
Z-axis direction: 5.0 mm
• R3 ................................................................. 3 The number of times the rough
cutting cycle is repeated: 3 times
• P100 .............................................................. The sequence number of the first
N100 block of the blocks defining the
finish shape: N100
• Q200 ............................................................. The sequence number of the last
N200 block of the blocks defining the
finish shape: N200
• U0.3 .............................................................. X 0.3 mm Finishing allowance in the X-axis
direction: 0.3 mm (in diameter)
• W0.1 .............................................................. Z 0.1 mm Finishing allowance in the Z-axis
direction: 0.1 mm
• F0.3 ............................................................... 0.3 mm/rev Feedrate: 0.3 mm/rev
N100 G00 X49.54 Z1.0; ........................................... N100 N200 The blocks from N100 to N200
b i define the finish shape including b
to i.
2 2 NOTE
1. R 0.4 mm 1. The command values in these
blocks are determined taking into
consideration the tool nose radius
(0.4 mm) of the finishing tool.
2. “F0.15”
2. The feedrate command “F0.15”
(0.3 mm/rev).
G01 X54.0 Z 1.23 F0.15;
Z 5.0;
X56.34;
X59.8 Z 6.73;
Z 25.0;
X67.54;
N200 X70.0 Z 26.23;
G00 X200.0 Z150.0;
M01;
finishing
G50 S2000;
G00 T0202;
G96 S200 M03;
X56.0 Z20.0 M08;
G01 Z0 F1.0;
X30.0 F0.15;
G00 X75.0 Z10.0; ..................................................... G70 Positioning at a, the start point of
N100 N200 (G70)
2 N100 to N200.
S200 2 NOTE
200 m/min F0.15 0.15
Cutting speed S200 (200 m/min)
Feedrate F0.15 (0.15 mm/rev)
G00 X200.0 Z150.0;
M01;
G73 <Tool Paths for G73 Closed-Loop Cutting Cycle>
1 (X75.0, Z10.0)
1-4 G71, G72, G73

Cautions on Using G71, G72, and G73 Cycles
G71, G72, G73 The cautionary items to be observed when using the G71,
G72, and G73 commands are described below.
8 8 WARNING
If a multiple repetitive cycle is interrupted to execute
manual operation, the status before the interruption of the
cycle must be re-established before restarting the
interrupted cycle.
[Serious injury/Machine damage/Tool breakage]
2 2 NOTE
1. P, Q G71, 1. If the program, which defines the finish shape is specified by
G72, G73 addresses P and Q, such a program must directly follow the G71,
G71, G72, G73 G72, or G73 block. If there is a block between G71, G72, or G73
block and the program, which defines the finish shape, the inserted
block is not executed.
2. G71, G72, G73 A 2. During the execution of a rough cutting cycle called up by the G71,
P, Q F, S, T G72, or G73 command, F, S, T, G96, and G97 commands are
G96, G97 F, S, T G96, G97 ignored even if they are specified in the program which defines the
G71, G72, G73 finish shape (designated by address A or addresses P and Q). The
F, S, T, G96, and G97 commands must be specified in the G71,
G72, or G73 block, or a preceding block.
: G96
(G96 mode)
N5 G71 U2.0 R0.5;
N6 G71 P7 Q17 U0.3 W0.1 F0.25 S100;.................. G71 Execution of the G71 rough cutting
0.25 mm/rev cycle
100 m/min Feedrate: 0.25 mm/rev
Cutting speed: 100 m/min
N7 G00 X_ S180;...................................................... G71 “S180” and “F0.2” are ignored for

“S180”, “F0.2” the execution of the G71 rough
cutting cycle.
N8 G01 X_ Z_ F0.2;
:
N17_ ;
:
N_ G70 P7 Q17; ...................................................... G70 Execution of the G70 finishing cycle
: 180 m/min Cutting speed: 180 m/min
0.2 mm/rev Feedrate: 0.2 mm/rev
G70 During the execution of the G70
N7 N17 finishing cycle, feedrate and spindle
(cutting) speed specified in a block
between N7 and N17 are valid.
3. 3. An alarm message (P201) is displayed on the screen if any of the
P201 following G codes is specified in the program which defines the
finish shape.
• G27, G28, G29, G30 • G27, G28, G29, G30
• G32 • Thread cutting command (G32)
• G90, G92, G94 • G90, G92, G94
• G70 G76 • Multiple repetitive cycle (G70 to G76)
• G80, G83, G85, G87, G89 • Hole machining canned cycle (G80, G83, G85, G87, G89)
• G31, G31.1, G31.2, G31.3, G36, G37 • G31, G31.1, G31.2, G31.3, G36, G37
4. MDI 4. It is allowed to specify the G71, G72, or G73 command in the MDI
G71, G72, G73 mode if the program which defines the finish shape is stored in the
memory.
5. M98 5. It is allowed to specify the sub-program call M code (M98) and
G65, G66, G66.1 macro call G code (G65, G66, G66.1) in the program, which
defines the finish shape.
6. P, Q 6. The size of the program which defines the finish shape, specified
R R by addresses P and Q, must be 50 blocks or less including the
50 blocks automatically inserted for the execution of the chamfering
50 and corner rounding function and the automatic tool nose radius
P202 offset function. An alarm message (P202) is displayed if the size of
the finish shape program exceeds 50 blocks.
7. G71, G72, G73 R 7. If the automatic tool nose radius offset mode is already valid when
R the G71, G72, or G73 command is specified, the automatic tool
R nose radius offset function is valid for the program which defines
G71, G72, G73 the finish shape. Conversely, if the G71, G72, or G73 command is
specified in the automatic tool nose radius offset mode, the
following processing occurs.
• G71, G72, G73 • The automatic tool nose radius offset mode is canceled
R temporarily immediately before the start of the finishing cycle of
G71, G72, or G73.
• • The start-up is executed for the finish shape program.
• • At the end point of the last block of the program which defines
R the finish shape, the center of the tool nose moves to the
position right angle to the tool path specified in that block.
8. G71, G72 R 8. In the execution of the G71 or G72 cycle, an alarm message
2 Z (P203) is displayed if Z-axis movement is zeroed or generated in
Z P203 the direction opposite to the programmed direction of movement
due to the automatic tool nose radius offset function.
9. U, W 9. The relationship between the finish shape program and the sign (+/
) for address U and W is indicated below.
U>0 U>0
A W<0 W>0 A
+X
G71, G72, G73
+Z Program Defining Finish

Finishing Allowance
Shape for G71, G72, and
G73 Cycles
A U<0 U<0 A
W<0 W>0
U, W > 0 U, W < 0 <Tool Paths Generated due to Wrong Sign>
B A
A'
U, W If a wrong sign is used for addresses U and W commands, overcut

will occur as in the illustration above.
10. 10. In the finish shape program, blocks which do not call up axis
movements are ignored.
11. N, F, S, M, T 11. In the finish shape program, addresses N, F, S, M, and T are
ignored.
12. G71, G72, G73 12. On completion of the G71, G72, or G73 cycle, the block to be
P, Q A executed next differs depending on whether addresses P and Q
(designation of sequence numbers) or address A (designation of a
program number) was used to call up the finish shape program.
• P, Q • Designation of addresses P and Q (sequence numbers)

Q The block to be executed next after the completion of the cycle
is the one that immediately follows the block specified by
address Q.
N100 G71 U_ R_ ;
N200 G71 P300 Q500 U_ W_ F_ S_ T_ ;
N300 ; ...................................................................... Finish shape program
N400 ;
N500 ;
N600 ; ...................................................................... N600 On completion of the G71 cycle,
block N600 is executed.
• A • Designation of address A (program number)
G71, G72, G73 The block to be executed next after the completion of the cycle
is the one that immediately follows the G71, G72 or G73 block.
N100 G71 U_ R_ ;
N200 G71 A100 U_ W_ F_ S_ T_ ;
O100 ;
N10 ___ ;
N20 ___ ;
...
N300 ; ...................................................................... N300 On completion of the G71 cycle,
block N300 is executed.
N400 ;
13. G71, G72, G73 13. For the execution of G71, G72 or G73 cycle, it is possible to select
the method for determining the direction of infeed between
“determining according to the finish shape” and “determining
according to the sign of the finishing allowance and entire stock for
rough cutting”.
#1273 bit 2 G71, G72, G73 #1273 bit 2 (Selecting the infeed direction determination judgment
method for G71, G72 and G73)
0 0:
Determining according to the finish shape
1 1:
Determining according to the sign of the finishing allowance and
entire stock for rough cutting
1-5 G70
G70 Finishing Cycle
A
B
X Rapid Traverse
A'
Z Cutting Feed
G71, G72, G73 G70 After the completion of rough cutting cycle, called by the G71,
G72 or G73 command, the workpiece is finished by calling the
G70 finishing cycle.
A G71, G72, G73 After the cutting tool is returned to point A, specified in a
A' D B program, finishing cycle is executed along the finish shape A'
D B defined in the blocks which follow the G71, G72, or G73
block.
2 2 NOTE
G70 G71, G72, G73 For the finishing cycle called by the G70 command, the finish shape
program specified in the G71, G72, or G73 block is used.
G70 A_ P_ Q_ ;
• G70 ..................................... Calls the finishing cycle.

workpiece.
8 8 WARNING
If the multiple repetitive cycle is interrupted to execute
interrupted cycle.
2 2 NOTE
1. G70 G71, G72, G73 1. During the execution of the finishing cycle called up by G70, the F,
F, S, T A S, and T commands specified in the G71, G72, or G73 block are
P, Q ignored, but the F, S, and T commands specified in the blocks
F, S, T between those assigned the sequence numbers specified by the P
and Q commands are used.
: G96
(G96 mode)
N5 G71 U2.0 R0.5;
N6 G71 P7 Q17 U0.3 W0.1 F0.25 S100;.................. G71 Execution of the G71 rough cutting
0.25 mm/rev cycle
100 m/min Cutting speed: 100 m/min
N7 G00 X_ S180; ..................................................... G71 “S180” and “F0.2” are ignored for
“S180”, “F0.2” the execution of the G71 rough
cutting cycle.
N8 G01 X_ Z_ F0.2;
:
N17_ ;
:
N_ G70 P7 Q17; ...................................................... G70 Execution of the G70 finishing cycle
: 180 m/min Cutting speed: 180 m/min
0.2 mm/rev Feedrate: 0.2 mm/rev
G70 During the execution of the G70
N7 N17 finishing cycle, feedrate and spindle
(cutting) speed specified in a block
between N7 and N17 are valid.
specified in the G71 block.
6. 6. An alarm message (P201) is displayed on the screen if any of the
P201 following G codes is specified in the program which defines the
finish shape.
• G27, G28, G29, G30 • G27, G28, G29, G30
• G32 • Thread cutting command (G32)
• G90, G92, G94 • G90, G92, G94

• G70 G76 • Multiple repetitive cycle (G70 to G76)
• G80, G83, G85, G87, G89 • Hole machining canned cycle (G80, G83, G85, G87, G89)
• G31, G31.1, G31.2, G31.3, G36, G37 • G31, G31.1, G31.2, G31.3, G36, G37
7. M98 7. It is allowed to specify the sub-program call M code (M98) and
G65, G66, G66.1 macro call G code (G65, G66, G66.1) in the program, which
defines the finish shape.
8. P, Q 8. The size of the program which defines the finish shape, specified
R R by addresses P and Q, must be 50 blocks or less including the
50 blocks automatically inserted for the execution of the chamfering
50 and corner rounding function and the automatic tool nose radius
P202 offset function. An alarm message (P202) is displayed if the size of
the finish shape program exceeds 50 blocks.
9. 9. In the finish shape program, blocks which do not call up axis
movements are ignored.
10. N, F, S, M, T 10. In the finish shape program, addresses N, F, S, M, and T are
ignored.
1-6 G74
G74 Face Cut-Off, Grooving Cycle, and Deep Hole Drilling Cycle
Q
R(2)
P
R(1)
X
Rapid Traverse
Intermittent Feed X
Z Cutting Feed
#8056
(R(1): Return amount, to be set for parameter #8056)

Details of Intermittent Infeed
G74 Z In the cycle called up by the G74 command, intermittent feed

with a fixed infeed distance is repeated along the Z-axis.
Q R(1) Q After the infeed by “Q”, the tool returns by “R(1)” then the next
infeed is repeated.
By repeating this infeed and retraction pattern, it is possible to
carry out cutting without applying excessive force to the tool.
5X 5If the interval along the X-axis is omitted in the program, the cycle
can be used for the deep hole drilling cycle.
1.
<Face cut-off cycle, face grooving cycle>

G74 R(1);
G74 X(U)_ Z(W)_ P_ Q_ R(2) F_ ;
<Deep hole drilling cycle>

G74 R(1)
G74 Z(W)_ Q_ F_ ;
2. F15
F15 format
<Face cut-off cycle, face grooving cycle>

G74 X(U)_ Z(W)_ I_ K_ F_ D_ ;
<Deep hole drilling cycle>

G74 Z(W)_ K_ F_ ;
• G74 ..................................... Calls the face cut-off cycle, face grooving
cycle, or deep hole drilling cycle.
• R(1) ..................................... Specifies the return amount.
2 2 NOTE
No. 8056 until it is replaced with the value specified next.
This value can also be set for parameter
No. 8056; the value set for the parameter is
changed according to the value specified in the
program.
• X .......................................... X Specifies the cutting end point in the X-axis
direction.
• Z .......................................... Z Specifies the bottom of cutting in the Z-axis
direction.
• U ......................................... X Specifies the distance and direction from the
cutting start point to the cutting end point in
the X-axis direction (in diameter).
• W ......................................... Z Specifies the distance and direction from the
the Z-axis direction.
• P, I ....................................... X Specifies the distance in X-axis movement
(unsigned, in radius).
• Q, K ..................................... Z 1 Specifies the depth of cut in the Z-axis
direction (unsigned value).
• R(2), D ................................ Escape at the bottom
8 8 WARNING
interrupted cycle.
2 2 NOTE
1. F G74 1. If no F command is specified in the G74 block, the one valid before
the execution of the G74 block becomes valid for the execution of
the cutting defined by the commands in the G74 block.
2. G74 2. The cycle starts from and ends at the position, where the cutting
tool is positioned right before the execution of the G74 block.
3. R 3. For the G74 cycle, the automatic tool nose radius offset function is
invalid.
4. R(2) 4. When specifying the escape at the bottom of cut using address
1 R(2), escape movement occurs from the first bottom of cut if an
1 2 un-coded value is used. If a minus sign is used, escape movement
R(2) occurs from the second bottom but there is no escape at the first
bottom. When performing grooving on an end face, assign a minus
R(2) sign for address R(2). If a minus sign is not specified, the tool shifts
by R(2) at the bottom of cut causing breakage of the tool.
Note that the direction of escape at the bottom of cut is the same
disregarding of the use of the minus sign.
5. G74 5. The following restrictions apply if a G74 command is specified. An
P204 alarm message (P204) is displayed unless these restrictions are
observed.
• X(U)/Z(W) P/Q 0 • Specify a value other than “0” for address P/Q if address X(U)/
Z(W) is specified.
• X(U)/Z(W) P/Q • The axis movement distance specified by address X(U)/Z(W)

must be greater than the axis movement distance specified by
address P/Q.
• P/Q R(2) • The axis movement distance specified by address P/Q must be
greater than the amount of escape specified by address R(2).
• P/Q 1 R(1) • The depth of cut, in each cutting movement, specified by
address P/Q must be greater than the amount of relief specified
by address R(1).
• P/Q 1 • The depth of cut, in each cutting movement, specified by
address P/Q must be smaller than the total depth of cut.
6. G74 G17, G18, G19 6. When specifying the G74 command, if an axis of other than the
P204 plane selected with G17, G18, or G19 is specified, an alarm (P204)
occurs.
Example:
G74 Programming using G74 (Face cut-off cycle)
G74 To create a program using the G74 face cut-off cycle.
4
40
R(2) 1
3 (P)
1 Intermittent Feed
3
1
110
70
(X70.0, Z 40.0) Rapid Traverse
O1;
N1;
G50 S1500;
G00 T0101;
G96 S100 M03;
X100.0 Z20.0 M08;
G01 Z3.0 F1.0;.......................................................... G74 Positioning at the start point
X100.0, Z3.0 (X100.0, Z3.0) for the face cut-off
cycle (G74)
G74 R0.1;.................................................................. (G74) Setting of the parameter used for
the face cut-off cycle (G74)
• R0.1 • R0.1
0.1 Return amount in intermittent
feed: 0.1
G74 X70.0 Z 40.0 P3.0 Q10.0 R1.0 F0.25; .............. G74 Execution of the face cut-off cycle
• X70.0 (G74)
X • X70.0
• Z 40.0 Cutting end point in the X-axis
Z direction
• P3.0 • Z 40.0
Bottom of cutting in the Z-axis
X 3 mm
direction
• Q10.0
• P3.0
Z 1
Interval in the X-axis direction
10 mm
movement (in radius): 3 mm
• R1.0
• Q10.0
1 mm Infeed amount per intermittent
• F0.25 infeed operation in the Z-axis
0.25 mm/rev direction: 10 mm
• R1.0
X100.0, Z3.0 Escape at the bottom of cutting:
1 mm
• F0.25
At the completion of the cycle, the
cutting tool returns to the start point
of the cycle (X100.0, Z3.0), at a
G00 X200.0 Z150.0;
M01;
Example:
G74 Programming using G74 (Deep hole drilling)
G74 To create a program using the G74 deep hole drilling cycle.
80 mm (For 80-mm deep hole)
10 10(Q)
Intermittent Feed
Rapid Traverse
80 R(1)
O1;
N1;
G97 S300 M03;
X0 Z20.0 M08;
G01 Z5.0 F1.0; ......................................................... G74 Positioning at the start point (X0,
X0, Z5.0 Z5.0) for the deep hole drilling cycle
(G74)
the deep hole drilling cycle (G74)
• R0.1 • R0.1
feed: 0.1
G74 Z 80.0 Q10.0 F0.15; ......................................... G74 Execution of the deep hole drilling
• Z 80.0 cycle (G74)
Z • Z 80.0
• Q10.0 Bottom of cutting in the Z-axis
Z 1 10 direction
mm • Q10.0
• F0.15 Infeed amount per intermittent
infeed operation in the Z-axis
0.15 mm/rev
direction: 10 mm
• F0.15
X0, Z5.0
After the completion of the cycle, the
of the cycle (X0, Z5.0), at a rapid
traverse rate.
G00 X200.0 Z150.0;
M01;
1-7 G75
G75 O.D./I.D. Grooving Cycle, Cut-Off Cycle
Q
Z
X
Z P Rapid Traverse
R(1)
Cutting Feed
R(2)
Intermittent Feed
X
#8056
(R(1): Return amount, to be set for parameter #8056)

Details of Intermittent Infeed
G75 X In the cycle called up by the G75 command, intermittent feed

with a fixed infeed distance is repeated along the X-axis.
P R(1) P After the infeed by “P”, the tool returns by “R(1)” then the next
infeed is repeated.
carry out cutting without applying excessive force to the tool.
5Z 5If the interval along the Z-axis is omitted in the program, the cycle
can be used for the cut-off cycle.
1.
<O.D./I.D. grooving cycle>

G75 R(1) ;
G75 X(U)_ Z(W)_ P_ Q_ R(2) F_ ;
<O.D. cut-off cycle>

G75 R(1) ;
G75 X(U)_ P_ F_ ;
2. F15
F15 format
<O.D./I.D. grooving cycle>

G75 X(U)_ Z(W)_ I_ K_ F_ D_ ;
<O.D. cut-off cycle>

G75 X(U)_ I_ F_ ;
• G75 ..................................... Calls the O.D./I.D. grooving cycle or O.D.
cut-off cycle.
• R(1) ..................................... Specifies the return amount.
2 2 NOTE
No. 8056 until it is replaced with the value specified next.
This value can also be set for parameter No.
8056; the value set for the parameter is changed
• X .......................................... X Specifies the bottom of cutting in the X-axis
direction.
• Z .......................................... Z Specifies the cutting end point in the Z-axis
direction.
• U ......................................... X Specifies the distance and direction from the
the X-axis direction (in diameter).
• W ......................................... Z Specifies the distance and direction from the
the Z-axis direction.
• P, I ....................................... X 1 Specifies the depth of cut in the X-axis
direction (unsigned value, in radius).
• Q, K ..................................... Z Specifies the distance in Z-axis movement
(unsigned).
• R(2), D ................................ Escape at the bottom
8 8 WARNING
interrupted cycle.
2 2 NOTE
1. F G75 1. If no F command is specified in the G75 block, the one valid before
the execution of the G75 block becomes valid for the execution of
the cutting defined by the commands in the G75 block.
2. G75 2. The cycle starts from and ends at the position, where the cutting
tool is positioned right before the execution of the G75 block.
3. R 3. For the G75 cycle, the automatic tool nose radius offset function is
invalid.
4. R(2) 4. When specifying the escape at the bottom of cut using address
1 R(2), escape movement occurs from the first bottom of cut if an
1 2 uncoded value is used. If a minus sign is used, escape movement
R(2) occurs from the second bottom but there is no escape at the first
bottom. When performing grooving on an end face, assign a minus
R(2) sign for address R(2). If a minus sign is not specified, the tool shifts
by R(2) at the bottom of cut causing breakage of the tool. Note that
the direction of escape at the bottom of cut is the same
disregarding of the use of the minus sign.
5. G75 5. The following restrictions apply if a G75 command is specified. An

P204 alarm message (P204) is displayed unless these restrictions are
observed.
• X(U)/Z(W) P/Q 0 • Specify a value other than “0” for address P/Q if address X(U)/
Z(W) is specified.
• X(U)/Z(W) P/Q • The axis movement distance specified by address X(U)/Z(W)
must be greater than the axis movement distance specified by
address P/Q.
• P/Q R(2) • The axis movement distance specified by address P/Q must be
greater than the amount of escape specified by address R(2).
• P/Q 1 R(1) • The depth of cut, in each cutting movement, specified by
address P/Q must be greater than the amount of relief specified
by address R(1).
• P/Q 1 • The depth of cut, in each cutting movement, specified by
address P/Q must be smaller than the total depth of cut.
6. G75 G17, G18, G19 6. When specifying the G75 command, if an axis of other than the
P204 plane selected with G17, G18, or G19 is specified, an alarm (P204)
occurs.
Example:
G75 Programming using G75 (O.D./I.D. grooving cycle)
G75 To create a program using the G75 O.D. grooving cycle.
6
5
0 R(2)
40 Intermittent Feed
80 4.5 4.5
100
110
(Q) (Q)
Rapid Traverse
O1;
N1;
G50 S1500;
G00 T0101;
G96 S100 M03;
X120.0 Z20.0 M08;
G01 Z 45.0 F1.0; ..................................................... G75 Positioning at the start point
X120.0, Z 45.0 (X120.0, Z 45.0) for the O.D.
grooving cycle (G75)
the O.D. grooving cycle (G75)
• R0.1 • R0.1
feed: 0.1
G75 X100.0 Z 80.0 P2.0 Q4.5 F0.15; ...................... G75 Execution of the O.D. grooving
• X100.0 cycle (G75)
X • X100.0
• Z 80.0 Bottom of cutting in the X-axis
Z direction
• P2.0 • Z 80.0
Cutting end point in the Z-axis
X 1 2 mm
direction
• Q4.5
• P2.0
Z 4.5 mm
Infeed amount per intermittent
• F0.15 infeed operation in the X-axis
0.15 mm/rev direction: 2 mm
• Q4.5
X120.0, Z 45.0 Interval in the Z-axis direction
movement: 4.5 mm
• F0.15
of the cycle (X120.0, Z 45.0), at a
G00 X200.0 Z150.0;
M01;
Example:
G75 Programming using G75 (Cut-off cycle)
G75 To create a program using the G75 O.D. cut-off cycle.
(hollow-body material)
18
R(1) 3(P)
4 12 3(P) Intermittent Feed
60
25
R(1)
3(P)
100 Rapid Traverse
O1;
N1;
G50 S1500;
G00 T0101;
G96 S100 M03;
X65.0 Z20.0 M08;
G01 Z 16.0 F1.0; ..................................................... G75 Positioning at the start point (X65.0,
X65.0, Z 16.0 Z 16.0) for the cut-off cycle (G75)
G75 R0.1;.................................................................. G75 Setting of the parameter used for
the cut-off cycle (G75)
• R0.1 • R0.1
feed: 0.1
G75 X20.0 P3.0 F0.15; ............................................. G75 Execution of the cut-off cycle (G75)
• X20.0 • X20.0
X Bottom of cutting in the X-axis
• P3.0 direction
X 1 3 mm • P3.0
• F0.15 Infeed amount per intermittent
infeed operation in the X-axis
0.15 mm/rev
direction: 3 mm
• F0.15

X65.0, Z 16.0 cutting tool returns to the start point
of the cycle (X65.0, Z 16.0), at a
G00 X200.0 Z150.0;
M01;
1-8 G76
G76 Multiple Thread Cutting Cycle
5 1
Rapid Traverse
4 2
3
Cutting Feed
G76 b c The G76 command calls the thread cutting cycle, shown in the
illustration on the left. The required thread height is obtained
by executing the thread cutting pattern repeatedly in the range
from b to c along the angle of the thread.
1.
G76 P(1) R(1) ;
G76 X(U)_ Z(W)_ R(2) P(2) Q(2) F_ ;
2. F15
F15 format
G76 X(U)_ Z(W)_ I_ K_ D_ F_ A_ P_ Q_ ;
• G76 ..................................... Calls the multiple thread cutting cycle.
• P(1) ..................................... P 6 Specifies how the thread should be
machined with a 6-digit number.
P[[^^@@ P[[^^@@
[[ 00 99 [[: Number of cutting paths for finishing:
00 to 99
2
2 NOTE
^^ ^^: Thread chamfering size

2 NOTE
2
Thread chamfering size can be specified in the
L 0.0L 9.9L 0.1L range from 0.0L to 9.9L in increments of 0.1L (L:
2 00 99 thread lead). In a program, specification is made
in a 2-digit number of 00 to 99.
@@ @@: Thread angle
2 2 NOTE
0 99 1 The angle can be selected in the range 0 to 99
in increments of 1 .
In a program, the selected angle is directly
#8059 specified in a 2-digit number.
This value can also be set for parameter
No. #8059; the value set for the parameter is
changed according to the value specified in the
program.
Example:
P021260 P021260
P This P command specifies the following:
2 The number of cutting paths for finishing is twice.
1.2 L Thread chamfering size is 1.2 L, and
60 Thread angle is 60 .
• R(1) ..................................... 0 99.999 mm Specifies the finishing allowance (0 to

99.999 mm).
2
2 NOTE
• X, Z ..................................... Specify the X and Z coordinates of the
thread cutting end point.
• U, W .................................... Specify the distance and direction from the
U thread cutting start point to the end point
along the X-axis and the Z-axis, respectively
(in diameter for U).
• R(2), I .................................. X Specifies the distance of taper in the X-axis
direction (signed value, in radius).
5 5If this command is omitted, straight thread is

cut.
• P(2), K ................................. Specifies the thread height (in radius,
unsigned value).
• Q(2), D ................................ 1 Specifies the depth of cut for the first thread
cutting path (in radius, unsigned value).
• F .......................................... Specifies the lead of thread.
• A .......................................... Specifies the angle of thread.

2 2 NOTE
0 99 1 The angle can be selected in the range 0 to 99
in increments of 1 .
#8059 until it is replaced with the value specified next.
• P .......................................... F15 Specifies the infeed mode (only for the F15
• P1 format).
• P1
• P2 Straight feed along the thread face at fixed
metal removal rate
• P2
2 Zigzag infeed at fixed metal removal rate
P “ (option)
” 2 NOTE
If designation of address P is omitted, P1 (straight
feed along the thread face at fixed metal removal
rate) is assumed.
• Q .......................................... F15 Specifies the shift angle of thread cutting
start angles (only for the F15 format).
5 Q 5Address Q is used for multiple thread cutting.

2 2 NOTE
1. P(2), Q(2), R(2) 1. The data set for addresses P(2), Q(2), and R(2) are distinguished
X(U), Z(W) by the position of addresses X (U) and Z (W).
(X, Z) F
Q(2)
R(2) P(2)
Thread Cutting Direction
2. G76 2. When programming the automatic thread cutting cycle in the G76
P204 mode, the following restrictions apply. An alarm message (P204) is
displayed on the screen unless they are observed.
• X(U), Z(W) • Always specify addresses X (U) and Z (W).
• X(U), Z(W) • When specifying addresses X (U) and Z (W), the end point must
be different from the start point.

Infeed Mode
Angle of Thread
1 Q 1st Q
Path
P (2) P (2)
2 Q 2 2nd Q 2
Path
n Q n nth Q n
Path
a Finishing Allowance
m (cutting results for "m" number of paths)
G76 n In the G76 cycle, the depth of cut in the nth thread cutting path
is as below.
Qn = nQ Qn = nQ
#1222 bit4 = 1 1 As the thread cutting cycle is repeated, the depth of cut
Qn NC reduces.
It is possible to clamp the depth of cut at a certain value ( set
in the NC) by setting the parameter as “#1222 bit 4 = 1”.
Value may be set in the NC by specifying the command
NC below in the standard format.
G76 P(1) Q R(1); G76 P(1) Q (internal setting value) R(1);
F15 Once set, value remains valid even after the command
format is changed to the F15 format.
#1222 bit4 = 0 The setting is made invalid by returning the parameter setting
as “#1222 bit 4 = 0”.
G76 Cautions on G76 Multiple Thread Cutting Cycle
G32 G92 The cautions indicated for the G32 and G92 thread cutting
cycles also apply to the thread cutting cycle called by the G76
command.
1 “ 1 For details of cautions on the thread cutting cycle, refer to “Pre-
” 109 cautions on Thread Cutting Operation” (page 109).
8 8 WARNING
interrupted cycle.
2 2 NOTE
Chamfering mode for thread cutting is valid when the power is turned
on.
M23 M23: Chamfering ON (Initial status when the power is turned on.)
M24 M24: Chamfering OFF
1 Relationship between Depth of Cut in First Cycle and

Number of Thread Cutting Cycles
(Fixed Metal Removal Rate and Straight Feed along the
Thread Face)
1 0 Calculating Number of Thread Cutting Paths when Depth

of Cut for First Path is Given
2
K−a
n= +1
D
D 1 D: Depth of cut for the first path (in radius)

K K: Thread height (in radius)
a a: Finishing allowance
n n: Number of thread cutting paths
Example:
1 D 0.35 mm K Assume that: D = 0.35 K = 1.3 a = 0.05, then, number of
1.3 mm a 0.05 mm thread cutting paths (n) are calculated as follows:
n
2
1.3 0.05
n= +1
0.35
= 12.76 + 1
12.76 13 14 (“12.76” is rounded up to “13”.)
14 Therefore, the thread cutting pattern is repeated 14 times to
generate the required thread.
1 0 Calculating Depth of Cut for First Path when Number of

Thread Cutting Paths is Given
K−a
D=
√n−1
n n: Number of thread cutting paths

K K: Thread height (in radius)
a a: Finishing allowance
D 1 D: Depth of cut for the first path (in radius)
Example:
K 1.3 mm a 0.05 mm Assume that: K = 1.3 a = 0.05 n = 14, then depth of cut for
n 14 1 D the first path (D) is calculated as follows:
1.3 − 0.05
D=
√ 14 − 1
= 0.346...
≈ 0.35
1 0.35 mm Therefore, the depth of cut for the first path is 0.35 mm.
Example:
G76 To execute thread cutting using the G76 multiple thread
cutting cycle.
M60 P = 2
C0.5
2 2
C1.5
3 C1 1.3
60
5
Details of Thread
25
Rapid Traverse
69
54
Cutting Feed
O1;
N1;
G00 T0101;
G97 S640 M03;
X70.0 Z20.0 M08;
G01 Z5.0 F1.0 M24; ................................................. G76 Positioning at the start point (X70.0,
X70.0, Z5.0 Z5.0) for the multiple thread cutting
cycle (G76)
2
2 NOTE
M24
The M24 command makes chamfering
invalid in the next thread cutting.
G76 P010060 R50;
G76 X57.4 Z 24.0 P1.3 Q0.35 F2.0; ........................ G76 Execution of the multiple thread
cutting cycle (G76)
• P010060 • P010060
1 The number of cutting paths for
0 finishing: Once
60 Thread chamfering amount: 0
Thread angle: 60
• R50
• R50
0.05 mm
Finishing allowance (0.05 mm)
• X57.4
• X57.4
The diameter of the last thread
• Z 24.0
cutting path
Z
• Z 24.0
2 mm The Z coordinate of the thread
• P1.3 cutting end point (includes
1.3 mm incomplete thread length of
• Q0.35 2 mm).
1 0.35 mm • P1.3
• F2.0 Thread height: 1.3 mm
2 mm • Q0.35
Depth of cut for the first thread
cutting path: 0.35 mm
• F2.0
Thread pitch: 2 mm
G00 X200.0 Z150.0 M09;
M30;
2 2 NOTE
1 The thread height and the depth of cut for the first path are specified
only for reference.
HOLE MACHINING CANNED CYCLE 353
2
Hole machining operation is programmed using several blocks
of commands.
G 1 A hole machining canned cycle allows hole machining
operation which requires several blocks of commands to be
programmed using one block of commands including an
appropriate G code.
2 2 NOTE
1. MC Y 1. Hole machining canned cycles can be used only with the MC type
or Y-axis specification machines.
2. F15 2. Two formats are provided for programming hole machining canned
F15 cycles - the standard format and the F15 format. If the command
G format differs between the standard format and the F15 format, the
difference is explained in the explanation of the related G code
items.
Pay sufficient care to the difference when making a program.
1 1 Concerning details on switching the format, refer to the

“ ” separate volume, OPERATION MANUAL “Setting Screen”.
<Basic Pattern of Hole Machining Canned Cycle>

G83-G85 X(U)_ C(H)_ Y(V)_ Z(W)_ R_ Q_ P_ F_ K_ (M68) (M268);
G87-G89 Z(W)_ C(H)_ Y(V)_ X(U)_ R_ Q_ P_ F_ K_ (M68) (M268);
G80;
• G83 G85 ............... Calls a face hole machining canned cycle.
• G87 G89 ............... Calls a side hole machining canned cycle.
• X, Z, C, Y ............... Specifies the hole machining positions (absolute
command).
• U, W, H, V .............. Specifies the distance and direction from the end
point of the previous block to the hole position
(incremental command).
• Z, X ........................ Specifies the hole bottom (absolute command)
• W, U ....................... R Specifies the distance and direction from the
point R to the hole bottom (incremental
command).
• R ............................ <Standard Format>
(Incremental Command)
R Specifies the distance and direction from the
initial point to the point R (Specify a radius value
F15 when machining the side of the workpiece).
<F15 Format>
R (Absolute Command)
Point R position (Specify a diameter value when
machining the side of the workpiece).
• Q ............................ 1 Specifies the depth of cut per single infeed
motion (Specify a radius value with a positive
value).
• P............................. Specifies the period of dwell function executed at
= the hole bottom.
Dwell = suspension of axis movement for period
specified
• F............................. : Drilling cycle:
mm/min Specifies the feedrate (mm/min).
Synchronized tapping cycle:
mm Specifies the pitch (mm).
354 HOLE MACHINING CANNED CYCLE
• K............................. When the holes to be machined are arranged in

equal intervals, the address K specifies the
K0 number of repetition of the machining of the
holes.
K0:
K1 Only the data of a hole machining canned cycle
1 is stored.
K1:
“K1” K Hole machining cycle is executed once at the
“K1” specified position.
K2 K9999 “K1” is omissible. If no K command is specified, it
is equivalent to the designation of “K1”.
K2 - K9999:
2 The specified hole machining cycle is repeated
F15 L by the specified number of times.
2 NOTE
In the F15 format, use address L to specify the number
of repetitions.
• (M68)...................... 1 1 C Spindle 1 brake clamp (C-axis clamp of spindle
1).
5 5Specify M68 to carry out heavy-duty cutting.

• (M268).................... 2 Spindle 2 brake clamp.
5 5Specify M268 to carry out heavy-duty cutting.

• G80 ........................ Hole machining canned cycle cancel.
2 2 NOTE
1. 1. Since the hole machining canned cycle is modal,
the canned cycle mode remains valid until it is
G80 01 G canceled. Therefore, after completing the cycle,
G00, G01, G02, G03 specify G80 or any of group 01 G codes such as
G00, G01, G02 and G03 to cancel it.
G83 X_ C_ Z_ R_ Q_ P_ F_ ; G83 X_ C_ Z_ R_ Q_ P_ F_ ;
G00 Z_ C_ ; G00 Z_ C_ ;
Z, C Only X- and Y-axes are moved, the hole machining
G83 X_ C_ Z_ R_ Q_ P_ F_ ; canned cycle is not executed.
Z_ C_ ; G83 X_ C_ Z_ R_ Q_ P_ F_ ;
Z_ C_ ;
The hole machining canned cycle is executed.
2. G80 G
G83 G89 R Z 2. If G80 is specified, the R and Z points and hole
machining data are canceled in addition to the G
code (G83 - G89) calling for the hole machining
canned cycle.
7 7 CAUTION
When thread cutting or hole machining, especially during
@ the synchronized tapping cycle, if the operation is stopped
by pressing the [EMERGENCY STOP] (Emergency Stop)
button or @ (RESET) key, thoroughly check the workpiece
and cutting tool conditions before carefully moving each
axis.
[Workpiece and cutting tool collision, or interference]
2 2 NOTE
1. 1. If a hole machining canned cycle is interrupted by the emergency
@ stop operation or by pressing the @ (RESET) key, although the
hole machining mode, hole machining data, and hole position data
are retained, the number of repetitions is cleared.
2. G98 2. To specify a hole machining canned cycle, select the feed per
G97 minute mode by specifying the G98 command, and specify the
spindle speed of the rotary tool spindle in the G97 mode.
3. 3. The number of times the called hole machining canned cycle

should be repeated is required only when the cycle should be
executed repeatedly. Although feedrate value is retained when the
hole machining canned cycle is canceled, the repeat number data
is not retained.
4. M13 4. To call a hole machining canned cycle, the spindle should have
M14 been rotated by the M13 or M14 command excluding the
synchronized tapping cycle.
Example:
S_ M13; S_ M13; Rotary tool spindle normal
: rotation
G83 X_ C_ Z_ R_ Q_ P_ F_ ; :
: G83 X_ C_ Z_ R_ Q_ P_ F_ ;
:
5. X, Y, Z, C, U, V, W, H, R 5. In the hole machining canned cycle mode, if any data of X, Y, Z, C,
U, V, W, H, R, or additional axis is specified in a block, the called
X, Y, Z, C, U, V, W, H, R hole machining cycle is executed. In the block that does not
contain any of X, Y, Z, C, U, V, W, H, R, or additional axis, the hole
X “G04 X_ ;” machining cycle is not executed. However, even if an X command
is specified, the hole machining cycle is not executed if it is
specified following the G04 command which calls the dwell
function.
6. G80 6. After the completion of hole machining operation executed using a
01 G G00, G01, G02, G03 hole machining canned cycle, cancel the hole machining canned
cycle by specifying G80 or a G code in 01 group (G00, G01, G02,
G03).
7. 7. If the hole bottom position is specified using an incremental
command, the following value must be specified.
R With an R command:
R Distance and direction from the point R to the hole bottom
R Without an R command:
Distance and direction from the initial point to the hole bottom
8. M 8. When miscellaneous function is specified with a G code which
M calls a hole machining canned cycle in the same block, the M code
FIN is output at the first positioning. After the completion of positioning,
1 M the next hole machining cycle is started after checking the M code
completion signal (FIN). If the number of repetitions is specified,
the M code is output only in the first cycle and is not output after
that.
9. 9. During the synchronized tapping cycle, feedrate override and
rotary tool spindle speed override are fixed to 100% because a
fixed lead thread cannot be cut if feedrate or rotary tool spindle
100% speed is changed during tapping cycle.
10. G80 G G83, G84, 10. If G80 is specified, the hole machining data and the hole position
G85, G87, G88, G89 data are canceled in addition to the G code (G83, G84, G85, G87,
G88, and G89) calling for a hole machining canned cycle.
2-1
Hole Machining Canned Cycle List
The operation methods called by the hole machining canned

cycle G codes, typical applications and cautions are described
here.
Face Hole Machining Canned Cycle
X C Y The face hole machining canned cycle indicates the canned

Z cycle in which hole machining is executed by the Z-axis with
positioning executed by the combination of X-, C-, and Y-axes.
Function Description
Code Page
G83 High-speed deep hole Deep hole drilling
#8115 = 357 drilling (Parameter
1 #8115 = 1)
Deep hole drilling
358
#8115 = 0 (Parameter #8115 = 0)
363 Spot drilling Centering drilling shallow
holes
Spot drilling (dwell)
368
G85 380 Boring Reaming and boring

Boring (dwell)
380
M329 Synchronized tapping Tapping

372
G84
M329 Synchronized Reverse Tapping
378
G84.1 tapping
M329 Spindle synchronized Tapping
379
G84 tapping
Side Hole Machining Canned Cycle
Z C Y The side hole machining canned cycle indicates the canned

X cycle in which hole machining is executed by the X-axis with
positioning executed by the combination of Z-, C-, and Y-axes.
Function Description
Code Page
G87 High-speed deep hole Deep hole drilling
#8115 = 357 drilling (Parameter
1 #8115 = 1)
Deep hole drilling
359
#8115 = 0 (Parameter #8115 = 0)
363 Spot drilling Centering drilling shallow
holes
Spot drilling (dwell)
368
G89 380 Boring Reaming and boring

Boring (dwell)
380
M329 Synchronized tapping Tapping

372
G88
M329 Synchronized Reverse Tapping
378
G88.1 tapping
2-2
Drilling Cycle
High-Speed Deep Hole Drilling Cycle
In the high-speed deep hole drilling cycle, drilling is executed in

intermittent axis feed with a fixed depth of cut. When carrying
out drilling on soft or viscous workpieces, long chips become
entangled in the drill. With such operations, this mode of drilling
cycle is used to break up chips.
Q d As show in the illustration below, after drill infeed by “Q”, the
Q drill is returned by “d” and the next infeed is repeated.
drill a deep hole without applying excessive force to the drill.
<End Face High-Speed Deep Hole Drilling Cycle>
Q Q Q
R
Point R
Initial Point
d Rapid Traverse
Dwell
Drilling
1. No. 8115 = 1
Standard format (parameter No. 8115 = 1)
MC
<MC specifications>
G83 X(U)_ C(H)_ Z(W)_ R_ Q_ P_ F_ ;
Y
<Y-axis specifications>
G83 X(U)_ C(H)_ Y(V)_ Z(W)_ R_ Q_ P_ F_ ;
2 2 NOTE
1. d No. 8013 1. The return amount “d” is set for parameter No. 8013. (The
1.000 mm default setting is 1.000 mm)
2. R R 2. For address R, specify the distance and direction from the
initial point to the point R. (Incremental commands)
2. F15
F15 format
MC
<MC specifications>
G17 G83.1 X(U)_ C(H)_ Z(W)_ R_ Q_ P_ F_ ;
Y
G17 G83.1 X(U)_ C(H)_ Y(V)_ Z(W)_ R_ Q_ P_ F_ ;
2 2 NOTE
2. R R 2. For address R, specify the point R position. (Absolute
commands)
<Side Face High-Speed Deep Hole Drilling Cycle>
Initial Point
R
Point R
Q
d
Q
Rapid Traverse
Q
Drilling
Dwell
1. No. 8115 = 1
Standard format (parameter No. 8115 = 1)
MC
<MC specifications>
G87 Z(W)_ C(H)_ X(U)_ R_ Q_ P_ F_ ;
Y
G87 Z(W)_ C(H)_ Y(V)_ X(U)_ R_ Q_ P_ F_ ;
2 2 NOTE
initial point to the point R. For the side high-speed deep hole
drilling cycle, specify the values as radius values. (Incremental
commands)
2. F15
F15 format
MC
<MC specifications>
G19 G83.1 Z(W)_ C(H)_ X(U)_ R_ Q_ P_ F_ ;
Y
G19 G83.1 Z(W)_ C(H)_ Y(V)_ X(U)_ R_ Q_ P_ F_ ;
2 2 NOTE
2. R R 2. For address R, specify the point R position. For the side
high-speed deep hole drilling cycle, specify the values as
diameter values. (Absolute commands)
Deep Hole Drilling Cycle
When carrying out drilling a deep hole where coolant cannot be

supplied satisfactorily or drilling a workpiece which generates
entangling chips, this drilling pattern can be effectively used.
Q R As shown in the illustration below, after drill infeed by “Q”, the
d drill is returned to point R at a rapid traverse rate. In the next
Q infeed, the drill is moved to a point above the depth drilled in
the previous operation by clearance amount “d” at a rapid
traverse rate, and is then fed by “Q”.
drill a deep hole without applying excessive force to the drill.
<End Face Deep Hole Drilling Cycle>
Q Q Q
R
Point R
d Initial Point Rapid Traverse

Dwell
Drilling
1. No. 8115=0
Standard format (parameter No. 8115 = 0) (default setting)
MC
<MC specifications>
G83 X(U)_ C(H)_ Z(W)_ R_ Q_ P_ F_ ;
Y
G83 X(U)_ C(H)_ Y(V)_ Z(W)_ R_ Q_ P_ F_ ;
2 2 NOTE
1. d No. 8013 1. The clearance amount “d” is set for parameter No. 8013. (The
initial point to the point R. (Incremental commands)
2. F15
F15 format
MC
<MC specifications>
G17 G83 X(U)_ C(H)_ Z(W)_ R_ Q_ P_ F_ ;
Y
G17 G83 X(U)_ C(H)_ Y(V)_ Z(W)_ R_ Q_ P_ F_ ;
2 2 NOTE
commands)
Example:
Programming using the end face deep hole drilling cycle
a f To carry out deep hole drilling cycle at a to f.
5 5 5 5
Rapid Traverse
90
Cutting Feed
2
150 3 1 30
d
C0
17
4
Z3.0 R Z30.0
210 6 330
Z3.0 (Point Z30.0 (Initial Point)
5
P.C.D 150 R)
270 0.1
a f G83
Dwell at hole bottom for 0.1 seconds.
Movement by G83 at a to f.
X150.0 Z30.0 C30.0; ................................................ a X150.0, C30.0 Positioning at a (X150.0, C30.0)

Z30.0 and initial point (Z30.0) at a rapid
traverse rate.
G83 Z 17.0 R 27.0 Q5000 P100 F100; ................... a Execution of deep hole drilling cycle
at a.
• Z 17.0 • Z 17.0
Z coordinate value of point Z (hole
• R 27.0 bottom)
R • R 27.0
Specifies the distance and
• Q5000 direction from initial point to point
1 5 mm R.
• P100 • Q5000
Depth of cut per one infeed
0.1
motion: 5 mm
1
• P100
Dwell period at hole bottom for
60 0.1 seconds.
Rotary tool spindle 1 rotation
(min 1) time (sec)
= 0.06 < 0.1 60 (sec)
1 =
Rotary tool spindle
speed (min 1)
= 0.06 < 0.1 (sec)
• F100
thus, the rotary tool spindle turns
100 mm/min more than one rotation.
60 (sec) spindle speed (min 1)
• F100
Feedrate of 100 mm/min
C90.0 Q5000; ........................................................... b f Execution of side deep hole drilling
C150.0 Q5000; cycle at b to f
C210.0 Q5000;
C270.0 Q5000;
C330.0 Q5000;
G80; .......................................................................... Cancellation of side deep hole
drilling cycle mode.
G00 X200.0 Z100.0 M05;.......................................... Stopping the rotary tool spindle
M46; .......................................................................... C Canceling the C-axis connection
G99; .......................................................................... Specifying the feed per revolution
mode
M01;
:
<Side Face Deep Hole Drilling Cycle>
Initial Point
R
Point R
Q
d
Q
Q Rapid Traverse
Drilling
Dwell
1. No. 8115=0
Standard format (parameter No. 8115 = 0) (default setting)
MC
<MC specifications>
G87 Z(W)_ C(H)_ X(U)_ R_ Q_ P_ F_ ;
Y
G87 Z(W)_ C(H)_ Y(V)_ X(U)_ R_ Q_ P_ F_ ;
2 2 NOTE
initial point to the point R. For the side deep hole drilling cycle,
specify the values as radius values. (Incremental commands)
2. F15
F15 format
MC
<MC specifications>
G19 G83 Z(W)_ C(H)_ X(U)_ R_ Q_ P_ F_ ;
Y
G19 G83 Z(W)_ C(H)_ Y(V)_ X(U)_ R_ Q_ P_ F_ ;
2 2 NOTE
2. R R 2. For address R, specify the point R position. For the side deep
hole drilling cycle, specify the values as diameter values.
(Absolute commands)
Example:
Programming using the side face deep hole drilling
cycle
+X
90
30
150 1 30
3
100
+Z C0
210 4 330
270
X160.0
(Initial Point)
X106.0 R
(Point R)
5
X100.0
5
d
17 Rapid Traverse
5
5 Cutting Feed
X66.0
0.1 a f G87
Dwell at hole bottom for 0.1 sec

Movement by G87 at a to f
X160.0 Z 30.0 C30.0; .............................................. a Z-30.0, C30.0 Positioning at a (Z 30.0, C30.0)

X160.0 and initial point (X160.0) at a
traverse rate.
G87 X66.0 R 27.0 Q5000 P100 F100; ..................... a Execution of deep hole drilling cycle
at a.
• X66.0 • X66.0
X coordinate value of point X
• R 27.0 (hole bottom)
R • R 27.0
• Q5000 direction from initial point to point
1 5 mm R.
• P100 • Q5000
Depth of cut per one infeed
0.1
motion: 5 mm
1
• P100
60 0.1 seconds.
= Rotary tool spindle 1 rotation
(min 1) time (sec)
= 0.06 < 0.1 60 (sec)

=
1 Rotary tool spindle
speed (min 1)
• F100 = 0.06 < 0.1 (sec)
100 mm/min thus, the rotary tool spindle turns
more than one rotation.
• F100
C90.0 Q5000; ........................................................... b f Execution of side deep hole drilling
C150.0 Q5000; cycle at b to f
C210.0 Q5000;
C270.0 Q5000;
C330.0 Q5000;
G80; .......................................................................... Cancellation of side deep hole
drilling cycle mode.
M46; ......................................................................... C Canceling the C-axis connection
M01; mode
:
Spot Drilling Cycle
Z X The spot drilling cycle is a simple cycle in which drilling is

carried out in the Z/ X directions and then the cutting tool is
returned at a rapid traverse rate. The spot drilling cycle is used
for machining a center hole by a centering drill or drilling of
comparatively shallow hole.
<End Face Spot Drilling Cycle>
R
Point R
Initial Point
Rapid Traverse
Drilling
1.
MC
<MC specifications>
G83 X(U)_ C(H)_ Z(W)_ R_ F_ ;
Y
G83 X(U)_ C(H)_ Y(V)_ Z(W)_ R_ F_ ;
2 2 NOTE
R R For address R, specify the distance and direction from the initial
point to the point R. (Incremental commands)
2. F15
F15 format
MC
<MC specifications>
G17 G81 X(U)_ C(H)_ Z(W)_ R_ F_ ;
Y
G17 G81 X(U)_ C(H)_ Y(V)_ Z(W)_ R_ F_ ;
2 2 NOTE
R R For address R, specify the point R position. (Absolute commands)
Example:
Programming using the end face spot drilling cycle
90
2
Rapid Traverse
150 3 1 30
Cutting Feed
C0
4
5
210 6 330
Z3.0 R Z30.0
5
P.C.D 150 Z3.0 Z30.0 (Initial Point)
270
(Point R)
a f G83
Movement by G83 at a to f.
O1;
N1;
G98; .......................................................................... Specifying the feed per minute
mode
M45; ......................................................................... C 1 C Connecting the spindle or spindle 1
as the C-axis
G28 H0;..................................................................... C Returning the C-axis to the machine
zero point
G00 T0101;
G97 S1000 M13;....................................................... 1000 min 1 Starting the rotary tool spindle in the
traverse rate.
G83 Z 5.0 R 27.0 F100; .......................................... a Execution of face spot drilling cycle
at a.
• Z 5.0 • Z 5.0
Z coordinate value of point Z
• R 27.0 • R 27.0
R Specifies the distance and
direction from initial point to point
• F100 R.
100 mm/min • F100
C90.0; ...................................................................... b f Executing the side spot drilling cycle
C150.0; at b to f.
C210.0;
C270.0;
C330.0;
G80; .......................................................................... Canceling the side spot drilling cycle
mode
mode
M01;
:
<Side Face Spot Drilling Cycle>
Initial Point
R
Point R
Rapid Traverse
Drilling
1.
MC
<MC specifications>
G87 Z(W)_ C(H)_ X(U)_ R_ F_ ;
Y
G87 Z(W)_ C(H)_ Y(V)_ X(U)_ R_ F_ ;
2 2 NOTE
point to the point R. For the side spot drilling cycle, specify the
values as radius values. (Incremental commands)
2. F15
F15 format
MC
<MC specifications>
G19 G81 Z(W)_ C(H)_ X(U)_ R_ F_ ;
Y
G19 G81 Z(W)_ C(H)_ Y(V)_ X(U)_ R_ F_ ;
2 2 NOTE
R R For address R, specify the point R position. For the side spot
drilling cycle, specify the values as diameter values. (Absolute
commands)
Example:
Programming using the side face spot drilling cycle
+X
90
30
150 1 30
3
100
+Z C0
210 4 330
270
X160.0
(Initial Point)
X106.0 R
X100.0 (Point R)
5
X90.0
Rapid Traverse
Cutting Feed
a f G87
O1;
N1;
mode
as the C-axis
zero point
G00 T0101;
X160.0 Z 30.0 C30.0; .............................................. a Z 30.0, C30.0 Positioning at a (Z 30.0, C30.0)
traverse rate.
G87 X90.0 R 27.0 F100; .......................................... a Execution of face spot drilling cycle
at a.
• X90.0 • X90.0
• R 27.0 • R 27.0
R Specifies the distance and
direction from initial point to point
• F100 R.
100 mm/min • F100
C90.0; ...................................................................... b f Executing the side spot drilling cycle
C150.0; at b to f.
C210.0;
C270.0;
C330.0;
G80; .......................................................................... Canceling the side spot drilling cycle

mode
mode
M01;
:
Spot Drilling Cycle (Dwell)
Z X The side spot drilling cycle (dwell) carries out drilling in the X
direction and returns the tool at a rapid traverse rate.
In the G83 face spot drilling cycle (dwell), accuracy of hole
depth in the blind hole machining is improved and surface
roughness at the hole bottom is improved as well since dwell is
carried out at the hole bottom.
<End Face Spot Drilling Cycle (Dwell)>
R
Point R
Initial Point
Dwell Rapid Traverse
Drilling
1.
MC
<MC specifications>
G83 X(U)_ C(H)_ Z(W)_ R_ P_ F_ ;
Y
G83 X(U)_ C(H)_ Y(V)_ Z(W)_ R_ P_ F_ ;
2 2 NOTE
2. F15
F15 format
MC
<MC specifications>
G17 G82 X(U)_ C(H)_ Z(W)_ R_ P_ F_ ;
Y
G17 G82 X(U)_ C(H)_ Y(V)_ Z(W)_ R_ P_ F_ ;
2 2 NOTE
Example:
Programming using end face spot drilling cycle (dwell)
a f To carry out spot drilling cycle (dwell) at a to f.
Rapid Traverse
90
Cutting Feed
2
150 3 1 30
5
C0
Z3.0 R Z30.0
4
210 6 330 Z3.0 Z30.0 (Initial Point)

(Point R)
5
P.C.D 150 0.1 a f G83
270
Dwell at hole bottom for 0.1 seconds. Movement by G83 at a to f.
O1;
N1;
mode
as the C-axis
zero point
G00 T0101;
traverse rate.
G83 Z 5.0 R 27.0 P100 F100; ................................. a Execution of spot drilling cycle
(dwell) at a.
• Z 5.0 • Z 5.0
Z coordinate value of point Z (hole
• R 27.0 bottom)
R • R 27.0
• P100 direction from initial point to point
0.1 R.
1 • P100
0.1 seconds.
60 Rotary tool spindle 1 rotation
= time (sec)
(min 1)
60 (sec)
= 0.06 0.1 =
Rotary tool spindle
1 speed (min 1)
• F100 = 0.06 < 0.1 (sec)

100 mm/min thus, the rotary tool spindle turns
• F100
C90.0; ...................................................................... b f Execution of side spot drilling cycle

C150.0; (dwell) at b to f
C210.0;
C270.0;
C330.0;
G80; .......................................................................... Cancellation of side spot drilling
cycle (dwell) mode
mode
M01;
:
<Side Face Spot Drilling Cycle (Dwell)>
Initial Point
R
Point R
Rapid Traverse
Drilling
Dwell
1.
MC
<MC specifications>
G87 Z(W)_ C(H)_ X(U)_ R_ P_ F_ ;
Y
G87 Z(W)_ C(H)_ Y(V)_ X(U)_ R_ P_ F_ ;
2 2 NOTE
point to the point R. For the side spot drilling cycle (dwell), specify
the values as radius values. (Incremental commands)
2. F15
F15 format
MC
<MC specifications>
G19 G82 Z(W)_ C(H)_ X(U)_ R_ P_ F_ ;
Y
G19 G82 Z(W)_ C(H)_ Y(V)_ X(U)_ R_ P_ F_ ;
2 2 NOTE
R R For address R, specify the point R position. For the side spot
drilling cycle (dwell), specify the values as diameter values.
(Absolute commands)
Example:
Programming using side face spot drilling cycle (dwell)
a f To carry out spot drilling cycle (dwell) at a to f.
+X
90
30
150 1 30
3
100
+Z C0
210 4 330
270
X160.0
(Initial Point)
X106.0 R
X100.0 (Point R)
5
X90.0 Rapid Traverse
0.1 a f G87 Cutting Feed

O1;
N1;
mode
as the C-axis
zero point
G00 T0101;
traverse rate.
G87 X90.0 R 27.0 P100 F100; ................................. a Execution of spot drilling cycle
(dwell) at a.
• X90.0 • X90.0
• R 27.0 (hole bottom)
R • R 27.0
• P100 direction from initial point to point
0.1 R.
1 • P100
0.1 seconds.
60 Rotary tool spindle 1 rotation
= time (sec)
(min 1)
60 (sec)
= 0.06 < 0.1 =
Rotary tool spindle
1 speed (min 1)
= 0.06 < 0.1 (sec)

• F100
100 mm/min more than one rotation.
• F100
C90.0; ...................................................................... b f Execution of side spot drilling cycle
C150.0; (dwell) at b to f
C210.0;
C270.0;
C330.0;
G80; .......................................................................... Cancellation of side spot drilling
cycle (dwell) mode
mode
M01;
:
2-3
Synchronized Tapping Cycle
1 X When executing the tapping operation, X- or Z-axis feed

Z amount per rotary tool spindle rotation must be equal to the
pitch of the thread to be cut.
Z With the synchronized tapping cycle, accurate tapping
X operation is possible for cutting thread as the rotation of the
rotary tool spindle and the Z-axis (end face)/X-axis (side face)
feed are constantly synchronized.
7 7 CAUTION
@ When the [EMERGENCY STOP] (Emergency Stop) button
or @ (RESET) key has been pressed to stop the machine
during a synchronized tapping operation, carefully move
the axes after checking the workpiece and cutting tool
carefully for damage. If you move the axes without due
care, the workpiece and cutting tool may collide or
interfere with each other, and this could damage the
machine.
[Workpiece and cutting tool collision, or interference/
Machine damage]
2 2 NOTE
1. 1. During the synchronized tapping cycle, feedrate override and
rotary tool spindle speed override are fixed to 100% because a
fixed lead thread cannot be cut if feedrate or rotary tool spindle
100% speed is changed during the synchronized tapping cycle.
2. 2. If the automatic operation button w [STOP] (Stop) on the
operation panel is pressed during the synchronized tapping cycle,
the synchronized tapping cycle does not stop until the Z-axis/
X-axis returns to the initial point is completed.
3. 3. Call the synchronized tapping cycle in the state the rotary tool
spindle is stopped.
4. 4. Call the synchronized tapping cycle while the spindle is stopped.
5. 5. Since the rotary tool spindle rotation and Z-axis/X-axis feed are
synchronized in the synchronized tapping cycle, it is not necessary
to use a tapper.
6. 6. The dry run function is invalid during the execution of a
7. 7. During synchronized tapping operation, there is a restriction on
rotary tool spindle speeds.
8. G99 8. For feedrate during the synchronized tapping cycle, only G99 (feed
G98 G99 per revolution) can be specified. Even if G98 (feed per minute) is
specified, the machine operates in the feed per revolution mode.
M329 M712 is executed without using the tailstock spindle temporarily, specify
M329 (EX1345) specifying the M329 command. An alarm (EX1345) occurs if the
M329 command is specified without the M712 command specified
in advance.

(page 220)
End Face Synchronized Tapping Cycle
Stops the Rotary Tool

Rotary Tool Spindle Rotation
Stops the Rotary Tool Spindle Normal
Spindle Rotation Rotation
R
Point R Initial Point
Rapid Traverse
Rotary Tool Spindle Reverse
Rotation after Dwell
Rotary Tool Spindle Cutting Feed
Rotation Stop after
Dwell
1.
MC
<MC specifications>
M329 S_ ;
G84 X(U)_ C(H)_ Z(W)_ R_ P_ F_ ;
Y
M329 S_ ;
G84 X(U)_ C(H)_ Y(V)_ Z(W)_ R_ P_ F_ ;
2 2 NOTE
2. F15
F15 format
MC
<MC specifications>
M329 S_ ;
G17 G84.2 X(U)_ C(H)_ Z(W)_ R_ P_ F_ ;
Y
M329 S_ ;
G17 G84.2 X(U)_ C(H)_ Y(V)_ Z(W)_ R_ P_ F_ ;
2 2 NOTE
Example:
Programming using the end face synchronized tapping
cycle
a f 2 mm 20 mm To carry out the synchronized tapping cycle (pitch: 2 mm,
depth: 20 mm) at a to f.
90°
Reverse Rotation Normal Rotation

2 Z30.0 Z30.0
Z30.0 (Initial Point)
150° 3 1 30°
C0 20
Z15.0 Z15.0 R
Z15.0 (Point R)
210° 6 330°
a f M329 G84
Dwell at hole bottom
5
P.C.D 150 Movement by M329 G84 at a to f Rapid Traverse
270° Cutting Feed
O1;
N1;
G99; .......................................................................... Calling the feed per revolution mode
M45; .......................................................................... C Connecting the spindle as the
C-axis
zero point
G00 T0101;
G97; .......................................................................... Calling the constant rotary tool
spindle speed control
traverse rate.
2
2 NOTE
The rotary tool spindle is stopped.
M329 S300;............................................................... Calling the synchronized tapping
cycle
G84 Z _ R 15.0 F2.0;............................................... a Execution of synchronized tapping

cycle at a.
2 2 NOTE
1. Z Z 20 + 1. For the Z-axis point, specify “Z (20
+ tap engaging length)”. For the
X X 100 2 X-axis point, specify “X (100 2
20 + (20 + tap engaging length))”.
2. In the movement from the initial
point to the point R, the rotary tool
2. R
spindle is stopped.
3. Feedrate F = Pitch (mm)
3. F= mm
C90.0; ...................................................................... b f Execution of synchronized tapping
C150.0; cycle at b to f.
C210.0;
C270.0;
C330.0;
G80; .......................................................................... Cancellation of synchronized
tapping cycle mode.
M01;
:
End Face Synchronized Reverse Tapping Cycle
Stops the Rotary Tool

Rotary Tool Spindle Rotation
Stops the Rotary Tool Spindle Reverse
Spindle Rotation Rotation
R
Point R Initial Point
Rapid Traverse
Rotary Tool Spindle Normal
Rotation after Dwell
Rotary Tool Spindle Cutting Feed
Rotation Stop after
Dwell
MC
<MC specifications>
M329 S_ ;
G84.1 X(U)_ C(H)_ Z(W)_ R_ P_ F_ ;
Y
M329 S_ ;
G84.1 X(U)_ C(H)_ Y(V)_ Z(W)_ R_ P_ F_ ;
2 2 NOTE
R R For address R, specify the distance and direction from the initial point
to the point R. (Incremental commands)
Side Face Synchronized Tapping Cycle
2 2 NOTE
M560 In the conditions below, specify M560 to change the rotation direction
G88 G88.1 of the rotary tool spindle or specify G88.1 (synchronized reverse
tapping cycle) instead of G88.
• 2 2 • With the headstock 2 specification machine, spindle 2 is selected

• • Offset holder is being used
• X • Synchronized tapping cycle is specified in the X-axis direction
1 “M560 M561 1 “M560 Rotary Tool Spindle Reverse Rotation Mode ON, M561
” 219 Rotary Tool Spindle Reverse Rotation Mode OFF” (page 219)
Stops the Rotary Tool Initial Point

Spindle Rotation
Rotary Tool Spindle
Rotation Stop after
Rotary Tool Spindle Dwell
Normal Rotation R
Point R
Rapid Traverse
Stops the Rotary

Rotary Tool Cutting Feed
Tool Spindle
Spindle Reverse
Rotation
Rotation after
Dwell
1.
MC
<MC specifications>
M329 S_ ;
G88 Z(W)_ C(H)_ X(U)_ R_ P_ F_ ;
Y
M329 S_ ;
G88 Z(W)_ C(H)_ Y(V)_ X(U)_ R_ P_ F_ ;
2 2 NOTE
point to the point R. For the side synchronized tapping cycle,
specify the values as radius values. (Incremental commands)
2. F15
F15 format
MC
<MC specifications>
M329 S_ ;
G19 G84.2 Z(W)_ C(H)_ X(U)_ R_ P_ F_ ;
Y
M329 S_ ;
G19 G84.2 Z(W)_ C(H)_ Y(V)_ X(U)_ R_ P_ F_ ;
2 2 NOTE
R R For address R, specify the point R position. For the side
synchronized tapping cycle, specify the values as diameter values.
(Absolute commands)
Example:
Programming using the side face synchronized tapping
cycle
a f 2 mm 20 mm To carry out the synchronized tapping cycle (pitch: 2 mm,
depth: 20 mm) at a to f.
+X
90
30
150 1 30
3
100
+Z C0
6
210 4 330
270
X160.0
(Initial Point)
X130.0 R
(Point R)
X100.0
20
Normal Rotation Reverse Rapid Traverse

Rotation
X60.0
Cutting Feed
a f M329 G88
Dwell at hole bottom Movement by M329 G88 at a to f
O1;
N1;
M45; ......................................................................... C Connecting the spindle as the
C-axis
zero point
G00 T0101;
G97; .......................................................................... Calling the constant rotary tool
spindle speed control
traverse rate.
2 2 NOTE
The rotary tool spindle is stopped.
M329 S300; .............................................................. Calling the synchronized tapping

cycle
G88 X_ R 15.0 F2.0; ................................................ a Execution of synchronized tapping

cycle at a.
2 2 NOTE
1. X X 100 2 20 1. For the X-axis point, specify “X (100
+ 2 (20 + tap engaging length))”.
2. In the movement from the initial
2. R point to the point R, the rotary tool
spindle is stopped.
3. F= mm 3. Feedrate F = Pitch (mm)
C90.0; ...................................................................... b f Execution of synchronized tapping
C150.0; cycle at b to f.
C210.0;
C270.0;
C330.0;
G80; .......................................................................... Cancellation of synchronized
tapping cycle mode.
M01;
:
Side Face Synchronized Reverse Tapping Cycle
Stops the Rotary Tool Spindle Rotation Initial Point
Rotary Tool Spindle Rotation Stop after Dwell

Rotary Tool Spindle Reverse Rotation
R
Point R
Rapid Traverse
Stops the Rotary Tool Spindle
Rotation Rotary Tool Cutting Feed
Spindle Normal
Rotation after
Dwell
MC
<MC specifications>
M329 S_ ;
G88.1 Z(W)_ C(H)_ X(U)_ R_ P_ F_ ;
Y
M329 S_ ;
G88.1 Z(W)_ C(H)_ Y(V)_ X(U)_ R_ P_ F_ ;
2 2 NOTE
R R For address R, specify the distance and direction from the initial point
to the point R. For the side synchronized reverse tapping cycle, specify
the values as radius values. (Incremental commands)
M329 G84 Spindle Synchronized Tapping Cycle (M329 G84)

(Option)
Normal Rotation
Rotation Stop
Rapid Traverse
Reverse Rotation
Cutting Feed
The M329 G84 command is used to execute a tapping

operation at the center of the spindle (rotational center of
workpiece).
Z This tapping cycle allows the Z-axis feed to be always
synchronized with spindle revolution.
M329 S_ ;
G84 X(U)_ Z(W)_ R_ P_ F_ ;
G80;
7 7 CAUTION
When the [EMERGENCY STOP] (Emergency Stop) button
@ or @ (RESET) key has been pressed to stop the machine
during a synchronized tapping operation, carefully move
the axes after checking the workpiece and cutting tool
carefully for damage.
[Workpiece and cutting tool collision, or interference/
Machine damage]
2 2 NOTE
1. 1. During synchronized tapping cycle, feedrate override and spindle
speed override are fixed to 100% because a fixed lead thread
100% cannot be cut if feedrate or spindle speed is changed during
2. 2. The dry run function is invalid during the execution of a
3. 3. Call the synchronized tapping cycle while the spindle is stopped.
4. 4. During synchronized tapping operation, there is a restriction on

spindle speeds.
Example:
M329 G84 Programming using M329 G84 (Synchronized tapping
cycle)
1.25 mm 15 mm To carry out the synchronized tapping cycle (M329 G84)
M329 G84 (pitch: 1.25 mm, depth: 15 mm) at the center of the spindle.
O0001;
N1;
G00 T0101;
G97; .......................................................................... Calling the constant spindle speed
control
X0 Z30.0; .................................................................. X0 Positioning at the center of the
Z30.0 spindle (X0) and initial point (Z30.0)
2 2 NOTE
The spindle rotation is stopped.
M329 S300; .............................................................. Calling the synchronized tapping

cycle
G84 Z _R 15.0 F1.25; ............................................. Executing the face synchronized
M329 G84 tapping cycle (M329 G84) at the
5• F= mm =
spindle center
1.25 mm 5• Feedrate F = Pitch (mm) = 1.25
Z Z (mm)
+ For the Z-axis point, specify “Z
(depth of tap + tap engaging
length)”.
G80; .......................................................................... Canceling the face synchronized
M329 G84 tapping cycle mode (M329 G84)
G00 X200.0 Z100.0 M05;.......................................... Stopping the spindle rotation
(G99;)........................................................................ (Calling the feed per revolution
mode)
M01;
2-4
Boring Cycle
Z X The boring cycle carries out drilling in the Z (end face)/ X

(side face) directions and returns the tool at a cutting federate.
2 2 NOTE
R 2 Return movement from the hole bottom to the point R is executed at
the feedrate twice the specified cutting feedrate.
<End Face Boring Cycle>
R
Point R
Rapid Traverse
Dwell Initial Point
Cutting Feed
1.
MC
<MC specifications>
G85 X(U)_ C(H)_ Z(W)_ R_ P_ F_ ;
Y
G85 X(U)_ C(H)_ Y(V)_ Z(W)_ R_ P_ F_ ;
2 2 NOTE
2. F15
F15 format
MC
<MC specifications>
G17 G89* X(U)_ C(H)_ Z(W)_ R_ P_ F_ ;
Y
G17 G89* X(U)_ C(H)_ Y(V)_ Z(W)_ R_ P_ F_ ;
2 2 NOTE
commands)
2. * P G85 2. * When omitting address P, specify a G85 command instead of
a G89 command.
Example:
Programming the end face boring cycle
a f To carry out the boring cycle at a to f.
90°
2 Rapid Traverse
150° 30°
Cutting Feed
3 1
C0
4 15
210° 6 330°
Z3.0 R Z30.0
Z3.0 (Point R) Z30.0 (Initial Point)
5
P.C.D 150
0.1
a f G85
270°
O1;
N1;
mode
M45; .......................................................................... C 1 C Connecting the spindle or spindle 1
as the C-axis
zero point
G00 T0101;
traverse rate.
G85 Z 15.0 R 27.0 P100 F100; ............................... a Execution of boring cycle at a
• Z 15.0............................................................ Z coordinate value of point Z (hole
bottom)
• R 27.0 ........................................................... R Specifies the distance and direction
from initial point to point R.
• P100 .............................................................. 0.1 Dwell period at hole bottom for 0.1
1 seconds.
time (sec)
60
= 60 (sec)
min 1
=
= 0.06 < 0.1 Rotary tool spindle speed (min 1)
1 = 0.06 < 0.1 (sec)
• F100............................................................... 100 mm/min Specifies the feedrate in ordinary
control 100 mm/min
C90.0; ...................................................................... b f Execution of boring cycle at b to f

C150.0;
C210.0;
C270.0;
C330.0;
G80; .......................................................................... Cancellation of boring cycle.
mode
M01;
:
<Side Face Boring Cycle>
Initial Point
R
Point R
Rapid Traverse
Cutting Feed
Dwell
1.
MC
<MC specifications>
G89 Z(W)_ C(H)_ X(U)_ R_ P_ F_ ;
Y
G89 Z(W)_ C(H)_ Y(V)_ X(U)_ R_ P_ F_ ;
2 2 NOTE
point to the point R. For the side boring cycle, specify the values as
radius values. (Incremental commands)
2. F15
F15 format
MC
<MC specifications>
G19 G89* Z(W)_ C(H)_ X(U)_ R_ P_ F_ ;
Y
G19 G89* Z(W)_ C(H)_ Y(V)_ X(U)_ R_ P_ F_ ;
2 2 NOTE
1. R R 1. For address R, specify the point R position. For the side boring
cycle, specify the values as diameter values. (Absolute
commands)
2. * P G85 2. * When omitting address P, specify a G85 command instead of
a G89 command.
Example:
Programming the side face boring cycle
a f To carry out the boring cycle at a to f.
+X
90°
30
150° 1 30°
3
100
+Z C0
210° 4 330°
270°
X160.0
(Initial Point)
X106.0 R
(Point R)
X100.0
15
Rapid Traverse
X70.0
Cutting Feed
0.1 a f G89
Dwell at hole bottom for 0.1 sec Movement by G89 at a to f
O1;
N1;
mode
M45; .......................................................................... C 1 C Connecting the spindle or spindle 1
as the C-axis
zero point
G00 T0101;
X160.0 Z 30.0 C30.0; .............................................. a Z-30.0, C30.0 Positioning at a (Z 30.0, C30.0)
traverse rate
G89 X70.0 R 27.0 P100 F100; ................................. a Execution of boring cycle at a
• X70.0.............................................................. X coordinate value of point X (hole
bottom)
• R 27.0 ........................................................... R Specifies the distance and direction
from initial point to point R
• P100 .............................................................. 0.1 Dwell period at hole bottom for 0.1

1 seconds.
time (sec)
60
= 60 (sec)
min 1
=
= 0.06 < 0.1 Rotary tool spindle speed (min 1)
1 = 0.06 < 0.1 (sec)
• F100............................................................... 100 mm/min Specifies the feedrate in ordinary
control 100 mm/min
C90.0; ...................................................................... b f Execution of boring cycle at b to f
C150.0;
C210.0;
C270.0;
C330.0;
G80; .......................................................................... Cancellation of boring cycle.
mode
M01;
:
6
6èÕ
CHAPTER 6
CHAPTER 6 EXAMPLE PROGRAMS
1 387
EXAMPLE PROGRAMS
EXAMPLE PROGRAMS 387
1
EXAMPLE PROGRAMS
A variety of machining methods and programming methods are
used when machining workpieces. This section describes
programs which will be used frequently in actual production.
Study these example programs and then create programs
which better suit your actual production requirements. Note
that the programming methods and values shown in the
example programs may not apply to your specific needs.
8 8 WARNING
1. 1. Workpiece materials and shapes vary widely among
machine users. Mori Seiki cannot predict the
workpiece clamping method, spindle speed, feedrate,
depth of cut, and width of cut, etc., that will be required
in each case and it is therefore the users' responsibility
to determine the appropriate settings.
If you have difficulty determining these conditions,
consult the Mori Seiki Service Department.
[Workpiece, cutting tool ejection/Serious injury/
Machine damage]
2. 2. The programs given in this section are not applicable
to all types of machines. Programs must be written
while taking the performance of the machine into
consideration and be executed with due consideration
given to safety.
[Workpiece, cutting tool ejection/Serious injury/
Machine damage]
1-1
Notching
Width between Two Faces (Using Polar Coordinate

Interpolation)
<Part Drawing>
10 37.75
φ55
40
<Tool>
12
End mill
388 EXAMPLE PROGRAMS
<Program>
+C
X 1 0
+X
4
5
X
C
X-Axis Value in Diameter
C-Axis Value in Radius
O1;
M45;
G28 H0;
G00 T0101;
G97 S*** M13;
X80.0 Z10.0;
0 G98 G01 Z 10.0F***;
G12.1 (G112); Polar coordinate interpolation mode
a G42 G01 X60.0F****;
b C20.0 F****;
c X 60.0 F***;
d C 20.0 F****;
e X60.0 F***;
f C0 F****;
0 G40 X80.0;
G13.1 (G113);
G00 Z10.0;
G00 X200.0 Z200.0 M5;
M46;
M30;
G12.1 (G112); ................................................... Polar coordinate interpolation mode

start
end
F***;.................................................................... Actual cutting feedrate
F****; .................................................................. Relatively rapid traverse rate
Y Width between Two Faces (Using Y-Axis)
<Part Drawing>
10 37.75
φ55
40
<Tool>
12
End mill
<Program>
25
18.875
X C0
20
X 20
Y
Y-Axis Value in Radius
40
O0001;
N1;
M69;
G98 G17 M45;
G28 H0;
G00 T0909;
G97 S*** M13;
a G00 X80.0 Y25.0 Z10.0 C0 M08;
Z 10.0;
b G41 G01 X40.0 F***;
c Y 20.0 F***;
d G40 G00 X80.0;
e Y25.0;
C180.0;
f G41 G01 X40.0 F***;
g Y 20.0 F***;
h G40 G00 X80.0;
G18 Z10.0 M09;
X300.0 Y0 Z150.0 M05;
M46;
M30;
Hexagon (Using Polar Coordinate Interpolation)
<Part Drawing>
10 20
34.642
φ55
40
<Tool>
12
End mill
<Program>
+C
3
8 9 2
17.321
4 10 1 0
X +X
30
20
7
5 10
6
X
C
C-Axis Value in Radius
O1;
M45;
G28 H0;
G00 T0101;
G97 S*** M13;
X90.0 Z10.0;
0 G98 G01 Z 10.0F***;
G12.1 (G112); Polar coordinate interpolation mode
a G42 G01 X80.0 F****;
b C17.321 F***;
c X 20.0;
d X 40.0 C0;
e X 20.0 C 17.321;
f X20.0;
g X40.0 C0;
h X20.0 C17.321;
i G40 X90.0 F****;
j C0;
G13.1 (G113);
G00 Z10.0;
G00 X200.0 Z200.0 M5;
M46;
M30;

start
end
F***;.................................................................... Actual cutting feedrate
****;
F .................................................................. Relatively rapid traverse rate
G12.1 G112 C When the polar coordinate interpolation mode is called (G12.1
0 b (G112)), the C-axis is set at 0-degree so that the tool (end mill)
a a is located at the position a instead of the position b. Move
G01 b the tool from the position a to b in the polar coordinate
interpolation mode by specifying a G01 command.
Y Hexagon (Using Y-Axis)
<Part Drawing>
10 20
34.642
φ55
40
<Tool>
12
End mill
<Program>
25
X C0
25
17.321
X
Y
Y-Axis Value in Radius
40
<Main Program>
O0001;
N1;
M69;
G98 G17 M45;
G28 H0;
G00 T0909;
G97 S*** M13;
G00 X80.0 Y25.0 Z10.0 C0 M08;
Z 10.0;
M98 P1001;
G00 C60.0;
M98 P1001;
G00 C120.0;
M98 P1001;
G00 C180.0;
M98 P1001;
G00 C240.0;
M98 P1001;
G00 C300.0;
M98 P1001;
G18 G00 Z10.0 M09;
X300.0 Y0 Z150.0 M05;
M46;
M30;
<Sub-Program>
O0001;
a G00 X80.0 Y25.0 M68;
b G41 G01 X34.642 F***;
c Y 25.0 F***;
d G40 G00 X80.0;
Y25.0 M69;
M99;
1-2 Y
Keyway Milling (Using Y-Axis)
<Part Drawing>
12
12 R6 R6
40
30 30 10
70
<Tool>
End mill
10
<Program>
<Main Program>
O0002;
M69;
G98 G19 M45;
G28 H0;
G00 T0909;
G97 S*** M13;
G00 X50.0 Y0 Z10.0 C0 M08;
Z 16.0;
M98 P1002;
G00 C90.0;
M98 P1002;
G00 C180.0;
M98 P1002;
G00 C270.0;
M98 P1002;
G18 G00 Z10.0 M09;
X300.0 Y0 Z150.0 M05;
M46;
M30;
<Sub-Program>
O1002;
G00 X50.0 Y0 M68;
G01 X42.0 F***;
X30.0 F***;
G41 Y 6.0;
Z 24.0;
G03 Y6.0 R6.0;
G01 Z 16.0;
G03 Y 6.0 R6.0;
G40 G01 Y0;
G00 X50.0;
M69;
M99;
1-3
Chuck-Work Programming
1) 1) Determine which side to be machined and which side to be

chucked.
60 The workpiece should be machined with the 60 mm
diameter section chucked.
10 20 20
C1
C1
φ 44
φ60
φ50
φ30
8 8 WARNING
Before starting cutting, clamp the workpiece securely
with enough chucking allowance. Support the
/ 2 workpiece with the tailstock if necessary. (Tailstock
2) NC 2) Translate the part drawing into the drawing for NC
operation/programming.
On the drawing, enter the dimensions to be used for
programming.
Z −51.0
Z −50.0
Z−40.0 Z −1.0
Z−20.0 Z0
Z1.0
X60.0
X58.0
X50.0
X44.0
X26.0
X30.0
X28.0 X0
3) 3) Study the cutting allowance.

1.5 mm Draw the blank workpiece. The stock on the end face
should be 1.5 mm.
1.5
φ60
4) 4) Determine the tools to be used.
R
Tool Name Nose R Turret Head Sta-
tion No.
Facing and O.D. turning (for rough cutting)

0.8 1
R
Tool Name Nose R Turret Head Sta-
tion No.
Facing and O.D. turning (for finish cutting)

0.8 2
5) 5) Determine the finishing conditions (cutting speeds,

R0 feedrates), and create the part program for finishing. (Tool
nose radius: 0)
Z −51.0
Z −50.0
Z−40.0 Z −1.0
Z−20.0 Z0
Z1.0
X60.0
X58.0
X50.0
X44.0
X26.0
X30.0
X28.0
X0
N2;
G50 S2000; .............................................................. 1 Setting the spindle 1 speed limit for
G00 T0202; .............................................................. 2 Rotating the turret to index No. 2
tool
G96 S180 M03; ........................................................ 180 m/min 1 Starting the spindle 1 in the normal
direction at the cutting speed of
180 m/min
X34.0 Z20.0; ............................................................ The following is for finishing
G01 Z0 F1.0; • • Feedrate for facing:
0.15 mm/rev 0.15 mm/rev
X0 F0.15; • • Feedrate for O.D. cutting:
0.2 mm/rev 0.2 mm/rev
G00 X26.0 Z1.0;
G01 X30.0 Z 1.0 F0.2;
Z 20.0;
X44.0;
X50.0 Z 40.0;
Z 50.0;
X58.0;
X62.0 Z 52.0;
G00 U1.0 Z20.0 M09;
X100.0 Z100.0 M05; ................................................ Moving to a position where the
turret head can be rotated; the
spindle stops.
M30;
6) 6) Determine the finishing allowance and the rough cutting

conditions (depth of cuts, cutting speeds, and feedrates),
and create the part program for rough cutting.
N1;
G50 S2000; .............................................................. 1 Setting the spindle 1 speed limit for
tool
G96 S120 M03; ........................................................ 120 m/min 1 Starting the spindle 1 in the normal
min.
X68.0 Z20.0 M08; ..................................................... The following is for rough cutting
• X10.0 • Feedrate for facing:
0.2 mm/rev, X0 0.2 mm/rev up to X10.0
0.1 mm/rev 0.1 mm/rev up to X0
2 2 NOTE
In the constant cutting speed mode,
the spindle speed increases as the
“G50 S_ ;” cutting tool moves closer to the center.
S However, since the spindle speed is
clamped at the value specified with
“G50 S_ ;”, the cutting speed will be
lowered near the center of the spindle.
Due to this, higher load is applied to
the tool tip causing the insert to be
broken.
Therefore, the feedrate must be
lowered near the spindle center to
• reduce load applied to the tool tip.
0.25 mm/rev • Feedrate for O.D. cutting:
• X 0.25 mm/rev
0.3 mm • Finishing allowance (X):
• Z 0.3 mm (in diameter)
0.1 mm • Finishing allowance (Z):
0.1 mm
G01 Z0.1 F1.0;
X10.0 F0.2;
X0 F0.1;
G00 X52.0 Z1.0;
G01 Z 49.9 F0.25;
G00 U2.0 Z1.0;
X44.0;
G01 Z 19.9;
G00 U2.0 Z1.0;
X36.0;
G01 Z 19.9;
G00 U2.0 Z1.0;
X26.3;
G01 X30.3 Z 1.0;
Z 19.9;
X44.3;
X50.3 Z 39.9;
Z 49.9;
X58.3;
X62.3 Z 51.9;
G00 U1.0 Z20.0;
X100.0 Z100.0; ........................................................ Moving to a position where the
turret head can be rotated
M01;
N1;
X62.3 Z−51.9 G Z−49.9 Z−39.9 G50 S2000;
B X52.0 G00 T0101;
F C A
D X44.0 G96 S120 M03;

Z−19.9 X36.0 X68.0 Z20.0 M08; ................................................. A
X30.3 Z−1.0 G01 Z0.1 F1.0;
E
X10.0 F0.2;
X0 F0.1;
G00 X52.0 Z1.0; ................................................... B
G01 Z 49.9 F0.25;
G00 U2.0 Z1.0;
X44.0; ................................................................... C
G01 Z 19.9;
G00 U2.0 Z1.0;
X36.0; ................................................................... D
G01 Z 19.9;
G00 U2.0 Z1.0;
X26.3; ................................................................... E
G01 X30.3 Z 1.0;
Z 19.9;
X44.3; ................................................................... F
X50.3 Z 39.9;
Z 49.9;
X58.3; ................................................................... G
X62.3 Z 51.9;
G00 U1.0 Z20.0;
X100.0 Z100.0;
M01;
7) 7) Create the part program for other processes such as
grooving and thread cutting.
In this example operation, there are no other processes.
8) 8) Arrange the part programs of individual processes to

complete the program.
O1;
N1; ........................................... N2; ...........................................
Part program for finishing
G50 S2000; G50 S2000;
G00 T0101; G00 T0202;
G96 S120 M03; G96 S180 M03;
X68.0 Z20.0 M08; X34.0 Z20.0;
G01 Z0.1 F1.0; G01 Z0 F1.0;
X10.0 F0.2; X0 F0.15;
X0 F0.1; G00 X26.0 Z1.0;
G00 X52.0 Z1.0; G01 X30.0 Z 1.0 F0.2;
G01 Z 49.9 F0.25; Z 20.0;
G00 U2.0 Z1.0; X44.0;
X44.0; X50.0 Z 40.0;
G01 Z 19.9; Z 50.0;
G00 U2.0 Z1.0; X58.0;
X36.0; X62.0 Z 52.0;
G01 Z 19.9; G00 U1.0 Z20.0 M09;
G00 U2.0 Z1.0; X100.0 Z100.0 M05;
X26.3; M30;
G01 X30.3 Z 1.0;
Z 19.9;
X44.3;
X50.3 Z 39.9;
Z 49.9;
X58.3;
X62.3 Z 51.9;
G00 U1.0 Z20.0;
X100.0 Z100.0;
M01;
2 2 NOTE
R In actual cutting, tool nose radius must be taken into consideration.
R0.8 (Tool nose radius: 0.8 mm)
R The program using the manual tool nose radius offset function is
shown below.
O1;
N1; ........................................... N2; ...........................................
Part program for finishing
G50 S2000; G50 S2000;
G00 T0101; G00 T0202;
G96 S120 M03; G96 S180 M03;
X68.0 Z20.0 M08; X34.0 Z20.0;
G01 Z0.1 F1.0; G01 Z0 F1.0;
X10.0 F0.2; X 1.6 F0.15;
X 1.6 F0.1; G00 X25.06 Z1.0;
G00 X52.0 Z1.0; G01 X30.0 Z 1.47 F0.2;
G01 Z 49.9 F0.25; Z 20.0;
G00 U2.0 Z1.0; X43.779;
X44.0; X50.0 Z 40.740;
G01 Z 19.9; Z 50.0;
G00 U2.0 Z1.0; X57.06;
X36.0; X62.0 Z 52.47;
G01 Z 19.9; G00 U1.0 Z20.0 N09;
G00 U2.0 Z1.0; X100.0 Z100.0 M05;
X26.3; M30;
G01 X30.3 Z 1.0;
Z 19.9;
X44.3;
X50.3 Z 39.9;
Z 49.9;
X58.3;
X62.3 Z 51.9;
G00 U1.0 Z20.0;
X100.0 Z100.0;
M01;
1-4 2
1 1 2 In this section, a machining program to perform the first and

second processes with only spindle 1 is explained.
<Blank Workpiece Drawing> <Part Drawing>

20
C1 C1
C1
C1 C1
75
25
70
30
50
43 40

S45C
75
O.D.
mm 25
43
Length
1 1st Process

chucked.
Soft Jaw
The right side in the part drawing should be chucked to

machine the left side.
8 8 WARNING
Before starting spindle rotation, check that the
/ 2 workpiece is securely clamped. Or, if performing
center-work, check that the tailstock spindle center
securely supports the workpiece. (Tailstock
If the workpiece is not securely clamped or supported,
it will fly out of the chuck when the spindle is rotated,
causing serious injuries or damage to the machine.
Z−20.0 Z−1.0
X70.0
X68.0
X50.0
X30.0
Z−1.0
X32.0
X0
Z0

programming.
43
φ 75
2.5
1.5
1.5
2.5
φ 25
1.5 mm Draw the material specifications. End face should be 1.5

2.5 mm mm and outside/inside diameters 2.5 mm each.
R0.8 Rough cutting - O.D. and facing (Tool nose radius: 0.8 mm)
1 Turret head station No.: 1
R0.8 Rough cutting and finishing - I.D. (tool nose radius: 0.8 mm)
R0.8 Finishing - O.D. and facing (Tool nose radius: 0.8 mm)

R0.8 feedrates), and create the part program for finishing. (Tool
nose radius: 0.8 mm)
Z−20.0 Z−1.0
X70.0
X68.0
X50.0
X30.0
Z−1.0
X32.0
X0
Z0
N3;
G50 S2500;............................................................... 1 Setting the spindle 1 speed limit for
G00 T0303; .............................................................. 3 Selecting the No. 3 tool
G96 S180 M03; ......................................................... 180 m/min 1 Starting the spindle or spindle 1 in
speed of 180 m/min
X74.0 Z20.0; ............................................................ R Program for finishing using the
G01 Z0 F1.0; manual tool nose radius offset
X28.0 F0.2; • function
G00 X65.06 Z1.0; 0.2 mm/rev • Feedrate for facing:
G01 X70.0 Z 1.47; • 0.2 mm/rev
Z 21.0 F0.25; 0.25 mm/rev • Feedrate for O.D. cutting:
G00 U1.0 Z20.0 M09; 0.25 mm/rev
X100.0 Z100.0 M05; ................................................. Moving to a position where the
spindle stops.
M30;
R0.8 conditions (depth of cuts, cutting speeds, and feedrates),
and create the part program for rough cutting. (Tool nose
radius: 0.8 mm)
N1;
tool
is 120 m/min.
X84.0 Z20.0 M08; .................................................... Program for rough cutting
G01 Z0.1 F1.0; • • Feedrate for facing:
X20.0 F0.25; 0.2 mm/rev 0.2 mm/rev
G00 X66.3 Z1.0; • • Feedrate for O.D. cutting:
G01 X70.3 Z 1.0; 0.3 mm/rev 0.3 mm/rev
Z 22.0 F0.3;
G00 U1.0 Z20.0;
X100.0 Z100.0; ......................................................... Moving to a position where the

M01;
N2;
G00 T0202; ............................................................... 2 Rotating the turret to index No. 2
tool
G97 S1000 M03;....................................................... 1000 min 1 94 m/min Starting the spindle or spindle 1 in
1 the normal direction at 1000 min 1
(cutting speed: 94 m/min)
X29.7 Z20.0; ............................................................ I.D. rough cutting program and
G01 Z2.0 F1.0; R finish chamfering program using the
Z 42.0 F0.2; manual tool nose radius offset
G00 U 1.0 Z1.0; • 0.2 mm/rev function
X34.94; • Feedrate: 0.2 mm/rev
G01 X29.0 Z 1.97;
G00 Z20.0;
M01;
O1; N3;
N1; G50 S2500;
G50 S2000; G00 T0303;
G00 T0101; G96 S180 M03;
G96 S120 M03; X74.0 Z20.0;
X84.0 Z20.0 M08; G01 Z0 F1.0;
G01 Z0.1 F1.0; X28.0 F0.2;
X20.0 F0.25; G00 X65.06 Z1.0;
G00 X66.3 Z1.0; G01 X70.0 Z 1.47;
G01 X70.3 Z 1.0; Z 21.0 F0.25;
Z 22.0 F0.3; G00 U1.0 Z20.0 M09;
G00 U1.0 Z20.0; X100.0 Z100.0 M05;
X100.0 Z100.0; M30;
M01;
N2;
G00 T0202;
G97 S1000 M03;
X29.7 Z20.0;
G01 Z2.0 F1.0;
Z 42.0 F0.2;
G00 U 1.0 Z1.0;
X34.94;
G01 X29.0 Z 1.97;
G00 Z20.0;
X100.0 Z100.0;
M01;
2 2nd Process

chucked.
Soft Jaw
The left side in the part drawing should be chucked to

machine the right side.
1 2 Since the left side in the part drawing was machined in the
1st process, the right side is machined in the 2nd process.
8 8 WARNING
/ 2 workpiece is securely clamped. Or, if performing
center-work, check that the tailstock spindle center
securely supports the workpiece. (Tailstock
X70.0Z−21.0
Z −40.0 Z−20.0
X68.0 Z−20.0
X50.0 Z−1.0
X70.0
X48.0 Z0
X50.0 Z−20.0
X50.0
X30.0
X32.0 Z0
X30.0 Z−1.0
X0 Z0

programming.
12.5
1.5
0.15
12.5 mm 0.15 mm should be 1.5 mm, stock on O.D. 12.5 mm, and that on I.D.
0.15 mm.
2 2 NOTE
0.15 mm 2 The stock of 0.15 mm on I.D. is the finishing allowance.
R0.8 Finishing - I.D. (Tool nose radius: 0.8 mm)


R0.8 federates), and create the part program for finishing. (Tool
X70.0Z−21.0
Z −40.0 Z−20.0
X68.0 Z−20.0
X50.0 Z−1.0
X70.0
X48.0 Z0
X50.0 Z−20.0
X50.0
X30.0
X32.0 Z0
X30.0 Z−1.0
X0 Z0
N2;
tool
G97 S1500 M03; ...................................................... 1500 min 1 165 m/min Starting the spindle or spindle 1 in
X34.94 Z20.0;............................................................ R Program for finishing using the
G01 Z1.0 F1.0; manual tool nose radius offset
X30.0 Z 1.47 F0.15; • 0.15 mm/rev function
Z 41.0; • Feedrate for I.D. cutting: 0.15
G00 U 1.0 Z20.0; mm/rev
M01;
N3;
G00 T0303; ............................................................... 3 Selecting the No. 3 tool
speed of 180 m/min
G00 X45.06 Z1.0; 0.2 mm/rev • Feedrate for facing: 0.2 mm/rev
G01 X50.0 Z 1.47; • • Feedrate for O.D. cutting: 0.25
Z 20.0 F0.25; 0.25 mm/rev mm/rev
X67.06;
X72.0 Z 22.47 F0.2;
G00 U1.0 Z20.0 M09;
spindle stops.
M30;
radius: 0.8 mm)
N1;
G50 S2000;............................................................... 1 Setting the spindle speed limit for
tool
is 120 m/min.
X84.0 Z20.0 M08; .................................................... R Program for finishing using the
G01 Z0.1 F1.0; manual tool nose radius offset
G00 X66.0 Z1.0; 0.25 mm/rev • Feedrate for facing: 0.25 mm/rev
G01 Z 19.9 F0.3; • • Feedrate for O.D. cutting: 0.3 mm/
G00 U2.0 Z1.0; 0.3 mm/rev rev
X57.0;
G01 Z 19.9;
G00 U2.0 Z1.0;
X46.3;
G01 X50.3 Z 1.0;
Z 19.9;
X68.3;
X72.3 Z 21.9;
G00 U1.0 Z20.0;
M01;

O2; N2;
N1; G00 T0202;
G50 S2000; G97 S1500 M03;
G00 T0101; X34.94 Z20.0;
G96 S120 M03; G01 Z1.0 F1.0;
X84.0 Z20.0 M08; X30.0 Z 1.47 F0.15;
G01 Z0.1 F1.0; Z 41.0;
X20.0 F0.25; G00 U1.0 Z20.0;
G00 X66.0 Z1.0; X100.0 Z100.0;
G01 Z 19.9 F0.3; M01;
G00 U2.0 Z1.0;
X57.0; N3;
G01 Z 19.9; G50 S2500;
G00 U2.0 Z1.0; G00 T0303;
X46.3; G96 S180 M03;
G01 X50.3 Z 1.0; X54.0 Z20.0;
Z 19.9; G01 Z0 F1.0;
X68.3; X28.0 F0.2;
X72.3 Z 21.9; G00 X45.06 Z1.0;
G00 U1.0 Z20.0; G01 X50.0 Z 1.47;
X100.0 Z100.0; Z 20.0 F0.25;
M01; X67.06;
X72.0 Z 22.47 F0.2;
G00 U1.0 Z20.0 M09;
X100.0 Z100.0 M05;
M30;
1-5 3
1 1 In this section, a series of machining programs is explained;

2 2 machining the first process with spindle 1, transferring of the
workpiece, then machining the second process with spindle 2.
2 2 NOTE
1. 2 1. The sample programs explained in this section can be used with
headstock 2 specifications only.
2. 1 2 2. In the sample programs explained in this section, right-hand

cutting tools are used both in the first process and the second
process.
1 2
Spindle 1 Spindle 2
Soft Jaw Soft Jaw
Transfer
G54 G55
1 2
Workpiece Zero Point in the Workpiece Zero Point in the
First Process Second Process
<Blank Workpiece Drawing> <Part Drawing>

20
C1 C1
C1
C1 C1
75
25
70
30
50
43 40

S45C
75
O.D.
mm 25
43
Length
1 1 1st Process (Spindle 1)

chucked.
Soft Jaw

8 8 WARNING
workpiece is securely clamped.
Z−20.0 Z−1.0
X70.0
X68.0
X50.0
X30.0
Z−1.0
X32.0
X0
Z0

programming.
43
φ 75
2.5
1.5
1.5
2.5
φ 25
1.5 mm Draw the material specifications. End face should be 1.5

2.5 mm mm and outside/inside diameters 2.5 mm each.
R0.8 Rough cutting and finishing - I.D. (tool nose radius: 0.8 mm)

R0.8 feedrates), and create the part program for finishing. (Tool
Z−20.0 Z−1.0
X70.0
X68.0
X50.0
X30.0
Z−1.0
X32.0
X0
Z0
G54 X0 Z0
N3;
G54;
G00 T0303; .............................................................. 3 Selecting the No. 3 tool
speed of 180 m/min
G00 X65.06 Z1.0; 0.2 mm/rev • Feedrate for facing:
G01 X70.0 Z 1.47; • 0.2 mm/rev
Z 21.0 F0.25; 0.25 mm/rev • Feedrate for O.D. cutting:
G00 U1.0 Z20.0 M09; 0.25 mm/rev
spindle stops.
M01;

radius: 0.8 mm)
N1;
G54;
tool
G96 S120 M03;......................................................... 120 m/min 1 Starting the spindle or spindle 1 in
is 120 m/min.
X84.0 Z20.0 M08; .................................................... Program for rough cutting
G01 Z0.1 F1.0; • • Feedrate for facing:
X20.0 F0.25; 0.2 mm/rev 0.2 mm/rev
G00 X66.3 Z1.0; • • Feedrate for O.D. cutting:
G01 X70.3 Z 1.0; 0.3 mm/rev 0.3 mm/rev
Z 22.0 F0.3;
G00 U1.0 Z20.0;
M01;
N2;
G54;
tool
G97 S1000 M03;....................................................... 1000 min 1 94 m/min Starting the spindle or spindle 1 in
X29.7 Z20.0; ............................................................ I.D. rough cutting program and
G01 Z2.0 F1.0; R finish chamfering program using the
Z 42.0 F0.2; manual tool nose radius offset
G00 U 1.0 Z1.0; • 0.2 mm/rev function
X34.94; • Feedrate: 0.2 mm/rev
G01 X29.0 Z 1.97;
G00 Z20.0;
M01;
8) 1 8) Arrange the part programs in the first process to complete

the program.
O1;
N1;
G54;
G50 S2000;
G00 T0101;
G96 S120 M03;
X84.0 Z20.0 M08;
G01 Z0.1 F1.0;
X20.0 F0.25;
G00 X66.3 Z1.0;
G01 X70.3 Z 1.0;
Z 22.0 F0.3;
G00 U1.0 Z20.0;
X100.0 Z100.0;
M01;
N2;
G54;
G00 T0202;
G97 S1000 M03;
X29.7 Z20.0;
G01 Z2.0 F1.0;
Z 42.0 F0.2;
G00 U 1.0 Z1.0;
X34.94;
G01 X29.0 Z 1.97;
G00 Z20.0;
X100.0 Z100.0;
M01;
N3;
G54;
G50 S2500;
G00 T0303;
G96 S180 M03;
X74.0 Z20.0;
G01 Z0 F1.0;
X28.0 F0.2;
G00 X65.06 Z1.0;
G01 X70.0 Z 1.47;
Z 21.0 F0.25;
G00 U1.0 Z20.0 M09;
X100.0 Z100.0 M05;
M01;
Transfer
N11;
G28 U0 W0;
G54;
G00 M05;
M211;
M34 (M35);
M51;
M251;
G00 B100.0;
G98 G01 B10.0 F1000;
G38 B0 K5.0 F50.0 Q0.1;
5 5The example of workpiece transfer in this section uses the work

coordinate system.
1 1 For details of using the work coordinate system and using the
“ 2 B ” 436 machine coordinate system, refer to “Moving Headstock 2
(B-Axis)” (page 436)
M59;
M259;
M210;
G04 U1.0;
M11;
G04 U1.0;
G00 B100.0;
M36;
G330;
M01;
2 2 2nd Process (Spindle 2)

chucked.
Soft Jaw

1 2 Since the right side in the part drawing was machined in the
1st process, the left side is machined in the 2nd process.
8 8 WARNING
workpiece is securely clamped.

X70.0 Z21.0
Z20.0 Z40.0
X68.0 Z20.0
X50.0 Z1.0
X70.0
X48.0 Z0
X50.0 Z20.0
X50.0
X30.0
X32.0 Z0 X30.0 Z1.0
G55 X0 Z0

programming.
12.5
1.5
0.15
12.5 mm 0.15 mm should be 1.5 mm, stock on O.D. 12.5 mm, and that on I.D.
0.15 mm.
2 2 NOTE
0.15 mm 2 The stock of 0.15 mm on I.D. is the finishing allowance.
R0.8 Finishing - I.D. (Tool nose radius: 0.8 mm)

5 Turret head station No.:5

R0.8 federates), and create the part program for finishing. (Tool
X70.0 Z21.0
Z20.0 Z40.0
X68.0 Z20.0
X50.0 Z1.0
X70.0
X48.0 Z0
X50.0 Z20.0
X50.0
X30.0
X32.0 Z0 X30.0 Z1.0
G55 X0 Z0
N22;
G55;
tool
G97 S1500 M203; .................................................... 1500 min 1 165 m/min Starting the spindle or spindle 1 in
X34.94 Z 20.0;.......................................................... R Program for finishing using the
G01 Z 1.0 F1.0; manual tool nose radius offset
X30.0 Z1.47 F0.15; • 0.15 mm/rev function
Z41.0; • Feedrate for I.D. cutting: 0.15
G00 U 1.0 Z 20.0; mm/rev
X100.0 Z 100.0; ....................................................... Moving to a position where the
M01;
N23;
G55;
G96 S180 M203;....................................................... 180 m/min 1 Starting the spindle or spindle 1 in
speed of 180 m/min
X54.0 Z 20.0; .......................................................... R Program for finishing using the
G00 X45.06 Z 1.0; 0.2 mm/rev • Feedrate for facing: 0.2 mm/rev
G01 X50.0 Z1.47; • • Feedrate for O.D. cutting: 0.25
Z20.0 F0.25; 0.25 mm/rev mm/rev
X67.06;
X72.0 Z22.47 F0.2;
G00 U1.0 Z 20.0 M09;
X100.0 Z 100.0 M05; ............................................... Moving to a position where the
spindle stops.
M30;
radius: 0.8 mm)
N21;
G55;

tool
G96 S120 M203;....................................................... 120 m/min 1 Starting the spindle or spindle 1 in
is 120 m/min.
X84.0 Z 20.0 M08; .................................................. R Program for finishing using the
G01 Z 0.1 F1.0; manual tool nose radius offset
G00 X66.0 Z 1.0; 0.25 mm/rev • Feedrate for facing: 0.25 mm/rev
G01 Z19.9 F0.3; • • Feedrate for O.D. cutting: 0.3 mm/
G00 U2.0 Z 1.0; 0.3 mm/rev rev
X57.0;
G01 Z19.9;
G00 U2.0 Z 1.0;
X46.3;
G01 X50.3 Z1.0;
Z19.9;
X68.3;
X72.3 Z21.9;
G00 U1.0 Z 20.0;
X100.0 Z 100.0; ....................................................... Moving to a position where the
M01;
N21; N22;
G55; G55;
G50 S2000; G00 T0521;
G00 T0420; G97 S1500 M203;
G96 S120 M203; X34.94 Z 20.0;
X84.0 Z 20.0 M08; G01 Z 1.0 F1.0;
G01 Z 0.1 F1.0; X30.0 Z1.47 F0.15;
X20.0 F0.25; Z41.0;
G00 X66.0 Z 1.0; G00 U1.0 Z 20.0;
G01 Z19.9 F0.3; X100.0 Z 100.0;
G00 U2.0 Z 1.0; M01;
X57.0;
G01 Z19.9; N23;
G00 U2.0 Z 1.0; G55;
X46.3; G50 S2500;
G01 X50.3 Z1.0; G00 T0622;
Z19.9; G96 S180 M203;
X68.3; X54.0 Z 20.0;
X72.3 Z21.9; G01 Z0 F1.0;
G00 U1.0 Z 20.0; X28.0 F0.2;
X100.0 Z 100.0; G00 X45.06 Z 1.0;
M01; G01 X50.0 Z1.47;
Z20.0 F0.25;
X67.06;
X72.0 Z22.47 F0.2;
G00 U1.0 Z 20.0 M09;
X100.0 Z 100.0 M05;
G28 U0;
M30;
1-6
Various Part Programs
Grooving
11 12
4
2 1
8 5
6 9
7 10
C1 3 4 C1
4
20
φ 40
φ 50
O1;
N1;
G97 S600 M03;
a X54.0 Z20.0 M08;
b G01 Z 20.0 F1.0;
c X40.0 F0.1;
d G04 U0.2; ................................................................. 0.2 Dwell: 0.2 sec
e G00 X52.0;
f W 2.0;
g G01 X48.0 Z 20.0;
h G00 X52.0;
i W2.0;
j G01 X48.0 Z 20.0;
k G00 X60.0;
l Z20.0;
X100.0 Z100.0 M05;
M30;
2 2 NOTE
1. 1 1. To finish the bottom of the groove in flat, it is necessary to suspend
axis movement for a period to allow the spindle to rotate
approximately one turn.
In this example,
60 60 sec
0.1 t= = 0.1 sec
min 1
600 min 1
0.1 1 By setting 0.1 second for a dwell period, the spindle can rotate one
turn.
2. R “0” 2. The program is created assuming that tool nose R is “0”.
I.D. Deep Hole Drilling
O1
N1;
G50 S500;
G00 T0101;
G96 S80 M03;
X55.0 Z20.0 M08;
G01 Z1.0 F3.0;
Z 50.0 F0.3;
G00 U 2.0 Z1.0;
X65.0;
G01 Z 50.0; The tool is moved to the position where the tool nose
G00 U 2.0 Z1.0; can be easily checked, or where the chips can be
X74.8; discharged without being interrupted.
G01 Z 50.0;
G00 U 2.0 Z200.0;
X150.0;
M00;
G00 X55.0 Z10.0 M03; Rough cutting is temporarily stopped to check the
Z 42.0 M08; tool nose and to discharge the chips.
G01 Z 90.0 F0.3;
G00 U 2.0 Z 42.0;
X65.0; 1
G01 Z 90.0;
: Again specify the commands for spindle 1 rotation
G00 U 2.0 Z20.0 M09; and for coolant discharge.
X200.0 Z50.0;
M00;
:
After the chips have been discharged, the finishing
allowance is checked.
Finishing
1 Milling 1 (Drilling on End Face)
2 2 NOTE
MC Y The following program can be used only by the MC type machines or
Y-axis specification machines.
<Part Drawing>
90
150 C A 30
P.C.D. 150
121
200
C0
D
210 F 330
E
P.C.D 150
40 6 M8 P1.25 15
6.8 25 270
6 Equal Parts, M8 P1.25, Depth 15
Prepared Hole 6.8 Drill, Depth 25
<Cutting Condition>
T Spindle Speed Feedrate

Process T Code Tool Name Tool Offset Number
(min 1) (mm/min)
N1 T1001 2000 150 1
Center drill
N2 T1002 6.8 1300 200 2
6.8 mm dia. drill
N3 T1003 M8 P1.25 400 500 3
M8 P1.25 Tap
2 2 NOTE
M8 P1.25 5 mm M8 P1.25 tap engaging length is 5 mm.
O1; ........................................................................... Program number

N1 (CENTER DRILL); .............................................. Drilling with center drilling
G98; ......................................................................... Calling the feed per minute mode
M45; ......................................................................... 1 C Connecting spindle 1 as the C-axis
zero point
tool
G97 S2000 M13; ...................................................... 2000 min 1 Starting the rotary tool spindle in the
X150.0 Z30.0 C30.0; ................................................ Positioning at the hole machining
start position at a rapid traverse rate
G83 H60.0 Z 5.0 R 27.0 F150 K6; ......................... Executing the face spot drilling cycle
G83 (G83)
• H60.0 • H60.0
DBDCDDDED Incremental value:
FDA Present position D B D C D D
• Z 5.0 DEDFDA
• Z 5.0
• R 27.0 Z coordinate value of the point Z
R (hole bottom)
• R 27.0
• F150 Distance and direction from the
initial point to the point R
150 mm/min
• F150
• K6
6
• K6
Number of repetitions: 6 times
G80; ......................................................................... Canceling hole machining canned
cycle
G99; ......................................................................... Calling the feed per revolution mode
M01; ......................................................................... Optional stop
N2 (6.8 DRILL); ........................................................ 6.8 Drilling with 6.8 mm dia. drill

G98; ......................................................................... Calling the feed per minute mode
zero point
tool
G97 S1300 M13; ...................................................... 1300 min 1 Starting the rotary tool spindle in the
G83 H60.0 Z 30.0 R 27.0 F200 K6; ....................... Executing the face spot drilling cycle
G83 (G83)
• H60.0 • H60.0
DBDCDDDED Incremental value:
FDA Present position D B D C D D
• Z 30.0 DEDFDA
• Z 30.0
• R 27.0 Z coordinate value of the point Z
R (hole bottom)
• R 27.0
• F200 Distance and direction from the
initial point to the point R
200 mm/min
• F200
• K6
6
• K6
Number of repetitions: 6 times
G80; ......................................................................... Canceling hole machining canned
cycle
M01; ......................................................................... Optional stop
N3 (M8 P1.25 TAP); .............................................. M8 P1.25 Tapping with M8 P1.25 tap


zero point
G97; ......................................................................... Calling the constant spindle speed
control
M329 S400; .............................................................. Calling a synchronized tapping
cycle
G84 Z 20.0 R 25.0 F1.25; ...................................... A Executing the face synchronized
M329 G84 tapping cycle (M329 G84) at point A
• Z 20.0 • Z 20.0
Z coordinate value of the point Z
Z= + (hole bottom)
Z = (depth of tap + tap engaging
= (15 + 5) = 20 mm length)
• R 25.0 = (15 + 5) = 20 mm
Z30.0 R • R 25.0
Z5.0 Distance and direction from the
initial point (Z30.0) to point R
• F1.25
(Z5.0)
1.25 mm
• F1.25
Pitch 1.25 mm
C90.0; ...................................................................... B F Executing the face synchronized
M329 G84 tapping cycle (M329 G84) at points
B to F
C150.0;
C210.0;
C270.0;
C330.0;
G80; ......................................................................... Canceling the face synchronized
M329 G84 tapping cycle (M329 G84)
M30; ......................................................................... Program end
2 C Milling 2 (Machining with the Zero Point of the C-Axis in

the Work Coordinate System Shifted)
C When machining an irregularly shaped, creating programs is

easier if the zero point of the C-axis in the work coordinate
system is shifted in advance. The shift amount is set at the
C work coordinate system number to be used on the WORK
OFFSET screen. Set the work coordinate system zero point of
the C-axis by using the following procedure.
8 8 WARNING
Before starting axis feed operation, ensure that no one is
near the moving parts, and that you are moving the axis in
the correct direction.
[Entanglement/Component interference]
1) 1) Prepare.
a) a) Set the door interlock key-switch in the [NORMAL]
position.
b) b) Close the door.
c) i c) Turn the operation selection key-switch to i [ON].
d) j d) Press the mode selection button j [ZRN] (Zero
Return).
e) e) Set the rapid traverse rate to be used by rapid traverse

rate override switch.
2 2 NOTE
100% For manual operation, the maximum allowable override value
50% is 50%. Therefore, if the switch is set to “100%”, the override
value is 50%.
f) C F C1 G C2 f) Press the C-axis selection button F [C1] or G [C2].
g) C g) Press and hold down the axis feed button for the C-axis.
50% [The axis approaches the machine zero point at the
‘C1’ ‘C2’ rapid feed rate (fixed at 50%) and stops.]
[The indicator lamp ‘C1’ or ‘C2’ is illuminated.]
h) h) Mount the sample workpiece.
2) X Z 2) Move the X- and Z-axes to bring the tool close to the
workpiece at any position that hasn't been drilled yet.
5 C 5The tool position is the guide for shifting the C-axis.

a) C 100 a) Press the axis feed amount selection button C [ 100].
b) Z b) Select the Z-axis with the axis selection switch.
c) c) Move the tool using the manual pulse generator.
d) X d) Move the X-axis in the same way.
Reference Hole
3) C ‘ ’ 3) Shift the C-axis and set the shift amount on the ‘WORK
OFFSET’ screen.
a) ‘ ’ a) Display the ‘WORK OFFSET’ screen.
b) C 100 b) Press the axis feed amount selection button C [ 100].
c) C c) Select the C-axis with the axis selection switch.
d) C d) Rotate the C-axis using the manual pulse generator to
shift the reference hole to the position of the tool.
Reference Hole
e) “C” e) Move the cursor to “C” in the work coordinate system to

be used.
2 2 NOTE
‘ ’ Do not use ‘COMMON’.
f) “C0” f) Input “C0”.
g) g) Press the [MEASURE] soft-key.
h) h) Press the [EXECUTE] soft-key.
“C” [The shift amount ( ) is set for “C” in the work
coordinate system to be used.]
Example:
2 2 NOTE
G54 This example uses the work coordinate system G54.
O1;
N1;
G98; .......................................................................... Calling the feed per minute mode
M45; .......................................................................... 1 C Connecting spindle 1 as the C-axis
G54; .......................................................................... Work coordinate system selection
zero point
G50 S2000;............................................................... 2000 min 1 Spindle speed limit setting of 2000
min 1
G00 X100.0 Z30.0 C0; .............................................. Positioning at the hole machining
G83 Z_ R_ F_; .......................................................... Starts the hole machining canned
cycle
C120.0; ..................................................................... C120.0 Executes the hole machining
canned cycle at C120.0
C240.0; ..................................................................... C240.0 Executes the hole machining
canned cycle at C240.0
G80; .......................................................................... Cancels a hole machining canned
cycle
mode
M30; .......................................................................... Program end
3 Milling 3
2 2 NOTE
Y The following program can be used only by the Y-axis specification
machines.
<Part Drawing>
4 8
8 4 Through-Hole
40
8
13.229 13.229
C3
C1
20 20
50
30
60
100
S45C Material AISI 1045 (Carbon steel)
mm 50 Dimensions O.D. 50
(mm)
101 Length 101
<Chucking Diagram>
30
5 30 mm 5The chucking depth is 30 mm.

O1;
G28 V0;
N1; ........................................................................... Face and O.D. rough cutting
G99 M46;
G50 S2000;
G00 T0101;
G96 S120 M03;
G00 X55.0 Z10.0 M08;
G01 Z0.1 F1.0;
X10.0 F0.2;
X 1.6 F0.1;
G00 X45.0 W1.0;
G01 Z 59.9 F0.25;
G00 U2.0 Z1.0;
X40.3;
G01 Z 3.468;
G00 U2.0 Z1.0;
X31.364;
G01 X40.3 Z 3.468;
Z 59.9;
X47.832;
U4.0 W 2.0;
G00 Z10.0;
G53 X0 Z0 M05;
M01;
N2; ........................................................................... Face and O.D. finishing

G99 M46;
G50 S2000;
G00 T0202;
G96 S200 M03;
X50.0 Z10.0 M08;
G01 Z0 F1.0;
X 0.8 F0.12;
G00 X31.532 W1.0;
G01 X40.0 Z 3.234 F0.15;
Z 60.0;
X47.532;
U4.0 W 2.0;
G00 Z10.0;
G53 X0 Z0 M05;
M01;
N3; ........................................................................... 13 13 dia. end milling (shoulder cutting)

G98 M45;
G28 U0 W0 H0;
G00 T0303;
C0;
G97 S500 M13;
X50.0 Z20.0 M08;
Y11.0;
M98 P1000;
M69;
C180.0;
M68;
M98 P1000;
G99 G00 X50.0 Z20.0 M69;
G28 V0;
G28 U0 W0;
M05;
M01;
N4; ........................................................................... Center drilling

G98 M45;
G28 U0 W0 H0;
G00 T0404;
C0;
M68;
G97 S1500 M13;
X50.0 Z20.0 M08;
G01 X40.0 Z 20.0 F750;
G87 X24.0 Y8.0 R 7.0 F75;
W 20.0;
Y 8.0;
W20.0;
G80;
G99 G00 X50.0 Z20.0 M69;
X200.0 Z100.0 M05;
G28 V0;
G28 U0 W0;
M05;
M01;
N5; ........................................................................... 8 8 dia. drilling

G98 M45;
G28 U0 W0 H0;
G00 T0505;
C0;
M68;
G97 S1200 M13;
X50.0 Z20.0 M08;
G01 X40.0 Z 20.0 F600;
G87 X 38.0 Y8.0 R 7.0 Q4000 F144;
W 20.0 Q4000;
Y 8.0 Q4000;
W20.0 Q4000;
G99 G00 X50.0 Z20.0 M09;
G28 V0;
G28 U0 W0;
M05;
G00 T0100 M69;
O1000; ..................................................................... 13 Sub-program (13 dia. end milling)

G01 X34.0 Z10.0 F500;
Z 53.5 F75;
Y0;
Z10.0;
Y 11.0;
Z 53.5;
Y20.0;
G00 X35.0 Z10.0;
Y9.0;
G01 X30.0 F500;
Z 53.5 F75;
Y 3.0;
Z10.0;
Y 15.0;
Z 53.5;
Y20.0;
G00 X50.0 Z20.0;
Y11.0;
M99;
4 Milling 4
(N1) Rough Face Cutting (N1)

M08; ......................................................................... Coolant supply
M69; .......................................................................... Spindle brake unclamp
G99 G18 M46; .......................................................... ZX C The feed per revolution mode.
Selecting the Z-X plane. Canceling
the C-Axis connection.
2000 min 1 automatic operation at 2000 min 1.
G54; .......................................................................... 1 Selecting work coordinate system 1.
tool
G96 S130 M03; ........................................................ 130 m/min Regulating the feedrate at 130 m/
min.
G00 X81.0 Z3.0; ....................................................... a Positioning at a at a rapid traverse
rate.
Z0.1; ......................................................................... b Moving to b for rough face cutting.
G01 X31.4 F0.25; ..................................................... 0.25 mm/rev c Executing rough face cutting up to
c at a feedrate of 0.25 mm/rev.
G00 X81.0 Z3.0; ....................................................... a Returning to a
X406.0 Z250.0; ........................................................ Retracting the tool from the
workpiece.
M01; .......................................................................... Optional stop
(N2) Face Finishing (N2)
< N1 > < N3 > 1
1
2
2
11 5
3 4
12
10
6
3
9 7 Rapid Traverse
8
Cutting Feed
C (N3) C End Milling (N3)
G00 M05; ................................................................. The rotary tool spindle stops.

M08;
M69;
G98 M45; .................................................................. C The feed per minute mode.
Connecting the C-axis.
zero point
G54;
G00 T1111;................................................................ 11 Rotating the turret to index No. 11
tool.
G97 S200 M13;......................................................... 200 min 1 The spindle rotates in the normal
direction at the RPM of 200 min 1
S318; ........................................................................ 318 min 1 The spindle rotates in the normal
direction at the RPM of 318 min 1
G00 Z5.0; ................................................................. a Moving to a

X145.184; ................................................................. b Moving to b
G00 C0; .................................................................... c Moving to c
G112; ....................................................................... Calling the polar coordinate
interpolation mode
G01 X118.2 C42.152 F1000; ................................... d Moving to d at cutting feedrate
Z 14.9 F45; .............................................................. e Moving to e
G03 X80.2 C23.152 R19.0; ...................................... 19 mm Cutting 19 mm dia. arc during
approach (contact circle)
G01 C 23.152; ......................................................... e j Cutting from e to j
X0 C 46.303;
X 80.2 C 23.152;
C23.152;
X0 C46.303;
X80.2 C23.152;
G03 X132.109 C30.106 R19.0; ................................ 19 mm Cutting 19 mm dia. arc during

retract (contact circle)
G01 Z5.0 F1000; ...................................................... k Moving to k at cutting feedrate
G113; ....................................................................... Canceling polar coordinate
interpolation mode
G00 X145.184; ......................................................... Retracting the tool from the
workpiece.
M01;
C (N4) C End Milling (N4)
C (N5) C Center Drilling (N5)
C (N6) C Drilling (N6)
M08;
M69;
G98 M45;
G28 H0;
G54;
tool.
G97 S200 M13;
S1170;
G00 Z5.0;
X81.0;
X55.0 C30.0;
G83 Z 14.443 Q6800 R 2.0 P500 F187; ................ Executing end face deep hole
aDbDcDdDeDf drilling cycle in order of
aDbDcDdDeDf
C90.0 Q6800;
C150.0 Q6800;
C210.0 Q6800;
C270.0 Q6800;
C330.0 Q6800;
G00 Z5; .................................................................... Canceling end face deep hole

drilling cycle
X81.0;
G28 U0;..................................................................... X X-axis zero return
G28 W0;.................................................................... Z Z-axis zero return
M01;
<N6> <N7>
2 2
3 1 3 1
4 4
6 6
Rapid Traverse
5 5
Cutting Feed
C (N7) C Tapping (N7)

M08;
M69;
G98 M45;
G28 H0;
G54;
tool.
G97; .......................................................................... Regulate the spindle speed.
G00 Z10;
X81.0;
X55.0 C30.0;
M329 S318;............................................................... Turn the synchronized tapping

mode on.
G84 Z 9.0 R0 F398; ................................................ Executing synchronized tapping
aDbDcDdDeDf cycle in the following order:
aDbDcDdDeDf
C90.0;
C150.0;
C210.0;
C270.0;
C330.0;
G00 Z10; .................................................................. Canceling synchronized tapping

cycle
X81.0;
G28 U0;
G28 W0;
M01;
M09; ......................................................................... Coolant OFF

M05; ......................................................................... The spindle stops.
M46; ......................................................................... C C-axis release
M30; ......................................................................... Program end
7
7èÕ
CHAPTER 7
CHAPTER 7 OTHER FUNCTIONS
1 433
WORKPIECE TRANSFER
2 444
3 450
WORKPIECE TRANSFER 433
1
WORKPIECE TRANSFER
1 2 1 When performing the first and second processes continuously
1 2 in a single setup, the workpiece after the first process in chuck
2 1 can be passed to chuck 2 where the second process is
carried out. This operation is called “workpiece transfer”.
2 To transfer a workpiece, it is necessary to move headstock 2
B B (B-axis) to the workpiece transfer position. There are two
methods for moving the B-axis; the method using the work
2 coordinate system and using the machine coordinate system.
7 7 CAUTION
2 B 2 When moving the headstock 2 (B-axis), move the turret to
the position where interference will not occur between
headstock 2 and tools, tool holders, and/or the turret.
2 [Tools, tool holders, and/or turret interference with spindle
2/Machine damage]
2 2 NOTE
2 Workpiece transfer is possible with headstock 2 specifications only.
<Flow of Workpiece Transfer>
The following is an example of the flow for workpiece transfer.
Refer to the corresponding pages for details on specifying
these commands.
M34 M35 Specifying the phase synchronized operation (M34) or

the speed synchronized operation (M35)
1 “M34, M35, M36 ” 435 1 “M34, M35, M36 Synchronized Operation ON/OFF”
(page 435)
4 4
Specifying the approach position for the workpiece
• transfer position.
G00 B_; • When using a work coordinate value:
• G00 B_;
G53 G00 B_; • When using a machine coordinate value:
1“ 2 B ” 436 G53 G00 B_;
1 “Moving Headstock 2 (B-Axis)” (page 436)
4 4
G38 Specifying the workpiece pushing check (G38)
1 “G38 ” 439 1 “G38 Workpiece Pushing Check” (page 439)
434 WORKPIECE TRANSFER
4 4
Workpiece transfer
1“ ” 433 1 “WORKPIECE TRANSFER” (page 433)
4 4
Cutting off the workpiece
M80 Workpiece cut-off detection (M80)
1 “M80 ” 441 1 “M80 Workpiece Cut-Off Detection” (page 441)
4 4
M34/M35 M36 Canceling (M36) the phase/speed synchronized
1 “M34, M35, M36 ” 435 operation (M34/M35)
1 “M34, M35, M36 Synchronized Operation ON/OFF”
(page 435)
4 4
2 B G330; Returning the headstock 2 (B-axis) to the machine zero
1 “G330 2 point (G330;)
” 146 1 “G330 Tailstock (Digital Tailstock)/Headstock 2 Reference
Point Return” (page 146)
4 4
2 M304 2 After specifying spindle 2 selection signal ON (M304),
start machining at the spindle 2 side.
1-1 M34, M35, M36

M34, M35, M36 Synchronized Operation ON/OFF
1 2 To transfer a workpiece from spindle 1 to spindle 2 with both

spindles rotating, synchronize the spindle speed and phase of
both the spindles or just the spindle speed by specifying
synchronized operation.
M34; ............................ Calls the phase synchronized operation

• 1 2 1 2 mode.
• Synchronizes both spindle speeds and
spindle phases between spindles 1 and 2.
M35; ............................ Calls the speed synchronized operation
• 1 2 mode.
• Synchronizes only spindle speeds
between spindles 1 and 2.
M36; ............................ Cancels the phase and/or speed
• M34, M35 synchronized operation mode.
• Cancels synchronized operation specified
by the M34 or M35 command.
M480 The phase synchronized operation mode can be specified by
the M480 command too.
1 • “M480C M46C ” 1 • “M480 Calls C-Axis Synchronized Operation Mode M46

218 C-Axis Synchronous Mode Cancel” (page 218)
• “ • For the adjustment of phase synchronization, refer to the
2 ” separate volume, OPERATION MANUAL “Spindle Phase
Adjustment Screen (Headstock 2 Specifications)”.
2 2 NOTE
1. M34, M35, M36 2 1. M34, M35, and M36 commands can be used with headstock 2
specifications only.
2. 1 2 M35 2. To transfer a workpiece from spindle 1 to spindle 2, synchronize
1 2 1 the spindle speeds of these spindles by specifying the M35
2 command. If a workpiece is transferred without synchronizing the
spindle speeds, the workpiece will be scratched.
3. M34 1 2 3. In the case of transferring a workpiece such as hexagonal bar, it is
1 2 necessary to synchronize spindles 1 and 2 both in speeds and
phases by specifying the M34 command. Unless the spindles are
synchronized both in speeds and phases, transfer of a hexagonal
bar is not possible.
4. M36 1 2 4. The M36 command should be specified only after the completion
M36 of cut-off cycle or when either of spindle 1 or spindle 2 chuck is
unclamped. After the execution of the M36 command, the spindle
which was controlled in synchronization with the other spindle
stops rotating.
5. M34 5. If an M34 command is specified when both spindle 1 and spindle 2
EX2419 chucks are clamped, an alarm message (EX2419) is displayed on
the screen.
6. M05 6. If the M05 command is specified in these modes, spindles 1 and 2
1 2 stop rotating in synchronization and the phase synchronization
operation mode or the speed synchronization operation mode is
canceled.
7. 7. Usually, the spindle cannot be started while the chuck is open.

Chuck clamp/unclamp operation is not allowed while the spindle is
rotating, either. However, these operations are allowed in the
synchronous operation mode.
5 M34 5It is allowed to use the M34 command for transferring a workpiece
M34 having round section shape. However, since spindle speed
synchronization control is executed after the completion of phase
M35 synchronization, it takes a long time to synchronize both the
speeds and phases. To shorten idle time, it is recommended to
specify the M35 command if the workpiece has a round section.
1-2 2 B
Moving Headstock 2 (B-Axis)
G00 B_ ;
• B .......................................... Specifies the approach position for
workpiece transfer operation (absolute
command)
1 2
Spindle 1 Spindle 2
<Using the Work Coordinate System>

G00 B0;
<Using the Machine Coordinate System>

G53 G00 B_;
Using the Work Coordinate System
2 B To move the headstock 2 (B-axis) using the work coordinate

‘ ’ “B” system, set the coordinate value of the workpiece approach
point to “B” on the ‘WORK OFFSET’ screen.
B0 Create a program taking this point as “B0”.
<Setting Approach Point>
1) 2 B 1) Move the headstock 2 (B-axis) to the workpiece transfer
position by manual operation.
2) ‘ ’ 2) Record the machine coordinate value displayed on the
‘CURRENT POSITION’ screen.
3) 2) 3) Display the work offset screen, and enter the value that is
“B” recorded in step 2) at “B” of the work coordinate system to
be used for a workpiece transfer operation.
4) G330; 2 B 4) Specify G330; to return the headstock 2 (B-axis) to the zero
point.
7 7 CAUTION
1. ‘ ’ ‘ ’ 1. Do not set the workpiece transfer position of the
B ‘COMMON’ work coordinate system on the ‘WORK
OFFSET’ screen to B.
‘ ’ ‘ ’ B If the workpiece transfer position of ‘COMMON’ on the
‘WORK OFFSET’ screen is set to B, the work
‘ ’ ‘ ’ B coordinate system called up in the program is shifted
by the set value.
[Interference between the tool, tool holder and rotary
tool spindle, and the workpiece, chuck and fixture/
Machine damage]
2. 2. When executing the zero return at the end of the

“G330” 2 transfer process, always specify the “G330”
(headstock 2 reference point return) command.
Interfer-
ence
Motion to the Work Coordinate System Zero Point (Rapid Traverse)
Motion to the Machine Zero Point (Rapid Traverse)
2 2 NOTE
‘ ’ When setting the workpiece transfer position on the ‘WORK OFFSET’
screen, select the work coordinate system that is used only for the
workpiece transfer operation. Do not use any other work coordinate
system.
Example:
G54;
M211;
M34 (M35);...................................... Phase synchronization or speed
synchronization command
G00 B_;
G98 G01 B_ F1000;........................ 2 B Headstock 2 (B-axis) moves to the
workpiece transfer position.
G38 J_ K_ Q_; ................................ Workpiece pushing check
G99;
G04 U1.0;
: Workpiece transfer, cut-off
M36; ................................................ Phase/speed synchronization command
cancel
G330; .............................................. 2 B Headstock 2 (B-axis) moves to the zero
return position
M05;
S1000 M204;................................... 2 After workpiece transfer, machining starts at
spindle 2
Using the Machine Coordinate System
2 B To move the headstock 2 (B-axis) using the machine

B coordinate system, record the machine coordinate value of the
B-axis as the work approach point.
Create a program using this recorded machine coordinate
value.
<Recording Machine Coordinate Value>
1) 2 B 1) Move the headstock 2 (B-axis) to the workpiece transfer
position by manual operation.
2) ‘ ’ 2) Record the machine coordinate value displayed on the
‘CURRENT POSITION’ screen.
3) G330; 2 B 3) Specify G330; to return the headstock 2 (B-axis) to the zero
point.
2 2 NOTE
‘ ’ “B” “0” Set “0” for “B” of all work coordinate systems on the ‘WORK OFFSET’
screen.
G53 G00 B_;

Workpiece Zero Point (G53 G00 B_;)
1 2
Chuck 1 Chuck 2
7 7 CAUTION
1. 2 B 2 1. When moving headstock 2 (B-axis), move the turret to
a position where there will be no interference between
2 headstock 2 and tools, tool holders, and/or the turret.
[Tools, tool holders, and/or turret interference with
headstock 2/Machine damage]
2. 2. When executing the zero return at the end of the
“G330” 2 transfer process, always specify the “G330”
(headstock 2 reference point return) command.
2 2 NOTE
1. 2 1. Workpiece transfer is possible with headstock 2 specifications only.
2. ‘ ’ “B” “0” 2. Set “0” for B of all work coordinate systems on the ‘WORK
OFFSET’ screen.
3. B 3. For the B-axis, an incremental command cannot be used.
Example:
G54;
G97 S1000 M03;
M211;
M34 (M35);...................................... Phase synchronization or speed
synchronization command
G53 G00 B_ ;
G53 G98 G01 B_ F1000; ............... 2 B Headstock 2 (B-axis) moves to the
workpiece transfer position.
G38 J_ K_ F_ Q_ ; .......................... Workpiece pushing check
M03;
: Workpiece transfer, cut-off
M36; ............................................... Phase/speed synchronization command
cancel
G330; .............................................. 2 B Headstock 2 (B-axis) moves to the zero
return position
M05;
S1000 M204;................................... 2 After workpiece transfer, machining starts at
spindle 2
1-3 G38
G38 Workpiece Pushing Check
G38 1 2 The G38 command is specified when transferring a workpiece

2 from chuck 1 to chuck 2 or from chuck 2 to chuck 1.
1
2 B In the workpiece transfer operation, when the position error of

the B-axis servomotor of headstock 2 reaches the parameter
2 1 set value, the workpiece is judged to have been brought into
2 1 contact with the reference face of chuck 2 or chuck 1. Then,
chuck 2 or chuck 1 clamps a workpiece and the program
advances to the next block.
2 2 NOTE
1. G38 2 1. G38 command can be specified with headstock 2 specifications
only.
2. 2 G38 ‘ 2. For spindle 2 tailstock specifications, set ‘2nd SPINDLE’ for ‘2 nd
’ ‘ 2 ’ ‘ 2 ’ SPINDLE/TAILSTOCK’ on the ‘OPERATION PANEL’ screen
before specifying G38.
G38 B(J, V)_ K_ F_ Q_ ;

• G38 ..................................... Workpiece pushing check command
• B .......................................... Absolute command
B Specify the B-coordinate of workpiece
transfer position on the work coordinate
system.
• J .......................................... Incremental command
Specifies the distance and direction of the
workpiece transfer position in reference to
the preset position.
• V .......................................... Coordinate value on the machine coordinate
system
Specifies the coordinate value of the
workpiece transfer position on the machine
coordinate system.
• K .......................................... B B-axis retraction stroke (unsigned value)
B Specify the stroke through which the B-axis
should retract from the position where
pushing of a workpiece is detected.
• F .......................................... mm/min Feedrate (mm/min)
Specifies the feedrate for skip feed operation
(pushing the workpiece to chuck 2).
• Q ......................................... Tolerance for workpiece transfer position
If the actual workpiece pushing position
B (J, V) Q known from the detection of workpiece
pushing and retraction after detection of
workpiece pushing is within the range of B
(J, V) Q, the program advances to the next
block.
7 7 CAUTION
This detection operation may cause low-strength
workpieces such as aluminum workpieces to be deformed
or damaged.
F Feedrate for skip feed operation should be changed
meeting the workpiece material and dimensions.
2 2 NOTE
1. K B 1. If address K is omitted, the B-axis is automatically retracted by the
servo error amount in the uni-direction positioning mode.
2. K B 2. If address K is specified, servo error is not calculated and the
B-axis is retracted by the specified amount.
In this case, retraction is not made in the uni-direction positioning
mode.
3. K 3. Change the value for a K command according to the strength of
the workpiece.
4. F 2 30 4. If an F command is omitted in a program, default value of 30 mm/
mm/min min is used.
5. “B (J, V) Q” 5. If the actual A-axis position after retraction from the workpiece
pushing detected position is outside the specified tolerance “B (J,
V) Q”, the pushing detection cycle is repeated again. If the
A-axis is not positioned within the tolerance, an alarm is generated
and the machine stops.
6. Q 1 mm 6. If a Q command is omitted, the tolerance for workpiece transfer
position is 1 mm.
7. G38 2 7. The approach point to be specified preceding the G38 command
1 should be taken at a point where the chuck 2 takes more than 1
second to come into contact with the workpiece.
8. B, J, V 1 8. For specifying the workpiece transfer position, use any one of the
addresses B, J, and V.
9. G38 0% 9. The chuck to workpiece contact position cannot be judged if the
feedrate override setting is raised after executing the G38 block
G38 with 0% set for feedrate override. It is necessary to set a value
0% other than 0% for feedrate override when executing the G38 block.
G38 It must also be remembered it is not allowed to change the
feedrate override setting during the execution of the G38 block.
10. G38 10. In a G38 block, all numeric values must be specified with a decimal
point.
0 Operation
1) B J V K Q 1) The B-axis starts positioning at the specified feedrate under
0.002 mm* B torque limited conditions to the target position obtained by
deducting “K + Q + 0.002 mm*” from the position specified
as B (J or V).
2 2 NOTE
* B K Q * If the target position is set as “B (K + Q)”, the B-axis position
K reached by returning by “K” from the target position without
detecting pushing (the position finally reached) is always within
0.002 mm the tolerance range and it is therefore impossible to detect an
alarm status. For this reason, the target position is set 0.002
mm further from the “B (K + Q)” position. The system judges
that pushing has not been detected if the B-axis stops at this
position.
2) 2 2) When chuck 2 comes into contact with the workpiece, the
B B-axis servomotor fails to rotate due to torque limit and only
servo error increases. When the error reaches the value set
B for the parameter, the servomotor stops.
3) 0.1 mm 3) If the stop position is within 0.1 mm from the B-axis

movement start point or at the B-axis movement end point,
a pushing detection alarm is triggered.
4) K B 4) B-axis returns the distance specified by K.

This return travel usually eliminates mechanical workpiece
deflection that might be generated by pushing operation.
K B If no K command is specified, the B-axis returns by “present
+ 0.1 mm 0.1 mm servo error + 0.1 mm” and then moves back 0.1 mm in the
pushing direction.
5) 5) The torque limited state is cleared.
6) 2 6) If the returned position is within the allowable tolerance,
chuck 2 is clamped and the program advances to the next
block.
7) 1) 6) 7) If the returned position is outside the allowable tolerance,
steps 1) to 6) are repeated once. If the retuned position is
still outside the allowable tolerance, an alarm is triggered.
0 Alarm Table
Alarm Function
No.
The position obtained in the
‘B ‘B POSITION
3001 pushing detection process is
’ ERROR’
outside the tolerance range.
‘2 B 2 ‘B,J AND V Two or more coordinate values

3003
’ SPECIFIED’ are specified.
‘B ‘B POSITION NOT
3005 No target position is specified.
’ SPECIFIED’
B No B-axis current is detected

‘ ‘SKIP NOT
3007 during axis feed up to the end
ON ’ DETECTED’
position.
The specified level current is
‘ ‘SKIP ALREADY
3008 detected at the start or just after
ON ’ DETECTED’
the start of Z-axis feed.
‘RETURN
‘ K The specified K value is not
3009 AMOUNT IS
’ positive.
NEGATIVE’
2 2 NOTE
G38 NC The pushing detection macro program called by G38 is stored in the
NC memory. In the default setting, the program can neither be
displayed nor edited. Do not edit the program otherwise the machine
could operate in an unintended manner.
1-4 M80
M80 Workpiece Cut-Off Detection
M80 1 The M80 command is used to check if the cut-off cycle,

2 executed after the transfer of the workpiece clamped in the
chuck of spindle 1 to the chuck of spindle 2, has been
completed.
1 2 1 Completion of cutting off is confirmed by detecting the spindle
speeds of spindles 1 and 2. If spindle 2 does not follow spindle
1 when the spindle speed of spindle 1 is changed, cutting off is
judged to have been completed.
M80; ............................ Detects the completion of cut-off cycle.

7 7 CAUTION
When cutting off a solid workpiece, the tool reaches the
center of rotation of the workpiece. For this reason, tools
or holders adjacent to the tool in use may interfere with
the chuck. When mounting tools or holders on turrets,
confirm that there will be no interference caused between
the chuck and the adjacent tools or holders.
[Interference of chuck and adjacent tools/holders,
machine damage]
2 2 NOTE
only.
2. M80 2. The M80 command can be used with bar feeder specifications.
3. M80 3. If the completion of the cut-off cycle is not detected after the
EX0035 1 2 execution of the M80 command, both spindle 1 and spindle 2 stop
rotating with the alarm message (EX0035) displayed on the
screen.
4. M80 M03, M04, 4. When the M80 command is executed in the synchronized mode
M203, M204 operation, the spindle at which the spindle start command (M03,
M04, M203, M204) was executed rotates at the specified speed.
The other spindle stops rotating.
5. M80 1 2 5. Although the execution of the M80 command cancels the
M80 synchronized operation of spindles 1 and 2, the synchronized
M36 operation mode is not canceled. Always specify the M36
command after specifying the M80 command.
M80 Programming Using M80
1 1 2 To transfer a workpiece, machined at the spindle 1 side, from

spindle 1 to spindle 2 and execute the cutting off cycle.
O1;
N1;
:
1 Machining program (machining of a
:
workpiece at the spindle 1 side)
:
N5;
G59; ......................................................................... G59 Selecting the G59 work coordinate
system (for workpiece transfer)
G97 S1000 M03; ...................................................... 1000 min 1 1 Starting the spindle 1 in the normal
M35; ......................................................................... Specifying the speed synchronized
operation mode
G00 B_ ; ................................................................... B Moving the B-axis (work coordinate
G53 system)
G00 B_; (When using a machine coordinate
value, specify G53 G00 B_;)
:
: Workpiece transfer
:
G99 G00 X42.0 M08; ............................................... Specifying the feed per revolution
mode
G01 X 0.6 F0.08; ..................................................... 0.08 mm/rev X 0.6 Cutting to X 0.6 at the feedrate of
0.08 mm/rev (cut-off cycle)
G28 U0 M09;
M80; ......................................................................... Detecting cutting off

2 2 NOTE
1 1000 min 1 Spindle 1 rotates at 1000 min 1 and
2 spindle 2 stops rotating.
G28 W0;
M36; ......................................................................... Canceling the speed synchronized
operation mode
G330; ....................................................................... 2 B Returning the headstock 2 (B-axis)
to the machine zero point
M01;
444 TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT
2
If one of the tools registered in a group has reached the end of
its preset life, this function selects a spare tool in the same
group.
<Tool Life Definitions>
Tool life is determined by the number of machined workpieces
or the tool usage time.
Number of
Machined Work- Tool Usage Time
Item pieces (Tool Cutting Time)
(Tool Usage Count)
1 999999 1 999999 Unit Times Minutes
Setting
1 - 999999 times 1 - 999999 minutes
range
<The Registration Number of Tools>
1 16 Number of tools in a
16 tools (maximum)
group
80
Number of groups 80 groups (maximum)
80
Number of tools in
80 tools (maximum)
total
2 2 NOTE
1. 1. Although the number of registration groups can be changed in the
range of the maximum number of groups, it is necessary to clear
the tool life data after changing the number of registration groups.
2. 2. Part program storage length is not influenced even when the
number of registration groups is changed.
2-1
Setting Tool Life Data by Manual Operation
Tool Life Management Screen
o D D Function selection key o (OFFSET) D [TOOL MANAGE]

D [T-LIFE MANAGE]
Set manually the required data for a tool life management on

this screen.
<Items on Screen>
Tool group in which all the registered

‘ ’ ‘CHANGE T. GROUP’ tools have reached the end of their
lives.
Group List Information

‘GP’ 1 9999 ‘GP’ Tool group number (1 to 9999)
Tool life counting conditions (times/
‘ ’ ‘TYPE’
time)
‘ ’ ‘SET VAL.’ Initial setting of tool life data
‘ ’ ‘PRNT VAL’ Present counted tool life data

TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT 445
* *
Option
EX (EX alarm is triggered when the
‘ ’ (‘PRE VAL.’) specified value is exceeded. This
function is used when tools are
checked during tool life.)
Tool number of the tool presently
‘ ’ used (‘IN USE’ status) or the tool
‘ ’ ‘SEL TOOL’
T number of the tool to be called by the
next T command.
Number of available tools except the
‘ ’ tool assigned as ‘IN USE’
‘ ’ ‘REMAINS’ “**” is displayed when all the tools in
the group reach the designated tool
“**” life.
Group Information
Register all the tool numbers in the
‘ ’ ‘TL No.’
same group.
State of the tools; Usable, In use,
‘ ’ ‘STATE’
Life, or Skip.
Group Registration
1) 1) Register tool group
D D Input the group number. D [NEW GROUP] D Input the tool

D\ number. D \ (INPUT) key
‘ ’ ‘ ’ ‘TOOL NUMBER’ ‘STATE’

0202 ‘ ’ 0202 ‘USABLE’
D D Move down a cursor and register all tools in the group.
2) 2) Set tool life conditions
D Confirm that the group detail mode is selected D [TYPE

D SETTING] D Select [TIMES] or [TIME].
2 2 NOTE
“ ” The type setting operation is not allowed unless all tools are in the
“USABLE” state.
3) ‘ ’ ‘ ’ 3) Input ‘SET VAL.’ and ‘PRNT VAL’
D D ‘ ’ [LIST GROUPS] D Group List Mode D Move the cursor to

‘ ’ D D\ ‘SET VAL.’ or ‘PRNT VAL’ cell. D Input value. D \
(INPUT) key
2 2 NOTE
1. “0 999999” 1. Data input range is from 0 to 999999.
2. 2. Data cannot be input while the machine is operating
automatically.
3. ‘ ’ ‘ ’ 3. Data cannot be input for ‘SEL TOOL’ and ‘REMAINS’.
2 2 NOTE
1. MAPPS No. 775 = 0 No. 1697 = 0 2 1. When MAPPS parameter No. 775 is set to “0” and No. 1697 is set
to “0” or “2”, [RESET GROUP] [DELETE GROUP] [NEW GROUP]
[TYPE SETTING] and [UNDO] are not allowed during automatic
operation.
2. ‘ ’ 2. [SKIP] is not executed for a group without the ‘IN USE’ tool.
Changing Tool Number
1) 1) Press [GROUP DETAIL].

2) “ ” 2) Move a cursor to the tool number to be modified.
3) \ 3) Input a tool number, and press the \ (INPUT) key.
2 2 NOTE
1. 1. Data cannot be input while the machine is operating automatically.
2. “0” ‘ ’ 2. When a tool number other than “0” is input, the tool state is
changed to ‘USABLE’.
3. “0” 3. If “0” is input, the tool number is cleared.
Change of Status
1) 1) Press [GROUP DETAIL].

2) ‘ ’ 2) Move a cursor to the ‘TOOL NUMBER’ to be modified.
3) 3) Press [CHANGE STATE].
4) 4) Press [USABLE] or [LIFE].
2 2 NOTE
1. “ ” 1. If the tool state is changed to “USABLE”, the tool use data (TIMES
or TIME) is initialized.
2. 2. If the tool state is changed to “LIFE”, the tool use data (TIMES or
TIME) is changed to the same value as the set value.
3. ‘ ’ 3. The status of tools in ‘IN USE’ state cannot be changed.
4. EX0374 4. When the all tools in the group reached the set tool life, an alarm
(EX0374) occurs and the status cannot be changed. To release an
D alarm after changing the tools, press [RESET GROUP] D
“0” [EXECUTE] to reset the tool data to “0”.
* ‘ ’ * The tool ‘IN USE’ means the tool which has been called and has
not reached the preset tool life limit.
2-2
Setting Tool Life Data in Program
G10 L3;
P_ N_ L_;
T_ ;
(T_ ;)
:
P_ N_ L_;
T_ ;
:
G11;
• G10 ...................................... Start of Life Tool Data registration
• L3 ......................................... Initial specification at registration (All
groups)
• P .......................................... 1 9999 Specify group number (1 to 9999)
• N .......................................... Specify Tool Life Conditions
: N0 Time Management: N0
: N1 Times Management: N1
• L .......................................... 1 99999 Specify Life Value (1 to 99999)
• T........................................... Specify Registered Tool Number
• G11 ...................................... End of Registering Tool Life Data
2 2 NOTE
1. G10 L3 G11 1. When G10 L3 to G11 is executed, all the registered tool life data is
initialized. Set all tool life data in the same program.
2. N 2. If specification of address N is omitted, the tool life is counted in

the number of times used.
3. 3. In the setting data, the same tool number may appear repeatedly
2 whether in the same group or in different groups. Combination of
2 the upper two digits and lower two digits of a tool number may be
selected as required.
4. 4. The registered tools are selected in the order specified in the
program.
<Registration of Tool Life Data>
MDI When program above is executed by memory card or in MDI
mode, tool life data is renewed.
2-3
Specification in Machining Program
Group Specification
In response to the tool group number, the function calls a

registered tool in the specified group in the registered order
and manages the tool life.
T[[[[99;
• [[[[ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 9999 Specify group number (1 to 9999)
2 2 NOTE
T[[[[; When T[[[[; is specified, the tool life management function is not
executed. In this case, specify the T command as the ordinary
command of tool number and tool offset number.
1 T “T ” 229 1 For the T function, refer to “T FUNCTION” (page 229)
Life Count
If the counted tool life data reaches the preset tool life
condition, a spare tool in the same program is selected when
the tool group command is executed next, and the tool use
time is counted for the next tool.
2 2 NOTE
1. 1. When all tools in a specific group exceed the tool life, spare tool
selection is impossible. In this case, tool use time is continuously
counted for the last tool.
2. T + 2. Since registered T numbers (tool number + tool offset number)
have independent tool use data, the tool use time is counted for
the individual offset numbers for a tool number that has more than
one tool offset number. For such tools, the total tool use time data
for different offset numbers of those tools is regarded as the tool
use data and tool life condition.
<Counting By Length of Time>
G01, G02, G03 The length of time the tool has been used in the cutting mode
0.1 such as G01, G02 and G03 is counted in increments of 0.1
second.
2 2 NOTE
1. 1. The length of time spent in single-block stop, feed hold, rapid
traverse, dwell and waiting for the completion of commands during
tool use is disregarded.
2. 2. Tool use time is not counted in the machine lock state, auxiliary
function lock state and dry run state.
3. 3. The length of time is set and displayed in minute increments.
<Counting by Times Used>
M30 M89 Counting the tool life by the number of times used includes 2
2 mode types.
M30;............................. Program end

(M89;) .......................... Work counter
2 2 NOTE
1. M30 M89 1. M30 (M89) must be specified in a single block.
2. M89 #1108 = 89 2. Parameter No. 1108 = 89 is set when tool life is counted by an M89
command.
M30 M89 The counter of the tool group is incremented by “1” for the tool
“1” groups called in a program from the start to the execution of
“1” M30 (M89). If the same tool group is specified repeatedly,
counter data is incremented “1” independent of the number of
called times.
2 2 NOTE
M30 M89 If the NC enters the reset state before the execution of M30 (M89), the
counter of the tool groups used from the start to the reset state of the
“1” process program is incremented “1”. This counter is incremented when
the tool group is called; the function ignores whether or not the called
tool is used for cutting.
Skip Command
"‘ ’" Skip Command skips the tool in ‘IN USE’ status in the present
"‘ ’" group and updates the selected tool to the next group. Skip
Command is not executed when there is no tool in ‘IN USE’
status.
M27; ............................ Tool skip ON

Skips the presently selected tool in the
present group.
2-4
New Tool Selection Flag and Tool Life Expired Flag
New Tool Selection Flag
1. 1 1. If a new tool is selected in the specified tool group, the new

“1” tool selection flag is set (“1” is set) at the same time the tool
group command is executed.
2. 2. This flag can be used to execute the automatic measuring
of the offset data of the newly called tool, for example.
3. T 3. The new tool selection signal is valid until the next T code is
executed or the NC unit is reset.
4. 4. The new tool selection signal is output to system variable
#1003 #1003 of the custom macro program (option).
Tool Life Expiration Signal
1. 1. If all tools in the specified tool group have been used to the
“1” life, the tool life expired flag is set “1”.
2 2 NOTE
The tool life expired flag cannot be reset to “0” unless the tool life
“0” expired state of all the tools in that group is cleared either by
program or by an operation at the screen.
2. #1002 2. The tool life expiration signal is output to system parameter
#1002 of the custom macro program.
3. PMC PMC 3. The tool life expired flag is also output to PMC. The PMC
executes the following processing when it receives the tool
life expired flag.
• Displays the message indicating that tool life has been
expired.
• PC Disables the execution of cycle start (set for PC
"#6411.2" parameter #6411.2).
• PC Disables indexing of the turret head (PC parameter
“#6411.1” #6411.1)
450 LOAD MONITORING FUNCTION
3
3-1
Outline of Load Monitoring Function
Overview
The function includes the following features:

1. 1. Axes monitored
The following number of axes can be monitored.
3 Spindle - 3 axes
4 Servo axes - up to 4 axes
2. 2. Monitoring groups
85 Up to 85 groups can be monitored.
3. 3. Operation modes
The operation modes can be switched by pressing the
[TEACHING]/[MONITOR] soft-key on the Load Monitoring
Load Meter Screen.
1 “ ” 452 1 “The Load Monitoring Load Meter Screen” (page 452)
• Teaching Mode
The function detects the reference value, and automati-
cally sets the warning level and the alarm level.
• Monitoring Mode
The function compares the load value detected during
cutting in the specified group intervals to the preset warn-
ing and alarm detection threshold level values of the same
group intervals. The following processing is executed if
the detected load value exceeds the preset threshold lev-
el value.
Warning:
Start interlock processing (macro input signal processing is
optionally provided).
2 2 NOTE
M When the warning is issued, the following M codes cannot be
executed.
• M10 • M10 Chuck clamp operation
• M11 • M11 Chuck unclamp operation
• M25 • M25 Tailstock (digital tailstock) OUT
• M26 • M26 Tailstock (digital tailstock) IN
• M47 • M47 Workpiece ejector OUT
• M210 2 • M210 Chuck clamp <spindle 2>
• M211 2 • M211 Chuck unclamp <spindle 2>
• M432 • M432 Work unloader cycle
Alarm:
Feed hold and spindle stop processing
4. 4. Programming
G313 A_S_M_; The axis specified by G313 A_ S_ M_; started by group
M93 number, terminated by M93.
5. 5. Data setting
MDI Automatic setting by teaching and MDI setting are possible.
6. 6. Input/output of data
RS-232C The data can be input/output by using RS-232C interface
and memory cards.
7. ‘ ’ 7. ‘LOAD MONITOR’ screen
‘ ’ The load of the spindle or feed axis is displayed on the
‘LOAD MONITOR’ screen.
LOAD MONITORING FUNCTION 451
Display mode: Bar graph and numeric value

2 2 NOTE
1. 1. The function is not adequate for machining causing only slight load
variation.
2. 2. It is impossible to monitor a machining with acceleration/
deceleration torque such as constant surface speed control.
<Operation Flow>
Set each numeric value of the load monitoring setting.

1“ ” 456 1 “Load Monitoring Setting Screen” (page 456)
4 4
Create the program for load monitoring
1“ ” 458 1 “Specifying Load Monitor Program” (page 458)
4 4
Execute the load monitoring program in the teaching
mode.
4 4
Check the data that was taught and change the data if
necessary.
1“ ” 454 1 “Load Monitoring Data Setting Screen” (page 454)
4 4
Execute the load monitoring program in the monitoring
mode.
4 4
After finishing a program, check the load monitoring
data.
3-2
Screens for Load Monitoring Function
4 There are four screens for the load monitoring function.

• • Load Monitoring Load Meter Screen
• • Load Monitoring Data Setting Screen
• • Load Monitor Warning List Screen
• • Load Monitoring Setting Screen
‘ ’ These screens are collectively called the ‘LOAD MONITOR’
screen.
‘ ’ Screen transition from the ‘PROGRAM CHECK’ screen is as

follows.
‘PROGRAM CHECK’ screen
Load Monitoring Data Load Monitoring Load Meter Load Monitor Warning
Setting Screen Screen List Screen
Load Monitoring Setting

Screen
<Common Soft-Keys>
Soft-keys Function
[LOAD On pressing this soft-key, the Load
METER] Monitoring Load Meter Screen is displayed
and this soft-key is highlighted.
[DATA On pressing this soft-key, the Load
SETTING] Monitoring Data Setting Screen is displayed
and this soft-key is highlighted.
[WARNING On pressing this soft-key, the Load Monitor
LIST] Warning List screen is displayed and this
soft-key is highlighted.
‘ [RETURN] On pressing this soft-key, the screen returns

’ to the ‘PROGRAM CHECK’ screen.
The Load Monitoring Load Meter Screen
‘ ’ This screen is displayed by pressing the [LOAD MONITOR]

soft-key on the ‘PROGRAM CHECK’ screen, or by pressing the
[LOAD METER] soft-key on the Load Monitoring Data Setting
Screen/Load Monitor Warning List Screen.
The status of the load can be checked in this screen with the
bar graph and numeric values.
2 2 NOTE
30 100% X Z 100% For the spindle, the load value is displayed taking the 30-min rating as
100% and for the X- and Z-axes.
X 10
Present Load Value Maximum Load Value
10 In addition, the fields of up to 10 tools that have caused a

warning or an alarm are displayed in yellow.
@ The alarm state can be cleared by pressing the @ (RESET)
(RESET) key on the operation panel.
To clear the fields displayed in yellow, press the [WARNING
CLEAR] soft-key.
<Display Items and Descriptions>
Description
Display Item
‘ No.’ This item displays the station number of the

‘TURRET No.’ turret where the tool which has been taught or
the tool to be monitored is installed.
‘ No ’ ‘ No.’ This number is assigned when load monitoring

‘SUB No.’ is executed for different cutting operations
carried out using the tool which has the same
‘TURRET No.’.
‘ ’ S1 S3 2 The axis selected for which the load is to be

‘AXIS’ (AX Load S2 X X Z Z Y Y monitored among Spindle (S1), Rotary Tool
Detection Axis) Spindle (S3), Spindle 2 (S2), X-axis (X), Z-axis
(Z) and Y-axis (Y) is displayed.
‘STD’ The load value detected in the teaching

‘STD’ (Reference Value) operation is displayed.
(%)
‘WRN’ The value for detecting the tool wear and

‘WRN’ (WARNING Level) initiating Start-Interlock processing.
(%)
‘ALM’ This threshold level is used to detect the “tool

‘ALM’ (Alarm Level) (%) chipping/breakage” alarm state; if the detected
load exceeds this level, feed hold and alarm
processing are executed.
‘ ’ 8 A tool name or other information can be

‘COMMENT’ entered, using up to 8 characters.
<Soft-Keys>
Soft-keys Function
[TEACHING] On pressing this soft-key, the teaching
ON/OFF mode ON/OFF status is switched.While the
ON teaching mode is ON, this soft-key is
highlighted.
[MONITOR] On pressing this soft-key, the monitoring
ON/OFF mode ON/OFF status is switched.While the
ON monitoring mode is ON, this soft-key is
highlighted.
[LOAD On pressing this soft-key, the load
MONITOR monitoring setting screen is displayed.
SETTING]
Soft-keys Function
[WARNING Upon pressing this soft-key, the fields of
CLEAR] tools that have caused a warning or an
alarm displayed in yellow are cleared.
Load Monitoring Data Setting Screen
This screen is displayed by pressing the [DATA SETTING]

soft-key on the Load Monitoring Load Meter Screen/Load
Monitor Warning List Screen.
On this screen, check the data set by teaching (Reference
Value, Warning level and Alarm level), and change the data if
necessary.
It is also possible to set the data without teaching.
10 In addition, the fields of up to 10 tools that have caused a
warning or an alarm are displayed in yellow.
@ The alarm state can be cleared by pressing the @ (RESET)
(RESET) key on the operation panel.
To clear the fields displayed in yellow, press the [WARNING
CLEAR] soft-key.
Description
Display Item
‘ No.’ This item displays the station number of the

‘TURRET No.’ turret where the tool to be monitored is
installed.
‘ No ’ ‘ No.’ This number is assigned when load monitoring

‘SUB No.’ is executed for different cutting operations
carried out using the tool which has the same
‘TURRET No.’.
‘ ’ S1 S3 2 Select the axis for which the load is to be

‘AXIS’ (AX Load S2 X X Z Z Y Y monitored among Spindle (S1), Rotary Tool
Detection Axis) Spindle (S3), Spindle 2 (S2), X-axis (X), Z-axis
(Z) and Y-axis (Y).
‘STD’ The load value detected in the teaching

‘STD’ (Reference Value) operation is displayed.
(%)
‘WRN’ The value for detecting the tool wear and

‘WRN’ (WARNING Level) initiating Start-Interlock processing.
(%)
‘ALM’ This threshold level is used to detect the “tool

‘ALM’ (Alarm Level) (%) chipping/breakage” alarm state; if the detected
load exceeds this level, feed hold and alarm
processing are executed.
‘ ’ 8 A tool name or other information can be

‘COMMENT’ entered, using up to 8 characters.
2 2 NOTE
‘STD’ ‘WRN’ ‘ALM’ % 0 999 ‘STD’, ‘WRN’, and ‘ALM’ determine the percentage (%) of the rated
motor load. The setting range is 0 to 999.
‘STD’ ‘WRN’ ‘ALM’ Their magnitude relationship is ‘STD’ < ‘WRN’ < ‘ALM’
<Data setting/changing procedure>
1) 1) Move the cursor to the field to be set by using the cursor
control keys.
2) 2) Input the value.
3) \ 3) Press the \ (INPUT) key.
<Data deleting procedure>

1) 1) Move the cursor to the field for the data to be deleted by
using the cursor control keys.
2) 2) Press the [DELETE] soft-key.
3) 3) Press the [EXECUTE] soft-key.
<Soft-Keys>
Soft-keys Function
[SEARCH] On pressing this soft-key after inputting the
tool number to be searched for, it is possible
to search for a tool that has already set.The
corresponding tool is displayed at the top of
the data display area.
+**% ‘STD’ (%) ‘WRN’ (%) [+**%] On pressing this soft-key after placing the
‘ALM’ (%) cursor on ‘STD’ (Reference Value) (%),
‘WRN’ (Warning Level), or ‘ALM’ (Alarm
**% Level)(%), the corresponding value of the
tool at the cursor position is increased in
increments of **%.
• 100 Example:
• +10% • Old Value: 100
• 110 • Soft-Key: +10%
• New Value: 110
2
2 NOTE
MAPPS
No. 1611 The value to be displayed on the soft-key is set
No. 1611 = 10 “0” by MAPPS parameter No. 1611 (in the above
example, No. 1611 = 10).When the parameter is
set to “0” (default setting), the soft-key is not
displayed.
**% ‘STD’ (%) ‘WRN’ (%) [ **%] On pressing this soft-key after placing the
‘ALM’ (%) cursor on ‘STD’ (Reference Value) (%),
‘WRN’ (Warning Level), or ‘ALM’ (Alarm
**% Level)(%), the corresponding value of the
tool at the cursor position is decreased in
increments of **%.
• 100 Example:
• 10% • Old Value: 100
• 90 • Soft-Key: 10%
• New Value: 90
2
2 NOTE
MAPPS
No. 1611 The value to be displayed on the soft-key is set
No. 1611 = 10 “0” by MAPPS parameter No. 1611 (in the above
example, No. 1611 = 10).When the parameter is
set to “0” (default setting), the soft-key is not
displayed.
[CLEAR ALL] On pressing this soft-key, all the load

monitoring data are deleted.
[DELETE] On pressing this soft-key, the load
monitoring data that has been selected by
placing the cursor on it is deleted.
[WARNING On pressing this soft-key, the fields of tools
CLEAR] that have caused a warning or an alarm
displayed in yellow are cleared.
The Load Monitor Warning List Screen
This screen is displayed by pressing the [WARNING LIST]

soft-key on the Load Monitoring Load Meter Screen/Load
Monitoring Data Setting Screen.
10 On this screen, the list of up to 10 tools which have caused a

warning during load monitoring is displayed.
2 2 NOTE
When the machine is stopped or alarm messages are displayed by
executing the load monitoring function, check the details of the
message by referring to “Alarm List” and take appropriate measures.
Description
Display Item
‘ ’ The date when the warning has occurred is

‘DATE’ displayed.
‘ ’ The time when the warning has occurred is

‘TIME’ displayed.
‘O ’ The list of the presently executed programs

‘O-No.’ when the warning is issued is displayed.
‘N ’ The sequence number when the warning is

‘N-No.’ issued is displayed.
‘ No.’ The turret number of the tool for which warning

‘TURRET No.’ is being issued is displayed.
‘ No ’ The sub number when the warning is issued is

‘SUB No.’ displayed.
‘ ’ The axis name of the tool for which warning is

‘AXIS’ being issued is displayed.
<Soft-Keys>
Soft-keys Function
[CLEAR ALL] On pressing this soft-key, all the data of the
warning list are deleted.
On pressing this soft-key, the fields of tools
that have caused a warning or an alarm
displayed in yellow on the Load Monitoring
Load Meter screen and the Load Monitoring
Data Setting screen are also cleared.
Load Monitoring Setting Screen
This screen is displayed by pressing the [LOAD MONITOR

SETTING] soft-key on the Load Monitoring Load Meter
Screen.
Set numeric values for the following items on this screen.
Standard Setting
Items and Descriptions
Setting Range
1. ‘ ’ 0.01 10 1. ‘SAMPLING PROHIBITION TIME’ ( 0.01
sec.)
The time during which the function ignores
the transitional load variation before actual
2 cutting starts
‘ ’ “0” 0 999 2 NOTE
‘ ’
If the setting for the parameter ‘NO LOAD TIME’
is “0”, the no load current is not detected and the
actual load is set for the reference value (‘STD.’).
Standard Setting
Items and Descriptions
Setting Range
2. ‘ ’ 0.01 0 2. ‘NO LOAD TIME’ ( 0.01 sec.)
The time between designation of the load
monitoring or teaching mode and the start
0 of load monitoring
“ ” 0:
0 0: The actual load value detected during
0 999 teaching is set as the reference value
‘ ’ Other than 0:
The result of following calculation is set as
the reference value (‘STD.’). “(Actual load
value) (Average load detected during
immune period)”
3. ‘ ’ 0.01 10 3. ‘MONIT PROHIBITION TIME’ ( 0.01 sec.)
‘ ’ Set the time during which the function
ignores load variation at the start of actual
0 999 cutting that is determined by the function
according to the value set for ‘LOAD
ACCEPT VARIABLE’.
4. ‘ ’ % 100 4. ‘ALARM COEFFICIENT’ (%)
The load level at which alarm occurs due to
faulty tool in percentage (%) of the
0 200 reference value detected in the teaching
mode.
5. ‘ ’ % 50 5. ‘WARNING COEFFICIENT’ (%)
The load level at which warning occurs due
to tool wear in percentage (%) of the
0 200 reference value detected in the teaching
mode.
6. ‘ ’ 0.014 3 6. ‘LOAD AVERAGE CALC. PERIOD’ ( 0.014
sec.)
“1” “14 msec” The time in which the load current variation
1 127 rate is calculated.
Value “1” is equal to “14 msec”.
7. ‘ ’ % 10 7. ‘LOAD ACCEPT VARIABLE’ (%)
The value that is used by the function to
determine that the actual cutting has started
“ ” in the teaching or monitor mode.The
1 100 function determines that actual cutting has
started when the load current variation rate
exceeds the value set for this parameter.
8. ‘ ’ 0.01 10 8. ‘ALARM DECISION TIME’ ( 0.01 sec.)
The time it takes to establish the alarm
1 999 status after the detected load has exceeded
the alarm level.
9. ‘ ’ 0.01 10 9. ‘WARNING DECISION TIME’ ( 0.01 sec.)
The time it takes to establish the warning
1 999 status after the detected load has exceeded
the warning level.
<Setting Procedures>
1) 1) Move the cursor to the field to be set by using the cursor
control keys.
2) 2) Input the value.
3) \ 3) Press the \ (INPUT) key.
3-3
Specifying Load Monitor Program
<Load Monitoring Program Command Format>
G313 A_. T_. S_. M92.;

• A........................................... Teaching or designation of the axis to be
monitored
• T........................................... Designation of variation rate detection axis
• S........................................... SUB Designation of SUB No.
• M92 ..................................... Designation of teaching or monitor mode
Example:
G313 A128. T128. S1. M92.; G313 A128. T128. S1. M92.;
In this example, teaching/monitoring is executed for the
SUB-No. 1 spindle only from the rising edge of the spindle load, and the
data are stored to SUB-No. 1. Specify this format in the
preceding block of a block including cutting commands.
“A” “T” Specify the sum of axis constants for the axes to be
designated with the address “A” or “T” (Refer to the table
below).
<Axis Constant Table>
Axis Name Axis Constant
128 Spindle 128
2 32 Spindle 2 32
64 Rotary tool spindle 64
X 1 X-Axis 1
Z 2 Z-Axis 2
Y 8 Y-Axis 8
2 2 NOTE
1. “A”, “T”, “S”, “M” 1. A decimal point must be used in a numerical value specified
following address “A”, “T”, “S”, or “M”.
2. “T” ‘ 2. It is possible to designate the axis on which the load variation rate
’ “0” is detected with the address “T”, however, this designation is
invalid if “0” is set for ‘LOAD ACCEPT VARIABLE’.
3. “T” “A” 3. Argument “T” can be omitted; it is assumed that the same value as
set for address “A” is set for address “T”.
M93 Specify M93 to cancel the teaching and monitor mode.
2 2 NOTE
M93 Specify M93 independently in a block immediately after the block
including cutting commands.
5 U03 5The macro variable to reset the macro interrupt is U03 (#1103).
#1103
3-4
Interlock Function for Set Value and Operation Mode by Operation Selection Key-Switch
MAPPS No.1570 By changing the MAPPS parameter No. 1570 setting as shown
below, switching of the operation mode (teaching/monitoring)
and changing of the setting value on the Load Monitoring
Setting Screen becomes impossible. This prevents accidental
switching of the operation mode and changing of the setting
value.
This prevents accidentally switching of the operation mode and

changing the setting value.
No.1570=0 Switching of the operation mode and changing
of the setting value on the Load Monitor Setting
Screen is possible. (default setting)
No.1570=1 Changing of the setting value on the Load
Monitor Setting Screen is impossible.
No.1570=2 Switching of the operation mode is impossible.
No.1570=3 Switching of the operation mode and changing
of the setting value on the Load Monitor Setting
Screen is impossible.
2 2 NOTE
i This interlock function is valid when the operation selection key-switch
u is placed in i [ON] or u [OFF].
3-5
Alarm, Error Display
The macro alarms that relate to the load monitoring function

are as follows.
Macro Alarm
No. 3038: ‘LOAD MONITOR PROGRAM ERROR’ G313 No. 3038: ‘LOAD MONITOR PROGRAM ERROR’ (In the
“A”“T”“S” G313 block, the address “A”, “T” or “S” designation is
incorrect.)
PC e When a PC alarm is displayed, check the message details by

pressing the e (HELP) key.
3-6
Load Monitoring Data Input/Output
Teaching data Input/Output

1 1 For details of Input/Output screen, refer to the separate volume,
“OPERATION MANUAL”
<Input Procedure>
1) ‘ ’ 1) Place the cursor on ‘PARAM’.
2) 2) Press the [READ] soft-key.
[The input data list is displayed.]
3) 3) [Move the cursor to the data to be input]
4) 4) Press the [EXECUTE] soft-key.
<Output Procedure>
1) ‘ ’ 1) Place the cursor on ‘PARAMETER’.
2) 2) Make an entry in the command input line using key input.
The data can be output in the following three ways.
• “LOAD” ‘ ’+‘ Input “LOAD” in the input line, then output ‘LOAD
’ MONITOR SETTING’ + ‘TEACHING DATA’.
• “ALL” ‘ NC, PC ’ Input “ALL” in the input line, then output ‘PARAMETER
+‘ ’+‘ ’ (NC, PC)’ + ‘LOAD MONITOR SETTING’ + ‘TEACHING
DATA’
• ‘ NC, PC ’+‘ If nothing is input, ‘PARAMETER (NC, PC)’ + ‘LOAD
’ MONITOR SETTING’ is output.
3) D 3) [PUNCH]D[EXECUTE]
[Data are output.]
G41 R 248
G42 R 248
1
350 G46 253
1 G50 G96
350 138
1 mm/min, /min 241 G51.2 G251 G50.2 G250

124
G52 126
C
G53 126
C 1 M46 203 G54 G59 128
C 2 M246 203 G54 G59 128
C 1 M45 203 G61 154
C 2 M245 203 G62 157
C M480 218 G63 156
C M46 218 G64 156
G65 130
F G66 G66.1
G67
F 241 133
G70 336
G G71, G72, G73 334
G00 71 G73 329
G01 73 G74
338
G01 78
G75 342
G01 R 74
G76 349
G02 G03
79 G76 346
G02 G03 G90 G94

82 136
G04 85 G97
141
G07.1 G107 87
G98 143
G09 153
G98 G99 142
G12.1 G112 G13.1
G113 93 G99 143
G17, G18, G19 95 G313 458
G22 G23 G325

145
96 G325
G27 98 146
G28 G30 2 (3, 4) G374 G375
99 146
G31 100 G479 148
G32 101 G479 148
G32 103 G479 148
G32 G92 105 G 62
G34 121 G 62
G38 439
G40 R
248
M 211
M92 458
M00 M01
187 M98/M198 M99
213
M02 M30
188 M200 M201
215
M03 1 M203 2 M04 1
M204 2 M05 188 M329 G84
379
M08 M09
190 M329 G84
379
M10 1 M210 2
M11 1 M211 2 M382
192 M383
M13 M14 M05 216

195
M432
M23 M24 216
196
M458 M459
M25, M26 218
198
M478 M479
M25, M26 218
M25, M26 198
M480 C M46 C
M25, M26 218
198 M560 M561
M27 448 219
M28 M29 M611Y M610 Y
155 220
M34, M35, M36 435 M661 M662
220
M45 C 1 M245 C 2
M46 C 1 M246 C 2 M2200 221
203 M712 M713
M47 204 220
M48 M49 M 171
205 M 171
M51 M251 2
M59 M259
2 205 S
M52 M252 2 SEICOS 158
M57
S 239
M257 2
206
M68 1 M268 2 T
M69 1 M269 2
206 T 229
M73 M74
207 Y
M80 441
Y M611 220
M80 442
Y M610 220
M85 M86 209
M89
209
M90 1 M91 353
1 M290 2
M291 2 355
85
85
Y 392
459
1 34
441
2 35
322
G28 99
329
G53 126
30
437
31
40
53
23
G61 154 R 264
G09 153 310
R 257
G13.1 G113 93
G12.1 G112 93
M29 155
349
M28 155
297
G02 79
G03 79 I/F 191
G07.1 G107 87 M09 190
M08 190
447
445
297
M01 187
M25, M26 198

G90 136
G27 98
G75 342
299
M561 219
M560 219 230
M14 195 307
M13 195 309
M05 195 313
49 162
225 SEICOS 162
447 164
G17, G18, G19 95 SEICOS
164
27
249 162
SEICOS
G34 121
162
25
163
SEICOS 163
313
309 36
444 M05 188
444 G50
138
448
M27 448 M59
205
446
M51
232 205
357 M329 G84
1 400 379
1 1 409 444
2 404 R 291
2 2 413 R 278
R G01 74 447
446
297
M713 220
39
M712 220
26
200
M2200 221
M25, M26 198
283
M99 213
G479 148
M98/M198 213
198
R 300
M25,
M26 198
G325 145
242
2
G70 336
G330 146
G62 157
148
G479 148
151
148
150 G375 146
M85 209 G374 146
M86 209 448
R 247 448
R G40, G41, G42
249
R 253
R 254 R 274
R 259 G31 100
R 262 448
R 158 106
R SEICOS 309
148 R 254
1 mm/rev 241 160
SEICOS 160
G97 141
36 G23 96
M291 211
G22 96 2 M204 188
106 2
363 M257 206
368 2
M252 206
M57 206 2 M203 188
2 B 436
M52 206 2 M211 192
2
M478 218 M259 205
2
M479 218 M251 205
2 M210 192
2 M269 206
57 2 M268 206
M48 205 2 (3, 4) 99
M49 205 107
G01 73 103
153 G63 156
G96 138 G32 101
- - 240 356
311 G94 136
R 259 375
G64 156 373
G74 338
200
M200 215
356 37
378 M201 215
375 M24 196
M23 196
31
1
M90 211
1
M91 211 48
1 M04 188 112
1 M03 188 106
1 M11 192 112
1 M10 192 278
1 M69 206
G325 145, 146
1 M68 206
M25, M26 198
2
M290 211 32
2
R G42 248
R 279
48
M459 218
33
M458 218
85
103 458
M34, M35, M36 435 G00 71
372
440
M89 209
130
37
I 131
M80 441
II 131
G75 342
131
297
104
357
358
G74 338
450
418
450
451
M92 458
Y 388 455
387 456
454
459
1 G313 458
350 458
109 452
G92 105 108
108
107, 123, 348
319
G32 105
319
111
G76 346
84
148
M662 220
M661 220
32
I/F M G479 148
221 47
R 252 M30 188
R M02 188
G40 248
M00 187
R 282
59
R 282
60
R 278
2 61
R G41 248
446 G65 130
G04 85 M 186
288, 299, 387 M89 209
417
387
R 264
1 418
R 288
2 C
421
393
3 423
2 400
4 427
3 407
417
236
165
G73 329 SEICOS 165
166
M383 216
SEICOS 166
167
M382 216
SEICOS 167
G02 82
G03 82
242
G01 74
38
380
50
311 G 62
161
SEICOS 161
252
132
158
SEICOS 158
310
R 256 G52 126
G50.2 Y 391
G250 124 389
G51.2 G251 124
G98 143 M432 216
G99 143, 142 M73 207
G98 142 M74 207
459 G38 439
G66 133 M89 209
G66.1 G54 G59 128

133 436
G67 133 433
M47 204
G 62
INDEX
INDEX
Page Page
Numerics Calculating Number of Thread Cutting Paths when Depth of
Cut for First Path is Given 350
1st Process 400 Calculating the Incomplete Thread Portion 108
1st Process (Spindle 1) 409 Calculating Tool Nose Radius Offset Data 279
2nd Process 404 Calling the load monitor macro program (G313) 458
2nd Process (Spindle 2) 413 Calls C-Axis Synchronized Operation Mode (M480) 218
Cancel Mode (Automatic Tool Nose Radius Offset) 257
A Cancel Mode (Tool Radius Offset) 310
Adjusting the groove width 236 Canceling Cutter Radius Offset Mode 164
Alarm Table 441 Canceling Cutter Radius Offset Mode (Compatible
Specifications with Seicos) 164
Alarm, Error Display 459
Carriage Direct-Coupled
Argument Assignment 130
OUT/IN(M25, M26) 198
Argument Assignment I 131
CAUTION LABELS 31
Argument Assignment II 131
Cautions on G76 Multiple Thread Cutting Cycle 349
Automatic Centering Type Steady Rest Travel (Carriage
Direct-Coupled) 148 Cautions on Programming Tapping Using G32 103
Automatic Centering Type Steady Rest Travel (Servo- Cautions on Using G71, G72, and G73 Cycles 334
Driven) 150 C-Axis Connection (Spindle 1) (M45) 203
Automatic Centering Type Steady Rest/Tailstock Travel C-Axis Connection (Spindle 2) (M245) 203
(G479) 148
C-Axis Connection Cancel (Spindle 1) (M46) 203
Automatic Corner Override (G62) 157
C-Axis Connection Cancel (Spindle 2) (M246) 203
Automatic Determination of Offset Direction 158
C-Axis Synchronous Mode Cancel (M46) 218
Automatic Determination of Offset Direction (Compatible
Center-Work Programming with Safety 200
Chamfering and Rounding Functions (G01) 74
Automatic Door Close (Option) (M86) 209
Chamfering OFF (M24) 196
Automatic Door Open (Option) (M85) 209
Chamfering ON (M23) 196
Change of Status 446
Automatic Tool Nose Radius Offset Mode (Automatic
Determination of Offset Direction) 158 Changing Coolant Discharge Pressure (Knoll I/F Only)
191
Automatic Tool Nose Radius Offset Mode (Automatic
Determination of Offset Direction) (Compatible Specifications Changing Tool Number 446
with Seicos) 148 Chip Conveyor (Chip Conveyor Specifications) 37
Axis Control and Movement Direction 57 Chip Conveyor Forward Rotation Start (M200) 215
Chip Conveyor Stop (M201) 215
B Chuck-Work Programming (2) 400
Bar Feeder I/F and M Code Commands (Bar Feeder Chuck-Work Programming (3) 407
Specifications) 221 Circular Interpolation (Clockwise) (G02) 79
Bar Stock 32 Circular Interpolation (Counterclockwise) (G03) 79
Basic Programs (Automatic Tool Nose Radius Offset) 264 Closed-Loop Cutting Cycle (G73) 329
Bed Cover Chip Flush Coolant OFF/Chuck Top Coolant OFF COMPATIBLE SPECIFICATIONS WITH SEICOS
(Option) (M383) 216 (OPTION) 158
Bed Cover Chip Flush Coolant ON/Chuck Top Coolant ON Compulsory Determination of Offset Direction 161
(Option) (M382) 216
Compulsory Determination of Offset Direction (Compatible
Boring Cycle 380 Specifications with Seicos) 161
Concave Arc 297
C Controlling Constant Surface Speed (Constant surface speed
control) (G96) 138
Calculating Coordinate Values 283
Controlling Spindle Speed at Constant Speed (Constant
Calculating Coordinate Values to be Specified in Program Surface Speed Control Cancel) (G97) 141
297
Convex Arc 297
Calculating Depth of Cut for First Path when Number of Thread
Coolant Discharge OFF (M09) 190
Cutting Paths is Given 350
INDEX
Page Page
Coolant Discharge ON (M08) 190 Face Hole Machining Canned Cycle 356
Coordinate Values of Approach Arc Radius Start Point 85 Feedrate for Finishing 242
Cut-Off Cycle (G75) 342 Feedrate Override Cancel OFF (M48) 205
Cutter Radius Offset Mode 162 Feedrate Override Cancel ON (M49) 205
Cutter Radius Offset Mode (Compatible Specifications with Feedrate Per Minute (G98) 143
Seicos) 162 Feedrate per Minute Command (G98) 142
Cutting Feedrate Control 153 Feedrate Per Revolution (G99) 143
Cutting Mode (G64) 156 Feedrate per Revolution Command (G99) 142
Cutting of O.D. with arc profile 299 Finishing Cycle (G70) 336
Cylindrical Interpolation (G07.1 (G107)) 87 FIRE PREVENTION AND COUNTERMEASURE 27
FOR SAFE MACHINE OPERATION 23
D FOR USERS AND SUPERVISORS 25
Data 48
Deep Hole Drilling Cycle 358 G
Deep Hole Drilling Cycle (G74) 338 G Code List 62
Depth of Cut and Number of Passes for Cutting ISO O.D. G FUNCTIONS 62
Thread (Reference) 111
G00 Positioning Cutting Tool at Rapid Traverse Rate 71
Digital Tailstock
G01 Chamfering and Rounding Functions 74
Forward/Backward(M25, M26) 198
G01 Line at Angle Command 78
Direction of Offset Determined by G46 253
G01 Moving Cutting Tool along Straight Path at Cutting
DISPOSITION OF MACHINES 53
Feedrate 73
Door Interlock 48
G02 Circular Interpolation (Clockwise), G03 Circular
Door Interlock Function 33 Interpolation (Counterclockwise) 79
Drilling Cycle 357 G02 Helical Interpolation (Clockwise), G03 Helical
Drilling with Tailstock Canned Cycle (Option) (G374) 146 Interpolation (Counterclockwise) (Option) 82
Drilling with Tailstock Canned Cycle Completion Check G04 Suspending Program Execution (Dwell) 85
(Option) (G375) 146 G07.1 (G107) Cylindrical Interpolation 87
Dwell 85 G09 Exact Stop 153
Dwell Command 103 G12.1 (G112) Polar Coordinate Interpolation (Notching),
G13.1 (G113) Polar Coordinate Interpolation Cancel 93
G17, G18, G19 Selecting Plane for Machining 95
E
G22 Stored Stroke Check Function ON, G23 Stored Stroke
End Face Synchronized Reverse Tapping Cycle 375 Check Function OFF (Option) 96
End Face Synchronized Tapping Cycle 373 G27 Zero (Reference Position) Return Check 98
Exact Stop (G09) 153 G28 Machine Zero (Reference Position) Return, G30 Second
Exact Stop Mode (G61) 154 (Third or Fourth) Zero (Reference Position) Return 99
Example Program 288, 299 G31 Skip Function 100
Example Program (Manual Tool Nose Radius Offset) 288 G32 Tapping (at Center of Spindle) 101
Example Program for Sample Workpiece (Manual Tool Nose G32 Thread Cutting, G92 Thread Cutting Cycle 105
Radius Offset) 300 G34 Variable Lead Thread Cutting 121
EXAMPLE PROGRAMS 387 G38 Workpiece Pushing Check 439
Expressing Axis Movement in Programming 59 G40 Tool Nose Radius Offset Cancel/Cutter Radius Offset
Headstock 2 Specification 61 Cancel 248
Tailstock Specification 60 G41 Tool Nose Radius Offset, Left/Cutter Radius Offset,
Left 248
G42 Tool Nose Radius Offset, Right/Cutter Radius Offset,
F Right 248
F FUNCTION 241 G50 Setting Maximum and Minimum Spindle Speeds, G96
Face Cut-Off, Grooving Cycle (G74) 338 Controlling Constant Surface Speed (Constant surface speed
control) 138
Face Cutting Cycle (G94) 136
INDEX
Page Page
G51.2 (G251) Polygon Cutting, G50.2 (G250) Polygon Cutting Grooving 417
Cancel (Option) 124 Group Registration 445
G52 Setting Local Coordinate System 126 Group Specification 447
G53 Selecting Machine Coordinate System 126
G54 to G59 Selecting Work Coordinate System 128
H
G61 Exact Stop Mode 154
Helical Interpolation (Clockwise) (Option) (G02) 82
G62 Automatic Corner Override 157
Helical Interpolation (Counterclockwise) (Option) (G03)
G63 Tapping Mode 156
82
G64 Cutting Mode 156
Hexagon (Using Polar Coordinate Interpolation) 389
G65 Macro Call (One-Shot) 130
Hexagon (Using Y-Axis) 391
G66 Macro Modal Call (Call after Execution of Axis Movement
High-Speed Deep Hole Drilling Cycle 357
Commands), G66.1 Macro Modal Call (Call in Each Block),
G67 Macro Modal Call Cancel 133 HOLE MACHINING CANNED CYCLE 353
G70 Finishing Cycle 336 Hole Machining Canned Cycle List 355
G73 Closed-Loop Cutting Cycle 329
G74 Face Cut-Off, Grooving Cycle, and Deep Hole Drilling I
Cycle 338
I.D. Deep Hole Drilling 418
G75 O.D./I.D. Grooving Cycle, Cut-Off Cycle 342
If Wall Lies at Endpoint of Cutting (Automatic Tool Nose
G76 Multiple Thread Cutting Cycle 346
Radius Offset) 259
G90 O.D./I.D. Cutting Cycle, G94 Face Cutting Cycle 136
G97 Controlling Spindle Speed at Constant Speed (Constant 311
Surface Speed Control Cancel) 141
Imaginary Tool Tip Position 249
G98 Feedrate Per Minute 143
Incomplete Thread Portion 108
G98 Feedrate per Minute Command, G99 Feedrate per
Infeed Mode 349
Revolution Command 142
Interlock Function for Set Value and Operation Mode by
G99 Feedrate Per Revolution 143
Operation Selection Key-Switch 458
G313 Calling the load monitor macro program 458
internal threads 112
145
G325 Tailstock K
Digital Tailstock Change of Value Set 146 Keyway Milling (Using Y-Axis) 392
G330 Tailstock (Digital Tailstock)/Headstock 2 Reference
Point Return 146
L
G374 Drilling with Tailstock Canned Cycle, G375 Drilling with
Tailstock Canned Cycle Completion Check (Option) 146 Lead Angle 84
G479 Steady Rest Lead in Approach Arc 85
Automatic centering type steady rest travel 148 Legal Obligation 38
G479 Automatic Centering Type Steady Rest/Tailstock Life Count 447
Travel 148
Line at Angle Command (G01) 78
G479 Tailstock travel 148
Load Monitoring (Teaching, Monitoring) Valid (M92) 458
General Cautions on Automatic Tool Nose Radius Offset
Load Monitoring Data Input/Output 459
Function 259
Load Monitoring Data Setting Screen 454
General Cautions on Offset Function 311
Groove Width Tool Offset Function (Option) 165
Load Monitoring Setting Screen 456
Groove Width Tool Offset Function (Option) (Compatible
Specifications with Seicos) 165 Locked-In Prevention Key 37
Groove Width Tool Offset Mode 166
Groove Width Tool Offset Mode (Compatible Specifications M
with Seicos) 166
M Code List 171
Groove Width Tool Offset Mode Cancel 167
M FUNCTIONS 171
Groove Width Tool Offset Mode Cancel (Compatible
Specifications with Seicos) 167 M00 Program Stop, M01 Optional Stop 187
INDEX
Page Page
M02 Program End, M30 Program End and Rewind 188 M2200 Pre-Read Stop 221
M25, M26 Carriage Direct-Coupled M25, M26 Digital Tailstock
OUT/IN 198 Forward/Backward 198
M03 Spindle Start (Normal), M203 Spindle 2 Start (Normal), M25, M26 Tailstock Forward/Backward (Digital
M04 Spindle Start (Reverse), M204 Spindle 2 Start (Reverse), Tailstock),M25, M26Tailstock Spindle OUT/IN(Carriage
M05 Spindle Rotation Stop 188 Direct-Coupled) 198
M47 Workpiece Ejector Out (Option) 204 M28 Error Detect ON 155
M52 Through-Spindle Air Blow ON, M252 Spindle 2 Through- M28 Error Detect ON, M29 Error Detect OFF 155
Spindle Air Blow ON, M57 Through-Spindle Air Blow OFF, M29 Error Detect OFF 155
206 M432 Work Unloader Cycle Function (Option) 216
M08 Coolant Discharge ON, M09 Coolant Discharge OFF M458 Tool Tip Air Blow ON, M459 Tool Tip Air Blow OFF
190 (Option) 218
M10 Spindle 1 Chuck Clamp, M210 Spindle 2 Chuck Clamp, M480 Calls C-Axis Synchronized Operation Mode M46 C-Axis
M11 Spindle 1 Chuck Unclamp, M211 Spindle 2 Chuck Synchronous Mode Cancel 218
Unclamp 192 M560 Rotary Tool Spindle Reverse Rotation Mode ON, M561
M13 Rotary Tool Spindle Start (Normal), M14 Rotary Tool Rotary Tool Spindle Reverse Rotation Mode OFF 219
Spindle Start (Reverse), M05 Rotation Stop 195 M611 Y-Axis Zero Point Interlock Invalid, M610 Y-Axis Zero
M23 Chamfering ON, M24 Chamfering OFF 196 Point Interlock Valid 220
M27 Tool skip ON 448 M661 Steady Rest Coolant ON, M662 Steady Rest Coolant
OFF (Option) 220
M329 G84 Spindle Synchronized Tapping Cycle (Option)
379 M712 Tailstock Spindle Interlock Function OFF, M713
Tailstock Spindle Interlock Function OFF Cancel 220
M34, M35, M36 Synchronized Operation ON/OFF 435
M382 Bed Cover Chip Flush Coolant ON/Chuck Top Coolant
ON, M383 Bed Cover Chip Flush Coolant OFF/Chuck Top Machine Zero (Reference Position) Return (G28) 99
Coolant OFF (Option) 216 macro alarms 459
M45 C-Axis Connection (Spindle 1), M245 C-Axis Connection Macro Call (One-Shot) (G65) 130
(Spindle 2), M46 C-Axis Connection Cancel (Spindle 1), M246
Macro Modal Call (Call after Execution of Axis Movement
C-Axis Connection Cancel (Spindle 2) 203
Commands) (G66) 133
M478 Through-Spindle Coolant ON, M479 Through-Spindle
Macro Modal Call (Call in Each Block) (G66.1) 133
Coolant OFF (Option) 218
Macro Modal Call Cancel (G67) 133
M48 Feedrate Override Cancel OFF, M49 Feedrate Override
Cancel ON 205 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 50
M51 Spindle Chuck Air Blow ON, M251 Spindle 2 Chuck Air MANUAL TOOL NOSE RADIUS OFFSET 278
Blow ON, M59 Spindle Chuck Air Blow OFF, M259 Spindle 2 Milling 1 (Drilling on End Face) 418
Chuck Air Blow OFF (Option) 205
Milling 2 (Machining with the Zero Point of the C-Axis in the
M68 Spindle 1 Brake Clamp, M268 Spindle 2 Brake Clamp, Work Coordinate System Shifted) 421
M69 Spindle 1 Brake Unclamp, M269 Spindle 2 Brake
Unclamp 206 Milling 3 423
M73 Work Unloader OUT, M74 Work Unloader IN Milling 4 427

(Option) 207 Mixture of Argument Assignments I and II 131
M80 Workpiece Cut-Off Detection 441 Modal G code 62
M85 Automatic Door Open, M86 Automatic Door Close Moving Cutting Tool along Straight Path at Cutting Feedrate
(Option) 209 (G01) 73
M89 Work Counter, Total Counter, Multi Counter (Option) Moving Headstock 2 (B-Axis) 436
209
Multi Counter (Option) (M89) 209
M90 Spindle 1/Rotary Tool Spindle Simultaneous Operation
Multiple M Code Function 186
Mode ON, M91 Spindle 1/Rotary Tool Spindle Simultaneous
Operation Mode OFF, M290 Spindle 2/Rotary Tool Spindle MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CYCLES 319
Simultaneous Operation Mode ON, M291 Spindle 2/Rotary Multiple Repetitive Cycles List 319
Tool Spindle Simultaneous Operati 211
Multiple Thread Cutting Cycle (G76) 346
M92 Load Monitoring (Teaching, Monitoring) Valid 458
multi-start threads 107
213
M200 Chip Conveyor Forward Rotation Start, M201 Chip N
Conveyor Stop 215
Nesting Level for Calls 132
INDEX
Page Page
New Tool Selection Flag 448 R
New Tool Selection Flag and Tool Life Expired Flag 448
Recommended Example Programs (Automatic Tool Nose
Radius Offset) 274
O Relationship among Cutting Speed, Diameter, and Spindle
Speed 240
O.D./I.D. Cutting Cycle (G90) 136
Relationship between Depth of Cut in First Cycle and Number
O.D./I.D. Grooving Cycle (G75) 342 of Thread Cutting Cycles (Fixed Metal Removal Rate and
Offset for Taper Cutting and Chamfering 278 Straight Feed along the Thread Face) 350
Offset in Circular Interpolation 297 Rotary Tool Spindle Reverse Rotation Mode OFF (M561)
219
Offset Mode (Automatic Tool Nose Radius Offset) 256
Rotary Tool Spindle Reverse Rotation Mode ON (M560)
Offset Mode (Tool Radius Offset) 310
219
One-shot G code 62
Rotary Tool Spindle Start (Normal) (M13) 195
Operation 440
Rotary Tool Spindle Start (Reverse) (M14) 195
Operation in Cutter Radius Offset Mode 163
Rotation Stop (M05) 195
Operation in Cutter Radius Offset Mode (Compatible
Rough Cutting Cycle 322
Optional Stop (M01) 187
Outline of Load Monitoring Function 450 S
Overcut in Automatic Tool Nose Radius Offset Mode 262 S FUNCTION 239
Overcut in Tool Radius Offset Mode 313 SAFETY DEVICES 30
Overview 450 Safety During Machine Operation (1) 34
Safety During Machine Operation (2) 35
P Safety Precautions 31
SAMPLE PROGRAM
Parallel Threads 112
Chuck-Work Programming (2) 400
Polar Coordinate Interpolation (Notching) (G12.1 (G112))
93 Chuck-Work Programming (3) 407
Polar Coordinate Interpolation Cancel (G13.1 (G113)) 93 Chuck-Work Programming 393

Notching 387
Polygon Cutting (Option) (G51.2 (G251)) 124
Various Part Programs 417
Polygon Cutting Cancel (Option) (G50.2 (G250)) 124
Positioning Cutting Tool at Rapid Traverse Rate (G00) 71
264
Positive (+) and Negative ( ) Designation for Tool Radius
Screens for Load Monitoring Function 451
Offset Amount and Tool Paths 313
Scrolled thread cutting on face 106
PRECAUTIONS FOR OPERATORS 26
Second (Third or Fourth) Zero (Reference Position) Return
Precautions on Thread Cutting Operation 109
(G30) 99
Precautions on Using Tapper 103
Selecting Machine Coordinate System (G53) 126
Precautions when Operating Special Specification
Selecting Plane for Machining (G17, G18, G19) 95
Machines 49
Selecting Work Coordinate System (G54 to G59) 128
Pre-Read Stop(M2200) 221
Set to Use Automatic Tool Nose Radius Offset Function (G40,
Program End (M02) 188
G41, G42) 249
Program End and Rewind (M30) 188
Setting Local Coordinate System (G52) 126
Program Stop (M00) 187
Setting Maximum and Minimum Spindle Speeds (G50)
PROGRAM TO SHORTEN PROCESSING TIME 225 138
Programming 47 Setting Tool Life Data by Manual Operation 444
Programming positioning using a work coordinate system Setting Tool Life Data in Program 446
(G54 to G59) 128
Setting Tool Nose Radius 252
Programming using M329 G84 (Synchronized tapping
Setting Tool Radius Offset Amount 309
cycle) 379
Side Face Synchronized Reverse Tapping Cycle 378
Programming Using M80 442
Side Face Synchronized Tapping Cycle 375
Side Hole Machining Canned Cycle 356
INDEX
Page Page
Skip Command 448 Steady Rest 148
Skip Function (G31) 100 Automatic centering type steady rest travel (G479) 148
Specification in Machining Program 447 Steady Rest Coolant OFF (Option) (M662) 220
Specify Feedrate per Minute (mm/min, /min) 241 Steady Rest Coolant ON (Option) (M661) 220
Specify Feedrate per Spindle Revolution (mm/rev) 241 Stored Stroke Check Function OFF (Option) (G23) 96
Specifying Load Monitor Program 458 Stored Stroke Check Function ON (Option) (G22) 96
Specifying Offset Direction 252 Straight thread cutting 106
Spindle 1 Brake Clamp (M68) 206 Sub-Program Call (M98/M198) 213
Spindle 1 Brake Unclamp (M69) 206 Sub-Program End (M99) 213
Spindle 1 Chuck Clamp (M10) 192 surface roughness 242
Spindle 1 Chuck Unclamp (M11) 192 Suspending Program Execution (Dwell) (G04) 85
Spindle 1/Rotary Tool Spindle Simultaneous Operation Mode Switching Absolute Coordinate during Automatic Tool Nose
OFF (M91) 211 Radius Offset 253
Spindle 1/Rotary Tool Spindle Simultaneous Operation Mode Synchronized Operation ON/OFF (M34, M35, M36) 435
ON (M90) 211 Synchronized Tapping Cycle 372
Spindle 2 Brake Clamp (M268) 206
Spindle 2 Brake Unclamp (M269) 206
T
Spindle 2 Chuck Air Blow OFF (Option) (M259) 205
T FUNCTION 229
Spindle 2 Chuck Air Blow ON (Option) (M251) 205
Tailstock
Spindle 2 Chuck Clamp (M210) 192
Digital Tailstock Change of Value Set (G325) 145, 146
Spindle 2 Chuck Unclamp (M211) 192
Tailstock travel (G479) 148
Spindle 2 Start (Normal) (M203) 188
Tailstock (Digital Tailstock)/Headstock 2 Reference Point
Spindle 2 Start (Reverse) (M204) 188 Return (G330) 146
Spindle 2 Through-Spindle Air Blow OFF (Option) (M257) Tailstock Forward/Backward (Digital Tailstock) 198
206
Tailstock Forward/Backward (Digital Tailstock)(M25,
Spindle 2 Through-Spindle Air Blow ON (Option) (M252) M26) 198
206
Tailstock Spindle Interlock Function OFF Cancel(M713)
Spindle 2/Rotary Tool Spindle Simultaneous Operation Mode 220
OFF (M291) 211
Tailstock Spindle Interlock Function OFF(M712) 220
Spindle 2/Rotary Tool Spindle Simultaneous Operation Mode
ON (M290) 211 Tailstock Spindle OUT/IN (Carriage Direct-Coupled
Tailstock) 200
Spindle Chuck Air Blow OFF (Option) (M59) 205
Tailstock Spindle OUT/IN(Carriage Direct-Coupled)(M25,
Spindle Chuck Air Blow ON (Option) (M51) 205 M26) 198
Spindle Rotation Stop (M05) 188 Tailstock Travel 148
Spindle Speed and Chucking 36 Tailstock Travel (Carriage Direct-Coupled) 151
Spindle Speed and Gripping Force 36 Tapered thread cutting 106
Spindle Start (Normal) (M03) 188 Tapping (at Center of Spindle) (G32) 101
Spindle Start (Reverse) (M04) 188 Tapping Mode (G63) 156
Spindle Synchronized Tapping Cycle (M329 G84) Technical Terms Used in Explanation of Automatic Tool Nose
(Option) 379 Radius Offset Function 254
Spot Drilling Cycle 363 Technical Terms Used in Explanation of Tool Radius Offset
Spot Drilling Cycle (Dwell) 368 Function 309
Start-Up (Automatic Tool Nose Radius Offset) 254 The Load Monitor Warning List Screen 455
Start-Up (Tool Radius Offset) 309 The Load Monitoring Load Meter Screen 452
Start-Up and Cancel 160 Thread Cutting (G32) 105
Start-Up and Cancel (Compatible Specifications with Thread Cutting Cycle (G92) 105
Seicos) 160 Thread Cutting Spindle Speed Override (Option) 107,
Start-Up During Cutter Radius Offset Mode 162 123, 348
Start-Up During Cutter Radius Offset Mode (Compatible Through-Spindle Air Blow OFF (Option) (M57) 206
Specifications with Seicos) 162 Through-Spindle Air Blow ON (Option) (M52) 206
INDEX
Page Page
Through-Spindle Coolant OFF (Option) (M479) 218 WORKPIECE TRANSFER 433
Through-Spindle Coolant ON (Option) (M478) 218
To Finish Tapping at Correct Depth in Blind Hole 104 Y
Tool Geometry Offset 230
Y-Axis Zero Point Interlock Invalid (M611) 220
Tool Life Expiration Signal 448
Y-Axis Zero Point Interlock Valid (M610) 220
Tool Life Management Screen 444
Z
tool nose radius (automatic) 148, 247
tool nose radius (manual) 278 Zero (Reference Position) Return Check (G27) 98
Tool Nose Radius Offset Cancel/Cutter Radius Offset Cancel

(G40) 248
Tool Nose Radius Offset Data Table 291
Tool Nose Radius Offset Direction 282
Tool Nose Radius Offset Direction and Calculation of
Coordinate Values 282
Tool Nose Radius Offset Method 278
Tool Nose Radius Offset, Left/Cutter Radius Offset, Left
(G41) 248
Tool Nose Radius Offset, Right/Cutter Radius Offset, Right
(G42) 248
Tool Paths for Rough Cutting Cycle 329
Tool skip ON (M27) 448
Tool Tip Air Blow OFF (Option) (M459) 218
Tool Tip Air Blow ON (Option) (M458) 218
Tool Wear Offset 232
Total Counter (Option) (M89) 209
Turning ON/OFF Power 32
U
Using the Machine Coordinate System 437
Using the Work Coordinate System 436
V
Variable Lead Thread Cutting (G34) 121
W
Width between Two Faces (Using Polar Coordinate
Interpolation) 387
Width between Two Faces (Using Y-Axis) 388
Work Counter (Option) (M89) 209
Work Unloader Cycle Function (Option) (M432) 216
Work Unloader IN (Option) (M74) 207
Work Unloader OUT (Option) (M73) 207
WORKING ENVIRONMENT 39
Workpiece Cut-Off Detection (M80) 441
Workpiece Ejector Out (Option) (M47) 204
Workpiece Pushing Check (G38) 439
Comment Form
Date:
To improve this manual, we invite you to make comments on

any insufficient description or errors in this manual. We want
to know how you think we can make this manual better.
Please restrict your comments to those concerning this
http://www.moriseiki.com manual only. Comments can also be submitted using the
company website at
http://www.moriseiki.com.
Name of Manual PROGRAMMING MANUAL
PX-NL_4-E0JPEN
Number of Revisions
Name Company
Department Telephone
Address
Chapter Page Line Comments/Requests
For Mori Seiki's Use - Do not write below this line.
No.
Description Reception No. Received by
2 35-16 450-0002 TEL. 052 587-1811 FAX. 052 587-1818
2 15-1 A 18 108-6018 TEL. 03 5460-3570 FAX. 03 5460-9610
362 639-1183 TEL. 0743 53-1121 FAX. 0743 52-8713
106 639-1160 TEL. 0743 53-1125 FAX. 0743 55-0489
201 519-1414 TEL. 0595 45-4151 FAX. 0595 45-5417
488-19 274-0052 TEL. 047 410-8800 FAX. 047 410-8834
TC
33
<NORTH AMERICA / SOUTH AMERICA>

DMG / Mori Seiki USA (MORI SEIKI U.S.A., INC.)
MORI SEIKI CANADA, LTD.
MORI SEIKI MEXICO, S.A. DE C.V.
MORI SEIKI BRASIL LTDA.
<EUROPE>
MORI SEIKI GmbH
MORI SEIKI (U.K.) LTD.
MORI SEIKI FRANCE S.A.S.
MORI SEIKI ITALIANA S.R.L.
MORI SEIKI Moscow LLC
DMG / MORI SEIKI Turkey (DMG MOR SE K STANBUL MAK NE T CARET VE SERV S L M TED RKET )
<ASIA / OCEANIA>
DMG / MORI SEIKI Singapore (DMG MORI SEIKI SOUTH EAST ASIA PTE. LTD)
DMG / MORI SEIKI Malaysia (DMG MORI SEIKI (Malaysia) Sdn. Bhd.)
DMG / MORI SEIKI Vietnam (DMG MORI SEIKI (Vietnam) Co. Ltd.)
DMG / MORI SEIKI Thailand (MORI SEIKI Manufacturing (Thailand) CO., LTD.)
DMG / MORI SEIKI Taiwan (DMG MORI SEIKI (Taiwan) Co. Ltd. )
MORI SEIKI HONG KONG LIMITED
MORI SEIKI (SHANGHAI) CO., LTD.
DMG / MORI SEIKI Korea (DMG MORI SEIKI Korea Co., Ltd.)
DMG / MORI SEIKI Indonesia (PT. MORI SEIKI Indonesia)
DMG / MORI SEIKI India (DMG Mori Seiki India Machines and Services Pvt Ltd)
DMG / MORI SEIKI Australia (DMG / MORI SEIKI Australia PTY LTD.)
0120-124-280
0077-78-0222
ABC XXXXXX
NV5000/40 NV501XXXXX
IP
TEL: 047-410-8825 TEL: 0595-45-6065

FAX: 047-410-8837 FAX: 0595-45-4156
E-Mail:service-chiba@moriseiki.co.jp E-Mail:service-ctr@moriseiki.co.jp
110101JP
MORI SEIKI CO., LTD. <EUROPE>
Nagoya Head Office MORI SEIKI GmbH
2-35-16 Meieki, Nakamura-ku, Nagoya City, Aichi 450-0002, Japan
Head Office
Phone: (81) -52-587-1811 Fax.: (81) -52-587-1818
Antoniusstrasse 14, 73249 Wernau, Germany
Tokyo Branch Phone: (49)-7153-934-0 Fax.: (49)-7153-934-220
18th floor, Shinagawa Intercity Tower A, 2-15-1 Konan Minato-ku, Tokyo,
Technical Centers
108-6018, Japan
Stuttgart, München, Hamburg, Düsseldorf, Chemnitz
Phone: (81) -3-5460-3570 Fax.: (81) -3-5460-9610
Nara Campus No.1 Plant
362 Idono-cho, Yamato-Koriyama City, Nara 639-1183, Japan MORI SEIKI (U.K.) LTD.
Phone: (81) -743-53-1121 Fax.: (81) -743-52-8713 Head Office
Nara Campus No.2 Plant 202 Bedford Avenue, Slough SL1 4RY, England
106 Kita Koriyama-cho, Yamato-Koriyama City, Nara 639-1160, Japan Phone: (44)-844-800-7647 Fax.: (44)-844-800-7648
Phone: (81) -743-53-1125 Fax.: (81) -743-55-0489 Technical Centers
Iga Campus London, Birmingham
201 Midai, Iga City, Mie 519-1414, Japan
Phone: (81) -595-45-4151 Fax.: (81) -595-45-5417 MORI SEIKI FRANCE S.A.S.
Chiba Campus Head Office
488-19 Suzumi-cho, Funabashi City, Chiba 274-0052, Japan Parc du Moulin, 1 Rue du Noyer BP 19326 Roissy en France 95705 Roissy
Phone: (81) -47-410-8800 Fax.: (81) -47-410-8834 CDG Cedex, France
Phone: (33)-1-39-94-68-00 Fax.: (33)-1-39-94-68-59
Technical Centers
Mori Seiki France Sud-Est S.A.S., Prague
<NORTH AMERICA / SOUTH AMERICA>

DMG / Mori Seiki USA (MORI SEIKI U.S.A., INC.) MORI SEIKI ITALIANA S.R.L.
Head Office
Via Riccardo Lombardi N. 10, 20153 Milano, Italy
2400 Huntington Blvd. Hoffman Estates, Illinois 60192
Phone: (39)-02-4894921 Fax.: (39)-02-48914448
Phone: (1)-847-593-5400 Fax.: (1)-847-593-5433
Technical Centers
Chicago, Dallas, Los Angeles, San Francisco, Seattle, Detroit, Cincinnati,
Boston, New Jersey, Charlotte Head Office & Technical Center
Edificio Sant Cugat Trade Center III
Avda. de les Corts Catalanes, 9-11, Entidad 16D
MORI SEIKI CANADA, LTD. 08173 Sant Cugat del Valles (Barcelona), Spain
Head Office & Technical Center Phone: (34)-935-75-36-46 Fax.: (34)-935-75-08-47
6497 Edwards Blvd. Mississauga Ontario L5T 2V2, Canada
Phone: (1)-905-565-1331 Fax.: (1)-905-565-0234
MORI SEIKI Moscow LLC
MORI SEIKI MEXICO, S.A. DE C.V. Business Center "Salut", build. 1, 27, 5th floor, Sushchevskaya St., Moscow,
Head Office 127055, Russia
Calle 4 núm. 25, Local D, 2°.piso, Fraccionamiento Industrial Alce Blanco, Phone: (7)-495-969-2895 Fax.: (7)-495-969-2890
Naucalpan Estado de México 53370, Mexico
Phone: (52)-55-5359-8785 Fax.: (52)- 55-5359-4271
DMG / MORI SEIKI Turkey (DMG MOR SE K
Technical Center
Monterrey
STANBUL MAK NE T CARET VE SERV S
L M TED RKET )
MORI SEIKI BRASIL LTDA.
Ferhatpa a Mah. Gazipa a Cad. No.11 34885 Ata ehir, stanbul, Turkey
Head Office
Phone: (90)-216-471-66-36 Fax.: (90)-216-471-80-30
Av. dos Imarés, 437 Indianópolis, CEP 04085-000, São Paulo -SP, Brasil
Phone: (55)-11-5543-1762 Fax.: (55)-11-5543-1948
Technical Center
Curitiba
The export of this product is subject to an authorization from the government of the exporting country. Printed in Japan
Check with the government agency for authorization.
101101EN
<ASIA / OCEANIA> DMG / MORI SEIKI India (DMG Mori Seiki India
DMG / MORI SEIKI Singapore (DMG MORI SEIKI Machines and Services Pvt Ltd)
SOUTH EAST ASIA PTE. LTD) Head Office
Parimala Towers 64, Jalahalli Camp Cross,
Off MES Road, Yeshwanthpur Bangalore 560 022, India
3 Tuas Link 1, Singapore 638584 Phone: (91)-80-4089-6500 Fax.: (91)-80-4113-1285
Phone: (65)-6660-6688 Fax.: (65)-6660-6699
Technical Centers
New Delhi, Pune, Ahmedabad
DMG / MORI SEIKI Malaysia (DMG MORI SEIKI
(Malaysia) Sdn. Bhd.) DMG / MORI SEIKI Australia (DMG / MORI SEIKI
Head Office
Australia PTY LTD.)
No. 19, Jalan U1/31, Seksyen U1, Hicom-Glenmarie Industrial Park,
40150 Shah Alam, Selangor, Malaysia Head Office
Phone: (60)-3-5569-5282 Fax.: (60)-3-5569-5286 6/6 Garden Road Clayton VIC 3168, Australia
Phone: (61)-3-85-404-600 Fax.: (61)-3-85-404-601
Technical Centers
DMG / MORI SEIKI Vietnam (DMG MORI SEIKI
Melbourne, Sydney, Perth
(Vietnam) Co. Ltd.)
Technical Centers
Hanoi, Ho Chi Minh City
DMG / MORI SEIKI Thailand (MORI SEIKI Manufac-

turing (Thailand) CO., LTD.)
Head Office
40 Moo 4 Rojana Industrial Park 2, Rojana Road, Tambol U-Thai, Amphur U-
Thai, Ayutthaya 10230, Thailand
Phone: (66)-35-746720 Fax.: (66)-35-746731
Technical Center
Bangna
DMG / MORI SEIKI Taiwan (DMG MORI SEIKI (Tai-

wan) Co. Ltd.)
No.12-3, Industrial 33 Road, Industrial Park, Taichung City, 40768 Taiwan,
R.O.C.
Phone: (886)-4-2355-6490 Fax.: (886)-4-2355-6505
MORI SEIKI HONG KONG LIMITED

Unit 08, 23/F., The Metropolis Office Tower, 10 Metropolis Drive, Hung Hom,
Kowloon, Hong Kong
Phone: (852)-2757-8910 Fax.: (852)-2757-7839
MORI SEIKI (SHANGHAI) CO., LTD.

Head Office
Room 4301, 4307, Maxdo Center, No.8 Xing Yi Road, HongQiao
Development Zone, Shanghai 200336, China
Phone: (86)-21-5208-0270 Fax.: (86)-21-5208-0273
Technical Centers
Shanghai, Beijing, Tianjin, Dalian, Shenzhen, Chongqing, Guangzhou, Suzhou,
Wuhan, Qingdao
DMG / MORI SEIKI Korea (DMG MORI SEIKI Korea

Co., Ltd.)
#110, Kofomo Techno Center II, 3 Na 505-3 Ho Sihwa Industrial Complex,
1289-5 Jeongwang-dong KR-429-932 Siheung-si, Korea
Phone: (82)-31-488-0500 Fax.: (82)-31-488-0567
DMG / MORI SEIKI Indonesia (PT. MORI SEIKI Indo-

nesia)
Komplek Gading Bukit Indah Blok M/01, Jl. Bukit Gading Raya, Kalapa
Gading, Jakarta Utara, 14240 Indonesia
Phone: (62)-21-453-1199 Fax.: (62)-21-4585-7414
The export of this product is subject to an authorization from the government of the exporting country. Printed in Japan
Check with the government agency for authorization.
101101EN

Mori Seiki Series - Programming Manual NL Series. 481 Pages.

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mori Seiki Series - Programming Manual NL Series. 481 Pages.

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mori Seiki Series - Programming Manual NL Series. 481 Pages.

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PROGRAMMING MANUAL

Before starting operation, maintenance, or programming, carefully read the

The product shipped to you (the machine and accessory

About Declaration of Conformity

MORI SEIKI GmbH

MORI SEIKI (U.K.) LTD.

MORI SEIKI FRANCE S.A.S.

MORI SEIKI ITALIANA S.R.L.

MORI SEIKI ESPAÑA S.A.

About this Manual

“,” Thousand separator: “,” (comma)

Signal Word Definition

[ ] [ ] Failure to observe the precautions (hazards, warnings

1 1 Indicates items to be referred to.

FOR SAFE MACHINE OPERATION

FOR SAFE MACHINE OPERATION

2-14 G28 G30 2 (3, 4) ....................... 99

2-31 G374 G375 ......... 146

3 SEICOS ................................................................................. 158

2-3 ..................................................................................................................... 372

• Use an explosion-proof mist collector.

• It is recommended to install the automatic fire

machine may operate in an unexpected manner, causing

Door Lock System

Door with Interlock Function

Be sure to follow the instructions on the caution label. Failure

1. 1. Turn the power OFF before performing the followings.

Be sure to follow the instructions below to prevent spindle

2. 2. Use a guide bush when machining the bar stock shorter

Note that setting the [INTERLOCK MODE] key-switch to

1. 1. The operator will become entangled with the spindle if the

1. 1. Keep the front door closed while the machine is operating.

• Clamp a workpiece in the chuck at the center of the

1. 1. Do not stand near the moving parts of the machine while

1. 1. Specify a spindle speed limit that is lower than the lowest of

1. 1. As the spindle speed increases, centrifugal force acts on

3. 3. When machining, measure the chuck gripping force applied

Turning the locked-in prevention key makes it impossible to

1. 1. Do not attempt to reach inside the chip conveyor or put

The product shipped to you (the machine and accessory

13. 13.Bolts used for fixtures should be periodically replaced

24. 24.Stop machine operation immediately and contact the

1. 1. For the default setting of the spindle speed limit, check

1. 1. When mounting a chuck, chuck cylinder, or connecting

3. 3. The chuck or fixture clamping the workpiece must be

• • Chuck gripping force

1. 1. Only technicians qualified to operate cranes are to

5. 5. Raise the workpiece a short distance off the floor to

1. 1. During setup, implement the following safety

14. 14.When machining bar stock on a machine equipped with

1. 1. Use a finger to touch the panel as it can be easily

3. 3. Do not put too much confidence in interlock function.

2. 2. If necessary to perform a memory clear operation,

6. 6. Do not put too much confidence in interlock function.

2 S, SMC, SY <Headstock 2 Specifications (S, SMC, SY Specifications)>

When writing a program, the numerical values used for

To write a program, the origin for the program,

X The diametral dimensions of a product are

Z The longitudinal dimensions of a product are